JP7822686B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Slot machines have long been known as one type of gaming machine (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-016110 A

The problem this invention aims to solve is to improve the performance of gaming machines.

The present invention provides
A predetermined control chip is included,
having a predetermined socket,
the predetermined control chip has a plurality of pins;
numbers corresponding to some of the pins of the predetermined control chip are written on the predetermined board on which the predetermined socket is arranged,
the predetermined control chip has a predetermined counter;
Main processing can be executed,
When a predetermined counter times out, a timer interrupt process can be executed;
The main process has a predetermined interrupt disabled section from an interrupt disable instruction to an interrupt enable instruction (hereinafter, the predetermined interrupt disabled section from an interrupt disable instruction to an interrupt enable instruction will be referred to as a "predetermined interrupt disabled section");
When a predetermined counter times out at timing t1, which is a certain timing during a predetermined interrupt disabled section, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing t1, but the value of the predetermined counter is updated, and timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t2, which is a timing after the predetermined interrupt disabled section ends, and after the timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t2, when the predetermined counter times out at timing t3, timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing t3,
When the period at which a predetermined counter times out is T, timing t1 is "n×T (n is a natural number)," and timing t2 is a specific timing earlier than "(n+1)×T," timing t3 is "(n+1)×T."
It is characterized by:

This invention can improve the performance of gaming machines.

1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine, which is an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing the positional relationship between the display window and each reel, and the pay lines, and (B) is a diagram showing the names of the symbol positions. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the first embodiment. FIG. 1 is a diagram (1) showing condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (2) showing the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 4 shows the condition devices and winning combinations in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a transition diagram of the game state in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the small win A1 condition device to the small win C2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This is a diagram showing the pattern combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state when the small win D1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the middle reel is in the "PB=1" configuration, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the right reel is in the "PB=1" position, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. This figure shows the symbol combinations in which only the symbol on the left reel is in the "PB=1" position, among the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the small win A1 condition device to the small win F2 condition device are activated in the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 03 is won. In the first embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 06 is won. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 shows the types of winning combinations, symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a table of numbers in the second embodiment. FIG. 11 is a transition diagram of the game state in the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the change conditions of the game state in the second embodiment. In the second embodiment, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. 10A and 10B are diagrams showing the arrangement of symbols on reels in the first embodiment and modified examples of the second embodiment. In a modified example of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the first left stop when the small win A1 condition device is activated, at the first left stop when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and at the first left stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated, and (2) is a diagram showing the pattern of the left reel that can be displayed stopped in the display window at the second left stop after the first middle stop when the small win C1 condition device is activated. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 01 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 02 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the winning combination when small win 03 is won. In a variant of the first and second embodiments, (1) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 04 is won, (2) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 05 is won, and (3) is a diagram showing the stopping results when small win 06 is won. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating the configuration of a main CPU, a ROM, and an RWM in a third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored outside the used area of the RWM in the third embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 34. 10A is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board in the third embodiment, and FIG. 10B is a diagram showing a management information display LED in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits 1 to 9 and segments A to G and P in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 3, (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) in the third embodiment and the signal output from output port 6, and (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start process (M_PRG_START) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) according to the third embodiment. 11 is a flowchart showing a main process (M_MAIN) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart illustrating a power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) according to a third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking request flag generation process (S_LED_FLASH) according to the third embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a blinking/non-applicable item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a rate display timer update process (S_RATE_TIME) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) according to the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the third embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an unrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing signals output from output ports 2 to 5 in a modified example of the third embodiment. A diagram showing the relationship between the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signals output from output ports 3 and 6 in a modified example of the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit and the like for executing interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 10A and 10B show examples of programs for explaining interrupt prohibition and interrupt permission in the fourth embodiment, where (A) and (B) show programs for main processing, and (C) shows a program for interrupt processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is no interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship between an 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment, showing an example in which there is an interrupt disabled period in the main processing. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the 8-bit counter times out multiple times in the relationship between the 8-bit counter and interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an interrupt period when there is no interrupt inhibit period in the main process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an interrupt disabled period in the main process is set between interrupt process 1 and interrupt process 2 in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt prohibited period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed is during an interrupt disabled period in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels and the detection and notification of errors in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 76 (Example 1). 13 is a time chart (example 2) showing a case in which a setting is changed after an error is detected during rotation of the reels in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 78 (Example 2). 13 is a time chart showing a case (example 3) in which multiple errors are detected during setting confirmation in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 80 (Example 3). This is a time chart (Example 4) showing the case where the first error and the second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch is operated (game begins)) in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 83 is a diagram showing an error history screen including the progress of FIG. 82 (Example 4). FIG. 13 is an external perspective view showing a main control board, a socket, and a main chip not yet mounted in the socket in a sixth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing in more detail the main chip mounted in the socket. This is a view (front view) taken along the arrow Z1 in FIG. 85 . This is a view (side view) taken along the arrow Z2 in Figure 85. 1A is an enlarged view of the product name and company name, and FIG. 1B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Z3-Z3 in FIG. 1A. 10A and 10B are cross-sectional views showing the relationship between three types of step portions. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 1) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in a seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a front view. 90A is a view seen from the Z4 direction in FIG. 90A, and FIG. 90B is a view seen from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in FIG. 90B. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing a positional relationship (example 2) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) is a plan view and (B) is a side view (enlarged view). 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the positional relationship (Example 3) between a substrate and a predetermined electronic component in the seventh embodiment, in which (A) shows a front view (the mounting surface of the predetermined electronic component), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. 94A and 94B are diagrams showing a modified example of Example 3 of FIG. 93, in which (A) shows a front view (the surface on which a predetermined electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor according to an eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in ROM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map in the built-in RWM in FIG. 95 in the eighth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating an interrupt initial setting address in the eighth embodiment, in which (A) is a diagram showing data details of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between interrupt priority levels and interrupt priority setting values. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating vector address values and data values stored in the vector addresses in the eighth embodiment, where (A) shows the vector address values, (B) shows the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values, and (C) shows an example of the data values of the vector addresses. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a process from when the power is turned on until when the device transitions to a user mode in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a program that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the use area of the built-in ROM in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example in which the vector address is set to "00F4H" in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by a RST command in the eighth embodiment, where (A), (B), and (C) show example 1, example 2, and example 3, respectively. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing program code area setting addresses and their data values in the eighth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine according to the ninth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (1) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (2) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (3) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (4) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (5) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (6) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (7) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (8) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. An explanatory diagram (9) of the gap between the medal selector and the chute member in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (1) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (2) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (3) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (4) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (5) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (6) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (7) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (8) showing the operation mode when an error is detected and released in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (1) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (2) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the ninth embodiment. 13 is a time chart (3) showing an operation mode when the power is turned off during door opening notification in the ninth embodiment.

In this specification, the meanings of terms are as follows: "Bet" refers to placing a bet on medals (game media) to play a game. To bet medals, a player inserts actual medals into the medal insertion slot 47, or operates the bet switch 40 to bet credited (stored) medals. Meanwhile, "credits (also called "stored")" differs from the above-mentioned "bet" and refers to storing medals inside the slot machine 10. In this specification, "credit" does not include "bet." Furthermore, "insertion" refers to betting or crediting medals. Furthermore, "prescribed number" refers to the number of bets that can be placed in a game to start (execute) the game. For example, in a game with a prescribed number of "2" or "3," the game can be started with either a bet of "2" or "3"; the game cannot be played with a bet of "1." For ease of explanation, "prescribed number" is sometimes referred to as "bets." Meanwhile, "bets" can also refer to something other than the prescribed number. For example, in a game with a specified number of "2" or "3," when one medal is inserted (before the game begins), the number of bets is "1" (the number bet at that time).

"Cleaning" refers to a player inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 47 (described below). "Cleaning bet" refers to a player betting medals by depositing medals into the medal insertion slot 47. "Cleaning credit" refers to a player crediting medals (adding credits) by depositing medals into the medal insertion slot 47.

"Bet medals" refers to medals that have been bet. "Reserved medals" refers to medals that have been credited (reserved). "Reserved bet" refers to a player operating the bet switch 40 (described below) to bet some or all of their credited medals to play a game, within the range that can be bet for that game. "Automatic bet" refers to the automatic betting of the number of medals bet in the previous game by the control processing of the slot machine 10 when a replay is won. Here, the "winning of a small role" refers to the stop display of a symbol combination corresponding to a small role (meaning that the symbol combination stops on a pay line; the same applies below). On the other hand, the "Rules Concerning the Certification and Model Inspection of Gaming Machines (hereinafter simply referred to as the "Rules")" interprets the stop display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay as the activation of a condition device related to a replay, and not as a "winning role." However, in this application (this specification, etc.), replays are also treated as one of the winning combinations (replay winning combinations), and the stopped display of a symbol combination corresponding to a replay may be referred to as a "replay winning." "Settlement" refers to the payment of bet medals and/or saved medals to the player. In this embodiment, the settlement process is executed when the settlement switch 43 (described below) is operated.

"Payout" refers to the payment of medals to a player based on a winning combination, or the payment of medals as a result of the above-mentioned settlement. When medals are paid out to a player based on a winning combination, this includes both storing the medals as credits (adding stored medals, in other words, updating the electronic data stored in the RWM 53 (described below)) and actually paying out medals from a payout port (not shown). For example, the maximum number of medals to be credited is 50, and any medals exceeding the credit number of 50 are controlled so that they are actually paid out to the player. Note that "payout" is sometimes referred to as "granting." Therefore, the "number of payouts" is sometimes referred to as the "number of grants."

In this embodiment, "gaming media" refers to medals, but in the case of enclosed (ECO) gaming machines, for example, electronic information (electronic medals, electronic data) is used as gaming media. Note that "electronic information" refers to, for example, when money (banknotes) is inserted into a lending machine, it is converted into electronic information corresponding to the amount of money, and some or all of that electronic information can be credited to the gaming machine as gaming media for playing games on the gaming machine. Note that "gaming media" is sometimes referred to as "gaming value."

Furthermore, when the gaming medium is electronic information, "paying out medals" means crediting (adding) the amount to a gaming medium credit device installed in the gaming machine. Therefore, "paying out medals" does not only mean actually paying out medals from hopper 35 (described below), but also includes the process of crediting (adding) electronic information for the payout amount corresponding to the winning combination to the gaming medium credit device.

When a game progresses from the "N-1"th game, to the "N"th game, to the "N+1"th game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), and the current game is the "N"th game, the "N"th game is referred to as the "current game." The "N-1"th game is referred to as the "previous game." Furthermore, the "N+1"th game is referred to as the "next game."

In this specification, numbers with "(B)" at the end (especially 8-bit numbers) indicate binary numbers. Similarly, numbers with "(H)", "H", or "h" at the end indicate hexadecimal numbers. Specifically, for example, a number representing "16" in decimal is written as "00010000(B)" in binary, and as "10(H)", "10H", or "10h" in hexadecimal. Furthermore, numbers representing decimal numbers are written as "16(D)" when necessary. However, when it is clear whether the number is binary, decimal, or hexadecimal, the final symbols "(B)", "(D)", "(H)", "H", or "h" may be omitted.

Furthermore, the probability that the desired symbol to be displayed on a valid line will be able to stop on the valid line between the moment the stop switch 42 is operated and the time the reels 31 stop (maximum number of frames moved) is called the "pull-in rate (PB)." The fact that the target symbol cannot be stopped on the valid line (pulled into the valid line) unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the appropriate reel 31 position (at an operation timing that allows the target symbol to stop on the valid line within the maximum number of frames moved) is called "PB ≠ 1." In contrast, the fact that the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled into) on the valid line, regardless of the position of the reels 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 42), is called "PB = 1."

Furthermore, the "operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the operation timing (the timing at which the stop switch is pressed to stop the target symbol on an active line). Furthermore, the "advantageous operation mode" of the stop switch 42 refers to an operation mode in which a symbol combination that has a payout or a large number of payouts stops, an operation mode in which a symbol combination that transitions (promotes) to an advantageous RT stops, or an operation mode in which a symbol combination that does not transition (falls) to an unfavorable RT stops, in a game in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 creates an advantage/disadvantage in the game outcome (symbol combination that stops on an active line). An "advantageous operation mode" is also referred to as the correct operation mode or the correct press order.

"Games in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome" refers to, for example, a game in which multiple types of minor winning combinations (bells) with different payout amounts are won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), in which the type of minor winning combination (bell) that is won (the payout amount is different) depends on the operation mode of the stop switch 42. It also refers to, for example, a game in which multiple types of replays are won (when multiple replays are won, i.e., a game in which the so-called "push order replay" is won), in which the RT shifts depending on the type of replay that is won.

The "instruction function" refers to a function that instructs the player on how to operate the stop switch 42. In principle, the instruction function is a function that instructs the player on the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42. In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that makes it easier to win. Note that "display" refers to visibly showing the content of the "instruction," and "notification" refers to informing the player of the content of the instruction. Therefore, the "instruction function" is both a "display function" and an "notification function."

Furthermore, the notification of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 may not be limited to the most advantageous operation mode. Notification of the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 may be considered "activation of the instruction function," but notification of any operation mode, including the most advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, may also be considered "activation of the instruction function." For example, assume that the push order bell has six options for push orders, and the payout when the push order bell is won is one, three, four, ten, or no win (no prize), depending on the push order. Here, notifying the push order to win a 10-coin combination is a notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42, and of course corresponds to "activation of the instruction function." On the other hand, notifying the push order to win a 1-coin combination, a 3-coin combination, or a 4-coin combination may be considered "notification of an advantageous operation mode (activation of the instruction function)," and need not be considered "notification of an advantageous operation mode."

The button press sequence to win a 4-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it will not result in a 10-coin combination. However, since the payout number is "4" for a bet of "3" and the difference in coins for that game is "+1," it is an operation mode that increases the difference in coins and is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode. Similarly, the button press sequence to win a 3-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it will not result in a 10-coin combination. However, since the payout number is "3" for a bet of "3" and the difference in coins remains the same (does not decrease), it is not necessarily an unfavorable operation mode.

Similarly, the button press sequence for winning a 1-coin combination is not the most advantageous operation mode because it does not result in a 10-coin combination. Furthermore, the payout is "1" for a bet of "3," which reduces the difference in coins. However, this can also be considered an operation mode that does not result in missing out on a combination, so it may not be considered a disadvantageous operation mode.

In this embodiment, when the push order bell is hit, the instruction function is activated to notify the operation mode (correct push order) that will result in the winning combination with the highest payout. However, for example, if the difference counter value (described below) in the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit ("2400 (D)") but there is still room for the number of plays remaining in the advantageous zone (advantageous zone clear counter value described below), when the push order bell is hit, it is conceivable to notify the push order that will result in a winning combination of, for example, a 3-coin or 4-coin combination, as described above, and control the difference counter value so that it remains the same.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the activation of the instruction function is limited to one specified number. For example, suppose the specified number for activating the instruction function is set to "3." In this case, when playing with the specified number of "2" or "3" during AT, if you start playing with a bet number of "3" and win the push order bell, the instruction function can be activated. In contrast, if you start playing with a bet number of "2," the instruction function cannot be activated even if you win the push order bell.

The "game zone" comprises a "normal zone (non-advantageous zone)" and a "advantageous zone." While the 5.9 machines had a "waiting zone" (a game zone where the player has won the advantageous zone lottery but has not yet transitioned to the advantageous zone), the current 6 machine regulations do not provide for a "waiting zone." However, this is not limited to this, and game zones other than the normal zone and advantageous zone may also be provided. A "normal zone" is a game zone that prohibits the transmission of signals related to the instruction function, specifically, the push order instruction number and winning and replay condition device number (information that can determine the correct push order) described below, to a peripheral board (e.g., sub-control board 80), and does not affect the performance of the instruction function in any way (no processing related to the instruction function is executed). In other words, the normal zone is a game zone where operation status cannot be reported. However, in addition to the lottery for winning combinations, a decision (by lottery, etc.) can be made as to whether to transition to the advantageous zone.

During normal operation, the instruction function must not be activated, so push order instruction information cannot be displayed on a specified display device (LED, etc.) electrically connected to the main control board 60, and because signals related to the instruction function are not transmitted to peripheral boards, advantageous operation modes cannot be displayed (announced) by the image display device 23 electrically connected to the sub-control board 80.

On the other hand, a "favourable zone" is a play zone that has the capability related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated), and more specifically, when the instruction function is activated, it refers to a play zone in which signals related to the instruction function can be sent to the sub-control board 80 only when the main control board 60 displays push order instruction information so that the instruction content (operation mode of the stop switch 42) can be identified. In other words, a favourable zone is a play zone in which the instruction function can be activated (the instruction function may be activated), that is, a play zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can be displayed (may be displayed). However, the sub-control board 80 cannot output effects that contradict the instructions issued by the main control board 60 or the signals related to the instruction function that it has received.

Furthermore, during advantageous periods, the indication function does not have to be activated even in games where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can have an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome. On the other hand, during advantageous periods, in games where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can have an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, the indication function may always be activated to display the operation mode of the stop switch 42. The AT (notification game state) is a game state that notifies the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in games where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 can have an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome. Therefore, the AT is always active during advantageous periods, and is never executed during non-advantageous periods.

Furthermore, the AT may always (100%) report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 in games where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome; however, it may not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 even in games where the operation mode of the stop switch 42 has an advantageous/disadvantageous effect on the game outcome, for example, to keep the payout rate for a specified period within a range set by the rules. For example, if the upper limit of the difference counter is approached during the AT but there are still AT games remaining, it may be possible to temporarily not report the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (not activate the instruction function) in order to prolong the life of the AT.

Furthermore, the relationship between the advantageous zone and the AT can be set in various ways. First, for example, it can be set as "advantageous zone = AT." In this case, winning the advantageous zone and winning the AT are equivalent. The AT then starts from the first play in the advantageous zone. The AT also ends when the advantageous zone ends.

Secondly, setting "AT ≠ advantageous zone" is one example. In this case, simply moving into an advantageous zone does not fulfill the conditions for starting (executing) the AT. Instead, whether or not to execute the AT is determined by lottery or other method, provided that the player is in an advantageous zone. If it is decided to execute the AT, the AT will be executed until the specified termination conditions for that AT are met. Note that if the player is not in an AT when moving into an advantageous zone, the main gaming state can be set to, for example, a normal zone, a premonition, CZ (chance zone (a period when it is easier to win the AT)), etc.

When transitioning to a premonition after transitioning to a favorable zone, it is possible to always transition to the actual premonition, and transition to the AT after the completion of a predetermined number of plays of the actual premonition. Alternatively, at the time of transition to or after transitioning to a favorable zone, whether the premonition will be actual or false may be determined by lottery, and if it is determined to be actual, transition to the AT may occur after the end of the actual premonition. Furthermore, if it is determined to be a false premonition, the advantageous zone may be maintained after the end of the false premonition, or a transition to the normal zone may occur. Furthermore, when the AT termination conditions are met, both the AT and the advantageous zone may be terminated. Alternatively, the AT may end, but if the advantageous zone termination conditions are not met, the advantageous zone may continue (non-AT and advantageous zone). The same applies when the AT is started at the same time as the advantageous zone.

Further, the number of times to play in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and during the advantageous zone, a lottery or the like is not held for the advantageous zone.Furthermore, the initial number of times to play in the advantageous zone is determined when the advantageous zone starts, and during the advantageous zone, a decision (lottery or the like) is made as to whether or not to add (add) the (remaining) number of times to play in the advantageous zone.Furthermore, a predetermined termination condition is set for the advantageous zone, and when the predetermined termination condition for the advantageous zone is met, the advantageous zone is terminated at that point even if there are remaining times to play in the advantageous zone (or remaining times to play the AT).

Here, the "predetermined end condition" for the advantageous zone is when the difference counter value, described below, exceeds "2400 (D)," or when the advantageous zone clear counter (remaining number of plays in the advantageous zone), described below, reaches "0." When either of these conditions is met, it is determined that the end condition for the advantageous zone has been met, and the next play will transition to the normal zone (non-advantageous zone). In this case, even if the final play is an AT, the AT will also end at the same time as the advantageous zone ends.

In the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED (also referred to as the "zone indicator") 77, described below, is lit. The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be lit at all times during the advantageous zone, or may be lit when a specified lighting condition is met after the transition to the advantageous zone. Here, a "specified lighting condition" is, for example, when the instruction function is activated in a gaming state where the advantageous zone is in effect and the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1". Note that once the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, it remains lit during the advantageous zone.

The "interval Sim (simulation) payout rate" is the payout rate assuming that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role always stops (even when a role with "PB≠1" is won, the symbol combination corresponding to that role stops), and assuming that when there are multiple symbol combinations corresponding to the winning role, the symbol combination most advantageous to the player (when the push order bell is won, the high-numbered bell with the maximum payout) stops. The calculation of the interval Sim payout rate does not include the number of balls paid out due to the activation of special devices (such as the activation of 1BB). In addition, in a game in which a replay is won, if the number of bets is "3," the number of payouts is counted as "0." In a replay based on a winning replay (the next game after the game in which a replay was won), the number of bets is calculated as "0" and the number of payouts is "x" (where "x" is the number of payouts for that game). Alternatively, the number of payouts for the game in which a replay was won and the number of bets for the next game may not be counted. Furthermore, "a gaming state in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds '1'" includes an RT or main gaming state in which the interval Sim payout rate is set to exceed '1'. Here, an RT in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds '1' includes, for example, an RT in which the probability of winning a replay is set high. Also, if the main gaming state includes a normal, CZ (chance zone), AT, pull-back zone, etc., an example of a main gaming state in which the interval Sim payout rate exceeds '1' is an AT.

When the advantageous zone ends, more specifically, in the final play of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off, for example, during the play end check process described below, or during the play start set process for the next play after the final play of the advantageous zone. When the conditions for ending the advantageous zone are met, the advantageous zone display LED flag initialization process described below is executed, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off in the subsequent interrupt process.

"Processing related to favorable zones" includes, for example, the following processes: 1) Drawing lots for (transition to) favorable zones; 2) Updating the favorable zone clear counter (subtracting, clearing); 3) Updating the difference counter (calculating, clearing); 4) Updating the favorable zone type flag; 5) Controlling the favorable zone display LED 77 (updating the favorable zone display LED flag).

Furthermore, "processing related to the instruction function" includes, for example, the following processes: 1) Display of push order instruction information (activation of the instruction function); 2) AT lottery; 3) In the case of a game count management type AT (the AT ends when the remaining number of plays reaches "0"), updating of the AT play count counter (subtraction, addition, clearing); 4) In the case of a difference number management type AT (the AT ends when the remaining difference number of plays reaches "0"), updating of the AT difference number counter (subtraction, addition, clearing);

Current rules stipulate that processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions can all be executed in one specified number of times in one game state (RT), with the following exceptions: Therefore, in this embodiment, processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions can be executed when the specified number is "3," and processing related to advantageous zones and processing related to instruction functions cannot be executed when the specified number is "2." However, during advantageous zones, updating of the advantageous zone clear counter and updating of the difference number counter must be executed regardless of the specified number.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the result of the role lottery is a non-winning combination (for example, when the winning number is "0" in Figure 26 described below), in other words, when playing when the condition device is not activated, processing related to the advantageous zone (lottery to transition to the advantageous zone) is not executed. However, this is not limited to this, and processing related to the advantageous zone may be executed even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning combination. On the other hand, in this embodiment, even if the result of the role lottery is a non-winning combination, processing related to the instruction function (AT lottery processing) can be executed if the probability of not winning is a predetermined value or higher (when the probability is not extremely low, for example, "1/17500" or higher).

Furthermore, if the result of executing the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is that the advantageous zone transition lottery is won, the advantageous zone will be entered from the next game. Therefore, in a game in which the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) is executed and the advantageous zone is won, notification of the correct button press order (processing related to the instruction function) cannot be executed. However, it is permissible to execute the advantageous zone transition lottery (processing related to the advantageous zone) and the AT lottery (processing related to the instruction function) in a single game. Furthermore, for example, when a specific role lottery result is obtained, the advantageous zone and AT may be determined (without executing the lottery).

The management information display LED (also called the "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display") 74 consists of, for example, four LEDs, each with a two-digit identification segment (an LED that displays which of the five items below it is, using a predetermined symbol, etc.) and a two-digit ratio segment (an LED for displaying the calculated ratio).

The management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the ratios of the following five items 1) to 5) at predetermined intervals. 1) Either the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) (7U.) or the instructed feature ratio (cumulative) (7P.) 2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 plays) (6y.) 3) Feature ratio (6000 plays) (7y.) 4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative) (6A.) 5) Feature ratio (cumulative) (7A.)

For example, when displaying the cumulative ratio of reels, if the ratio is 50%, the symbol "7A." indicating the cumulative ratio is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment. Here, "cumulative" refers to the total sum of the values counted up to that point. In this embodiment, counting continues until it reaches at least 175,000 plays. If the cumulative total is less than 175,000 plays, the ratio is displayed, for example, by flashing; if it is 175,000 plays or more, the ratio is displayed, for example, by lighting up. The cumulative total continues to add up even after 175,000 plays or more are reached until it reaches the value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53. Furthermore, "6,000 plays" refers to the total number of plays over 15 sets, with one set consisting of 400 plays.

The "favorable zone ratio" refers to the ratio (proportion) of time spent in the favorable zone relative to the total play zone (non-favorable zone + favorable zone). Specifically, for example, if the number of plays in the total play zone is "1000" and the number of plays in the favorable zone within that zone is "700," the favorable zone ratio is "70%." Furthermore, the "command-incorporated feature ratio" is the sum of the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the command function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts. Note that for slot machines that do not have feature units, the "command-incorporated feature ratio" is the sum of the number of payouts in games in which the command function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts. The sum of the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in games in which the command function is activated is counted by the command-incorporated feature counter.

Furthermore, the "number of payouts in a game in which the instruction function is activated" is calculated by adding "10" to the instruction-included device counter when, for example, 10 bells are won based on operating the stop switch 42 in the push order displayed by activating the instruction function. In contrast, when, for example, a 1 bell is won because the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order in a game in which the instruction function is activated, "1" is added to the instruction-included device counter. Similarly, when, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, the stop switch 42 is operated in a push order different from the displayed push order, and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is won), the instruction-included device counter is not added. In other words, the count value from the previous game remains the same.

When a common bell is won during the AT, the instruction function is activated in the same way as when a push order bell is won, and push order instruction information (dummy) is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, or the instruction function is not activated. If the instruction function is activated when a common bell is won, the number of payouts for that game is added to the instruction-included device counter.

On the other hand, if you win the common bell and do not activate the instruction function, the payouts for that game will not be added to the instruction feature counter. However, the total payouts will be added to the counter. In this case, the sub-control board 80 may notify you of the correct button press order using images or sound.

Furthermore, special roles (roles) include BB (first-class role continuous operation device; first-class big bonus), RB (first-class special role; regular bonus), and MB (second-class role continuous operation device; second-class big bonus). Here, BB is a device that can continuously operate RB. In other words, during BB play, RB play is executed continuously. Furthermore, during RB play, the probability of winning a small role increases. Furthermore, if the number of medals paid out during RB play exceeds a predetermined number, RB play ends. Furthermore, if the number of medals paid out during BB play exceeds a predetermined number, BB play ends.

Moreover, MB is a device that can continuously activate CBs (second-class special roles). In other words, CB games are executed continuously during MB play. Furthermore, during CB play, regardless of the results of the lottery by the role selection means 61, all minor roles are won in duplicate, and for a specific reel 31 (for example, the left reel 31), the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is within 75 ms (maximum number of moving frames is 1 frame). Furthermore, CB play ends after one play, and when the number of medals paid out during MB play exceeds a predetermined number, MB play ends.

Furthermore, when a special role is won, the winning information for the special role is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role stops on an active line. A game in which a special role is not won is called a "non-internal game." When a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the winning special role does not stop on an active line, that is, a game in which the winning information for the special role is carried over, is called an "internal game."

Furthermore, if BB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on an active line (BB wins), no medals will be paid out in the current game, but BB game will start from the next game. During BB game, RB game is executed continuously, increasing the probability of winning a small prize. Then, if the number of medals paid out during BB game exceeds a predetermined number, BB game ends, and from the next game, the game returns to the state it was in before switching to BB game.

Furthermore, if BB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to BB does not stop on an active line, the BB winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to BB stops on an active line. A game state in which BB winning information is carried over is called "inside BB." The timing of the transition to inside BB can be set as appropriate. For example, in a game in which BB is won, the transition to inside BB may occur after all reels 31 have stopped, or the transition to inside BB may not occur in the game in which BB is won, but may occur in the next game.

Furthermore, if you win RB and the symbol combination corresponding to RB stops on a valid line (RB wins), no medals will be paid out for the current game, but RB game will start from the next game. During RB game, the probability of winning a small prize increases. Then, if the number of medals paid out during RB game exceeds a predetermined number, RB game will end and from the next game, the game will return to the state it was in before switching to RB game.

Furthermore, if an RB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to the RB does not stop on an active line, the RB winning information is carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to the RB stops on an active line. A game state in which the RB winning information is carried over is called "inside RB." The timing of the transition to inside RB can be set appropriately, similar to the timing of the transition to inside BB. For example, in a game in which an RB is won, the transition to inside RB may occur after all reels 31 have stopped, or the transition to inside RB may not occur in a game in which an RB is won, but may occur in the next game.

Furthermore, if MB is won and the symbol combination corresponding to MB stops on a valid line (MB wins), no medals will be paid out in this game, but MB game will start from the next game. CB game is executed continuously during MB game. Then, if the number of medals paid out during MB game exceeds a predetermined number, MB game ends and the game state before transitioning to MB game will be restored from the next game. Furthermore, if MB is won but the symbol combination corresponding to MB does not stop on a valid line, the MB winning information will be carried over to the next game until the symbol combination corresponding to MB stops on a valid line. The game state in which MB winning information is carried over is called "inside MB."

"RT" means that the types (number) of roles to be drawn and their winning probabilities are in a unique lottery state, and "RT transition" means that the winning probability of at least one replay to be drawn changes when a transition from one RT to another RT occurs. Therefore, the types of replays and their winning probabilities in one RT are values specific to that RT, and the types of replays and their winning probabilities will not all be the same in one RT and another RT. However, it is acceptable for the combined value of the winning probabilities of replays to be the same in one RT and another RT. Note that "non-RT" does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, but is equivalent to "RT0." Therefore, when "RT" is used in this specification, it includes non-RT.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. Therefore, in this embodiment, it refers to "the number of payouts during 1BB activation to the total number of payouts." For example, if the total number of payouts for 6000 games is 2000, and of that, the number of payouts when a first-class special feature (RB) is activated is 500, then the "Continuous feature ratio (6000 games)" is 25 (%).

Furthermore, the "role ratio" refers to the ratio of the payout number when a role is activated to the total payout number. Here, "role" includes the above-mentioned first-class special role, as well as second-class special role (CB), MB (also known as 2BB. Second-class role continuous activation device. CB operates continuously.), and SB (single bonus). Note that gaming machines that do not have the corresponding function for any of the above five items will display the ratio segment as "--". For example, if a machine does not have an "RB (first-class special role)", there is no continuous role ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment will display as "--". As described above, the management information display LED 74 displays five types of ratios, but will also display a test pattern at a predetermined timing when certain conditions are met.

Furthermore, the rules stipulate that the advantageous zone ratio and the instructed feature ratio should be 70% or less. It also states that the feature ratio should be 70% or less, and that the consecutive feature ratio should be 60% or less. Therefore, by looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, you can confirm whether or not the ratios are within the range stipulated by the rules.

Gaming machines with specifications that set the advantageous zone ratio at 70% or less are called "7U" types, and gaming machines with specifications that set the instruction-included device ratio at 70% or less are called "7P" types. Gaming machines with advantageous zones are either "7U" or "7P" types. In the case of the "7U" type, the advantageous zone ratio (cumulative) is displayed on the management information display LED 74, and in the case of the "7P" type, the instruction-included device ratio (cumulative) is displayed. In the "7U" type, the ratio of advantageous zones to the total playing zone must be "70"% or less, but in the "7P" type, the number of payouts paid out by the activation of the instruction function and device operation only needs to be 70% or less of the total payout number; for example, the entire playing zone, or most of it, may be an advantageous zone.

For example, when moving to a non-favorable zone, it can be set so that there is a 100% chance of winning the favorable zone lottery, or so that there is a nearly 100% (for example, around 98%) chance of winning the favorable zone lottery, or so that there is a high chance (for example, 70%) of winning the favorable zone lottery. The "7U" type cannot refer to the set value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function (for example, AT lottery), but the "7P" type can refer to the set value itself to perform processing related to the instruction function.

The management information display LED 74 can also be used as a performance display monitor in pachinko gaming machines. In this case, the management information display LED 74 (performance display monitor) is composed of a two-digit identification segment and a two-digit ratio segment, similar to slot machines (slot machines). It sequentially displays the real-time (currently being measured) base value for every 60,000 out balls (the "base value" indicates the number of safe balls per 100 out balls), as well as the base values for the previous, second, and third times before every 60,000 balls. For example, the identification segment for the real-time base value is displayed as "bL.", the identification segment for the base value one time before is displayed as "b1.", the identification segment for the base value two times before is displayed as "b2.", and the identification segment for the base value three times before is displayed as "b3." In this way, the management information display LED 74 is applicable not only to slot machines but also to pachinko gaming machines.

<First Embodiment> The first embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of minor winning combinations (bells) with different payout numbers are won (a game in which the so-called "push order bell" is won), the type of minor winning combination (the symbol combination displayed stopped on the pay line) that is won varies depending on the operation mode (push order) of the stop switch 42, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (payout number). The first embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. Figure 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of a slot machine 10, an example of a gaming machine in the first embodiment. The slot machine 10 is equipped with a main control board 50 and a sub-control board 80 as representative control boards. The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and is equipped with an RWM 53, a ROM 54, a main CPU 55, etc. (This does not mean that it is equipped with only the components illustrated in Figure 1).

In Figure 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression, including operation switches such as the bet switch 40, are electrically connected via an input port 51 or an output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection part where signals from operation switches and the like are input, and the output port 52 is a connection part where signals are transmitted to peripheral devices such as the motor 32. In Figure 1, input peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and output peripheral devices are indicated by arrows pointing from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices (the same applies to the sub-control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of the game, etc. The ROM 54 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game. The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU (an IC with calculation functions) provided on the main control board 50, and executes programs and performs calculations necessary for the progress of the game, specifically drawing winning combinations, controlling the drive of the reels 31, and paying out winnings.

Furthermore, an MPU including an RWM 53, ROM 54, main CPU 55, and registers is mounted on the main control board 50. Note that the RWM 53 and ROM 54 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally. Note that an MPU including an RWM 83, ROM 84, and sub-CPU 85 is also mounted on the sub-control board 80, which will be described later. Note that the RWM 83 and ROM 84 may be mounted inside the MPU or may be provided externally.

In Figure 1, medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 are sent inside the medal selector. As shown in Figure 1, the medal selector is equipped with (but is not limited to) a path sensor 46, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44 (a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b), which are electrically connected to the main control board 50. A medal inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is first detected by the path sensor 46.

Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the path sensor 46. The blocker 45 allows or disallows the insertion of medals. When medal insertion is disallowed, the blocker forms a medal path that returns medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the payout port. On the other hand, when medal insertion is allowed, the blocker forms a medal path that guides medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 to the hopper 35. The blocker 45 is composed of, for example, a switching member that blocks an opening (the opening leading to the medal return port) formed in part of the medal path within the medal selector to form a medal path for guiding medals toward the hopper 35, and an actuator for driving the switching member.

Here, the blocker 45 does not allow medal insertion during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin, until all reels 31 stop, and, in the case of a winning combination, until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination). In other words, the blocker 45 allows medal insertion at least when no game is being played.

Inside the medal selector, a throw-in sensor (optical sensor) 44 is provided further downstream of the blocker 45. In this embodiment, the throw-in sensor 44 consists of a pair of throw-in sensors 44a and 44b arranged a predetermined distance apart, and is configured so that a medal is detected by one throw-in sensor 44a and then detected by the other throw-in sensor 44b a predetermined time later. Whether the correct medal has been thrown in is determined based on the timing at which the pair of throw-in sensors 44 turn on and off, respectively.

1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected with operation switches operated by the player, including a bet switch 40 (40a or 40b), a start switch 41, a (left, center, right) stop switch 42, and a settlement switch 43. Here, the term "operation switch (or simply "switch")" refers to a device (including an electric circuit and/or an electric component) that switches an electric signal on/off based on the operation of an operation body by the player (operator) (receives an external force), and does not limit the shape of the operation body operated by the player.

When the operation switch is in the OFF state, for example, light from the light-emitting element continues to be incident on the light-receiving element (when the light-receiving element continues to detect light, the operation switch is in the OFF state). Then, when the operation switch (operator) is operated by a player or the like, the light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element. When this state is detected, an electrical signal indicating that the operation switch has entered the ON state is sent to the main control board 50. Note that the opposite of the above may also be configured so that when the operation switch is in the OFF state, light from the light-emitting element does not enter the light-receiving element, and the operation switch enters the ON state when light from the light-emitting element enters the light-receiving element.

In this embodiment, the operating body of the start switch 41 is lever-shaped (hence, it is also referred to as the "start lever (switch) 41"), and the operating bodies of the bet switch 40, stop switch 42, and settlement switch 43 are push-button-shaped (hence, they are also referred to as the "bet button (switch) 40," "stop button (switch) 42," and "settlement button (switch) 43").

In addition, although not shown in Figure 1, an LED (light emitting means) is provided on the operating body of the operation switch and/or around or near it. When the operation acceptance of that operation switch is in an permitted state, the LED corresponding to that operation switch, for example, emits blue light, and when the operation acceptance of that operation switch is in a prohibited state, the LED of that operation switch, for example, emits red light, thereby indicating to the player the permitted/prohibited state of that operation switch.

Specifically, for example, when all reels 31 are spinning and a stop switch 42 is ready to be operated, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 light up blue, indicating to the player that they are ready to be operated. When one stop switch 42 is operated, the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is controlled to stop. The remaining stop switches 42 then become operable after the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the stopped reel 31 ends and the detection sensor 42e of the operated stop switch 42 turns off. Therefore, during this time, the LEDs of all stop switches 42 light up red. When the excitation state of the motor 32 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 ends and the detection sensor 42e corresponding to that stop switch 42 turns off, the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have already been operated continue to light up red, but the LEDs of the stop switches 42 that have not yet been operated light up blue.

The bet switch 40 is an operating switch that is operated by the player when betting stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, it is equipped with a 1 bet switch 40a for inserting one medal, and a 3 bet switch 40b for inserting three medals (the maximum number, specified number). However, this is not limiting, and a bet switch for betting two medals may also be provided.

The specified number is predetermined depending on, for example, whether the reel is inactive or active. Specifically, it is set to three medals when the reel is inactive, SB is active, or 1BB is active, and two medals when 2BB is active. Operating the 1-bet switch 40a twice allows two medals to be inserted, and operating it three times allows three medals to be inserted. Also, when the specified number is three medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows three medals to be inserted at once, and when the specified number is two medals, operating the 3-bet switch 40b allows two medals to be inserted at once. If the 3-bet switch 40b is operated when less than the specified number has already been bet, betting processing is performed so that the number of medals bet becomes three.

The start switch 41 is an operating switch operated by the player when starting all of the reels 31 (left, center, and right). Three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three reels 31 (left, center, and right), and are operating switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reel 31. The settlement switch 43 is an operating switch operated by the player when paying out medals bet and/or accumulated (credited) within the slot machine 10.

Also, as shown in FIG. 1, the display board 75 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. In reality, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, connecting the main control board 50 to the relay board, and the relay board to the display board 75; however, the relay board is not shown in FIG. 1. In this way, the main control board 50 and the display board 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, or another board may be interposed between them. Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, but may be connected via another board (e.g., a relay board). For example, one or more other boards (e.g., a relay board) may be interposed between the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80.

The display board 75 is equipped with a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78. The credit number display LED 76 is an LED that displays the number of medals stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10, and is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit.

The winning number display LED 78 is an LED that displays the payout number (the number of medals won by the player) when a winning combination is achieved, and, like the credit number display LED 76, is composed of two digits, an upper digit and a lower digit. The winning number display LED 78 may be controlled to turn off when no medals are to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit may be turned off, and only the lower digit may display "0."

Furthermore, the number of wins display LED 78 normally displays the number of wins, but when an error occurs, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error. Furthermore, in games in which the push order is notified during the AT, the number of wins display LED 78 functions as an LED that displays push order instruction information (notifies the advantageous push order). Therefore, in this embodiment, the number of wins display LED 78 is an LED that also displays the number of wins, the error content, and push order instruction information. However, this is not limited to this, and it is of course possible to provide a dedicated LED or the like that displays push order instruction information. Note that during the AT, notification of the advantageous push order is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub-control board 80.

In Figure 1, the main control board 50 is electrically connected to the motors 32 (stepping motors in this embodiment) of the symbol display device. The symbol display device includes reels 31 (three in this embodiment) that display symbols, motors 32 that drive each reel 31, and reel sensors 33 that detect the position of the reels 31.

The motor 32 serves as a driving means for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each reel 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65, which will be described later. Here, the reels 31 consist of a left reel 31, a center reel 31, and a right reel 31. The stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the stop switch 42 operated to stop the center reel 31 is the center stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42. The left reel 31 may be referred to as the first reel 31, the center reel 31 may be referred to as the second reel 31, and the right reel 31 may be referred to as the third reel 31.

The reels 31 are ring-shaped, with reel tape affixed to their outer periphery, on which multiple types of symbols (symbols that make up symbol combinations corresponding to winning combinations) are printed. Each reel 31 is also provided with one index (or two or more). The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the periphery of the reel 31, and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position or whether it has made one rotation. Each index is detected by a reel sensor 33. The signal from the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. When the index detects (breaks) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

In addition, the symbol at the reference position at the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in advance in ROM 54. This makes it possible to detect the symbol at the reference position at the moment the index is detected. Furthermore, from the moment the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31, it becomes possible to determine how many pulses the (stepping) motor 32 needs to be driven to stop the symbol on the pay line, counting from the symbol at the reference position.

The main control board 50 is also electrically connected to a medal payout device. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 that drives when medals are paid out from the payout port in the hopper 35, and a payout sensor 37 that detects medals paid out from the hopper motor 36.

Medals that are fed through the medal insertion slot 47 and accepted (determined to be normal) are designed to be stored in the hopper 35. In this embodiment, the payout sensor (optical sensor) 37 consists of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b arranged a predetermined distance apart. When a medal is paid out, the medal moves a predetermined moving member. The movement of the predetermined moving member turns payout sensors 37a and 37b on/off. Whether the medal has been paid out correctly is determined based on whether payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off, respectively, within a predetermined time range.

For example, if the hopper motor 36 is running but the pair of payout sensors 37 are not detected as being on, it is determined that no medals have been paid out, and a hopper error (no medals) is detected. On the other hand, if at least one of the payout sensors 37 continues to output an on signal, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

When a player starts a game, they either insert pre-credited medals by operating the bet switch 40 (reserve bet) or deposit medals through the medal slot 47 (deposit bet). When the start switch 41 is operated with the specified number of medals bet for that game, a signal is generated and input to the main control board 50. Upon receiving this signal, the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65, described below) performs a lottery using the role selection means 61 and controls the drive of all motors 32 to rotate all reels 31. As the reels 31 are rotated by the motors 32 in this way, the symbols on the reels 31 are displayed moving up and down within the display window at a predetermined speed.

Then, the player presses a stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, it drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to that stop switch 42, and executes the role selection means 61.
The stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed in accordance with the lottery result (the result determined by the internal lottery means).

The game result for this game is displayed based on the symbol combinations that appear when all reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination stops on a winning line (when that combination wins), medals corresponding to the winning combination are paid out.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described. As shown in Figure 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 is equipped with the following role selection means 61, etc. The following means in this embodiment are examples and are not limited to the means shown in this embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 draws (determines, selects) winning numbers. Here, "drawing winning numbers by the role lottery means 61" is the same as "internal lottery" in the Amusement and Entertainment Act Regulations (Regulations regarding the certification and model inspection of gaming machines, etc.; hereinafter simply referred to as the "Regulations"). The result of the lottery by the role lottery means 61 is the same as "the result determined by internal lottery" in the Regulations. Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as "internal lottery means 61" in accordance with the Regulations. Once the winning number is determined by the role lottery means 61, the winning and replay condition device number and the role condition device number are determined based on the winning number, and the winning and replay condition devices and role condition devices that will be operable in the game are determined. For this reason, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as the condition device number determination (lottery or selection) means, winning role determination (lottery or selection) means, etc.

The winning combination lottery means 61 includes, for example, a random number generation means (such as a hardware random number generator) for the lottery, a random number extraction means for extracting the random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and a winning number determination means for determining the winning number based on the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means.

The random number generating means generates random numbers within a predetermined range (for example, "0" to "65535" in decimal). The random numbers are generated by a counter that counts once every 200 n (nano) seconds, with the range of "0" to "65535" being counted as one cycle, and continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on.

The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means at a predetermined time, in this embodiment when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. The determination means compares the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with the lottery table described below to determine the winning number corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs.

The winning flag control means 62 controls the on/off of the winning flag corresponding to each role based on the lottery results by the role lottery means 61. In this embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. When a role is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag for that role is turned on (the winning flag is set). Note that winning roles can occur when there is one winning role (single win) or when there are multiple winning roles (multiple win).

The push order instruction number selection means 63 selects (determines) a push order instruction number (a number corresponding to the correct push order) based on the winning number lottery result (when a push order bell or push order replay is won) by the role lottery means 61. The "push order" of the push order instruction number selected here refers to a push order that is advantageous to the player (the correct push order). For example, when a push order bell is won, it refers to a push order that will result in a high bell (the correct push order). Also, when a replay is won twice, it refers to a push order that will promote the player to an advantageous RT or a push order that will prevent the player from falling into an unfavorable RT.

In this embodiment, each winning number is assigned a unique push order instruction number. When a push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number, specifically information such as "=*" ("*" = 1, 2, ...), on the above-mentioned winning number display LED 78. In this way, the function of displaying push order instruction information when a conditional device with an advantageous push order is activated is also referred to as an instruction function. When a push order bell or push order replay is won during the AT, the main control board 50 sends a command corresponding to the push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 at the start of play (after the start switch 41 is operated and the winning number is determined). When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it displays an image of the correct push order on the image display device 23.

Note that the main control board 50 can only transmit the selected push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80 during the advantageous zone (AT). Therefore, even if a push order instruction number is selected by the push order instruction number selection means 63 during the normal zone, that push order instruction number will not be transmitted to the sub-control board 80. Note that it is not necessary to select a push order instruction number during the normal zone.

The effect group number selection means 64 selects an effect group number corresponding to the winning number to be sent to the sub-control board 80. The effect group number corresponding to the winning number is predetermined. When the start switch 41 is operated to determine the winning number, the effect group number selection means 64 selects the effect group number corresponding to the winning number for that game, and the main control board 50 sends the selected effect group number to the sub-control board 80. The sub-control board 80 outputs an effect related to the winning role based on the received effect group number. Unlike the push order instruction number described above, the effect group number is selected for each game and sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 does not send the winning number for that game to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the sub-control board 80 cannot know the winning number for that game. However, the sub-control board 80 receives an effect group number for each game, and is therefore able to output an effect based on the received effect group number. However, even when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the correct push order cannot be determined from the effect group number, so the sub-control board 80 will not announce the correct push order based on the effect group number. In contrast, during AT, when the push order bell or push order replay is won, the main control board 50 sends a push order instruction number to the sub-control board 80. This allows the sub-control board 80 to announce the correct push order based on the received push order instruction number.

When the reel control means 65 receives a command to start the rotation of the reels 31, particularly in this embodiment, when it detects operation of the start switch 41, it controls all (three) reels 31 to start rotating. Furthermore, after the winning number is determined by the winning lottery means 61, the reel control means 65 references the on/off status of the win flag for the current game and selects a stop position determination table corresponding to the on/off status of the win flag. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the reel control means 65 determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 based on the timing when it detects the operation of the stop switch 42, and drives and controls the motor 32 to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 controls the reels 31 to stop within the range of the reel 31 stop control so that a symbol combination corresponding to a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is on) can be stopped on an active line, and controls the reels 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to a role other than a winning role (a role for which the winning flag is off) cannot be stopped on an active line.

Here, "within the range of reel 31 stop control" means the range of the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 actually stops, or the range of the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving symbols (frames)). In this embodiment, the reel 31 rotates at a constant speed of approximately 80 rotations per minute. When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 190 ms, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation (for example, the center reel 31). As a result, in this embodiment, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to four, except for a specific reel 31 during MB operation.

On the other hand, for a specified reel 31 during MB operation, the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 is stopped is set to within 75 ms. As a result, for a specified reel 31 during MB operation, the maximum number of moving symbols from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated until the reel 31 stops is set to one symbol.

Then, at the moment that the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, if any of the symbols within the stop control range of the reel 31 are symbols that should be stopped on a predetermined pay line, the stop switch 42 is controlled to stop that symbol on the predetermined pay line. In other words, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment that the stop switch 42 is operated, and the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number does not stop on the predetermined pay line, the reel 31 is controlled to rotate and move within the stop control range of the reel 31 until it is stopped, thereby controlling the symbol of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number to stop on the predetermined pay line as much as possible (pull-in stop control).

Conversely, if the reels 31 were stopped immediately the moment the stop switch 42 was operated, and a symbol combination that does not correspond to the winning number would stop on an active line, the reels 31 are controlled to rotate and move within the range of their stop control when they stop, preventing the symbol combination that does not correspond to the winning number from stopping on an active line (kick-off stop control). Furthermore, in games where multiple winning roles have been achieved (for example, when the push order bell is won), the priority of winning roles is predetermined according to the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and the timing of the operation of the stop switch 42, and the symbol associated with the highest priority role is controlled to stop according to the predetermined priority.

The winning determination means 66 determines whether the symbol combination on the reels 31 that has stopped on a winning line when the reels 31 have stopped is a symbol combination that corresponds to any winning combination. Here, the winning determination means 66 does not actually detect whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has stopped on a winning line. Specifically, based on the condition device activated in the game and the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed and/or the timing of the operation of the stop switch 42, the winning determination means 66 determines in advance the symbol combination that will stop on a winning line before the reels 31 actually stop, or the symbol combination that will stop on a winning line after the reels 31 have stopped.

The control command transmission means 71 transmits to the sub-control board 80 information (control commands) necessary for the effects output by the sub-control board 80. Examples of control commands include information when the bet switch 40 is operated, information when the start switch 41 is operated, push order instruction numbers (only during AT and when a winning number with the correct push order is selected), effect group numbers, RT (game status) information, information when the stop switch 42 is operated, and information on winning roles.

1, the sub-control board 80 controls the selection and output of effects (information) during game play and game standby. Here, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71) transmits information (control commands) required for outputting effects to the sub-control board 80 in one direction via parallel communication.
The main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connected using optical communication means. Furthermore, both the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, or serial communication and parallel communication may be used together.

Like the main control board 50, the sub-control board 80 is equipped with an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub-CPU 85. Peripheral devices for performance, such as the performance lamps 21 shown in FIG. 1, are electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 via the input port 81 or output port 82. However, the peripheral devices for performance are not limited to these. The RWM 83 is a storage medium that can temporarily store data captured by the sub-CPU 85 when controlling the performance. The ROM 84 is a storage medium that stores programs and various data, such as those used when conducting lotteries related to the performance, as performance data.

The effect lamps 21 are, for example, LEDs, and light up in a predetermined pattern when predetermined conditions are met. The effect lamps 21 include back lamps that are placed on the inner periphery of each reel 31 and illuminate the symbols displayed on the reels 31 (three consecutive symbols visible through the display window) from behind, fluorescent lights that illuminate the symbols on the reels 31 from above, and frame lamps that are placed in front of the front door of the slot machine 10 and flash when a winning combination is achieved.

The speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when predetermined conditions are met in order to produce various effects during play. The image display device 23 is comprised of an LCD display, an organic EL display, a dot display, etc., and displays various effect images during play (such as the correct button press sequence and effects corresponding to the conditional devices activated in the game), game information (such as the number of plays and number of coins won when a special device is activated or during the advantageous zone (AT)).

In this embodiment, the "special role (role)" includes "1BB (first-class role continuous operation device; first-class big bonus)" and "RB (first-class special role; regular bonus)." Therefore, the "special game" includes "1BB game" and "RB game." Furthermore, in this embodiment, "1BB" includes two types: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B." Hereinafter, "1BB-A" and "1BB-B" will be collectively referred to as "1BB."

During 1BB play, RB play is executed continuously. Note that in this embodiment, no symbol combination corresponding to RB is set. Therefore, during 1BB play, RB play is executed continuously without the symbol combination corresponding to RB being displayed statically.

Furthermore, during RB play, the player will win either a "1-coin role ALL" or a "small role ALL" in a lottery by the role lottery means 61 for each play. As a result, the probability of winning a small role is higher during RB play, i.e., 1BB play, than during non-internal play and internal 1BB play. Furthermore, during RB play, the specified number (the number of medals bet that can start play) becomes "3," and the "1-coin role ALL" is won with a probability of "60535/65536," and "1" medal is paid out. Therefore, during RB play, i.e., 1BB play, the player's medals are reduced. Furthermore, RB play ends when "2" plays are executed, "2" wins are made, or the end conditions for 1BB play are met. In other words, the end conditions for RB play are set to "2" plays being played, "2" wins being made, or the end conditions for 1BB play being met.

Furthermore, 1BB game continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds 210, and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds 210. In other words, the end condition for 1BB game is set to be when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds 210. When RB game ends, if the end condition for 1BB game is not met, RB game is executed again. In this way, RB game is executed continuously during 1BB game. Furthermore, when RB game ends, if the end condition for 1BB game is met, 1BB game ends and the game transitions to non-internal mode. Furthermore, if the end condition for 1BB game is met during RB game, RB game ends, 1BB game ends, and the game transitions to non-internal mode.

The role selection means 61 also determines a "winning number" by lottery. For this reason, the role selection means 61 is also referred to as a "winning number selection (determination, selection) means." Furthermore, once a winning number is determined, a "condition device number" corresponding to that winning number is generated. Once the condition device number is generated, the condition device corresponding to that condition device number is activated, and the symbol combination of the role corresponding to the activated condition device can be displayed stopped on the pay line (the role will win).

Furthermore, the "condition device number" comprises a "reel condition device number" and a "small win and replay condition device number." Furthermore, the "reel condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a special role (reel), and in this embodiment, comprises "1" to "2," as shown in Figure 9, which will be described later. Furthermore, the "small win and replay condition device number" is a condition device number corresponding to a small win or replay, and in this embodiment, comprises "1" to "18," as shown in Figures 6 to 8, which will be described later.

Furthermore, when a special role is won, the role condition device corresponding to the winning of that special role becomes operable. For example, when 1BB is won, the 1BB condition device becomes operable. Furthermore, when a small role is won, the small role condition device corresponding to the winning of that small role becomes operable, and when a replay is won, the replay condition device corresponding to the winning of that replay becomes operable. For example, when a small role A1 is won, the small role A1 condition device becomes operable.

Furthermore, when a special role is won that allows the winning information to be carried over to the next play or later, the winning information for that special role will be carried over to the next play until the symbol combination corresponding to that special role is displayed stopped on an active line (that special role wins). Furthermore, when a special role is won but the symbol combination corresponding to that special role is not displayed stopped on an active line, this is called "internal play." In other words, a play in which the winning information for a special role is carried over is called "internal play."

In contrast, a game in which a special role that can carry over winning information to the next game or later is not won is referred to as "non-internal." In other words, a game in which the winning information of a special role is not carried over is referred to as "non-internal." In this embodiment, a game in which a special role is won is included in "non-internal," but a game in which a special role is won may also be included in "internal." "1BB" is a special role that can carry over winning information to the next game or later, and when "1BB" is won but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the pay line, it is referred to as "1BB internal."

Furthermore, "special game" is also referred to as "operation of special device." For example, "1BB game" is also referred to as "1BB operation," and "RB game" is also referred to as "RB operation." Furthermore, "when special device is not operating" includes a state in which a special device condition device has been activated, but the symbol combination corresponding to the activated special device condition device is not displayed stopped on the pay line. For example, when a "1BB condition device" is not operating, or when a "1BB condition device" has been activated, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the pay line, this is referred to as "when 1BB is not operating." In other words, when "1BB" is not won, or when "1BB" is won, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is not displayed stopped on the pay line (within 1BB), this is "when 1BB is not operating."

Furthermore, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, "1BB" comes in two types: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B," and "gimmick condition devices" come in two types: "1BB-A condition devices" and "1BB-B condition devices." Furthermore, the winning combination for a "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A," and the winning combination for a "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B."

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside the internal area, a lottery is only held when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"), and no lottery is held when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). In other words, when the "1BB-A condition device" is not inside the internal area, it is subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted, but is not subject to a lottery when three medals are inserted. In contrast, when the "1BB-B condition device" is not inside the internal area, it is only held to a lottery when three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"), and no lottery is held when two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2"). In other words, when the "1BB-B condition device" is not inside the internal area, it is subject to a lottery when three medals are inserted, but is not subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role "1BB-A" can stop on an active line (can win a prize). Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops on an active line when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, it will result in a "1BB-A win," and although no medals will be paid out for this game, the next game will transition to "1BB-A game" (when 1BB-A is activated). On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop on an active line when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A internal." Furthermore, when two medals are inserted into the "1BB-A" slot, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can stop on an active line (leading to a win), but when three medals are inserted into the "1BB-A" slot, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not stop on an active line.

Furthermore, when the "1BB-B Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role "1BB-B" can stop on an active line (can win a prize). Furthermore, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops on an active line when the "1BB-B Condition Device" is activated, it will result in a "1BB-B win," and although no medals will be paid out for this game, the next game will transition to "1BB-B game" (when 1BB-B is activated). On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop on an active line when the "1BB-B Condition Device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B internal." Furthermore, when three medals are inserted into the "1BB-B" slot, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can stop on an active line (leading to a win), but when two medals are inserted into the "1BB-B" slot, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not stop on an active line.

Furthermore, the "setting value" relates to the player's advantage, and in this embodiment, although not shown, there are six levels, from setting 1 to setting 6. The higher the setting value, the higher the player's advantage. Furthermore, when the power is off and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on in this state, the system transitions to a setting change state (setting change mode) in which the setting value can be changed. At this time, an initialization process (RWM clear process) is executed to initialize a specified memory area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, when the power is on and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the system transitions to a setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the start condition for the "advantageous zone" is set to be that in the non-advantageous zone, one of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) is won (determined) in the lottery by the role selection means 61. In other words, in the non-advantageous zone, if one of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) is won in the lottery by the role selection means 61, the zone will transition to the advantageous zone.

Also,
In this embodiment, the end condition of the "advantageous zone" is set to when the difference counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", when the advantageous zone clear counter (the number of remaining games in the advantageous zone) reaches "0", or when the notification game (AT) ends. In other words, when the difference in the number of coins in the advantageous zone exceeds "2400", when the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches "1500", or when the notification game (AT) ends, the advantageous zone ends and transitions to a non-advantageous zone.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, during non-internal play, the probability of winning any of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) in the lottery by the winning lottery means 61 is "50,536/65,536." Therefore, even if the advantageous zone ends and you move to a non-advantageous zone, you can then win any of the winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) to "18" (replay condition device) in the subsequent "1" play and "2" play, and move to the advantageous zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed when the winning number "13" (small role G condition device) through winning number "15" (small role I condition device) is selected (determined) in the lottery by the role selection means 61. The "small role G condition device" through "small role I condition device" have a relatively low probability of activation (winning), and are referred to as "rare roles" or "rare small roles." The probability of winning the AT lottery when the "small role G condition device" through "small role I condition device" are activated is set to 10%. Furthermore, when the AT lottery is won, the right to play the notification game is granted. Then, if the right to play the notification game is held and the conditions for starting the notification game are met, the notification game will begin.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initial number of plays for the notification game is set to "50" plays. When the right to play the notification game is granted and the conditions for starting the notification game are met, the notification game is played for "50" plays. Furthermore, if a player already has the right to play the notification game and wins the AT lottery, the number of rights to play the notification game is increased (added). For example, if a player has "2" rights to play the notification game, the player can play the notification game for "(50 plays + 50 plays =) 100 plays."

Furthermore, if the AT lottery is won while the notification game is being played, the remaining number of plays of the notification game will be increased (added). For example, if the AT lottery is won when the remaining number of plays of the notification game is 20, the remaining number of plays of the notification game will be (20 plays + 50 plays =) 70 plays. Furthermore, the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order can only be performed during advantageous zones; the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order cannot be performed in non-advantageous zones. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the activation of the instruction function and the suggestion of the push order are performed, it is considered to be in an advantageous zone.

Figure 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels 31 in this embodiment. As shown in Figure 2, in this embodiment, each reel 31 consists of 20 frames. In other words, each reel 31 has 20 symbols. Figure 2 also shows the symbol numbers. For example, on the left reel 31, the symbol with symbol number 0 is a blue 7.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reels 31 stop is set to within 190 ms. As a result, the maximum number of symbols that can move from the moment the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected until the reels 31 stop is four symbols. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated just before the number one "replay" on the left reel 31 crosses an active line, a maximum of four symbols can move from that symbol, up to the number five "red 7" that can stop on an active line. Therefore, if four specific symbols are arranged on one reel 31 with an interval of five symbols, the specific symbols can always stop on an active line, regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated.

Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replays" are positioned at numbers "1," "6," "11," and "16." In other words, "Replays" on the left reel 31 are positioned at intervals of "4" symbols, every "5." Therefore, for the left reel 31, "Replays" can always be stopped on an active line, regardless of when the left stop switch 42 is operated. In this way, a symbol arrangement that always allows the target symbol to be stopped on an active line, regardless of when the stop switch 42 is operated, is referred to as a "PB = 1" arrangement. In contrast, a symbol arrangement that does not allow the target symbol to be stopped on an active line unless the stop switch 42 is operated at the appropriate time (within the range of the maximum number of symbols that can be moved from the active line) is referred to as a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

In addition to "Replay," "Bell" and "Watermelon" are also arranged in "PB=1" on the left reel 31. Also, on the left reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively (in order) in four locations. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively from number 1 to number 3, consecutively from number 6 to number 8, consecutively from number 11 to number 13, and consecutively from number 16 to number 18.

Furthermore, on the left reel 31, the "blue 7" at number "0," the "red 7" at number "5," the "black BAR" at number "10," and the "white BAR" at number "15" combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7," "red 7," "black BAR," or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a pay line.

Similarly, on the left reel 31, the "Cherry" symbols "4," "9," and "14," as well as the "Blank" symbol "19," combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the "Cherry" or "Blank" symbol on the left reel 31 can be stopped on a pay line.

Furthermore, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" is placed above "Watermelon", "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is placed above "Cherry/Blank", and "Replay" is placed above "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR". In other words, on the left reel 31, "Cherry/Blank" and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are placed between "Watermelon" and "Replay". As a result, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR", "Replay", "Bell", "Watermelon" and "Cherry/Blank" are placed consecutively (in order) in "4" locations. Specifically, on the left reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR," "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," and "Cherry/Blank" are arranged consecutively (in order) from numbers "0" to "4," as well as from numbers "5" to "9," from numbers "10" to "14," and from numbers "15" to "19."

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry," "Bell," "Replay," and "Watermelon" are each arranged in a "PB=1" configuration. Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry," "Bell," "Replay," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively in four locations. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, "Cherry," "Bell," "Replay," and "Watermelon" are arranged consecutively from numbers 0 to 3, from numbers 5 to 8, from numbers 10 to 13, and from numbers 15 to 18.

Furthermore, on the center reel 31, the "blue 7" at number 4, the "red 7" at number 9, the "black BAR" at number 14, and the "white BAR" at number 19 combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7," "red 7," "black BAR," or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 can be stopped on an active line.

Furthermore, on the middle reel 31, the "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is positioned between the "Watermelon" and the "Cherry" (above the "Watermelon" and below the "Cherry"). As a result, on the middle reel 31, the "Cherry," "Bell," "Replay," "Watermelon," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are positioned consecutively (in order) at four locations. Specifically, on the middle reel 31, the "Cherry," "Bell," "Replay," "Watermelon," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are positioned consecutively (in order) at positions "0" through "4," as well as at positions "5" through "9," "10" through "14," and "15" through "19."

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," and "Cherry" are each in the "PB=1" position. Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) in four locations. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," and "Cherry" are arranged consecutively (in order) at number 19, numbers 0 through 2, as well as consecutively at numbers 4 through 7, numbers 9 through 12, and numbers 14 through 17.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, the "blue 7" at number 3, the "red 7" at number 8, the "black BAR" at number 13, and the "white BAR" at number 18 combine to form a "PB=1" arrangement of four symbols. Therefore, no matter when the center stop switch 42 is operated, any of the "blue 7," "red 7," "black BAR," or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 can be stopped on a pay line.

Furthermore, on the right reel 31, "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" is positioned between "Cherry" and "Replay" (above "Cherry" and below "Replay"). As a result, on the right reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," "Cherry," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are positioned consecutively (in order) in four locations. Specifically, on the right reel 31, "Replay," "Bell," "Watermelon," "Cherry," and "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR" are positioned consecutively (in order) at number 19, numbers 0 through 3, as well as consecutively at numbers 4 through 8, numbers 9 through 13, and numbers 14 through 18.

Figure 3 (A) shows the display window 18, the relative positions of each reel 31, and the pay lines (display lines that display symbol combinations). The display window 18 allows the reels 31 arranged inside to be seen through. In this embodiment, three reels 31 (left reel 31, center reel 31, and right reel 31) are arranged horizontally in parallel. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that consecutive "3" symbols are visible from above and below through the display window 18. As a result, when each reel 31 stops, the consecutive "3" symbols on each reel 31 are seen stopped and displayed in the upper, middle, and lower rows of the display window 18, respectively. Therefore, when all reels 31 stop, a total of "9" symbols (frames) are visible through the display window 18. Note that in Figure 3 (A), the numbers in the lower right corner of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

3(B) also illustrates the names of the symbol positions in this embodiment. The positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when each reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "top row,""middlerow," and "bottom row." Furthermore, the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the left reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper left row,""middle left row," and "lower left row." Similarly, the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the center reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper middle row,""middle middle row," and "lower middle row," and the positions of the "3" symbols stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the right reel 31 stops are referred to, from top to bottom, as the "upper right row,""middle right row," and "lower right row."

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 3 (A), a winning line is set for the "9" symbols visible through the display window 18. Here, an "winning line" is a line of symbols arranged when the reels 31 stop, a symbol combination line (display line) that forms a symbol combination, and a line that will result in a winning combination when a symbol combination corresponding to a certain role stops on that line. Furthermore, an "invalid line" is a symbol combination line that is not set as a winning line and is not a target for forming a symbol combination. In this embodiment, the only valid line, regardless of the game state or bet amount, is the straight "middle line" that passes through the "left middle" - "middle middle" - "right middle" as shown in Figure 3 (A), and all other lines are invalid.

For example, in this embodiment, the following lines are invalid: an "upper line" that runs straight through the "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right" line; a "lower line" that runs straight through the "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" line; a "sloping right line" that runs straight through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" line; a "sloping right line" that runs straight through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" line; a "small mountain line" that runs small mountain-shaped through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" line; a "small V line" that runs small V-shaped through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" line; and a "bent line" that runs bent through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "middle right" line.

The active and inactive lines are collectively referred to as "symbol combination lines." The position and number of active lines may vary depending on the game state and the number of bets. For example, in a specific game state, a line sloping downward to the right may be the active line. Also, for a specific number of bets, there may be multiple active lines (a total of five: an upper line, a middle line, a lower line, an upward-to-right line, and a downward-to-right line).

Figures 4 and 5 show the types of roles (such as roles corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the role drawing means 61), symbol combinations, and payout numbers in this embodiment. Roles can be broadly divided into special roles, replays (replay roles), and minor roles. Each role has a predetermined symbol combination and payout number when it wins. When all reels 31 stop, if a symbol combination corresponding to any role stops on an active line (the role wins), the number of medals corresponding to that role is paid out (a dividend (profit) is awarded). However, the payout number when a special role wins is set to "0." Furthermore, for replays, medals are automatically inserted, allowing for a replay.

As shown in Figures 4 and 5, game states in this embodiment include not inside, inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A, inside 1BB-B), and in 1BB play (in 1BB-A play, in 1BB-B play). Furthermore, when not inside, the lottery items differ depending on whether two medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "2") or three medals are inserted (when the number of medals bet is "3"). In Figures 4 and 5, "2" indicates "when two medals are inserted," and "3" indicates "when three medals are inserted." Furthermore, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB (inside 1BB-A and inside 1BB-B)," and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB play (in 1BB-A play and 1BB-B play)."

The role numbers "1" to "82" shown in Figures 4 and 5 correspond to small roles. In this embodiment, there are 82 types of small roles, "small role 01" to "small role 82." As shown in Figures 4 and 5, "small role 01" to "small role 82" are subject to lottery when two medals are inserted outside the interior, when three medals are inserted outside the interior, when inside the 1BB, and during 1BB play, and the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed stopped on the active line (winning).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 4, for "Small Win 01" to "Small Win 06," the number of medals paid out (awarded) upon winning is set to "10" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, for "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 78," the number of medals paid out (awarded) upon winning is set to "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5, for "Small Win 79" to "Small Win 82," the number of medals paid out (awarded) upon winning is set to "3" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is only one type, with the symbol number "1," and the symbols on each reel 31 are in the "PB=1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration (the symbols can always be displayed stopped on an active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 42). Also, as shown in Figure 19 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (active line) (when "Small Win 01" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward right line" (inactive line) passing through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is only one type, with the symbol number "2," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is only one type, with the symbol number "3." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is only one type, with the symbol number "4," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is only one type, with the symbol number "5." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is only one type, with the symbol number "6." Furthermore, like "Small Win 01," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 02" to "Small Win 06" all have the symbols on each reel 31 in the "PB=1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 02" to "Small Win 06" are all symbol combinations consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration, just like "Small Win 01."

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 02" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left"-"upper middle"-"upper right" line. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 19 (3) described below, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small Win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line). Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (1) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 04" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "upward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle middle"-"upper right" line.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (2) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 05" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Mid-hill line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"middle-lower"-"lower right". Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3) described below, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line) (when "Small Win 06" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "lower line" (invalid line) passing through the "lower left"-"lower middle"-"lower right".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" is the single symbol number "7," and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left and right reels 31) are in the "PB=1" configuration (they can always be displayed as stopped symbols on an active line regardless of the timing of the stop switch 42 operation), and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (center reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration (they may or may not be displayed as stopped symbols on an active line depending on the timing of the stop switch 42 operation).

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 08" is only one type, symbol number "8," the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 09" is only one type, symbol number "9," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 10" is only one type, symbol number "10." Furthermore, like "Small Win 07," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 08" to "Small Win 10" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement, but the symbol on the center reel 31 in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 08" to "Small Win 10", like "Small Win 07", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in a "PB = 1" arrangement, and the symbols on one other reel 31 (middle reel 31) are in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 11" is only one type, with the symbol number "11." The symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 11" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 12" is only one type, symbol number "12," the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 13" is only one type, symbol number "13," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 14" is only one type, symbol number "14." Furthermore, like "Small Win 11," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 12" to "Small Win 14" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the right reel 31 in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 12" to "Small Win 14" are all symbol combinations in which, like "Small Win 11," the symbols on two reels 31 (the left reel 31 and the center reel 31) are in a "PB = 1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (the right reel 31) are in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is the single symbol number "15," and the symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 15" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on two reels 31 (center reel 31 and right reel 31) in the "PB=1" configuration, and symbols on one other reel 31 (left reel 31) in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 16" is only one type of symbol number "16", the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 17" is only one type of symbol number "17", and the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 18" is only one type of symbol number "
There is only one type of symbol combination, "small win 16" to "small win 18". In addition, similar to "small win 15", the symbols on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are each in the "PB=1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB≠1" arrangement. In other words, similar to "small win 15", the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 16" to "small win 18" are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on "two" reels 31 (center reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other "one" reel 31 (left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 19" is only one type, which is the symbol number "11," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 20" is only one type, which is the symbol number "20." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 21" is only one type, which is the symbol number "21," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 22" is only one type, which is the symbol number "22." Similar to "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 14," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" to "Small Win 22" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" to "Small Win 22", like "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 14", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in a "PB = 1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (right reel 31) are in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 23" is only one type, which is the symbol number "23," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 24" is only one type, which is the symbol number "24." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 25" is only one type, which is the symbol number "25," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 26" is only one type, which is the symbol number "26." Similar to "Small Win 15" to "Small Win 18," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 23" to "Small Win 26" all have the symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement, but the symbols on the left reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 23" to "Small Win 26", like "Small Win 15" to "Small Win 18", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 (the center reel 31 and the right reel 31) are in a "PB = 1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (the left reel 31) are in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 27" is only one type, symbol number "27," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 28" is only one type, symbol number "28." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 29" is only one type, symbol number "29," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 30" is only one type, symbol number "30." Similar to "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 10," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 27" to "Small Win 30" all have the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement, but the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. In other words, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 27" to "Small Win 30", like "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 10", are all symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in a "PB = 1" arrangement, and the symbols on the other one reel 31 (middle reel 31) are in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 31" is only one type, with the symbol number "31." The symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 31" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on one reel 31 (center reel 31) is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 32" to "Small Win 46" are each only one type of symbol number, "32" to "46." Furthermore, like "Small Win 31," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 32" to "Small Win 46" all have the symbol on the center reel 31 in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, like "Small Win 31," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 32" to "Small Win 46" are all symbol combinations consisting of a symbol on one reel 31 (center reel 31) in the "PB=1" configuration, and symbols on the other two reels 31 (left reel 31 and right reel 31) in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 47" is the single symbol number "47", where the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 47" is a symbol combination where the symbol on one reel 31 (right reel 31) is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 48" to "Small Win 62" are each only one type of symbol number, "48" to "62." Furthermore, like "Small Win 47," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 48" to "Small Win 62" all have the symbol on the right reel 31 in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, like "Small Win 47," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 48" to "Small Win 62" are all symbol combinations consisting of one reel 31 (right reel 31) with the symbol in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 (left reel 31 and center reel 31) with the symbol in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 63" is only one type, with the symbol number "63." The symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 63" is a symbol combination in which the symbol on one reel 31 (left reel 31) is in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 64" to "Small Win 78" are each only one type of symbol number, "64" to "78." Furthermore, like "Small Win 63," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 64" to "Small Win 78" all have the symbol on the left reel 31 in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, like "Small Win 63," the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 64" to "Small Win 78" are all symbol combinations consisting of one reel 31 (left reel 31) with the symbol in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) with the symbol in the "PB≠1" configuration.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 79" is the single symbol number "79," and the symbols on the center and right reels 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 79" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on two reels 31 (center and right reels 31) are in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the remaining one reel 31 (left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration. Furthermore, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 79" is displayed stopped on the active line (middle line) (when "Small Win 79" is won), "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are displayed stopped on the "upward-right line" (inactive line) that runs through the "lower left"-"middle"-"upper right" rows.

There is only one symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 80", which is symbol number "80". Like "Small Win 79", the symbols on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, like "Small Win 79", the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 80" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on two reels 31 (middle reel 31 and right reel 31) in the "PB=1" configuration, and symbols on the other one reel 31 (left reel 31) in the "PB≠1" configuration. Additionally, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 80" is displayed stopped on the active line (middle line) (when "Small Win 80" is won), similar to "Small Win 79," "Cherry" - "Cherry" - "Cherry" will be displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) that passes through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" row.

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 81" is the single symbol number "81," and the symbols on the center and right reels 31 are each in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 81" is a symbol combination in which the symbols on two reels 31 (center and right reels 31) are in the "PB=1" configuration, and the symbols on the remaining one reel 31 (left reel 31) are in the "PB≠1" configuration. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 81" is "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry," and when "Small Win 81" is won, "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (active line).

The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 82" is only one type, with the symbol number "82," and the symbols on each reel 31 are in the "PB=1" configuration. In other words, the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 82" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration. The symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 82" is "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon," and when "minor win 82" is won, "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (active line).

There is only one symbol combination that corresponds to "Replay", the winning combination number "83", and the symbols on each reel 31 are in the "PB=1" position. In other words, the symbol combination that corresponds to "Replay" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" position. In addition, the symbol combination that corresponds to "Replay" is "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay", and when "Replay" wins, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (active line).

As shown in Figure 5, "Replay" is subject to a lottery when two medals are inserted while not inside the reel, when three medals are inserted while not inside the reel, and when inside the 1BB reel, and the corresponding symbol combination can stop and display on an active line (win). However, it is not subject to a lottery during 1BB play, and therefore the corresponding symbol combination will not stop and display on an active line (win). Furthermore, when a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" stops and displays (wins), medals are automatically inserted, and the replay can be performed.

The role numbers "84" and "85" shown in Figure 5 correspond to special roles (roles). In this embodiment, there are two types of special roles: "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". As shown in Figure 5, "1BB-A" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted during a non-internal game, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted. In contrast, "1BB-B" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted during a non-internal game, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted.

Furthermore, there is only one symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A," the winning number "84," and while the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" configuration, the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the winning symbol combination for the "1BB-A condition device" is set to "1BB-A," and when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning symbol combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).

Then, when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on an active line, it becomes a "1BB-A win" and, although no medals are paid out for this game, the next game will transition to "1BB-A game." On the other hand, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on an active line when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-A inside."

In this embodiment, when two medals are inserted while not inside the "1BB-A" state, the "1BB-A condition device" can be activated independently (single win), and in that game when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated independently, a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on an active line in that game when the "1BB-A condition device" is activated independently, the game will transition to "1BB-A inside" from the next game. Also, if the winning combination selection means 61 results in a non-winning combination when two medals are inserted while "1BB-A inside" is active, a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, in this embodiment, the winning combination selection means 61 will not result in a non-winning combination during "1BB-A inside," so once the game transitions to "1BB-A inside," a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

Furthermore, there is only one symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B," the winning combination being "85." As with "1BB-A," the symbols on the right reel 31 are in the "PB=1" configuration, but the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are each in the "PB≠1" configuration. As mentioned above, in this embodiment, the winning combination of the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B," and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination of "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line (can win a prize).

Then, when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on an active line, it becomes a "1BB-B win" and no medals are paid out for the current game, but the next game will transition to "1BB-B game." On the other hand, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on an active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the next game will transition to "1BB-B internal."

In this embodiment, when three medals are inserted while not inside the "1BB-B" state, the "1BB-B condition device" can be activated independently (single win), and in that game when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated independently, a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, if a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on an active line in that game when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated independently, the game will transition to "1BB-B inside" from the next game. Also, if the winning combination selection means 61 results in a non-winning combination when three medals are inserted while "1BB-B inside" is active, a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line. However, in this embodiment, since the winning combination selection means 61 does not result in a non-winning combination during "1BB-B inside," once the game transitions to "1BB-B inside," a symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on an active line.

For each of the above-mentioned roles, if the symbol combination corresponding to the winning role does not stop and display on an active line in a game in which the role is won, some roles are carried over to the next game and some are not. In this embodiment, the carried-over role is 1BB ("1BB-A" and "1BB-B"). In this embodiment, all symbol combinations corresponding to 1BB are set to "PB ≠ 1," so even if 1BB is won, there are cases in which the symbol combination corresponding to 1BB does not stop and display on an active line (1BB does not win). When 1BB is won, the winning information for 1BB is controlled to be carried over to the next game and thereafter until 1BB wins.

On the other hand, if a minor win or replay is won, the winning combination is valid only for the current game, and the winning information will not be carried over to the next game or later. In other words, in a game in which such a combination is won, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination can be displayed on an active line, but regardless of whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination is displayed on an active line, the right to the winning combination will expire at the end of that game.

Figures 6 to 9 are diagrams showing the condition device in this embodiment. Figures 6 to 8 show the small win and replay condition device in this embodiment. In the notes section of Figures 6 and 7, "push order 123" indicates the push order of "left, center, right," and "push order 132" indicates the push order of "left, right, center." Furthermore, "push order 213" indicates the push order of "center, left, right," and "push order 231" indicates the push order of "center, right, left." Furthermore, "push order 312" indicates the push order of "right, left, center," and "push order 321" indicates the push order of "right, center, left."

As shown in Figures 6 to 8, there are 17 types of small win condition devices, ranging from the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" corresponding to small win and replay condition device number "1" to the "Small Win ALL Condition Device" corresponding to small win and replay condition device number "17." Furthermore, the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to the "Small Win I Condition Device" are subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted outside the internal area, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, and when inside 1BB, but are not subject to a lottery (a lottery is not held) during 1BB play.

Furthermore, the "1-piece role ALL condition device" is subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the slot, when three medals are inserted while not inside the slot, when inside 1BB, and during 1BB play. Furthermore, the "small role ALL condition device" is not subject to a lottery (a lottery is not held) when two medals are inserted while not inside the slot, when three medals are inserted while not inside the slot, and when inside 1BB, but is only subject to a lottery (a lottery is held) during 1BB play.

Here, the following methods can be used to control the stopping of the reels 31 when multiple types of minor winning combinations with different payout numbers of medals are won. As a first priority, if all of the symbols (on that reel 31) that make up the winning symbol combination can be stopped and displayed on an active line, the reels 31 are stopped at that position. Next, if all of the symbols that make up the winning symbol combination cannot be stopped and displayed on an active line (when the first priority cannot be adopted), as a second priority, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled using either "number priority" or "number priority."

Furthermore, "number priority" refers to the process of giving priority to the symbols on the reel 31 that make up the symbol combination with the greatest number of medals paid out among the symbol combinations of overlapping winning roles, and causing them to stop and be displayed (pulled in) on the active line. On the other hand, "quantity priority" refers to giving priority to the symbols on the reel 31 that make up the symbol combination with the greatest number of symbol combinations that can stop and be displayed on the active line.

In this embodiment, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated, multiple types of small wins (bells) with different payout numbers of medals are won (the so-called "push order bell" is won). When the push order bell is won, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled to stop with priority given to the number of medals if the push order is correct, and with priority given to the number of medals if the push order is incorrect. As a result, when the push order bell is won, the type of small win (the symbol combination displayed on the active line) that is won will differ depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, which will result in an advantage or disadvantage in the game result (the number of medals paid out).

The "small role A1 condition device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6. When winning number "1" is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61, a small role and replay condition device number "1" are generated from this winning number "1". Then, the "small role A1 condition device" corresponding to the small role and replay condition device number "1" is activated. Furthermore, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated, the seven types of small roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6 are won in duplicate.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press sequence is "Left, Center, Right (123)," and any other button press sequence is considered incorrect. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Center, Right (123)" button press sequence while the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, the left reel 31 will have "Replay" (PB = 1) displayed in the middle left row, with priority given to the number of coins; when the second middle stop occurs, the middle reel 31 will have "Bell" (PB = 1) displayed in the middle middle row; and when the third right stop occurs, the right reel 31 will have "Watermelon" (PB = 1) displayed in the middle right row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" to be displayed in the active line when "PB = 1" occurs.

In this way, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is prioritized, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out according to the "Small Win A1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line. As shown in Figure 19 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is displayed stopped on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the downward-sloping right line (inactive line).

Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during activation of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device," "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line). As a result, when the left reel is stopped for the first time during activation of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device," "Blue 7," "Red 7," "Black BAR," or "White BAR" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, when the left reel is stopped for the first time during activation of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device," "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR," "Replay," and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed as stopped in the display window 18.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 01" is one type, "Watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops and displays when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and display on an active line when the "Small Winning A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win A1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "left, right, center (132)", the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 07" or "small win 08" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of "1/2" based on the priority of the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle left row, and then at the second right stop, a "Bell" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle right row, based on the number of units, to enable either a "Small Win 07" or a "Small Win 08" to be won. Then, at the third middle stop, a "Red 7" or a "Blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the center reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only located at number "4." Therefore, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Similarly, because the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on number 9, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" through "9" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle-middle row is 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "Blue 7" or "Red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle-middle row is 1/2, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" or "Small Win 08" being displayed stopped on an active line is 1/2.

In this way, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 07" or "Small Win 08" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the first left button stops, but incorrect when the second right button stops, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31. This prevents the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "Small Win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" is one type, "Bell." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Middle Left Right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Middle Win 31" or "Middle Win 32" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (described below), when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, when the middle first stop occurs, a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed in the middle middle row, when the left second stop occurs, a "Red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, a "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed in the right middle row, based on quantity priority.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is only located at number "5." Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "8," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "3," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when the "19" or any of the "0" through "3" symbols on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 31" or "minor win 32" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, quantity priority is given, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" or "Small Win 32" (both pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on the active line, which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 01" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. This prevents the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "Small Win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" is one type, "Red 7," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" is one type, "Watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "White BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "Black BAR" or "White BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As shown in FIG. 2 , the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 is located only at number 15. Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "11" through "15" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the active line (middle left row) is 1/4. Furthermore, since the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 is located only at number 14. Therefore, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "10" through "14" on the center reel 31 is located on an active line, the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle middle row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 is positioned only on number 19, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" through "19" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the left-middle row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle-middle row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 01" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31. This prevents the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "Small Win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" is one type, "White BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" is one type, "Cherry." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" or "Small Win 54" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in FIG. 14, which will be described later,
The symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line when the "1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small prize 01", "small prize 07", "small prize 08", "small prize 31", "small prize 32", "small prize 53" or "small prize 54". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small prize 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all "3" reels 31 in the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31," "Small Win 32," "Small Win 53," and "Small Win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the first left stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role A1 Condition Device," a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left); when the first middle stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role A1 Condition Device," a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle); and when the first right stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role A1 Condition Device," a "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line, and when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-B," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is "blank" - "red 7" - "replay," which is a symbol combination that does not affect the stop control of reel 31 based on the number of symbols when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A." For example, since the symbol on center reel 31 of "1BB-A" is "red 7," among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A," the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on center reel 31 is "red 7" is "2." Therefore, since the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on center reel 31 is "watermelon" is the same as the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on center reel 31 is "watermelon," it is possible to stop and display the "watermelon" on center reel 31 on an active line based on the number of symbols, when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A," at the first center stop (when the push order is incorrect) during play when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A."

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "blank," which is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the left reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the number-priority stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A." Similarly, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" is a "replay," which is a symbol that is not used in the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated. Therefore, the symbol on the right reel 31 of "1BB-A" does not affect the number-priority stopping control of the reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A."

The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B", like the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A", is a symbol combination that does not affect the number-priority stopping control of the reels 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B". Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is a symbol combination that does not affect the number-priority stopping control of the reels 31 when the "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated "inside 1BB-A". Similarly, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is a symbol combination that does not affect the number-priority stopping control of the reels 31 when the "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated "inside 1BB-B".

In this embodiment, there are two types of "1BB", "1BB-A" and "1BB-B". When two medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-A" is held, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed as a stopped symbol. When three medals are inserted, a lottery for "1BB-B" is held, and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed as a stopped symbol. However, this is not limited to this, and "1BB" can be used as a single type, with the number of inserted medals always set to "3". In this case, it is preferable that the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" be a symbol combination that does not affect the number-priority stop control of the reels 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated "inside 1BB".

The "Small Win A2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small wins listed in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "left, center, right (123)," just like when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on an active line with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of coins. When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, right, center (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 09" or "small win 10" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of coins.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 33" or "small win 34" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "small win A2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, middle, left (321)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 49" or "small win 50" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, middle (312)" push order.

The "Small Win A2 Condition Device" replaces "Small Win 07" and "Small Win 08" of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 09" and "Small Win 10," replaces "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 33" and "Small Win 34," and replaces "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" of the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 49" and "Small Win 50." Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

The "Small Win B1 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column in Figure 6, and when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small wins listed in the winning role column in Figure 6 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "left, right, center (132)," and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, based on the number of coins being given priority; when the second right stop occurs, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row; and when the middle third stop occurs, "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" to be displayed stopped on an active line when "PB = 1" occurs.

In this way, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "Small Win B1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line, based on the number of medals being prioritized. As shown in Figure 19 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" is displayed stopped on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the upper line (inactive line).

Furthermore, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time during activation of the "small win B1 condition device," "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line). As a result, when the left reel is stopped for the first time during activation of the "small win B1 condition device," "Blue 7," "Red 7," "Black BAR," or "White BAR" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, when the left reel is stopped for the first time during activation of the "small win B1 condition device," "Blue 7/Red 7/Black BAR/White BAR," "Replay," and "Bell" on the left reel 31 are displayed as stopped in the display window 18.

14, which will be described later, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 02" is one type, "Replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 02" is one type, "Cherry," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 02" is one type, "Replay." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that is stopped and displayed when the push order is correct when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Center, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 11" or "Small Win 12" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, at the first left stop, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle left row, and then at the second middle stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle middle row, based on the number of wins, to enable either a "small win 11" or a "small win 12." Then, at the third right stop, a "black BAR" or a "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the right reel 31 is displayed in a stopped state in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13. Therefore, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" through "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/2, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 11" or "minor win 12" being displayed stopped on an active line is 1/2.

In this way, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 11" or "Small Win 12" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the first button stops on the left, but incorrect when the second button stops on the center, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the center reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the center reel 31. This prevents the "bell" on the center reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "cherry" on the center reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "minor win 02" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" is one type, "Bell." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Central, Left, Right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, based on the number of items being prioritized; when the left second stop occurs, the "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row; and when the right third stop occurs, the "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at number 10. Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 is only positioned at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" through "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is "1/4", and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle right row is "1/2", so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 35" or "small win 36" stopping and displaying on an active line is "1/8".

In this way, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the middle reel 31 is stopped for the first time, quantity priority is given, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on the active line, which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first middle reel stops, a "watermelon" will be displayed on the active line. This is a different symbol from the symbol (cherry) on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 02," and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. This prevents the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "cherry" on the middle reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "Small Win 02" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" is one type, "black BAR," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" is one type, "watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" or "Small Win 36" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on number priority; when the second left stop occurs, a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the third middle stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the left-middle row is 1/4. Furthermore, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/4, and the probability of having the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4, so the probability of having the "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/2. Therefore, the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" stop and display on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 02" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, will be displayed stopped on the active line. This prevents the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "replay" on the right reel 31 from being displayed stopped on the active line, preventing "minor win 02" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 47" and "Small Win 48" is one type, "Red 7," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 47" and "Small Win 48" is one type, "Cherry." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 47" or "Small Win 48" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Fig. 14 described later, the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the pay line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated are the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 02", "small win 11", "small win 12", "small win 35", "small win 36", "small win 47" or "small win 48". In addition, the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 02" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all "3" reels 31 in the "PB = 1" arrangement.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 35," "Small Win 36," "Small Win 47," and "Small Win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this number is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the first left stop occurs during activation of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device," a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left); when the first middle stop occurs during activation of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device," a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle); and when the first right stop occurs during activation of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device," a "Cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line, and when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-B," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line.

The "Small Winning Role B2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "Small Winning Role B2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role B2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "left, right, center (132)," just like when the "Small Winning Role B1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, right, middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, middle, right (123)" push order when the "small win B2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 13" or "small win 14" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of coins being prioritized.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 37" or "small win 38" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

When the "small win B2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, center (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, center, left (321)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, center (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 57" or "small win 58" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, center (312)" push order.

The "Small Win B2 Condition Device" replaces "Small Win 11" and "Small Win 12" of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 13" and "Small Win 14," replaces "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 37" and "Small Win 38," and replaces "Small Win 47" and "Small Win 48" of the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 57" and "Small Win 58." Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Win B2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated.

The "Small Winning Role C1 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "Small Winning Role C1 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role C1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center left right (213)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row due to the number of coins being prioritized; when the left second stop occurs, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row; and when the right third stop occurs, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" to be displayed stopped on the active line when "PB = 1" occurs.

In this way, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "Small Win C1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line, based on the number of medals being prioritized. Note that, as shown in Figure 19 (3), which will be described later, when "Small Win 03" is won, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the middle line (active line).

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle row (active line). As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "replay," "bell," and "watermelon" on the left reel 31 are displayed as stopped in the display window 18.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03" is one type, a "bell," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03" is also one type, a "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03" is also one type, a "bell." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops and displays when the push order is correct when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and display on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" or "Small Win 16" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/2 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, at the first center stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row, and then at the second right stop, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row, based on the number of wins, to enable either a "small win 15" or a "small win 16." Then, at the third left stop, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is only located at number "5." Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "1" through "5" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 is only located on number "0," unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "16" through "19" or "0" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left row is 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle left row is 1/2, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" or "Small Win 16" being displayed stopped on an active line is 1/2.

In this way, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, making it possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" or "Small Win 16" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the first center button stops, but incorrect when the second right button stops, a "watermelon" that is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 03" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line. This makes it possible to prevent the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and to prevent the "bell" on the right reel 31 from stopping and displaying on the active line, thereby preventing "small win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 4, the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 15" and "Small Win 16" is one type, a "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 15" and "Small Win 16" is one type, a "watermelon." In this way, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, by limiting the type of symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the push order is correct when the center first stops but incorrect when the right second stops, the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Center, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, based on number priority; when the second middle stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row; and when the third right stop occurs, a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at number "9." Therefore, unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "5" through "9" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 is only positioned at number "4," unless the center stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "4" on the center reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle-middle row). Therefore, the probability of the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle-middle row is 1/4.

Furthermore, since the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 is only located at number "8," unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "4" through "8" on the right reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle right row is 1/4.

From the above, the probability of having a "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is "1/2," and the probability of having a "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right-middle row is "1/4," so the probability of having a symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 63" or "minor win 64" stop and display on an active line is "1/8."

In this way, when the left reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first left button stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is the "PB=1" symbol on the left reel 31, will be displayed stopped on the active line. This prevents the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being displayed stopped on the active line, preventing "minor win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Red 7." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 14, which will be described later, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority; when the second left stop occurs, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the third middle stop occurs, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 is positioned only at number 10. Therefore, unless the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "6" through "10" on the left reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed as a stopped symbol on the middle left row is 1/4.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is 1/4, and the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the left-middle row is 1/4, and the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 being stopped and displayed in the middle-middle row is 1/2, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 51" or "small win 52" being stopped and displayed on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time while the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, quantity priority is given, so that it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the first right reel stops, a "cherry" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "minor win 03" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31. This prevents the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the right reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "minor win 03" from being won.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 5, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 51" and "Small Win 52" is one type, "black BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 51" and "Small Win 52" is one type, "cherry." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Middle, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 51" or "Small Win 52" (both pay out one coin) on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Left, Middle (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 14 below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated are those corresponding to "Small Win 03," "Small Win 15," "Small Win 16," "Small Win 51," "Small Win 52," "Small Win 63," or "Small Win 64." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 15" and "Small Win 16" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 51," "Small Win 52," "Small Win 63," and "Small Win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left), when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the first middle stop occurs, a "bell" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle), and when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed as stopped on the active line, and when the "small role C1 condition device" is activated "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed as stopped on the active line.

The "Small Winning Role C2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6, and when the "Small Winning Role C2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 6 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role C2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center left right (213)," just like when the "Small Winning Role C1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order when the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 17" or "small win 18" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of coins being prioritized.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (132)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 65" or "small win 66" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order.

When the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, center, left (321)" and the "small win C2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 55" or "small win 56" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small Win C2 Condition Device" replaces "Small Win 15" and "Small Win 16" of the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 17" and "Small Win 18," replaces "Small Win 51" and "Small Win 52" of the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 55" and "Small Win 56," and replaces "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" of the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 65" and "Small Win 66." Furthermore, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Win C2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

The "Small Winning Role D1 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "Small Winning Role D1 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role D1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center right left (231)," and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 04" (payout of 10 coins) on the active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins being given priority.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, the "Bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, based on the number of coins being prioritized; when the right second stop occurs, the "Replay" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row, and when the left third stop occurs, the "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" to be displayed stopped on the active line when "PB = 1" occurs.

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the center reel 31 is stopped first and the right reel 31 is stopped second, and the number of medals is prioritized, so the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out corresponding to the "small win D1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line. As shown in Figure 20 (1), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" is displayed stopped on the active line, "bell"-"bell"-"bell" is displayed stopped on the line sloping to the right (inactive line).

Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center reel 31 is stopped first, a "bell" (PB=1) on the center reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line); then, when the right reel 31 is stopped second, a "replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (active line); and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped third, a "watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 stops first, the right reel 31 stops second, and the left reel 31 stops third, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the upper left row. In other words, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 stops first, the right reel 31 stops second, and the left reel 31 stops third, a "bell," "watermelon," and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed as a stopped symbol in the display window 18.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 04" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 04" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 04" is one type, "replay." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops and displays when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and display on an active line when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are stopped and controlled so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both payouts of one coin) is stopped and displayed on the pay line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stops, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the center middle row. Then, when the left second stops, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row, based on the number of symbols, so that either "small win 19" or "small win 20" can be won. Then, when the right third stops, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row.

As shown in Figure 2, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 13. Therefore, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "9" through "13" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4.

Similarly, since the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 is positioned only at number 18, unless the right stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "14" through "18" on the right reel 31 is positioned on an active line, the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 cannot be displayed stopped on the active line (middle right row). Therefore, the probability of the "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the right reel 31 being displayed stopped on the middle right row is 1/2, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 19" or "minor win 20" being displayed stopped on an active line is 1/2.

In this way, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, quantity priority is given, and it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 19" or "small win 20" (both of which pay out 1 coin), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the first center button stops, but incorrect when the second left button stops, a "bell" will be displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31. This prevents the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, preventing "Small Win 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the center reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 19" and "Small Win 20" is only one type, a "bell," and the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 19" and "Small Win 20" is also only one type, a "bell." In this way, when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, if the push order is correct when the center first button stops, but the push order is incorrect when the left second button stops, by limiting the symbol types on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the left reel 31 stops first, a "replay" (PB = 1) is displayed on the left middle row, when the middle reel 31 stops second, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) is displayed on the middle row, and when the right reel 31 stops third, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) is displayed on the right middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle-middle row is 1/4, the probability of the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle-middle row is also 1/4, and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the right-middle row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle-middle row is 1/2, and the probability of the "black BAR" on the right reel 31 stopping and displaying in the right-middle row is 1/4, so the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" stopping and displaying on an active line is 1/8.

Thus, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the first time the left reel 31 is stopped, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both payouts of 1 coin) can be displayed on the pay line, which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed on the pay line, due to the priority of number of coins. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the left reel first stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 04" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed on the pay line. This prevents the "replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being displayed on the pay line, thereby preventing "small win 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 67" and "Small Win 68" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 67" and "Small Win 68" is one type, "Black BAR." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, right, center (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 67" or "small win 68" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order.

When the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right Left Middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 59" or "Small Win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15 below, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, when the right first stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row, based on the number of pieces being given priority; when the left second stop occurs, a "black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row; and when the middle third stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the left-middle row is 1/4, the probability of having the "red 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4, and the probability of having the "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of having the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the left-middle row is 1/4, and the probability of having the "red 7" or "blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/2, so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 59" or "minor win 60" stop and display on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time during operation of the "Small Win D1 Condition Device," the number of medals is prioritized, allowing the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 59" or "Small Win 60" (both of which pay out 1 medal), which pay out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" (payout of 10 medals) is stopped and displayed on the active line. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the right reel first stops, a "cherry" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 04" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the right reel 31, is stopped and displayed on the active line. This prevents the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "replay" on the right reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on the active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 04" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 59" and "Small Win 60" is one type, "black BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 59" and "Small Win 60" is one type, "cherry." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, center, left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, center (312)" push order.

As shown in Figure 15 below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated are those corresponding to "Small Win 04," "Small Win 19," "Small Win 20," "Small Win 59," "Small Win 60," "Small Win 67," or "Small Win 68." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 19" and "Small Win 20" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 59," "Small Win 60," "Small Win 67," and "Small Win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

Furthermore, when the small win D1 condition device is activated and the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle left); when the small win D1 condition device is activated and the first middle stop occurs, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle middle); and when the small win D1 condition device is activated and the first right stop occurs, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the small win D1 condition device is activated while "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line, and when the small win D1 condition device is activated while "inside 1BB-B," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed as stopped on the active line.

The "Small Winning Role D2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "Small Winning Role D2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role D2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "center right left (231)," just as when the "Small Winning Role D1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 04" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, middle (213)" push order when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 21" or "small win 22" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of coins being prioritized.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (132)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 69" or "small win 70" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order.

When the "small win D2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, center, left (321)" and the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 59" or "small win 60" (both of which pay out one coin) is displayed on an active line with a probability of 1 in 8, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)."

The "Small Winning D2 Condition Device" replaces "Small Winning 19" and "Small Winning 20" of the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 21" and "Small Winning 22," replaces "Small Winning 59" and "Small Winning 60" of the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 61" and "Small Winning 62," and replaces "Small Winning 67" and "Small Winning 68" of the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 69" and "Small Winning 70." Furthermore, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Winning D2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Winning D1 Condition Device" is activated.

The "Small Win E1 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column in Figure 7, and when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small wins listed in the winning role column in Figure 7 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "Right Left Center (312)," and any other press order is an incorrect press order.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of pressing "right, left, middle (312)", the reel 31 is stopped and controlled so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the activated line with a probability of "1/1" by priority of the number of coins. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 described later, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed with a priority of the number of coins.
When the left reel 31 stops at the second position, the left reel 31 will have a "watermelon" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and when the left reel 31 stops at the third position, the center reel 31 will have a "bell" (PB=1) stopped and displayed in the middle middle row. This allows the symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 05" with "PB=1" to be stopped and displayed on the active line.

In this way, when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is prioritized, and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out by the "Small Win E1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line. As shown in Figure 20 (2), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is displayed stopped on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the small hill line (invalid line).

Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (valid line), and then, when the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (valid line). As a result, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the right reel 31 stops first, and the left reel 31 stops second, and the "bell," "watermelon," and "cherry/blank" symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, a "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, a "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 05" is one type, a "watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops and displays when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning E1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and display on an active line when the "Small Winning E1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, center, left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 stops first, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) is displayed in the right middle row. Then, when the middle reel 31 stops second, a "replay" (PB = 1) is displayed in the middle middle row on the center reel 31, based on the priority of the number of symbols, so that either "small win 23" or "small win 24" can be won. Then, when the left reel 31 stops third, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) is displayed in the left middle row on the left reel 31.

As mentioned above, the probability of a "red 7" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is 1/4, and the probability of a "blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of a "red 7" or "blue 7" on the left reel 31 stopping and displaying in the middle left row is 1/2, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 23" or "minor win 24" stopping and displaying on an active line is 1/2.

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the center reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is prioritized, and a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" or "small win 24" (both of which pay out one medal) can be displayed on the active line. This symbol combination pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 medals) is displayed on the active line. Furthermore, if the correct push order is selected when the right reel first stops, but the incorrect push order is selected when the center reel second stops, a "replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the center reel 31, is displayed on the active line. This prevents the "replay" on the center reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the center reel 31 from being displayed on the active line, thereby preventing "small win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the right reel 31 symbol that constitutes "Small Win 23" and "Small Win 24" has only one type, "watermelon," and the center reel 31 symbol that constitutes "Small Win 23" and "Small Win 24" has only one type, "replay." In this way, when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, if the push order is correct when the right first button stops, but incorrect when the center second button stops, by limiting the type of symbols on the right reel 31 and center reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated can be reduced.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 71" or "small win 72" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the left first stop occurs, "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, when the middle second stop occurs, "Red 7" or "Blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, "Black BAR" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row, based on quantity priority.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/4, the probability of having the "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4, and the probability of having the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the middle-right row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of having the "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/2, and the probability of having the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the middle-right row is 1/4, so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 71" or "Small Win 72" stop and display on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated and the left reel 31 is stopped first, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 71" or "Small Win 72" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, due to quantity priority. This pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the left reel first stops, a "Replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 05" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on an active line. This prevents the "Replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 71" and "Small Win 72" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 71" and "Small Win 72" is one type, "Black BAR." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first left stop is incorrect in the push order when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 71" or "Small Win 72" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the center middle row, when the left second stop occurs, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, a "red 7" or "blue 7" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on quantity priority.

As described above, the probability of the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is 1/4, and the probability of the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is also 1/4. Furthermore, the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the middle right row is also 1/4, and the probability of the "blue 7" on the right reel 31 being displayed in the middle right row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is 1/2. The probability of a "red 7" being displayed on the right reel 31 in the middle right row is 1/4, and the probability of a "blue 7" being displayed on the right reel 31 in the middle right row is also 1/4, so the probability of a symbol combination corresponding to "minor win 43" or "minor win 46" being displayed on a pay line is 1/8.

In this way, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated and the center reel 31 is stopped for the first time, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, due to quantity priority. This pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 05" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the center reel first stops, a "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on an active line. This symbol is different from the symbol (bell) on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 05" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the center reel 31. This prevents the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the center reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, preventing "small win 05" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbols on the left reel 31 that make up "Small Win 43" and "Small Win 46" are either "Black BAR" or "White BAR," and the symbols on the right reel 31 that make up "Small Win 43" and "Small Win 46" are either "Red 7" or "Blue 7," but the symbol on the middle reel 31 that makes up "Small Win 43" and "Small Win 46" is only one type, "Watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on the middle reel 31 that makes up the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated to one type, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, even when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle right left (231)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 43" or "small win 46" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the priority of the number, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order of "middle left right (213)."

As shown in Figure 15 below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated are those corresponding to "Small Win 05," "Small Win 23," "Small Win 24," "Small Win 43," "Small Win 46," "Small Win 71," or "Small Win 72." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 23" and "Small Win 24" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 43," "Small Win 46," "Small Win 71," and "Small Win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the pressing order is correct, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line when all three reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line when the first and second stops are activated, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line when the third stop is activated. Furthermore, when the "small win E1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line when the first stop is activated, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line when the second and third stops are activated.

Furthermore, when the first left stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role E1 Condition Device," the left reel 31 will display a "Replay" (PB = 1) stopped on the active line (middle left); when the first middle stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role E1 Condition Device," the middle reel 31 will display a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) stopped on the active line (middle middle); and when the first right stop occurs during activation of the "Small Role E1 Condition Device," the right reel 31 will display a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) stopped on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the "Small Role E1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and when the "Small Role E1 Condition Device" is activated while "inside 1BB-B," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

The "Small Win E2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7 are won in duplicate. When the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct press order is "Right Left Center (312)," just like when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other press order is considered an incorrect press order.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 05" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, center, left (321)" and the "small win E2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" or "small win 26" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of coins being prioritized.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (132)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 77" or "small win 78" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order.

When the "small win E2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 44" or "small win 45" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

The "Small Win E2 Condition Device" replaces the "Small Win 23" and "Small Win 24" of the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 25" and "Small Win 26," replaces the "Small Win 43" and "Small Win 46" of the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 44" and "Small Win 45," and replaces the "Small Win 71" and "Small Win 72" of the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" with "Small Win 77" and "Small Win 78." Furthermore, the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of the reel 31 when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated.

The "Small Winning Role F1 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column in Figure 7, and when the "Small Winning Role F1 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column in Figure 7 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role F1 Condition Device" is activated, the correct button press order is "Right, Center, Left (321)," and any other button press order is an incorrect button press order.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Right, Center, Left (321)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 06" (payout of 10 coins) on an active line with a 1/1 probability (always), based on the number of coins. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right reel stops first, a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle right row, when the middle reel stops second, a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the middle reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle middle row, and when the left reel stops third, a "Watermelon" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row. This allows a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" to be stopped and displayed on an active line with "PB = 1."

In this way, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, the right reel 31 is stopped first, the center reel 31 is stopped second, and the left reel 31 is stopped third. By prioritizing the number of medals, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals that can be paid out by the "Small Win F1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line. As shown in Figure 20 (3), which will be described later, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on the active line, "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" is displayed stopped on the lower line (inactive line).

Furthermore, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time, a "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle right row (active line); when the middle reel 31 is stopped for the second time, a "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle middle row (active line); and when the left reel 31 is stopped for the third time, a "Watermelon" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the middle left row (active line).

As a result, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 stops first, the middle reel 31 stops second, and the left reel 31 stops third, a "bell" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the lower left row, a "watermelon" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the middle left row, and a "cherry" or "blank" on the left reel 31 is displayed as a stopped symbol in the upper left row. In other words, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 stops first, the middle reel 31 stops second, and the left reel 31 stops third, a "bell," "watermelon," and "cherry/blank" on the left reel 31 are displayed as a stopped symbol in the display window 18.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "watermelon," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Winning 06" is one type, "watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops and displays when the push order is correct when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can stop and display on an active line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "right, left, middle (312)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both payouts of one coin) on an active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the priority of the number of symbols. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 stops first, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) is displayed in the right middle row on the right reel 31, and when the left reel stops second, a "bell" (PB = 1) is displayed in the left middle row on the left reel 31, based on the priority of the number of symbols, to enable the winning of either "small win 27" or "small win 28." Then, when the middle reel 31 stops third, a "red 7" or a "blue 7" (both "PB ≠ 1") is displayed in the middle middle row on the center reel 31.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/4, and the probability of having the "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of having the "Red 7" or "Blue 7" on the middle reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/2, so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 27" or "Small Win 28" stop and display on an active line is 1/2.

Thus, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the right reel 31 is stopped first and the left reel 31 is stopped second, the number of medals is prioritized, and a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 27" or "small win 28" (both payouts of 1 medal) can be displayed on the pay line, which pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 medals) is displayed on the pay line. Furthermore, if the push order is correct when the right reel first stops but incorrect when the left reel second stops, a "bell" symbol, which is different from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 06" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is displayed on the pay line. This prevents the "bell" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being displayed on the pay line, thereby preventing "small win 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the right reel 31 symbol that constitutes "Small Win 27" and "Small Win 28" is a single type, "watermelon," and the left reel 31 symbol that constitutes "Small Win 27" and "Small Win 28" is a single type, "bell." In this way, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, if the push order is correct when the right first button stops, but incorrect when the left second button stops, by limiting the type of symbols on the right reel 31 and left reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed as stopped when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed as stopped on an active line.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Center, Right (123)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 75" or "Small Win 76" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on the number of symbols.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 15, which will be described later, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the left middle row, based on number priority; when the second middle stop occurs, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row; and when the third right stop occurs, a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the right middle row.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "black BAR" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/4, the probability of having the "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is also 1/4, and the probability of having the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right-middle row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of having the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the center reel 31 stop and display in the middle-middle row is 1/2, and the probability of having the "red 7" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the right-middle row is 1/4, so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 75" or "small win 76" stop and display on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated and the left reel 31 is stopped first, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 75" or "Small Win 76" (both of which pay out 1 coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, due to quantity priority. This pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the left reel first stops, a "Replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 06" and is also the symbol for "PB=1" on the left reel 31, is stopped and displayed on an active line. This prevents the "Replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "Watermelon" on the left reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 75" and "Small Win 76" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 75" and "Small Win 76" is one type, "Red 7." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first left button stops and the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 75" or "Small Win 76" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order.

When the "small win F1 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (described below), when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, when the center first stop occurs, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the center middle row, when the left second stop occurs, a "red 7" (PB ≠ 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the left middle row, and when the right third stop occurs, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both PB ≠ 1) on the right reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the right middle row, based on quantity priority.

As mentioned above, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the middle left row is 1/4, the probability of having the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the middle right row is also 1/4, and the probability of having the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the middle right row is also 1/4. From the above, the probability of having the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 stop and display in the middle left row is 1/4, and the probability of having the "Black BAR" or "White BAR" on the right reel 31 stop and display in the middle right row is 1/2, so the probability of having the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 39" or "Small Win 40" stop and display on an active line is 1/8.

In this way, when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated and the center reel 31 is stopped for the first time, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 39" or "Small Win 40" (both of which pay out one coin) can be stopped and displayed on an active line, due to quantity priority. This pays out fewer medals than when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" (pays out 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on an active line. Furthermore, if the push order is incorrect when the center reel first stops, a "watermelon" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (replay) on the center reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 06" and is the symbol for "PB=1" on the center reel 31, is stopped and displayed on an active line. This prevents the "watermelon" on the center reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "replay" on the center reel 31 from being stopped and displayed on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 06" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 39" and "Small Win 40" is one type, "Red 7," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 39" and "Small Win 40" is one type, "Watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated.

When the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated, even if the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 39" or "small win 40" (both pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on number priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

As shown in Figure 15 below, the symbol combinations that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the "Small Win F1 Condition Device" is activated are those corresponding to "Small Win 06," "Small Win 27," "Small Win 28," "Small Win 39," "Small Win 40," "Small Win 75," or "Small Win 76." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 27" and "Small Win 28" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 39," "Small Win 40," "Small Win 75," and "Small Win 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this number is greater than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win F1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

Note that when the small win F1 condition device is activated and the first left stop occurs, the left reel 31 will have a "replay" (PB = 1) displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left); when the small win F1 condition device is activated and the first middle stop occurs, the middle reel 31 will have a "watermelon" (PB = 1) displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle middle); and when the small win F1 condition device is activated and the first right stop occurs, the right reel 31 will have a "watermelon" (PB = 1) displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle right). For this reason, when the small win F1 condition device is activated while "inside 1BB-A," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line, and when the small win F1 condition device is activated while "inside 1BB-B," the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line.

The "Small Winning Role F2 Condition Device" includes the seven types of winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7, and when the "Small Winning Role F2 Condition Device" is activated, the seven types of small winning roles listed in the winning role column of Figure 7 are overlappingly won. When the "Small Winning Role F2 Condition Device" is activated, the correct pressing order is "Right, Center, Left (321)," just like when the "Small Winning Role F1 Condition Device" is activated, and any other pressing order is an incorrect pressing order.

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, center, left (321)," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 06" (payout of 10 coins) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the pressing order "right, left, center (312)" and the "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 29" or "small win 30" (both payout of 1 coin) is (always) stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/2, based on the number of coins being prioritized.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)" during operation of the "small win F2 condition device," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (each of which pays out one coin) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of "1/8" based on the number of pieces. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (132)" during operation of the "small win F2 condition device," the reels 31 are controlled to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 73" or "small win 74" (each of which pays out one coin) is stopped and displayed on an active line with a probability of "1/8" based on the number of pieces, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the push order of "left, center, right (123)."

When the "small win F2 condition device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority. When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, right, left (231)" push order and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order, the reels 31 are controlled to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 41" or "small win 42" (both of which pay out one coin) on an active line with a 1/8 probability, based on quantity priority, just as when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle, left, right (213)" push order.

The "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" replaces "Small Winning 27" and "Small Winning 28" of the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 29" and "Small Winning 30," replaces "Small Winning 39" and "Small Winning 40" of the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 41" and "Small Winning 42," and replaces "Small Winning 75" and "Small Winning 76" of the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" with "Small Winning 73" and "Small Winning 74." Furthermore, the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is activated is the same as the stopping control of reel 31 when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated.

As shown in Figure 8, the "small win G condition device" includes "small win 79" and "small win 80" as winning combinations, and when the "small win G condition device" is activated, "small win 79" and "small win 80" are double-wins. When the "small win G condition device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop so that the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" (both "PB ≠ 1") is displayed stopped on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, a "black BAR" or "white BAR" (both "PB ≠ 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed in the middle left row (active line); when the reel stops on the center row, a "cherry" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed in the middle middle row (active line); and when the reel stops on the right row, a "watermelon" (PB = 1) on the right reel 31 is displayed in the middle right row (active line). As mentioned above, the probability of a "black BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is 1/4, and the probability of a "white BAR" on the left reel 31 being displayed in the middle left row is also 1/4.

Therefore, if the timing of operation of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability of the "black BAR" or "white BAR" on the left reel 31 stopping to appear in the middle left row is 1/2, and therefore the probability of the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 79" or "small win 80" stopping to appear on a winning line is 1/2. However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 appears in the display window 18 (aiming for the "black BAR"), the "black BAR" (number 10) or "white BAR" (number 15) on the left reel 31 can be stopped to appear in the middle left row (a winning line). In this case, since the "cherry" on the center reel 31 and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, it is possible to always win "small win 79" or "small win 80." In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 79" or "Small Win 80" is displayed stopped on an active line, "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" will be displayed stopped on the line sloping to the right (inactive line).

As shown in Figure 8, the "Small Win H Condition Device" includes "Small Win 81" as a winning combination, and when the "Small Win H Condition Device" is activated, the "Small Win 81" is won. When the "Small Win H Condition Device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop so that the symbol combination (PB≠1) corresponding to "Small Win 81" is displayed on the activated line, regardless of the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, a "Cherry" (PB≠1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line), when the reel stops in the middle row, a "Cherry" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel stops on the right, a "Cherry" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (active line). As shown in Figure 2, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is located in three positions: "4", "9", and "14". Therefore, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "0" through "14" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 can be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left). However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols "15" through "19" on the left reel 31 is located on an active line, the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 cannot be displayed as a stopped symbol on the active line (middle left).

Therefore, if the timing of operation of the left stop switch 42 is random, the probability of having a "Cherry" on the left reel 31 stop on the active line (middle left) is 3/4, and therefore the probability of having a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 81" stop on the active line is 3/4. However, if the left stop switch 42 is operated (aiming for the "Black BAR") when the "Black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 appears in the display window 18, it is possible to have a "Cherry" number 9 or 14 on the left reel 31 stop on the active line (middle left). In this case, since the "Cherry" on the center reel 31 and the right reel 31 are both in the "PB=1" configuration, it is possible to always win a "Small Win 81." When a "Small Win 81" wins, a "Cherry"-"Cherry"-"Cherry" sequence is displayed on the active line (active line).

As shown in Figure 8, the "Small Win I Condition Device" includes "Small Win 82" as a winning combination, and when the "Small Win I Condition Device" is activated, the "Small Win 82" is won. When the "Small Win I Condition Device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop and display the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 82" on the activated line with a probability of 1/1 (always), regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, the left reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB=1) in the middle left row (active line), when the reel stops on the center row, the middle reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB=1) in the middle middle row (active line), and when the reel stops on the right, the right reel 31 displays a "watermelon" (PB=1) in the middle right row (active line). When a "small win 82" is won, a "watermelon"-"watermelon"-"watermelon" sequence is displayed on the middle row (active line).

The "1-Coin Role ALL Condition Device" includes all 1-coin roles ("Small Role 07" to "Small Role 78") as winning roles, and when the "1-Coin Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, all 1-coin roles are overlappingly won. When the "1-Coin Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop and display a symbol combination corresponding to one of "Small Role 07" to "Small Role 78" on the pay line, depending on the order and timing of pressing the stop switch 42. When the "1-Coin Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, any of "Small Role 07" to "Small Role 78" (all of which "pay out 1 coin") will win, and there will be no non-winning combinations.

The "Small Role ALL Condition Device" includes all small roles ("Small Role 01" to "Small Role 82") as winning roles, and when the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, all small roles are overlappingly won. When the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop so that a symbol combination corresponding to one of "Small Role 01" to "Small Role 06" is displayed on the pay line, depending on the order and timing of pressing the stop switch 42. When the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is activated, one of "Small Role 01" to "Small Role 06" (all of which "pay out 10 coins") will win, and there will be no non-winning combinations.

As shown in Figure 8, the "replay condition device" has only one type: a small win and the replay condition device number "18." As shown in Figure 8, the "replay condition device" includes "replay" as a winning role, and when the "replay condition device" is activated, a "replay" win occurs. When the "replay condition device" is activated, it controls the reels 31 to stop so that the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "replay" is (always) displayed on the activated line with a probability of 1/1, regardless of the order in which the stop switches 42 are pressed.

Specifically, when the reel stops on the left, "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (active line); when the reel stops in the middle row, "Replay" (PB=1) on the middle reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle middle row (active line); and when the reel stops on the right, "Replay" (PB=1) on the right reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle right row (active line). When a symbol combination corresponding to "Replay" is displayed stopped in the active line, a medal is automatically inserted and a replay becomes possible. When a "Replay" wins, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" are displayed stopped in the middle row (active line).

Figure 9 shows a reel condition device. As shown in Figure 9, in this embodiment, there are two types of reel condition devices: a "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to reel condition device number "1", and a "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to reel condition device number "2". As shown in Figure 10, the "1BB-A condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted into the non-internal area, and is not eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted into the non-internal area. In contrast, the "1BB-B condition device" is only eligible for the lottery when three medals are inserted into the non-internal area, and is not eligible for the lottery when two medals are inserted into the non-internal area.

Furthermore, when two medals are inserted outside the internal area and the winning number "19" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, role condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "19," and the "1BB-A condition device" corresponding to role condition device number "1" is activated. On the other hand, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area and the winning number "20" is drawn by the role drawing means 61, role condition device number "2" is generated from this winning number "20," and the "1BB-B condition device" corresponding to role condition device number "2" is activated.

Also, as shown in Figure 9, the winning combination for the "1BB-A Condition Device" is set to "1BB-A," and when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on an active line. If the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is displayed stopped on an active line when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, a "1BB-A win" occurs, and no medals are paid out in this game, but the game will transition to "1BB-A game" from the next game. On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" is not displayed stopped on an active line when the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated, the game will transition to "1BB-A internal" from the next game.

Note that if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when two medals are inserted "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the winning combination is not not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when "inside 1BB-A", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-A", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, during "1BB-A play," "RB play" is continuously executed. Note that in this embodiment, no symbol combination corresponding to "RB" is set, and during "1BB-A play," "RB play" is continuously executed without the symbol combination corresponding to "RB" being displayed. Furthermore, during "RB play," only two types of "1-piece role ALL condition device" and "small role ALL condition device" are subject to lottery by the role selection means 61, and either the "1-piece role ALL condition device" or the "small role ALL condition device" is activated for each play. For this reason, during "RB play," i.e., during "1BB-A play," the probability of winning a small role is higher than during non-internal play and "1BB-A internal play."

Furthermore, during "RB play," the specified number (the number of medals bet that can start play) reaches "3," and the "1-coin role ALL condition device" is activated with a probability of "60535/65536," paying out "1" medal. Therefore, during "RB play," that is, during "1BB-A play," the player's medals are decreasing. Furthermore, "RB play" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the end conditions for "1BB-A play" are met. In other words, the end conditions for "RB play" are set to "2" games played, "2" wins are made, or the end conditions for "1BB-A play" are met.

Furthermore, "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210." In other words, the end condition for "1BB-A game" is set to be when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210." When "RB game" ends, if the end condition for "1BB-A game" is not met, "RB game" is executed again. In this way, "RB game" is executed continuously during "1BB-A game." When "RB game" ends, if the end condition for "1BB-A game" is met, "1BB-A game" ends and the game transitions to non-internal mode. Furthermore, if the conditions for ending "1BB-A game" are met during "RB game," "RB game" will end, "1BB-A game" will end, and the game will transition to non-internal mode.

Also, as shown in Figure 9, the winning combination for the "1BB-B condition device" is set to "1BB-B," and when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on an active line. If the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is displayed stopped on an active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, a "1BB-B win" occurs, and no medals are paid out in this game, but the game will transition to "1BB-B game" from the next game. On the other hand, if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" is not displayed stopped on an active line when the "1BB-B condition device" is activated, the game will transition to "1BB-B internal" from the next game.

Note that if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when three medals are inserted "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, the winning combination is not not won by the winning combination selection means 61 when "inside 1BB-B", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line.

Furthermore, during "1BB-B game," "RB game" is executed continuously, just like during "1BB-A game." Furthermore, "1BB-B game," like "1BB-A game," continues until the cumulative number of medals earned (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals earned exceeds "210." When "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are not met, "RB game" is executed again. Furthermore, when "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met, "1BB-B game" ends and the game transitions to a non-internal state. Furthermore, when the termination conditions for "1BB-B game" are met during "RB game," "RB game" ends, "1BB-B game" ends, and the game transitions to a non-internal state.

Figure 10 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers placed for each game state in this embodiment. In Figure 10, "2" indicates "when two medals are inserted," and "3" indicates "when three medals are inserted." Also, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB-A" and "inside 1BB-B," and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB-A play" and "in 1BB-B play."

The winning probability for each winning number is calculated by dividing the number of places shown in Figure 10 by "65536". For example, in Figure 10, the number of places for winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500", so the winning probability for winning number "1" when two medals are inserted outside the internal area is "2500/65536". Also, for example, if winning number "1" is selected in the lottery by the winning lottery means 61, a small win and replay condition device number "1" is generated from this winning number "1", and the "small win A1 condition device" corresponding to small win and replay condition device number "1" is activated.

As shown in Figure 10, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device" are subject to lottery when not in the internal state and when in the internal state (when in the 1BB-A internal state, when in the 1BB-B internal state), but are not subject to lottery when in the 1BB state (when in the 1BB-A game, when in the 1BB-B game). Furthermore, the "1-piece Role ALL Condition Device" is subject to lottery in all game states. Furthermore, unlike the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is subject to lottery only when in the 1BB state (when in the 1BB-A game, when in the 1BB-B game), and is not subject to lottery when not in the internal state or when in the internal state (when in the 1BB-A internal state, when in the 1BB-B internal state).

Furthermore, like the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Replay Condition Device" is eligible for the lottery when it is not inside the internal state and when it is inside the internal state (when it is inside 1BB-A, when it is inside 1BB-B), but is not eligible for the lottery when it is inside 1BB (when it is playing 1BB-A, when it is playing 1BB-B). Furthermore, the "1BB-A Condition Device" is eligible for the lottery only when two medals are inserted when it is not inside the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery in any other game state. In contrast, the "1BB-B Condition Device" is eligible for the lottery only when three medals are inserted when it is not inside the internal state, and is not eligible for the lottery in any other game state.

In other words, when two medals are inserted into a non-internal state, the "1BB-A condition device" is the subject of the lottery, but the "1BB-B condition device" is not. In contrast, when three medals are inserted into a non-internal state, the "1BB-B condition device" is the subject of the lottery, but the "1BB-A condition device" is not the subject of the lottery. Also, in this embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" will be drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61, and there will be no non-winning numbers.

Next, we will explain the transition of game states in this embodiment. Figure 11 is a diagram showing the transition of game states in this embodiment, and Figure 12 is a diagram showing the conditions for changing game states in this embodiment. In Figure 12, "∞" (infinite) in the number of plays column means that no upper limit on the number of plays is set for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition listed in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 determines whether the game state transition conditions are met for each game when all reels 31 have stopped, and controls the game state to transition if it determines that the game state transition conditions are met. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, the game state transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, the game state transitions to non-internal mode. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is then turned on in this state, the game state transitions to setting change mode. At this time, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and the game state transitions to non-internal mode.

The non-internal state is maintained until the "1BB-A Condition Device" or "1BB-B Condition Device" is activated. As mentioned above, when two medals are inserted while the non-internal state, the "1BB-A Condition Device" becomes the subject of the lottery, and when three medals are inserted while the non-internal state, the "1BB-B Condition Device" becomes the subject of the lottery. Then, when two medals are inserted while the non-internal state, the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated (1BB-A win), and if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" stops and displays on an active line (1BB-A win), the game transitions to "1BB-A game" (1BB-A activated). On the other hand, if the "1BB-A Condition Device" is activated when two medals are inserted while the non-internal state, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" does not stop and display on an active line, the game transitions to "1BB-A internal state."

Furthermore, when two medals are inserted in the "1BB-A inside" mode, if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, when three medals are inserted, even if the winning combination is not won by the role selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line. However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, since the role selection means 61 will not result in a winning combination when "1BB-A inside" mode, once the mode transitions to "1BB-A inside", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and the mode will continue to be "1BB-A inside".

Furthermore, when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, the "1BB-B condition device" is activated (1BB-B win), and if the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" stops and displays on an active line (1BB-B win), the game will transition to "1BB-B game" (1BB-B activated). On the other hand, if the "1BB-B condition device" is activated when three medals are inserted outside the internal area, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" does not stop and display on an active line, the game will transition to "1BB-B internal area."

Furthermore, in the "inside 1BB-B" state, if three medals are inserted and the winning combination is not selected by the role selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, if two medals are inserted and the winning combination is not selected by the role selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line. However, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the symbol combination will not be displayed stopped on the active line by the role selection means 61 when "inside 1BB-B", so once the state transitions to "inside 1BB-B", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-B" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and the state will continue to be "inside 1BB-B".

Furthermore, during "1BB-A game," "RB game" is played continuously. Furthermore, "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the conditions for ending "1BB-A game" are met. Furthermore, "1BB-A game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."

Then, when "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are not met, "RB game" will be executed again. Also, when "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are met, "1BB-A game" will end and the game will transition to a non-internal state. Furthermore, when the termination conditions for "1BB-A game" are met during "RB game," "RB game" will end, "1BB-A game" will end, and the game will transition to a non-internal state.

Furthermore, during "1BB-B game," "RB game" is executed continuously, just like during "1BB-A game." Furthermore, "1BB-B game," like "1BB-A game," continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210," and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210."

Then, when the "RB game" has ended, if the end conditions of the "1BB-B game" have not been met, the "RB game" is executed again. Also, when the "RB game" has ended, if the end conditions of the "1BB-B game" have been met, the "1BB-B game" is ended and the game moves to a non-internal state. Furthermore, when the end conditions of the "1BB-B game" have been met during the "RB game," the "RB game" is ended, and the "1BB-B game" is ended and the game moves to a non-internal state.

Next, using Figures 13 to 20, we will explain the features of the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are activated in this embodiment, and the features of the stop control of the reel 31 when the "small role A1 condition device" to "small role F2 condition device" are activated. Figure 13 (1) is a diagram showing the symbols on the left reel 31 that can be displayed in the display window 18 when the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the "small role C1 condition device" is activated and the "small role C2 condition device" is activated and the "small role A1 condition device" is activated and the "small role B1 condition device" is activated and the "small role C2 condition device" is activated and the "small role C1 ... Figure 14 shows the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role C2 Condition Device" are activated, and Figure 15 shows the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "Small Role D1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated.

Figure 16 shows symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated, where only the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB=1" position. Figure 17 shows symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated, where only the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB=1" position. Figure 18 shows symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated, where only the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB=1" position.

Figure 19 (1) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 01" is won, Figure 19 (2) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 02" is won, and Figure 19 (3) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 03" is won. Figure 20 (1) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 04" is won, Figure 20 (2) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 05" is won, and Figure 20 (3) is a diagram showing the winning combinations when "Small Win 06" is won.

As shown in Figure 14, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, the number of coins is prioritized, and the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 01" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, "Replay" (PB=1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row (effective line) to win "Small Win 01." As a result, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in FIG. 13(1), the "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row. In other words, the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.

As shown in Figure 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, right, middle (132)" push order when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 02" (payout of 10 coins) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins. Also, when the left reel stops first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (active line) to win "small win 02."

As a result, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in Figure 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11), and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18.

As shown in Figure 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center left right (213)" press sequence during operation of the "small win C1 condition device," a symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 03" (payout of 10 coins) is displayed stopped on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of coins being prioritized. Furthermore, when the center first stops during operation of the "small win C1 condition device," a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped on the center-middle row (active line) to win "small win 03." Then, when the left second stops, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the left-middle row (active line) to win "small win 03."

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second reel stops after the center first reel stops, as shown in Figure 13 (2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed as stopped in the upper left row. In other words, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped in the display window 18. Also, "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 will not be displayed as stopped in the display window 18.

As shown in Figure 14, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64" (both pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols. Furthermore, when the left reel stops first when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, making it possible to win "small win 63" or "small win 64."

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown in Figure 13 (1), the "black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row. In other words, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11), and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11), and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbols on the left reel 31 displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the first left stop occurs.

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second button stops after the middle first button stops, as shown in Figure 13 (2), "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, but the "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 when the left first button stops (when the push order is incorrect) and when the left second button stops after the middle first button stops (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), a "Replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03" and is the "PB=1" symbol on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line. This prevents the "Replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from being displayed stopped on the active line, preventing "Small Win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Red 7." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is 1/4, the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is also 1/4, and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is also 1/4. This reduces the probability of winning a single coin when the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to 1/8, which in turn reduces the payout rate per game, thereby improving design flexibility.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the "left, center, right" order when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, that is, when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10" medals, the maximum number of medals payout corresponding to the "small win A1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line. Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is one type, "replay," the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is one type, "bell," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is one type, "watermelon."

Furthermore, the "replay" on the left reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is in the "PB=1" configuration, the "bell" on the middle reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is also in the "PB=1" configuration, and the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 01" is also in the "PB=1" configuration. In this way, by configuring the symbols on each reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that stops when the push order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated in the "PB=1" configuration, and by limiting the type of symbol on each reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination that stops when the push order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated to one type each, the number of symbol combinations that can stop on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated can be reduced.

The "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is similar to the "Small Win A1 Condition Device." As shown in FIG. 14, when the stop switches 42 are operated in the "left, center, right" order during operation of the "Small Win A2 Condition Device," i.e., when the left reel 31 is stopped first, the middle reel 31 is stopped second, and the right reel 31 is stopped third, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "Small Win A2 Condition Device," is displayed as a stopped symbol on an active line. As described above, the symbols on each reel 31 that make up "Small Win 01" are arranged in a "PB=1" configuration, and each reel 31 that makes up "Small Win 01" has only one type of symbol. This reduces the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed as a stopped symbol on an active line when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated.

As described above, the straight line passing through the "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right" is the "upper line," the straight line passing through the "middle left" - "middle middle" - "middle right" is the "middle line," and the straight line passing through the "lower left" - "lower middle" - "lower right" is the "lower line." Furthermore, the straight line passing through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" is the "downward-right line," the straight line passing through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "upper right" is the "upward-right line," and the small mountain-shaped line passing through the "lower left" - "middle middle" - "lower right" is the "small mountain line." In this embodiment, only the "middle line" is the "valid line," and the others are "invalid lines."

As shown in Figure 19 (1), when the symbol combination ("replay" - "bell" - "watermelon") corresponding to "minor win 01" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "minor win 01" is won), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are displayed stopped on the "downward-right line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left" - "middle middle" - "lower right". Also, as shown in Figure 19 (2), when the symbol combination ("replay" - "cherry" - "replay") corresponding to "minor win 02" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "minor win 02" is won), "bell" - "bell" - "bell" are displayed stopped on the "upper line" (invalid line) passing through the "upper left" - "upper middle" - "upper right".

Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" is "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell", and when "Small Win 03" is won, as shown in Figure 19 (3), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "middle line" (valid line). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (1), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay") corresponding to "Small Win 04" is displayed stopped on the valid line (when "Small Win 04" is won), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed stopped on the "right-sloping line" (invalid line) passing through the "bottom left"-"middle middle"-"top right"

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Bell" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small Win 05" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 05" is won), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Mid-hill Line" (invalid line) passing through the "Lower Left" - "Middle-middle" - "Lower Right". Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (3), when the symbol combination ("Watermelon" - "Replay" - "Watermelon") corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 06" is won), "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed stopped on the "Lower Line" (invalid line) passing through the "Lower Left" - "Lower Middle" - "Lower Right".

Also, as shown in Figure 20 (1), when a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 04" is won), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left). Furthermore, as shown in Figure 20 (2), when a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" is displayed stopped on an active line (when "Small Win 05" is won), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the display window 18 (upper left).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20 (3), when a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" is displayed on a payline (when "Small Win 06" wins), "Cherry" on the left reel 31 may also be displayed in the display window 18 (upper left row). In this embodiment, the symbol combination that can be displayed on a payline when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 is not a winning symbol combination, regardless of the symbols displayed on the payline on the center reel 31 and right reel 31. Also, in this embodiment, when "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed on a payline, it does not have a winning symbol combination, regardless of the symbols displayed on the payline on the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In other words, when a specific symbol on the left reel 31 is displayed on a payline, it does not have a so-called single-drum winning symbol, which wins a prize regardless of the symbols displayed on the payline on the center reel 31 and right reel 31.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated, there is no case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the display window 18 when the first left button is stopped, but there is a case where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped in the display window 18 when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated and the pressing order is correct.

Here, in this embodiment, an AT lottery is executed in a game in which the winning number "13" or "14" is drawn by the winning combination drawing means 61. Furthermore, in a game in which the winning number "13" is drawn, the "small combination G condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small combination 79" or "small combination 80" ("cherry" aligns on the upward-sloping line (invalid line)), and in a game in which the winning number "14" is drawn, the "small combination H condition device" is activated, making it possible to win "small combination 81" ("cherry" aligns on the middle line (valid line)). Therefore, when "cherry" aligns on the upward-sloping line (invalid line) or the middle line (valid line), the player hopes to win the AT lottery.

Furthermore, in conventional slot machines 10, it is known that when a cherry-related role and a special role (bonus) are simultaneously won (double win) in the role lottery, or when a cherry-related role is won, an AT lottery is held, and when a cherry-related role is won, if a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 (upper left, middle left, or lower left) in a game in which a cherry-related role is won, the cherry-related role will win regardless of the stopped display symbols on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In such slot machines 10, when a "cherry" on the left reel 31 stops and appears in the display window 18 and a cherry-related role wins, the player hopes to win a special role or the AT lottery.

However, in this embodiment, even if the push order is correct when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated, there are cases where the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 stops within the display window 18. In this case, the left reel 31 stops on the second or third position, and at that point, two or three "Bells" are aligned on the invalid line. This allows the player to recognize that a bell-related role has been won, and prevents excessive expectations of winning the AT lottery, even if the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 stops within the display window 18.

As mentioned above, in the example shown in Figure 20(1), the "Cherry" on the left reel 31 is displayed in the display window 18 (upper left), but the symbol combination displayed on the pay line at this time is the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" is "Watermelon"-"Bell"-"Replay," which is not a winning symbol combination regardless of the symbols displayed on the pay lines of the center reel 31 and right reel 31. In other words, the symbol combination shown in Figure 20(1) is not a winning symbol combination related to a cherry, nor is it a symbol combination that results in a so-called single-drum win. The symbol combinations shown in Figures 20(2) and (3) are the same as those shown in Figure 20(1).

Also, as shown in Figure 14, the symbol combinations that can be displayed as stopped on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated are those corresponding to "Small Win 01," "Small Win 07," "Small Win 08," "Small Win 31," "Small Win 32," "Small Win 53," or "Small Win 54." Furthermore, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" is a symbol combination consisting of symbols on all three reels 31 in the "PB=1" configuration. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" can be displayed as stopped when the button press order is correct.

Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 07" and "Small Winning 08" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on two reels 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on one other reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 07" and "Small Winning 08" can be displayed as stops when the push order is correct at the first stop, but incorrect at the second stop. Furthermore, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 31," "Small Winning 32," "Small Winning 53," and "Small Winning 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbols on one reel 31 are in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31," "Small Win 32," "Small Win 53," and "Small Win 54" can be displayed as stopped if the first stop is incorrect in the push order.

As such, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB=1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration is four. Therefore, this is more than the number of symbol combinations in which all three reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration (one), and the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB=1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has symbols in the "PB≠1" configuration (two).

Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the push order is correct, when all three reels 31 stop, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line. Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is correct but the second stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first and second stops, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the third stop. Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, if the first stop is incorrect, symbols in the "PB = 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the first stop, and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration are displayed as stopped on the active line on the second and third stops.

The symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the condition devices "Small Role A2 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated are also the same as those for the "Small Role A1 Condition Device." The symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the condition devices "Small Role A2 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated include a symbol combination where one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have a symbol in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration, a symbol combination where two reels 31 have a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration, and a symbol combination where three reels 31 have a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration.

Furthermore, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when each of the condition devices, "Small Role A2 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device," is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have a symbol in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "4." Furthermore, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when each of the condition devices, "Small Role A2 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device," is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which two reels 31 have a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "2."

Furthermore, among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the activated line when each of the condition devices of "small win A2 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" is activated, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on "3" reels 31 with "PB=1" arrangement is "1". And, the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on "1" reel 31 with "PB=1" arrangement and symbols on other "2" reels 31 with "PB≠1" arrangement is "1".
The number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in the "PB = 1" arrangement on "1" reel 31 and symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement on another "1" reel 31 is greater than the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols in the "PB = 1" arrangement on "3" reels 31.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14, when the left reel 31 is stopped first during operation of the "small win A1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out according to the subsequent stopping operation, on the active line. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14, when the center reel 31 is stopped first during operation of the "small win A1 condition device," it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 31" or "small win 32," which pays out "1" medal, which is less than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on the active line, ... Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time, depending on the subsequent stopping operation, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 53" or "small win 54," which pays out "1" medal less than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 01" is stopped and displayed on an active line.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, the symbol on the middle reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" is a "watermelon." This "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the middle reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01," and is a symbol that is arranged as "PB=1" on the middle reel 31. This prevents the "watermelon" on the middle reel 31 from being missed when the first middle stop occurs and the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, and prevents the "bell" on the middle reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" is a single type, "Red 7," and the symbol on the middle reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" is a single type, "Watermelon." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and middle reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" is a "cherry." This "cherry" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (watermelon) on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01," and is a symbol that is arranged as "PB=1" on the right reel 31. This prevents the "cherry" on the right reel 31 from being missed when the first right stop occurs and the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, and prevents the "watermelon" on the right reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 01" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" is one type, "White BAR," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 53" and "Small Win 54" is one type, "Cherry." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the center reel 31 is stopped first, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," which pays out "10," the maximum number of medals that can be paid out according to the subsequent stopping operation, on the active line. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 14, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, if the left reel 31 is stopped first, it is possible to stop and display on an active line a symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" or "small win 64," which pays out "1" medal, which is less than when the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03" is stopped and displayed on the active line, on the active line, on the subsequent stopping operation.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is a "Replay." This "Replay" on the left reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged as "PB=1" on the left reel 31. This prevents the "Replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed when the first left button stops and the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, and prevents the "Bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping on an active line, thereby preventing "Small Win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the center reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is a "red 7" or a "blue 7." The "red 7" or "blue 7" on the center reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the center reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration on the center reel 31. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 14, the symbol on the right reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 63" and "small win 64" is a "red 7." The "red 7" on the right reel 31 is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the right reel 31 that forms the symbol combination corresponding to "small win 03," and is a symbol that is arranged in a "PB≠1" configuration on the right reel 31.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Red 7." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed when the push order is incorrect when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

Also, as shown in FIG. 2, the left reel 31 has a section where "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) are arranged in that order. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 13 (1), at the first left stop when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18. Furthermore, of the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, "Replay" displayed stopped in the middle left row is the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64."

As shown in FIG. 13 (1), when the left first stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, and when the left first stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay" (number 11), and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 can be displayed in the display window 18, just as when the left first stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated. This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbols on the left reel 31 displayed in the display window 18 when the left first stop occurs.

Also, as shown in Figure 14, the correct push order for the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" is "left, center, right" or "left, center." In other words, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" are in the correct push order at the time of the first left stop. Here, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "correct group at the time of the first left stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31," "Small Win 32," "Small Win 53," and "Small Win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 33," "Small Win 34," "Small Win 49," and "Small Win 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 35," "Small Win 36," "Small Win 47," and "Small Win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 37," "Small Win 38," "Small Win 57," and "Small Win 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "Left First Stop Correct Group" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the correct pressing order for the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" is "middle left/right" or "middle right/left." In other words, the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" are in the correct pressing order at the time of the first middle stop. Here, the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "correct group at the time of the first middle stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 51," "Small Win 52," "Small Win 63," and "Small Win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 55," "Small Win 56," "Small Win 65," and "Small Win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 59", "small win 60", "small win 67" and "small win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement and the symbol on the other "two" reels 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the effective line when the "small win D2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 61", "small win 62", "small win 69" and "small win 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on "one" reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
The symbol combination is made up of symbols on the first reel 31 that are in the "PB=1" arrangement, and symbols on the other "two" reels 31 that are in the "PB≠1" arrangement.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "middle first stop correct group" that can be displayed stopped on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Also, as shown in Figure 15, the correct pressing order for the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" is "right, left, center" or "right, center, left." In other words, the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are in the correct pressing order at the time of the first right stop. Here, the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" to "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "correct group at the time of the first right stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 43," "Small Win 46," "Small Win 71," and "Small Win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 44," "Small Win 45," "Small Win 77," and "Small Win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 39," "Small Winning 40," "Small Winning 75," and "Small Winning 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 41," "Small Winning 42," "Small Winning 73," and "Small Winning 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on one reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the other two reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

From the above, of the symbol combinations included in the "Right First Stop Correct Group" that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the condition device is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which one reel 31 has a symbol in the "PB = 1" configuration and the other two reels 31 have symbols in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16".

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the correct pressing order for the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" is "center left/right," "center right left," "right left center," or "right center left." In other words, the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are incorrect in terms of pressing order at the time of the first left stop. Here, the "Small Role C1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "incorrect group at the time of the first left stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 65" and "Small Win 66" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 67" and "Small Win 68" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 69" and "Small Win 70" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 71" and "Small Win 72" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 77" and "Small Win 78" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 75" and "Small Winning 76" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 73" and "Small Winning 74" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the middle reel 31 and right reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As a result, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "Left First Stop Incorrect Group" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16." In other words, as shown in Figure 18, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 63" to "Small Win 78" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "Left First Stop Incorrect Group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the left reel 31 (replay) is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. The number of these symbol combinations is "16."

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the correct pressing order for the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" and the "Small Role E1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" is "left-center-right," "left-right-center," "right-left-center," or "right-center-left." In other words, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" and the "Small Role E1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are incorrect in terms of pressing order at the time of the first middle stop. Here, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role B2 Condition Device" and the "Small Role E1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "incorrect group at the time of the first middle stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 31" and "Small Win 32" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed in a stopped state on an active line when the "Small Win A2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 33" and "Small Win 34" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 35" and "Small Win 36" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 37" and "Small Win 38" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 43" and "Small Win 46" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win E2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 44" and "Small Win 45" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 39" and "Small Winning 40" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Winning F2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 41" and "Small Winning 42" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left and right reels 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As a result, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect group" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16." In other words, as shown in Figure 16, the symbol combinations corresponding to "minor win 31" to "minor win 46" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "middle first stop incorrect group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the center reel 31 (watermelon) is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. The number of these symbol combinations is "16."

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 14 and 15, the correct pressing order for the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" is "left, center, right," "left, right, center," "center, left, right," or "center, right, left." In other words, the pressing order for the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" becomes incorrect at the time of the first right stop. Here, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role D2 Condition Device" are referred to as the "incorrect group at the time of the first right stop."

Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations that correspond to "small win 53" and "small win 54" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when the "small win A2 condition device" is activated, the symbol combinations that correspond to "small win 49" and "small win 50" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration, and the symbol on the left reel 31 and the center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 47" and "Small Win 48" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win B2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 57" and "Small Win 58" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 51" and "Small Win 52" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 55" and "Small Win 56" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D1 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 59" and "Small Win 60" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. Among the symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win D2 Condition Device" is activated, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 61" and "Small Win 62" are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbol on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 is in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration.

As a result, of the symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "Right First Stop Incorrect Group" is activated, the number of symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration is "16." In other words, as shown in Figure 17, the symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 53" to "Small Win 62" are symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on an active line when a condition device included in the "Right First Stop Incorrect Group" is activated, and are symbol combinations in which the symbol on the right reel 31 (cherry) is in the "PB = 1" configuration and the symbols on the left reel 31 and center reel 31 are in the "PB ≠ 1" configuration. The number of these symbol combinations is "16."

As explained in the "correct group when stopped first on the left," "correct group when stopped first in the middle," "correct group when stopped first on the right," "incorrect group when stopped first on the left," "incorrect group when stopped first in the middle," and "incorrect group when stopped first on the right," by setting the number of symbol combinations consisting of symbols on one reel 31 with a "PB = 1" arrangement and symbols on the other two reels 31 with a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement to "16," it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated.

In other words, when playing with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at first middle stop" (small role A1 condition device, small role A2 condition device, small role B1 condition device, small role B2 condition device, small role E1 condition device, small role E2 condition device, small role F1 condition device, small role F2 condition device) activated, the push order will be incorrect at the time of the first middle stop. Furthermore, for the symbol combinations that can be displayed at the first middle stop during play with the condition devices included in the "incorrect solution group at first middle stop" activated, the symbol on the middle reel 31 will be in a "PB = 1" arrangement and one type (watermelon), and the symbols on both the left reel 31 and the right reel 31 will be in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement.

Furthermore, in order to give priority to the number of symbol combinations (1) that can be displayed when the push order is correct during play when a conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when the center stops first" is activated, the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the center stops first (when the push order is incorrect) during play when a conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when the center stops first" is activated is set to "2" for each conditional device. This minimizes the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the center stops first during play when a conditional device included in the "incorrect answer group when the center stops first" is activated. The same applies to the "incorrect answer group when the center stops first" and "incorrect answer group when the right stops first".

Here, a specification known as Accelerator AT is known among conventional slot machines. Slot machines equipped with this Accelerator AT are equipped with multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell has a high-value bell and a low-value bell with a different symbol combination. A "high-value bell" refers to a bell with a high payout number that wins when the push-order bell is selected correctly. A "low-value bell" refers to a bell with a low payout number that can win when the push-order bell is selected incorrectly. During non-internal and internal play, a lottery is held for roles that include all push-order bells. In a game where a push-order bell is selected, if the push-order is selected correctly, the corresponding high-value bell will win; if the push-order is selected incorrectly, the high-value bell will not win, and one of the corresponding low-value bells can win.

In contrast, during special play, the push order bell is not drawn. Instead, a lottery is held for the small prize ALL, which is won simultaneously by all high-number bells and all low-number bells (duplicate wins). In a play in which the small prize ALL is won, one of the high-number bells will win. The probability of winning the small prize ALL during special play is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of winning each push order bell outside of the internal reel and inside the reel, and lottery results other than a small prize ALL win are either not won, or a 1-piece prize ALL win, which is a duplicate win for all 1-piece prizes. In this way, the probability of winning each high-number bell and each low-number bell during special play is set to be equal to or higher than the probability of winning each high-number bell and each low-number bell outside of the internal reel and inside the reel, while the player's medals decrease during special play.

In this embodiment, the winning probability of each push order bell (small win A1 condition device to small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play is set to "2500/65536," thereby setting the winning probability of each high-ranking bell (small win 01 to small win 06) to "5000/65536." Furthermore, the winning probability of the small win ALL (small win ALL condition device) during special play is set to "5001/65536," thereby setting the winning probability of each high-ranking bell (small win 01 to small win 06) during special play to "5001/65536." However, since the winning probability of each small win during special play only needs to be set to equal or exceed the winning probability of each small win during non-internal and internal play, the winning probability of the small win ALL during special play may be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

However, slot machines equipped with the conventional accelerator AT described above are equipped with multiple types of push-order bells, and each push-order bell has a high-value bell and a low-value bell with different symbol combinations. This creates problems such as a large total number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when a push-order bell is won, and makes it difficult for players to understand the symbol combinations corresponding to the high-value bells. Therefore, in this embodiment, as described above, by appropriately setting the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated, the total number of symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" to the "small win F2 condition device" are activated is minimized, and the player can easily understand the winning combinations when the symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 01" to "small win 06" are displayed on an active line.

<Second Embodiment> The second embodiment is a slot machine in which, in a game in which multiple types of small winning combinations with different payout numbers are won, the type of small winning combination that is won varies depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed, resulting in an advantage/disadvantage in the game result (payout number), and the pattern arrangement is different from that of the first embodiment.

Figure 21 is a diagram showing the symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment. The symbol arrangement of the reel 31 in the second embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment shown in Figure 2, except that the "bells" at numbers "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in Figure 2 are replaced with "bell A," the "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell B," and all of the "bells" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A." Otherwise, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in Figure 2. Note that in the first embodiment, the "bells" on the left reel 31 were in a "PB = 1" arrangement, but in the second embodiment, the "bell A" on the left reel 31 is in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement, and the "bell B" on the left reel 31 is also in a "PB ≠ 1" arrangement. However, in the second embodiment, the combination of the two symbols "Bell A" and "Bell B" on the left reel 31 results in a "PB=1" arrangement.

Figures 22 and 23 are diagrams showing the types of roles (such as roles corresponding to winning numbers drawn by the role drawing means 61), symbol combinations, payout numbers, etc. in this embodiment. As shown in Figures 22 and 23, game states in this embodiment include not inside, inside 1BB, and in 1BB play. Also, in this embodiment, there is only one type of special role, "1BB." In Figures 22 and 23, "inside" refers to "inside 1BB," and "in 1BB" refers to "in 1BB play."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 01," "Small Winning 04," and "Small Winning 05" are the same as those in the first embodiment, except that the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A." The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Winning 02" and "Small Winning 06" are the same as those in the first embodiment. The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Winning 03" is the same as those in the first embodiment, except that the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A/Bell B," and the "Bell" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 07" to "Small Win 10" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A." The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 11" to "Small Win 14" are obtained by replacing the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 15" is obtained by replacing the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A" and the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 16" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "White BAR" and the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 17" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell B" and the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 18" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Red 7" and the "Bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "small win 19" to "small win 22" are obtained by replacing the "bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A/bell B" and by replacing the "bell" on the center reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A". The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 23" is obtained by replacing the "red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell A". The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 24" is obtained by replacing the "blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "white BAR". The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 25" is obtained by replacing the "black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "bell B". The symbol combination corresponding to "small win 26" is obtained by replacing the "white BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 27" is one in which the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with a "Red 7." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 28" is one in which the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with a "Blue 7." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 29" is one in which the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with a "Black BAR." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 30" is one in which the "Bell" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with a "White BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 31" is one in which the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell A." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 32" is one in which the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "White BAR." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 33" is one in which the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Bell B." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 34" is one in which the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment is replaced with "Red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 35" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Bell A" and the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Blue 7". The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 36" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with "White BAR" and the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with "Blue 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 37" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B" and the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Red 7". The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 38" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Red 7" and the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Red 7".

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 39" is the same as in the first embodiment, except that the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is replaced with a "Bell A." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 40" is the same as in the first embodiment, except that the "Red 7" on the left reel 31 is replaced with a "White BAR," and the "White BAR" on the right reel 31 is replaced with a "Black BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 41" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B" and the "Black BAR" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 42" is obtained by replacing the "Blue 7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Red 7."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 43" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell A" and the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 44" is obtained by replacing the "Black BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR" and the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "White BAR."

The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 45" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Bell B" and the "Red 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Black BAR." The symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 46" is obtained by replacing the "White BAR" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Red 7" and the "Blue 7" on the right reel 31 in the first embodiment with a "Black BAR."

The symbol combinations corresponding to "Small Win 47" to "Small Win 82" and "Replay" are the same as in the first embodiment. The symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" is the same as the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB-A" in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, the "small win condition device" and "replay condition device" are the same as in the first embodiment, and the "1BB condition device" is the same as the "1BB-A condition device" in the first embodiment.

Figure 24 is a diagram (number table) showing the number of winning numbers placed for each game state in the second embodiment. In Figure 24, "inside" indicates "inside 1BB" and "in 1BB" indicates "in 1BB game." As with the first embodiment, dividing the number of places shown in Figure 24 by "65536" gives the winning probability for each winning number.

As shown in Figure 24, the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device" are subject to lottery when not inside or inside (within 1BB), but are not subject to lottery when inside 1BB (during 1BB play). Furthermore, the "1-piece Role ALL Condition Device" is subject to lottery in all play states. Furthermore, unlike the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Small Role ALL Condition Device" is subject to lottery only when inside 1BB (during 1BB play), and is not subject to lottery when not inside or inside (within 1BB).

Furthermore, like the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role I Condition Device," the "Replay Condition Device" is subject to lottery when not inside or inside (when inside 1BB), but is not subject to lottery when in 1BB (during 1BB play). Furthermore, the "1BB Condition Device" is subject to lottery only when not inside, and is not subject to lottery in other game states. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, in any game state, the winning number "1" to "20" will be drawn by the role drawing means 61, and there will be no non-winning numbers.

Figure 25 is a diagram showing the transition of game states in the second embodiment, and Figure 26 is a diagram showing the conditions for changing game states in this embodiment. In Figure 26, "∞" (infinite) in the number of plays column means that no upper limit on the number of plays is set for each game state, and that game state will be maintained (continued) until the transition condition listed in the change trigger column is met.

The main control means 50 determines whether the game state transition conditions are met for each game when all reels 31 have stopped, and controls the game state to transition if it determines that the game state transition conditions are met. First, when the RWM 53 is initialized, the game state transitions to non-internal mode. When shipped from the factory, the game state transitions to non-internal mode. Also, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the power is off, and the power is then turned on in this state, the game state transitions to setting change mode. At this time, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and the game state transitions to non-internal mode.

The non-internal state will be maintained until the "1BB condition device" is activated. Then, if the "1BB condition device" is activated (1BB win) while not in the internal state and the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" stops and displays on an active line (1BB win), the game will transition to "1BB game" (1BB activated). On the other hand, if the "1BB condition device" is activated while not in the internal state, but the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" does not stop and display on an active line, the game will transition to "1BB internal state."

Furthermore, when "inside 1BB", if the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61, the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" can be displayed stopped on the active line. However, in this embodiment, since the winning combination is not won by the winning combination selection means 61 while "inside 1BB", once the state transitions to "inside 1BB", the symbol combination corresponding to "1BB" will not be displayed stopped on the active line, and the state "inside 1BB" will continue.

Furthermore, during "1BB game", "RB game" is played continuously. Furthermore, "RB game" ends when "2" games are played, "2" wins are made, or the conditions for ending "1BB-A game" are met. Furthermore, "1BB game" continues until the cumulative number of medals won (number of medals paid out, number of medals awarded) exceeds "210", and ends when the cumulative number of medals won exceeds "210".

Then, when "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB game" are not met, "RB game" will be executed again. Also, when "RB game" ends, if the termination conditions for "1BB game" are met, "1BB game" will end and the game will transition to a non-internal state. Furthermore, when the termination conditions for "1BB game" are met during "RB game," "RB game" will end, "1BB game" will end, and the game will transition to a non-internal state.

Next, using Figure 27, we will explain the features of the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the "small win A1 condition device" and the like are activated in the second embodiment, and the features of the stop control of reel 31 when the "small win A1 condition device" and the like are activated. Figure 27 (1) is a diagram showing the symbols on the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the first left stop occurs when the small win A1 condition device is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the small win B1 condition device is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the small win C1 condition device is activated. Figure 27 (2) is a diagram showing the symbols on the left reel that can be displayed in the display window when the second left stop occurs after the first middle stop occurs when the small win C1 condition device is activated. In Figure 27, the dotted lines passing through the left middle, middle middle, and right middle rows indicate the active line. The same applies to Figure 29, which will be described later. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out "10" medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "small win A1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of medals. Furthermore, when the left reel stops first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the left middle row (active line) to win "small win 01."

As a result, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown on the left side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row. That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6), and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, right, middle (132)" push order when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 02," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "small win B1 condition device," is stopped and displayed on the active line, with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of medals. Furthermore, when the left reel stops first when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, a "replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle row (active line) to win "small win 02."

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of FIG. 27(1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (No. 10) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the lower left row, the "replay" (No. 11) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, and the "bell A" (No. 12) of the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the upper left row.
As shown on the right side of (1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped symbols in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped symbols in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed as stopped symbols in the upper left row. That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6), and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "center, left, right (213)" press sequence while the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "small win 03," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "small win C1 condition device," is displayed stopped on the active line with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of medals. Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, upon the first center stop, "Bell A" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is displayed stopped on the center-middle row (active line) to win "small win 03." Then, upon the second left stop, "Bell A" or "Bell B" (two symbols combined for "PB = 1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the left-middle row (active line) to win "small win 03."

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of Figure 27(2), "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of Figure 27(2), and "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. Furthermore, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.

When the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Middle, Right (123)" push order, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols. Furthermore, when the left reel stops first during activation of the "Small Win C1 Condition Device," a "Replay" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, making it possible to win "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64."

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown on the left side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 27 (1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row. That is, "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay" (No. 11), and "Bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay" (No. 6), and "Bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 27(1), when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay" (No. 11), and "bell A" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (No. 5), "replay" (No. 6), and "bell B" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbols on the left reel 31 that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the first left stop occurs.

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second button stops after the center first button stops, as shown in FIG. 27 (2), "Replay" (No. 11), "Bell A" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay" (No. 6), "Bell B" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18 either. In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the left first button stops (when the push order is incorrect) and when the left second button stops after the center first button stops (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), a "Replay" symbol, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03" and is the "PB=1" symbol on the left reel 31, is displayed stopped on the active line. This prevents the "Replay" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents "Bell A" or "Bell B" on the left reel 31 from being displayed stopped on the active line, preventing "Small Win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, the symbol on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Replay," and the symbol on the right reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 63" and "Small Win 64" is one type, "Red 7." In this way, by limiting the type of symbols on the left reel 31 and right reel 31 that constitute the symbol combinations that can be displayed when the first left reel stops (when the push order is incorrect) when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated to one type each, it is possible to reduce the number of symbol combinations that can be displayed on an active line when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated.

Furthermore, the probability of the "red 7" on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is 1/4, the probability of the "blue 7" on the center reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is also 1/4, and the probability of the "red 7" on the right reel 31 that constitutes "small win 63" and "small win 64" stopping on an active line is also 1/4. This reduces the probability of winning a single coin when the push order is incorrect when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated to 1/8, which in turn reduces the payout rate per game, thereby improving design flexibility.

Furthermore, the "cherry" on the left reel 31 is not displayed in the display window 18 when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, or when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and then the "second left stop" after the first middle stop. This prevents players from getting their hopes up too high.

The first and second embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows: (1) In the second embodiment, the "bells" at numbers "12" and "17" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A," the "bells" at numbers "2" and "7" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell B," and all of the "bells" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment are replaced with "bell A," but the replacement of symbols is not limited to this.

For example, as shown in FIG. 28, the "Replays" at numbers "11" and "16" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay A," and the "Replays" at numbers "1" and "6" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay B." Furthermore, the "Cherry" at numbers "9" and "14" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A," and the "Cherry" at number "4" on the left reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry B."

Furthermore, all "Replays" on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Replay A," and all "Cherry" symbols on the center reel 31 and right reel 31 in the first embodiment may be replaced with "Cherry A." Otherwise, the symbol arrangement is the same as that of the reel 31 in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 2. Note that in the first embodiment, the "Replays" on the left reel 31 were in the "PB=1" arrangement, but in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, the "Replay A" on the left reel 31 is in the "PB≠1" arrangement, and the "Replay B" on the left reel 31 is also in the "PB≠1" arrangement. However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 28, the two symbols on the "Replay A" and "Replay B" on the left reel 31 combine to form the "PB=1" arrangement.

Furthermore, by replacing the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 as shown in FIG. 28, the symbols that make up the symbol combinations of the winning combinations in the first embodiment shown in FIGS. 4 and 5 can be replaced as appropriate. For example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" can be "Replay A/Replay B"-"Bell"-"Watermelon," and the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" can be "Replay A/Replay B"-"Cherry"-"Replay A." Furthermore, even if the symbol arrangement of each reel 31 is replaced as shown in FIG. 28, the small win condition device, replay condition device, and 1BB condition device can remain the same as in the first embodiment.

When the stop switch 42 is operated in the "left, center, right (123)" push order when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "small win 01," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "small win A1 condition device," is stopped and displayed on the active line with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of medals. Also, when the left reel stops first when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the active line to win "small win 01."

As a result, when the "Small Win A1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown on the left side of Figure 29 (1), there are cases where the "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29 (1), there are cases where the "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row. That is, the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or the "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay B" (No. 6), and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Right, Middle (132)" push order, the symbol combination (PB=1) corresponding to "Small Win 02," which pays out 10 medals, the maximum number of medals payable by the "Small Win B1 Condition Device," is displayed stopped on the active line with a 1/1 probability, based on the number of medals. Furthermore, when the left reel stops first while the "Small Win B1 Condition Device" is activated, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (the two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped on the active line to win "Small Win 02."

As a result, at the time of the first left stop when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, as shown on the left side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29(1), there are cases where "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row. In other words, the "black BAR" (number 10), "replay A" (number 11) and "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (number 5), "replay B" (number 6) and "bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "middle left right (213)" press order, the symbol combination (PB = 1) corresponding to "Small Win 03," which pays out "10" medals, the maximum number of medals payout corresponding to the "Small Win C1 Condition Device," is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/1, based on the number of medals. Furthermore, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, at the first center stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the center reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the middle center line (active line) to win "Small Win 03," and then, at the second left stop, a "bell" (PB = 1) on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed on the left middle line (active line) to win "Small Win 03."

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second stop occurs after the middle first stop, as shown on the left side of Figure 29 (2), "Replay A" (No. 11) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row, as shown on the right side of Figure 29 (2), and "Replay B" (No. 6) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the lower left row, "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the middle left row, and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 may be displayed stopped in the upper left row.

In other words, "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18. Furthermore, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed as stopped symbols in the display window 18 either.

Furthermore, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the stop switch 42 is operated in the "Left, Center, Right (123)" push order, a symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64" (both pay out one coin) is stopped and displayed on the active line with a probability of 1/8, based on the number of symbols. Furthermore, when the left reel first stops when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated, "Replay A" or "Replay B" (two symbols combined for "PB=1") on the left reel 31 is stopped and displayed in the middle left row, making it possible to win "Small Win 63" or "Small Win 64".

As a result, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the first left stop occurs, as shown on the left side of Figure 29 (1), there are cases where the "black BAR" (number 10) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay A" (number 11) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 12) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row, and as shown on the right side of Figure 29 (1), there are cases where the "red 7" (number 5) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the lower left row, the "replay B" (number 6) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the middle left row, and the "bell" (number 7) on the left reel 31 is displayed stopped in the upper left row. That is, the "Black BAR" (No. 10), "Replay A" (No. 11), and "Bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or the "Red 7" (No. 5), "Replay B" (No. 6), and "Bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped within the display window 18.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 29(1), when the first left stop occurs when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the first left stop occurs when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, and when the first left stop occurs when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, the "black BAR" (No. 10), "replay A" (No. 11), and "bell" (No. 12) on the left reel 31, or the "red 7" (No. 5), "replay B" (No. 6), and "bell" (No. 7) on the left reel 31 can be stopped and displayed in the display window 18. This makes it impossible to guess the operating condition device (the lottery result of the role selection means 61) from the position of the symbols on the left reel 31 that are stopped and displayed in the display window 18 when the first left stop occurs.

Furthermore, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, when the left second button stops after the center first button stops, as shown in FIG. 29 (2), "Replay A" (No. 11), "Bell" (No. 12), and "Watermelon" (No. 13) on the left reel 31, or "Replay B" (No. 6), "Bell" (No. 7), and "Watermelon" (No. 8) on the left reel 31 can be displayed stopped in the display window 18. In this case, "Cherry A" (No. 9) and "Black BAR" (No. 10) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18, and "Cherry B" (No. 4) and "Red 7" (No. 5) on the left reel 31 are not displayed stopped in the display window 18 either. In this way, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, different symbols on the left reel 31 are displayed stopped in the display window 18 when the left first button stops (when the push order is incorrect) and when the left second button stops after the center first button stops (when the push order is correct).

Then, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device" is activated and the first left button stops (when the push order is incorrect), a "Replay A" or "Replay B" is displayed on the active line, which is a different symbol from the symbol (bell) on the left reel 31 that constitutes "Small Win 03," and the two symbols combined on the left reel 31 form a "PB = 1" configuration. This prevents the "Replay A" or "Replay B" on the left reel 31 from being missed, and prevents the "bell" on the left reel 31 from stopping on the active line, preventing "Small Win 03" from winning.

Furthermore, when the "small win A1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win B1 condition device" is activated, when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated, or when the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the "small win C2 condition device" is activated and the "small win C1 condition device" is activated and the "small win A" on the left reel 31 is not displayed as a stopped symbol in the display window 18, and neither is "cherry B" on the left reel 31 displayed as a stopped symbol in the display window 18. This prevents players from getting their hopes up too high.

(2) In the first and second embodiments, the middle line is the active line, but the active line is not limited to the middle line, and the number of active lines is not limited to one. For example, as shown in Figures 30 and 31, the top line can be the active line, and the others can be the inactive lines. Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 01" can be "Bell" - "Replay" - "Cherry." In this case, when "Small Win 01" is won, as shown in Figure 30 (1), "Bell" - "Replay" - "Cherry" are displayed on the top line (active line), and "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell" are displayed on the line sloping to the right (inactive line), so the winning combination can be the same as when "Small Win 01" is won in the first embodiment.

Similarly, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 02" can be "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell." In this case, when "Small Win 02" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(2), "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed on the top line (valid line), making it possible to achieve the same winning combination as when "Small Win 02" is won in the first embodiment. Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 03" can be "Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Watermelon." In this case, when "Small Win 03" is won, as shown in FIG. 30(3), "Watermelon"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" are displayed on the top line (valid line), and "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed on the middle line (invalid line), making it possible to achieve the same winning combination as when "Small Win 03" is won in the first embodiment.

Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 04" can be "Cherry"-"Replay"-"Bell." In this case, when "Small Win 04" is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (1), "Cherry"-"Replay"-"Bell" are displayed on the top line (valid line), and "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed on the sloping right line (invalid line), so the winning combination can be the same as when "Small Win 04" is won in the first embodiment. Furthermore, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 05" can be "Cherry"-"Replay"-"Cherry." In this case, when "Small Win 05" is won, as shown in FIG. 31 (2), "Cherry"-"Replay"-"Cherry" are displayed on the top line (valid line), and "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed on the hill line (invalid line), so the winning combination can be the same as when "Small Win 05" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the symbol combination corresponding to "Small Win 06" can be "Cherry"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry." In this case, when "Small Win 06" is won, as shown in Figure 31 (3), "Cherry"-"Watermelon"-"Cherry" are displayed on the upper line (valid line), and "Bell"-"Bell"-"Bell" are displayed on the lower line (invalid line), so the winning combination can be the same as when "Small Win 06" is won in the first embodiment.

Also, for example, the bottom line or the line sloping downwards to the right can be made an active line. Furthermore, for example, the top line, middle line, bottom line, upward-right line, and downward-right line can be made an active line - a total of five lines.

(3) In the first and second embodiments, three reels 31 are provided: a left reel 31, a center reel 31, and a right reel 31. However, the number of reels 31 is not limited to three. For example, four reels 31, a first reel 31, a second reel 31, a third reel 31, and a fourth reel 31, may be provided side by side. In this case, four stop switches 42, from a first stop switch 42 to a fourth stop switch 42, may be provided corresponding to the four reels 31, respectively.

(4) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins paid out for a small win that can be won when the button press order is correct when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated was "10," but this is not limited to this and it may be, for example, "8" or "15." (5) In the first and second embodiments, the number of coins paid out for a small win that can be won when the button press order is incorrect when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated was "1," but this is not limited to this and it may be, for example, "2" or "3."

(6) In the first and second embodiments, 12 types of condition devices, "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device," were provided as condition devices that create advantages/disadvantages in game results depending on the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed. However, this is not limited to this, and six types, "Small Role A Condition Device" to "Small Role F Condition Device," may also be used. (7) In the first and second embodiments, the order in which the stop switch 42 is pressed when the "Small Role A1 Condition Device" to "Small Role F2 Condition Device" are activated is set to six options: "Left-Centre-Right," "Left-Right-Centre," "Centre-Left-Right," "Centre-Right-Left," "Right-Left-Centre," and "Right-Centre-Left." However, this is not limited to this, and three options may also be used: "First stop on the left, second and third stops optional," "First stop in the middle, second and third stops optional," and "First stop on the right, second and third stops optional."

(8) In the first and second embodiments, as shown in FIG. 10, the winning probability of the winning number "1" (small win A1 condition device) and the winning number "2" (small win A2 condition device) during non-internal and internal periods is set to "2500/65536", respectively, thereby setting the winning probability of the "small win 01" during non-internal and internal periods to "5000/65536". Similarly, by setting the winning probability of the winning number "3" (small win B1 condition device) to the winning number "12" (small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal periods to "2500/65536", respectively, the winning probability of the "small win 02" to "small win 06" during non-internal and internal periods is set to "5000/65536". In addition, by setting the winning probability of the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during the special game to "5001/65536", the winning probability of "small win 01" to "small win 06" during the special game is set to "5001/65536", respectively.

However, since the probability of winning each small win during special play can be set to be equal to or greater than the probability of winning each small win during non-internal and internal play, the probability of winning the winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play, i.e., the probability of winning "small win 01" to "small win 06" during special play, can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(9) In the first and second embodiments, when the push order bell is won (when the "small prize A1 condition device" to "small prize F2 condition device" are activated), the correct push order is one of six options: "left, center, right," "left, right, center," "center, left, right," "center, right, left," "right, left, center," and "right, center, left." A different high bell (a prize awarded when the push order is correct when the push order bell is won; in the above embodiment, "small prize 01" to "small prize 06") is awarded for each correct push order. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, the high bell may be one of three types: "small prize 01" to "small prize 03." Furthermore, when the push order is correct ("left, center, right" or "left, right, center") when the "small prize A1 condition device," "small prize A2 condition device," "small prize B1 condition device," and "small prize B2 condition device" are activated, "small prize 01" may be awarded. Similarly, when the "Small Win C1 Condition Device," "Small Win C2 Condition Device," "Small Win D1 Condition Device," and "Small Win D2 Condition Device" are activated and the pressing order is correct ("center left/right" or "center right/left"), "Small Win 02" may be awarded. Furthermore, when the "Small Win E1 Condition Device," "Small Win E2 Condition Device," "Small Win F1 Condition Device," and "Small Win F2 Condition Device" are activated and the pressing order is correct ("right left center" or "right center left"), "Small Win 03" may be awarded.

In this case, the winning probability of each small win during special play should be set to equal or exceed the winning probability of each small win during non-internal and internal play. Therefore, if the winning probabilities of winning numbers "1" (small win A1 condition device) through "12" (small win F2 condition device) during non-internal and internal play are set to "2500/65536," the winning probability of winning number "17" (small win ALL condition device) during special play can be set to, for example, "10000/65536."

(10) In the first and second embodiments, the correct push order when the push order bell is won (when the "small win A1 condition device" to "small win F2 condition device" are activated) is one of six options: "left center right," "left left center," "center left left," "center right left," "right left center," and "right center left." However, this is not limited to this, and it may be one of three options: "first stop on the left, second and third stops are optional" (left --), "first stop on the center, second and third stops are optional" (center --), or "first stop on the right, second and third stops are optional" (right --).

In this case, three types of push-order bells can be provided: a "left correct bell condition device" where "left -" is the correct push order; a "middle correct bell condition device" where "middle -" is the correct push order; and a "right correct bell condition device" where "right -" is the correct push order. Furthermore, when the "left correct bell condition device" is activated and the push order is correct, "minor prize 01" is awarded; when the "middle correct bell condition device" is activated and the push order is correct, "minor prize 02" is awarded; and when the "right correct bell condition device" is activated and the push order is correct, "minor prize 03" is awarded. In this case, if the winning probabilities of winning numbers corresponding to the "left correct bell condition device," "middle correct bell condition device," and "right correct bell condition device" during non-internal and internal play are set to "5000/65536," the winning probability of winning numbers corresponding to the "minor prize ALL condition device" during special play can be set to, for example, "5000/65536."

(11) In the first and second embodiments, a slot machine was used as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to casino machines and sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines), for example. Here, sealed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) can, for example, eliminate the medal payout device (a unit including the hopper 35, hopper motor 36, and payout sensor 37). They can also eliminate the need for a medal insertion slot 43 and medal selector. All electronic medals (electronic gaming media) awarded as a result of winning combinations are stored in the stored number display LED 76. In this case, the stored number display LED 76 can be configured to have five digits (allowing for a maximum of 99,999 electronic medals to be stored).

<Third Embodiment> In the third embodiment, the device includes a power switch 11, a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, and a setting change (reset) switch 153. The door switch 17, the setting key switch 152, and the setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via an input port 51.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off. In the following explanation, turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning on the power," "turning on the power," or "resuming the power supply." Turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The door switch 17 is a switch that detects the opening of the front door 12 and is attached to the cabinet 13 or the front door 12. The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, settings are changed, settings are checked, an error occurs, or medals are replenished.

The door switch 17 is set to be off when the front door 12 is closed, and on when the front door 12 is open. This makes it possible to detect the opening of the front door 12. Alternatively, the door switch 17 may be set to be on when the front door 12 is closed, and off when the front door 12 is open, thereby detecting the opening of the front door 12.

The setting key switch 152 is a switch used to transition to a setting change state (also referred to as "setting change mode" or "setting change in progress") in which the setting value can be changed, or a setting confirmation state (also referred to as "setting confirmation mode" or "setting confirmation in progress") in which the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed. By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 turns on (also referred to as the "first state"), and by rotating the setting key 90 degrees counterclockwise from this state, the setting key switch 152 turns off (also referred to as the "second state").

The setting change (reset) switch 153 serves as the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153. The setting change switch 153 is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state. The reset switch 153 is operated to return to the state before the error occurred (to release the error state) after an error that occurred has been removed. The RWM clear switch 153 is operated to initialize (clear) a specified storage area in the RWM 53.

In the following description, the switch will be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," the "setting change switch 153," the "reset switch 153," or the "RWM clear switch 153." Furthermore, when various switches such as the setting key switch 152 and the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 are in an on state, they will be referred to as "operated," and when they are in an off state, they will be referred to as "not operated." Note that in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are integrated, but this is not limiting; the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 may also be provided separately.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, the "game zone" includes a "normal zone" and a "favorable zone." The "normal zone" is a game zone in which signals related to the instruction function are prohibited from being sent to a peripheral board (e.g., the sub-control board 80), and which has no effect whatsoever on the performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function is not activated). In other words, the normal zone is a game zone in which advantageous operation modes of the stop switch 42 are not notified. Note that the normal zone may also be referred to as a "non-favorable zone." The "favorable zone" is a game zone that has performance related to the instruction function (the instruction function may be activated). In other words, the favorable zone is a game zone in which the operation mode of the stop switch 42 (e.g., the correct pressing order) can be notified.

Furthermore, the third embodiment is equipped with a favorable zone display LED 77 that can indicate to the player that they are in a favorable zone. In the normal zone, the favorable zone display LED 77 is off, and in the favorable zone, the favorable zone display LED 77 is on. In other words, when the favorable zone display LED 77 is off, it indicates that they are in a normal zone, and when the favorable zone display LED 77 is on, it indicates that they are in a favorable zone. In this way, in the third embodiment, there is a one-to-one correspondence between the display mode (off or on) of the favorable zone display LED 77 and the game zone (normal zone or favorable zone). For example, as shown in Figure 31, segment P of digit 4a of the acquisition count display LED 78 can be used as the favorable zone display LED 77. Furthermore, the favorable zone display LED 77 can also be provided separately from the acquisition count display LED 78.

In addition, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit immediately after transitioning from the normal zone to the advantageous zone, but may be lit when a predetermined condition is met after transitioning to the advantageous zone (for example, when notification of an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 begins). In this case, when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, it indicates that the zone is advantageous, but when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, it may indicate either a normal zone or an advantageous zone.

Figure 32 is a diagram explaining the configuration of the main CPU 55, ROM 54, and RWM 53 in the third embodiment. The main control board 50 is provided with the main CPU 55, RWM 53, and ROM 54. As shown in Figure 32, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and the main CPU 55 is provided within this chip. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has built-in memory, which includes a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. Furthermore, the addresses of the ROM 54 and RWM 53 are consecutive.

The memory area of the ROM 54 has a use area and an outside use area, and the use area and the outside use area each have a control area and a data area. Here, the "use area" is a memory area in which information related to the progress of the game is stored. The "control area" is a memory area in which various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored, and is also referred to as the "program area." Furthermore, the "data area" is a memory area in which information other than programs is stored, and is a memory area in which data used when executing programs is stored.

Furthermore, the "outside of the use area" is a memory area where information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the lighting of the management information display LED 74 described below, a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating. Like the use area, the "outside of the use area" has a control area and a data area. The control area of the use area is sometimes referred to as the "first control area" or "first program area," and the control area outside the use area is sometimes referred to as the "second control area" or "second program area." Furthermore, a program stored in the control area of the use area (first control area, first program area) is sometimes referred to as the "first program," and a program stored in the control area outside the use area (second control area, second program area) is sometimes referred to as the "second program."

During execution of a program (first program) stored in the control area of the used area of ROM 54, reference (access) to data stored in the data area of the used area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in data areas outside the used area of ROM 54 is prohibited. Similarly, during execution of a program (second program) stored in the control area outside the used area of ROM 54, reference to data stored in data areas outside the used area of ROM 54 is permitted, but reference to data stored in the data area of the used area of ROM 54 is prohibited.

Like ROM 54, the memory area of RWM 53 has a used area and an unusable area, and the used area and unusable area each have a working area and a stack area. As shown in Figure 32, addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" are the used area, addresses "F200(H)" to "F20F(H)" are the unused area, and addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" are the unusable area.

When a program (first program) stored in the control area of the usage area of ROM 54 is running, data stored in the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced (accessed) and rewritten (overwritten), but data stored outside the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced but not rewritten. Similarly, when a program (second program) stored in the control area outside the usage area of ROM 54 is running, data stored outside the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced and rewritten, but data in the usage area of RWM 53 is permitted to be referenced but not rewritten. This is to avoid complicating processing.

Furthermore, to prevent data in the used area of RWM53 from being rewritten (overwritten) due to a program crash or other reasons while a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, an unused area is provided between the used area of RWM53 and the outside used area. Furthermore, if an interrupt process occurs while a program outside the used area (second program) is being executed, there is a possibility that the interrupt process will rewrite (overwrite) data in the used area of RWM53, so interrupt process is prohibited while the program outside the used area (second program) is being executed.

Also, as shown in Figure 32, in addition to the used area and the non-used area, ROM 54 also has other areas such as a program management area. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 32, in addition to the used area and the non-used area, RWM 53 also has other areas such as an unused area.

Furthermore, the entire storage area of the built-in memory includes areas other than ROM 54 and RWM 53, such as an internal register area and unused areas. The internal register area also includes, for example, A registers through L registers and a transmission register.

Figure 33 is a diagram showing the address, label name, number of bytes, and name of data stored in the used area of RWM 53 in the third embodiment. The addresses of the used area are set in the range of "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", as shown in Figure 32. Note that the data shown in Figure 33 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and the data stored in the used area of RWM 53 is not limited to this.

Address "F000(H)" is the storage area for the setting value data (_NB_RANK). When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6". Therefore, any value between "0(H)" and "5(H)" is stored as the setting value data. The setting value display LED 73 then displays "N", which is the setting value data plus "1".

Address "F001(H)" is a 1-byte storage area where the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is stored. When the setting value is "N", "N-1" is stored in address "F000(H)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). Then, "N", which is the setting value data (_NB_RANK) plus "1", is stored in address "F001(H)" as the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP).

In this embodiment, the setting values are "1" to "6", and address "F000(H)" stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as setting value data (_NB_RANK), while address "F001(H)" stores one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP). The value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) is then displayed as the setting value on the setting value display LED 73.

Address "F010(H)" is a storage area for credit number data (_NB_CREDIT). The credit number data is data to be displayed on the credit number display LED 76. In this embodiment, a value between "0" and "50(D)" is stored as the credit number data. In this embodiment, the credit number data is stored as a value obtained by converting the credit number to a decimal number. For example, if the number of credits to be displayed is "29," the value "29(H)" is stored. In other words, "00101001(B)" is stored in address "F010(H)." As a result, the lower four bits D0 to D3 of address "F010(H)" are data for displaying the lower digits of the credit number ("9" in this example), and the upper four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the upper digits of the credit number ("2" in this example). In this embodiment, the upper limit of the credit number is "50(D)," so the stored data value is in the range of "0" to "50." In this embodiment, there is no RWM 53 address that stores the credit number data itself, and the credit number data is provided as display data for the credit number display LED 76.

Address "F011(H)" is the storage area for the winning number data (_NB_PAYOUT). The winning number data is data to be displayed on the winning number display LED 78. In the winning number data, similar to the credit number data described above, the lowest four bits D0 to D3 are data for displaying the lower digits, and the highest four bits D4 to D7 are data for displaying the higher digits. In this embodiment, when a small win is achieved, the payout number corresponding to the winning small win is displayed on the winning number display LED 78, and the payout number data corresponding to the winning small win is stored as the winning number data. Specifically, when a small win is achieved and medals are paid out, the winning number data is incremented as the medals are paid out, and the display on the winning number display LED 78 is updated. For example, when "1(H)" is stored as the winning number data, "01" is displayed on the winning number display LED 78.

Here, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) at address "F040(H)" (described below) stores "8(H)" when an 8-coin combination is won, and the payout number data is decremented by "1" depending on the number of medals paid out when medals are paid out (including addition to credits), such as "8" → "7" → ... → "0". In contrast, the winning number data stored at address "F011(H)" is incremented by "1" each time a medal is paid out, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8" when an 8-coin combination is won. Therefore, the display on the winning number display LED 78 also counts up, such as "0" → "1" → "2" → ... → "8".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, while the setting is being changed, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "88." Therefore, while the setting is being changed, setting change in progress display data for displaying "88" is stored as acquired number data. By displaying "88" on the acquired number display LED 78, it is possible to identify from the front of the gaming machine that a setting change is in progress. Furthermore, by lighting up "88" and all segments, it is possible to confirm that there are no defective segments (that there are no segments that cannot be lit). Note that the upper limit for the number of medals that can be paid out is 15, so when "88" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78, it can be understood that this is not a display of the number of medals to be paid out.

Furthermore, when the conditions for specifying the specified number (the number of medals to be bet in the current game) are met, the specified number is specified (displayed, notified) on the acquired number display LED 78 before the game begins (before betting becomes possible or before the start switch 41 is operated). In this embodiment, to specify the specified number of "2", the acquired number display LED 78 displays "0A". Therefore, when specifying the specified number, specified number display data for displaying "0A" is stored as the acquired number data.

Furthermore, when a push order bell or the like is won during the AT, push order instruction information is displayed on the number of wins display LED 78. Therefore, when push order instruction information is displayed on the number of wins display LED 78, the push order instruction number is stored as the number of wins data. For example, when push order instruction information is displayed in a game in which the winning number "3" is won, the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is stored as the number of wins data. As a result, the push order instruction information "=1" corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1 (H)" is displayed on the number of wins display LED 78.

Furthermore, when a specified error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78. Therefore, when a specified error occurs, error number display data for displaying the error number is stored as acquisition count data. For example, when the error number to be displayed is "HP," error number display data for displaying "HP" is stored as acquisition count data.

Address "F030 (H)" is the storage area for the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION). The operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is a flag used to determine whether replays and special features are activated. For example, when 1BB is activated, the D2 bit of the operation status flag is set to "1." Also, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to a replay has stopped and been displayed, the D0 bit of the operation status flag is set to "1."

Address "F040(H)" is a storage area for payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL). The payout number data becomes data indicating a value corresponding to the payout number when a small win is won in the game and the payout number is determined. When a small win is won, the payout number data corresponding to the won small win is stored, and the medal payout process is executed. Here, each time one medal is paid out ("1" is added to the credit amount, or one actual medal is paid out (from the hopper 35)), "1" is subtracted from the payout number data. In other words, it serves as the number of times the payout process is executed. As a result, when the medal payout process is completed, the payout number data becomes "0."

Address "F041 (H)" is the storage area for the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL). Like the payout number data, the payout number data buffer becomes data that indicates a value corresponding to the payout number when a small winning combination is achieved in the game and the payout number is determined. Unlike the payout number data, the payout number data buffer is not decremented each time a medal is paid out, and the initially stored value is maintained. This value is then maintained until the medal payout number update process is performed for the next game. For example, if a small winning combination that pays out 8 medals is achieved in the game, "8 (H)" is stored as the payout number data buffer, and if no winning combination is achieved in the next game, "0" is overwritten as the payout number data buffer.

Address "F042(H)" is the storage area for the automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL). The automatic bet number data indicates the number of medals to be automatically bet when a replay is won, and in this embodiment, "2" or "3" is stored. Address "F043(H)" is the storage area for the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL). The bet number data indicates the number of bets in the current game, and in this embodiment, any of "0" to "3" is stored.

Address "F044(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where status indicator LED lighting data is stored. As shown in Figure 36(A) described below, in the third embodiment, the display board 75 is provided with six status indicator LEDs 79: a 1-bet indicator LED 79a, a 2-bet indicator LED 79b, a 3-bet indicator LED 79c, a start-of-game indicator LED 79d, a deposit indicator LED 79e, and a replay indicator LED 79f. The status indicator LED lighting data indicates whether or not three of the six LEDs mentioned above, the start-of-game indicator LED 79d, the deposit indicator LED 79e, and the replay indicator LED 79f, should be lit.

As shown in Figure 33, the D0 bit of the status indicator LED lighting data is assigned to the game start indicator LED 79d, the D1 bit is assigned to the deposit indicator LED 79e, and the D2 bit is assigned to the replay indicator LED 79f. Each bit of this status indicator LED lighting data corresponds to each bit of the LED display counter 1 in Figure 40 (A), which will be described later. A "1" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned on, and a "0" is set to the bit corresponding to the LED to be turned off. For example, if the game start indicator LED 79d is to be turned on and the deposit indicator LED 79e and replay indicator LED 79f are to be turned off, "00000001 (B)" is stored as the status indicator LED lighting data.

Address "F051(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored. LED display counter 1 is a counter that determines which of digits 1 through 5 to light up and is continuously updated with each interrupt. Here, "digit" refers to the display unit (display), which in this embodiment is composed of a single 7-segment display. Of the digits in this embodiment, digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit count (reserved count) display LED 76, digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit count display LED 76, digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired count display LED 78, digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired count display LED 78, and digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73. Furthermore, each bit of LED display counter 1 is assigned as follows: bit D0 corresponds to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponds to the digit 2 signal, ..., bit D4 corresponds to the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 1 to 5 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit that is set to "1" in LED display counter 1 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000 (B)." Then, as the interrupt progresses from "1" to "2" to ... (for each interrupt), the LED display counter 1 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right. Furthermore, at the interrupt following interrupt "5," the LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000 (B)." At that interrupt, the LED display counter 1 is initialized to "00010000 (B)." As a result, the LED display counter 1 cycles through the following values for each interrupt: "5" → "4" → ... → "1" → "5" → "4" → ... In other words, five interrupts constitute one cycle.

From the above, the values of LED display counter 1 are: "N" interrupt: 00010000 (B) "N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B) "N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B) "N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B) "N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B) "N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialized; same value as "N" interrupt) "N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B) :

In the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, dynamically lighting up digits 1 to 5. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)," a digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light up (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00001000 (B)," outputs a digit 4 signal, and enables digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED D78) to light up (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

Address "F052 (H)" is the storage area for the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). The LED display request flag takes a value depending on whether it is in normal operation, during a setting change, or during setting confirmation. In the third embodiment, during normal operation, digits 1 to 4 are lit and digit 5 is not lit, so the value is "00001111 (B)." Furthermore, during setting change and setting confirmation, digit 5 is lit and digits 1 to 4 are not lit, so the value is "00010000 (B)."

Address "F061 (H)" is the storage area for the advantageous zone type flag (_NB_ADV_KND). The advantageous zone type flag is a flag that indicates whether the current play zone is a normal zone or an advantageous zone. When in a normal zone, the advantageous zone type flag stores "00000000 (B)", and when transitioning from a normal zone to an advantageous zone, the D0 bit becomes "1". The timing at which the advantageous zone type flag is updated will be explained later.

Address "F062 (H)" is the storage area for the advantageous zone display LED flag (_FL_ADV_LED). The advantageous zone display LED flag is a flag that indicates whether the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit or not. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is off, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "0", and when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous zone display LED flag is "1". Note that the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be lit at any time after transitioning to the advantageous zone (for example, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be lit at the same time as transitioning to the advantageous zone).

On the other hand, the advantageous zone display LED 77 does not have to be lit even after transitioning to the advantageous zone. Specifically, first, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit when transitioning to the advantageous zone, but may be lit later (during the advantageous zone). Second, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may not be lit when transitioning to the advantageous zone, and if the advantageous zone termination conditions are met before the conditions for turning on the advantageous zone display LED 77 are met, the advantageous zone may be terminated without the advantageous zone display LED 77 ever being lit.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the instruction function is activated (when the correct button press sequence is notified) in a game state where the game is in a favorable zone and the zone Sim payout rate exceeds "1", the favorable zone display LED 77 is illuminated. Furthermore, once the favorable zone display LED 77 is illuminated, it remains illuminated throughout the favorable zone. Also, during the game end check process for the final game in the favorable zone, processing is executed to turn off the favorable zone display LED 77. Specifically, when the favorable zone end conditions are met, initialization processing is executed for the favorable zone display LED flag storage area (processing to clear the favorable zone display LED flag). As a result, the favorable zone display LED 77 is turned off during the subsequent interrupt processing.

Furthermore, when the advantageous zone indicator LED 77 is illuminated in a game that activates the indicator function, the illumination timing is, for example, when the start switch 41 is operated (more specifically, from the time the reels 31 start to rotate until they reach a constant speed). However, this is not limited to this, and other illumination timings include, for example: 1) before the start switch 41 is operated; 2) after the start switch 41 is operated, when all reels 31 reach a constant speed and the stop switch 42 can be operated; 3) when at least one reel 31 has stopped and at least one other reel 31 is rotating; 4) when all reels 31 have stopped; and 5) after all reels 31 have stopped (when the game has ended) and before the settlement switch 43 can be operated before the start of the next game.

However, when lighting up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the winning role for that game must already be determined, so this does not apply before the start switch 41 is operated (before the role is drawn). When lighting up the advantageous zone display LED 77 in a game that activates the instruction function, the start switch 41 is operated and the role is drawn, so the earliest timing for lighting up the advantageous zone display LED 77 after the reels 31 start to rotate and before the rotation of the reels 31 reaches a constant speed is the shortest possible time.

Address "F063 (H)" is the storage area for the advantageous zone clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR). The advantageous zone clear counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during an advantageous zone. The advantageous zone clear counter is set to "0" during the normal zone, and is initialized to "1500 (D)" when the game transitions to an advantageous zone. The advantageous zone clear counter is also set to decrement "1" per play during the normal zone as well as during the advantageous zone. However, the minimum value is "0." For this reason, when the advantageous zone clear counter (before decrement) is "0" during the normal zone, even if "1" is decremented, the counter used will return a value of "0" after decrement. Therefore, during the normal zone, "0" is maintained, although "1" is decremented for each play. In other words, when "0" is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter, the game is in the normal zone (non-advantageous zone).

Furthermore, when a game moves into a favorable zone, the favorable zone clear counter is set to an initial value of "1500 (D)", so the next time the game is played, the favorable zone clear counter will be "1499 (D)". The favorable zone clear counter stores a maximum initial value of "1500 (D)", so it is composed of two bytes. In other words, when a value other than "0" is stored in the favorable zone clear counter, the game is in a favorable zone.

Address "F065(H)" is the storage area for the difference counter (_SC_24HGAME). The difference counter is a counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative difference in number of sheets during the favorable period, and is also referred to as the "MY counter." The difference counter does not simply store the cumulative difference in number of sheets itself, but rather stores a "value corresponding" to the cumulative difference in number of sheets. For example, when the difference in number of sheets becomes a negative value, the value is corrected to "0(H)." Therefore, the "cumulative value of the difference in number of sheets ≠ the difference counter value." The difference counter is an increment counter that determines whether the value corresponding to the cumulative difference in number of sheets during the favorable period exceeds "2400(D)." For this reason, the difference counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference counter only needs to count the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins during at least the advantageous period, and does not need to count during the non-advantageous period (normal period). Here, when updating the difference counter value on the condition that it is in an advantageous period, it is necessary to determine for each game whether the game is in an advantageous period. For this reason, in this embodiment, the difference counter value is updated even during the non-advantageous period (normal period). In this way, the difference counter value can be updated for each game without determining whether the game is in an advantageous period, thereby simplifying the process.

Furthermore, even if the difference in number of coins becomes negative in the current game and the value corresponding to the cumulative value of the difference in number of coins becomes carry-down data, the difference counter value is updated. However, if the result of this calculation is that the difference counter is carry-down data, the difference counter value is corrected to "0".

To give a specific example (assuming the difference counter value at the start of the first game is "0 (H)"), 1st game: When the number of bets is "3" and the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFD (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)". 2nd game: When the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is "9", the difference counter after calculation is "0006 (H)" (no correction). 3rd game: When the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "0003 (H)" (no correction). 4th game: When the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is "1", the difference counter after calculation is "0001 (H)" (no correction). 5th game: When the number of bets is "3", the number of payouts is "0", the difference counter after calculation is "FFFE (H)", and the difference counter after correction is "0 (H)". Note that even if the difference number counter for the previous game was "0 (H)" and the difference number counter for the current game is "0 (H)," this is the result of a new calculation of the difference number counter value that reflects the difference number for that game, so this also constitutes an "update" of the difference number counter.

As described above, if the difference counter value after the calculation is a value that has undergone borrowing, the difference counter value is corrected to "0" (initial value "0" is set). The method for determining whether borrowing has occurred will be described later. By updating the difference counter value in this way, for example, when the number of payouts is large compared to the number of bets, i.e., when the difference in the number of coins is increasing, the difference counter value increases as the game progresses. In contrast, when the number of payouts is less than the number of bets, for example, during play during the normal interval, the difference counter value will increase by the number of payouts when a payout is made based on a small winning combination, but if the number of payouts then falls below the number of bets, it will eventually return to "0".

Address "F067(H)" is the storage area for the AT flag (_FL_AT_KND). The AT flag is a flag used to determine whether or not an AT is in progress; it is set to "0" when not in an AT and to "1" when in an AT. The AT flag is set to "1" when the AT lottery is won, which is executed in step S364 of Figure 46, which will be described later. The AT flag is also turned off when play ends in the final AT game, which is executed, for example, in the game end check process (step S415 of Figure 50), which will be described later. The AT flag is also included in the data that is cleared (initialized) when the advantageous period ends.

Address "F068 (H)" is the storage area for the AT play count counter (_CT_ART). The AT play count counter is a decrement counter that counts the number of plays during the AT (including ART). Unlike the advantageous zone clear counter, when the AT play count counter reaches "0", further counting (subtraction) is stopped. The AT play count counter is updated (subtracted) during the AT after the start switch 41 is operated (step S281 in FIG. 46) during the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46).

Also, in this embodiment, the initial value of the number of AT plays may exceed "255 (D)," so the AT play count counter is configured as a 2-byte counter. If the maximum number of AT plays is "255 (D)" or less, the AT play count counter may be configured as a 1-byte counter. When the AT starts (or when the mode transitions to AT preparation), an initial value is set in the AT play count counter. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when the AT is won. After the initial value is determined, the number of AT plays may be updated to "0" without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the number of AT plays may be increased when a specified condition is met during the AT, and the number of AT plays may be increased when a lottery for additional play is won. In this case, the increase is added to the AT play count counter. This AT play count counter is also included in the data that is cleared at the end of the advantageous period.

Note that in this embodiment, a game count management type AT is exemplified, so an AT play count counter is provided. Therefore, in the case of a difference number management type AT, an AT difference number counter is provided instead of an AT play count counter. Then, when the AT starts, an initial value for the difference number of coins that can be obtained is set. Also, when an additional win is won, the additional difference number of coins is added. Then, each time a payout is made, the difference number of coins for that play is subtracted, and when the AT difference number counter reaches "0", the AT ends.

The 48-byte memory area from addresses "F1D0(H)" to "F1FF(H)" is the stack area for use.

Here, the management information display LED 74 is also called a "role ratio monitor" or "ratio display" and is composed of four LEDs (digits 6 to 9, starting from the left). Of the four LEDs that make up the management information display LED 74, the two LEDs on the left (digits 6 and 7) are also called "identification segments" and display the type of information, and the two LEDs on the right (digits 8 and 9) are also called "ratio segments" and display the calculated ratio.

Furthermore, it may also be referred to as: Digit 6: Upper digit of identification segment, Digit 7: Lower digit of identification segment, Digit 8: Upper digit of ratio segment, Digit 9: Lower digit of ratio segment.

In the third embodiment, the management information display LED 74 repeatedly displays the following six items of information, 1) to 6), at predetermined intervals as management information. 1) Indicated feature ratio (cumulative) (7P) 2) Continuous feature ratio (6000 plays) (6y) 3) Feature ratio (6000 plays) (7y) 4) Continuous feature ratio (cumulative) (6A) 5) Feature ratio (cumulative) (7A) 6) Feature status ratio (cumulative) (5H)

For example, when displaying the cumulative ratio of reels, if the ratio is 50%, the symbol "7A." indicating the cumulative ratio of reels is displayed in the identification segment, and "50" is displayed in the ratio segment. Here, "cumulative" refers to the total sum of the values counted up to that point. In this embodiment, counting continues until the total reaches at least 175,000 plays. When the total is less than 175,000 plays, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by flashing. When the total is 175,000 plays or more, the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment, for example, by lighting up. The cumulative total continues to add up even after the total reaches 175,000 plays or more until it reaches the value (upper limit) that can be stored in a specified address of RWM 53. Furthermore, "6,000 plays" refers to the total number of plays over 15 sets, with one set consisting of 400 plays.

The "instruction-included feature ratio" is the sum of the number of payouts when a feature is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts. Note that for slot machines that do not have feature units, the "instruction-included feature ratio" is the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, divided by the total number of payouts. The sum of the number of payouts when a feature is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated is counted by the instruction-included feature counter.

Regarding the "number of payouts in games in which the instruction function is activated," when a 15-coin role is won, for example, based on the stop switch 42 being operated in the displayed push order during a game in which the instruction function is activated, the payout number "15" is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. For example, in a game in which the small role condition devices A1 to A6 are activated during a 1BB game and the instruction function is activated (displaying the correct push order (the push order that will win a 15-coin role)), when the stop switch 42 is operated in the displayed push order (the correct push order) and a 15-coin role (any of small role 01 to small role 06) is won, the payout number "15" is added to the instruction-included role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

In contrast, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different press order from the displayed press order, resulting in, for example, a three-coin winning combination, the number of payouts "3" is added to the instruction-included device counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter. For example, in a game in which the small win condition devices A1 to A6 are activated and the instruction function is activated (displaying the correct press order), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different press order from the displayed press order (incorrect press order), resulting in a three-coin winning combination (any of small wins 13 to 24), the number of payouts "3" is added to the instruction-included device counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter.

Furthermore, in a game in which the instruction function is activated, if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different press order from the displayed press order and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is achieved), the instruction-included feature counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will have the same values as in the previous game. For example, if the stop switch 42 is operated in an incorrect press order, no winning combination will be achieved (no winning combination will be achieved). Then, in a game in which the small win condition devices A1 to A6 are activated and the instruction function is activated (displaying the correct press order), if the stop switch 42 is operated in a different press order from the displayed press order (incorrect press order) and a winning combination is missed (when no winning combination is achieved), the instruction-included feature counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter will have the same values as in the previous game.

In this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed during a game in which the instruction function is activated because the stop switch 42 is operated in a different press order from the displayed press order, a process is executed to add the payout number "0" to the instruction-invoked role counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter, so that the values of both counters are the same as in the previous game. It is also possible to configure the process to skip the process of adding the payout number when a winning combination is missed, but in this case, a process to determine whether the winning combination was missed or not must be inserted before the process to add the payout number, and if it is determined that the winning combination was missed, the process of adding the payout number must be skipped. This increases the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing burden on the main CPU 55. Therefore, in this embodiment, when a winning combination is missed, a process to add the payout number "0" to both counters is executed. This allows the values of both counters to be set to the same value as the previous game without the need to determine whether a winning combination has been missed, thereby reducing the amount of ROM 54 used and the processing burden on the main CPU 55.

"Continuous feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when the first-class special feature (RB) is activated to the total number of payouts. For example, if the total number of payouts in "6000" games is "2000 coins," and the number of payouts when the "first-class special feature (RB)" is activated is "500 coins," the "Continuous feature ratio (
6000 games) will be 25(%).

"Feature ratio" refers to the ratio of the number of payouts when a feature is activated to the total number of payouts. Here, "features" include the above-mentioned first-class special features (RB), as well as second-class special features (CB), MB (also known as 2BB. Second-class feature continuous activation device. CB activates continuously), and SB (single bonus).

The "reel status ratio" is the sum of the number of plays when a reel is activated and the number of plays when the reel continuous operation device is activated, divided by the total number of plays. The sum of the number of plays when a reel is activated and the number of plays when the reel continuous operation device is activated is counted by the reel status counter. Note that for gaming machines that do not have the function corresponding to any of the above six items, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--". For example, if a machine is not equipped with "RB (Type 1 special reel)", there is no continuous reel ratio, so when the ratio display numbers "2" and "4" are displayed, the ratio segment will be displayed as "--".

According to the regulations, the ratio of instructed reels should be set to less than 70%, the reel ratio should also be set to less than 70%, the continuous reel ratio should be set to less than 60%, and the reel state ratio should be set to less than 50%. By looking at the information displayed on the management information display LED 74, you can check whether or not the settings are within the legal range.

Furthermore, various ratio information may be configured to be output as an external signal so that various ratio information can be grasped by devices external to the slot machine 10, such as the hall computer 200. For example, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may be configured to output, as an external signal, the instruction-based feature ratio data, consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data, feature ratio (cumulative) data, and feature status ratio data, etc., displayed as external signals. In this case, if a predetermined number of plays (e.g., "17,500 plays" for consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data and feature ratio (cumulative) data, or "175,000 plays" for instruction-based feature ratio data and feature status ratio data) is not met, predetermined information different from the current ratio information (e.g., "FF (H)") may be output as an external signal. When the predetermined number of plays is met, various ratio information may be output as an external signal. Furthermore, advantageous zone ratio data not displayed on the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) may also be configured to be output as an external signal. In this case, a memory area for a favorable zone play count counter that counts the number of plays in the favorable zone and favorable zone ratio data that indicates the ratio of the number of plays in the favorable zone to the total number of plays may be provided outside the area used by RWM 53.

Figures 34 and 35 are diagrams showing the addresses, label names, number of bytes, and names of data stored outside the used area of RWM 53 in the third embodiment. As shown in Figure 32, addresses outside the used area are set in the range of "F210 (H)" to "F3FF (H)." Note that the data shown in Figures 34 and 35 is for use in explaining the third embodiment, and data stored outside the used area of RWM 53 is not limited to this.

The 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" increments the number of games played, with every 400 games being a division. This 400-game counter cycles between "0" and "399(D)," and is incremented by "1" with each game. If "1" is added when the value of the 400-game counter is "399(D)," the value of the 400-game counter will become "0."

Note that, conversely to the above, the 400 game counter may be set to an initial value of "399 (D)" and decremented by "1" for each game. In this case, when the value of the 400 game counter reaches "0," it is determined that 400 games have been played. If the value of the 400 game counter is decremented by "1" when it is "0," the 400 game counter is set to its initial value of "399 (D)."

The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" specifies which ring buffer the number of medals paid out in a given game should be added to. Specifically, address "F212(H)" stores a ring buffer number between "0" and "14(D)."

Addresses "F213(H)" to "F230(H)" are the storage areas for total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are made up of 15 ring buffers. Each total payout ring buffer consists of 2 bytes. For example, total payout ring buffer 0 consists of addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)", with address "F213(H)" being the lower digit and address "F214(H)" being the upper digit. In Figures 34 and 35, for storage areas with a byte count of 2 or more, the lowest address number is displayed.

One ring buffer stores the total number of medals paid out over 400 games. For example, the payout numbers for games 1 through 400 are stored at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," and the payout numbers for games 401 through 800 are stored at addresses "F215(H)" and "F216(H)." Whether the 400th game has been played is determined by referencing the 400-game counter at address "F210(H)" mentioned above. The ring buffer number at address "F212(H)" is used to determine which ring buffer value to add (update) the number of medals paid out during that game.

Then, when the total payout numbers for the first through 400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)," the total payout numbers for the 5601st through 6000th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 14 at addresses "F22F(H)" and "F230(H)." Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)" is cleared, and the payout numbers for the 6001st through 6400th games are stored in total payout ring buffer 0 at addresses "F213(H)" and "F214(H)."

Note that total payout ring buffers 0-14 each consist of 2 bytes. If the maximum payout number per game is 15, the maximum number of coins that can be paid out over 400 games is 6,000, which can be stored in a memory capacity of 2 bytes. This also applies to the continuous feature payout ring buffers 0-14 and the feature payout ring buffers 0-14, which will be described later.

Furthermore, addresses "F231(H)" to "F24E(H)" are the storage areas for consecutive payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Furthermore, addresses "F24F(H)" to "F26C(H)" are the storage areas for payout ring buffers 0 to 14.

The total play count counter at addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)" is a counter that stores the number of plays (cumulative) and is composed of 3 bytes. The total play count counter is composed of 3 bytes because it is necessary to count "175,000(D)" plays as the cumulative number of plays. The total play count counter continues counting even if the number of plays exceeds "175,000(D)" plays, and stops counting when the 3 bytes are full ("FFFFFF(H)").

The instruction-included feature counter at addresses "F270(H)" to "F272(H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts when the feature is activated and the number of payouts in games that activate the instruction function, and is composed of 3 bytes. The total payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F273(H)" to "F275(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of medals paid out over 6000 games. Even if 15 medals are paid out per game over 6000 games, this would be a total of 90,000 medals, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (the same applies to the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter and the feature payout (6000 times) counter, described below).

The consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F276(H)" to "F278(H)" counts the number of payouts when consecutive feature operations are performed over 6000 games. The feature payout (6000 times) counter at addresses "F279(H)" to "F27B(H)" counts the number of payouts when consecutive feature operations are performed over 6000 games.

When a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are not operating and the reels are not operating, only the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated (incremented); the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are not updated. When a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are not operating and the reels are operating, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the reels payout (6000 times) counter are updated; the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter is not updated. Furthermore, when a payout occurs when the consecutive reels are operating, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the reels payout (6000 times) counter, and the consecutive reels payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter, and feature payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 plays. First, when medals are paid out between the first play and the 6000th play, they are stored (added) in the total payout (6000 times) counter, consecutive feature payout (6000 times) counter, and feature payout (6000 times) counter depending on whether the consecutive feature is activated or not, and whether the feature is activated or not, respectively. At the end of the 6000th play, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and feature ratio (6000 times) are calculated. After this calculation, the number of payouts for each of the 400 games from the current game until "400 x 15 - 1" games (5,999 games) before "400 x 15 - 400" games (5,600 games) before that game is subtracted from the total payout (6,000 times) counter value, the consecutive bonus payout (6,000 times) counter value, and the bonus payout (6,000 times) counter value, respectively.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is subtracted from the total payout (6000th) counter value. The value of total payout ring buffer 0 (F213(H) to F214(H)) is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts from the 6001st game to the 6400th game is added to total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000th) counter.

Similarly, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 (F231(H) to F232(H)) is subtracted from the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts during continuous feature operation from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the continuous feature payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter.

Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th play is reached, the value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 (F24F(H) to F250(H)) is subtracted from the reel payout (6000 times) counter value. The value of the reel payout ring buffer 0 is then cleared. Furthermore, the number of payouts when the reel is activated from the 6001st play to the 6400th play is added to the reel payout ring buffer 0 and the reel payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the payout numbers for the following number of games: Total payout ring buffer 0: "1st game" to "400th game" Total payout ring buffer 1: "401st game" to "800th game" Total payout ring buffer 2: "801st game" to "1200th game" Total payout ring buffer 3: "1201st game"
"1600" play Total payout ring buffer 4: "1601" play to "2000" play Total payout ring buffer 5: "2001" play to "2400" play Total payout ring buffer 6: "2401" play to "2800" play Total payout ring buffer 7: "2801" play to "3200" play Total payout ring buffer 8: "3201" play to "3600" play Total payout ring buffer 9: "3601" play to "4000" play Total payout ring buffer 10: "4001" play to "4400" play Total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" play to "4800" play Total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" play to "5200" play Total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game point to "5600" game point Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game point to "6000" game point Total payout (6000 times) counter: "1" game point to "6000" game point

Assuming that the 6000th game has been played, all of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 will contain the number of coins paid out for each game. Furthermore, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter will match the sum of the values stored in total payout ring buffers 0 to 14. Here, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ1 and the value stored in total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1, then the following calculation is performed: Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ1 - Z1. Furthermore, the following calculation is performed: Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (cleared). In other words, the process executes a subtraction of the value "Z1" of the total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts over the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago, from the value "Σ1" stored in the total payout (6000 games) counter.

Next, a process is executed to clear the value "Z1" of total payout ring buffer 0, which stores the number of payouts during the 400 games from 5999 (400 x 15 - 1) games ago to 5600 (400 x 15 - 400) games ago. After this calculation, the 6001st game begins. If there is a payout between the 6001st game and the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that no special devices were activated between the 6001st game and the 6400th game), it is added to total payout ring buffer 0 and to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming the 6,400th play has ended, the total payout ring buffer will store the payout numbers for the following play periods: Total Payout Ring Buffer 0: "6001" play period to "6,400" play period Total Payout Ring Buffer 1: "401" play period to "800" play period Total Payout Ring Buffer 14: "5601" play period to "6,000" play period Total Payout (6,000 times) Counter: "401" play period to "6,000" play period and "6001" play period to "6,400" play period

Then, as above, if the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this point is Σ2 and the value stored in total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2, then Total payout (6000 times) counter = Σ2 - Z2. Then, Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0. After this calculation, the 6401st game is started. If there is a payout between the 6401st game and the 6800th game (here, it is assumed that no special devices were activated between the 6401st game and the 6800th game), it is added to Total payout ring buffer 1 and to the Total payout (6000 times) counter. The above process is repeated.

Furthermore, while the total payout ring buffer and total payout (6000 times) counter have been explained, the same processing as above is performed when a special feature is activated or when a continuous special feature is activated. Specifically, when a special feature is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are replaced with special feature payout ring buffers 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the special feature payout (6000 times) counter. Note that when a special feature is activated, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

Similarly, when a continuous feature is activated, the total payout ring buffers 0-14 are replaced with continuous feature payout ring buffers 0-14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous feature payout (6000 times) counter. When a continuous feature is activated, one of the total payout ring buffers 0-14, one of the feature payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the feature payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.

The total payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)" counts the cumulative number of payouts, and counts the total number of payouts over at least "175,000(D)" games. Similarly, the continuous feature payout (cumulative) counter at addresses "F27F(H)" to "F281(H)" counts the cumulative number of payouts when continuous features are activated, and similarly to the above, counts the number of payouts when continuous features are activated over at least "175,000(D)" games.

Furthermore, similarly, the feature payout (cumulative) counters at addresses "F282(H)" to "F284(H)" count the cumulative number of payouts when the feature is activated, and similarly to the above, they count the number of payouts when the feature is activated over at least "175,000 (D)" games. Note that the three types of payout (6,000 times) counters mentioned above subtract the number of payouts from 5,999 games ago to 5,600 games ago every 400 games, but these three types of payout (cumulative) counters do not subtract values.

Note that the three types of payout (cumulative) counters are each made up of three bytes. For example, if 15 coins are paid out per 175,000 games, the result is "175,000 x 15 = 2,625,000," which is smaller than the value that can be stored in three bytes. Therefore, it can be stored in a memory capacity of three bytes.

The reel status counter at addresses "F285(H)" to "F287(H)" is a counter that counts the total number of plays when a reel is activated and the total number of plays when the reel continuous operating device is activated, and is composed of 3 bytes. The instruction-included reel ratio data at address "F288(H)" is a memory area that stores the instruction-included reel ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of payouts when a reel is activated and the number of payouts in games where the instruction function is activated, to the total number of payouts.

The consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F289(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 games. The feature ratio (6000 times) data at address "F28A(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when features are activated to the total number of payouts over 6000 games.

The consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28B(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when consecutive features are activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of plays. The feature ratio (cumulative) data at address "F28C(H)" is a memory area that stores the ratio of the number of payouts when features are activated to the total number of payouts over the total number of plays.

The reel status ratio data at address "F28D(H)" is a memory area that stores the reel status ratio, which is the ratio of the total number of plays when the reel is activated to the total number of plays when the reel continuous operating device is activated. The calculation result buffer at address "F28E(H)" is a memory area that temporarily stores the calculation results during the ratio calculation process.

The count upper limit flag at address "F28F(H)" is turned on when the storage capacity of the total number of plays counter (addresses "F26D(H)" to "F26F(H)") or the total payout (cumulative) counter (addresses "F27C(H)" to "F27E(H)") reaches its upper limit (3 bytes full, i.e., "FFFFFF(H)"). Of the 1-byte (8-bit) data, bit "D0" is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of plays, and bit "D1" is assigned to the upper limit flag for the number of payouts. Bits "D2" to "D7" are unused in the third embodiment. For example, when the total number of plays counter has reached its upper limit, the value of the count upper limit flag is "00000001(B)."

The payout limit buffer at address "F290(H)" is a memory area that stores a value to make the total payout (cumulative) counter three bytes full when the number of payouts for that game exceeds three bytes when added to the total payout (cumulative) counter. For example, if the total payout (cumulative) counter value before payouts for that game is "FFFFFE(H)" and the number of payouts for that game is "8(H)", adding "8(H)" to the counter value will cause an overflow. Therefore, to prevent the total payout (cumulative) counter value from overflowing, a value is calculated to make it three bytes full, and the result of this calculation is stored in the payout limit buffer. In the above example, "FFFFFE(H)" + "1(H)" = "FFFFFF(H)", so "1(H)" is stored in the payout limit buffer.

The blinking request flag at address "F291 (H)" is a flag used to identify targets that meet the blinking display conditions when displaying identification segments and ratio segments. For the instructed role ratio, continuous role ratio (cumulative), role ratio (cumulative), and role etc. state ratio, the identification segment is controlled to blink when the total number of plays (value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "175,000". For the continuous role ratio (6,000 times) and role ratio (6,000 times), the identification segment is controlled to blink when the total number of plays (value stored in the total number of plays counter) is less than "6,000".

The indicated feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature state ratio should ideally be ratios over 175,000 games (to reduce variation), but if the ratios are calculated based on fewer than 175,000 games played, the identification segment will flash to indicate this. Similarly, the consecutive feature ratio (6,000 times) and feature ratio (6,000 times) should ideally be ratios over 6,000 games played, but if the ratios are calculated based on fewer than 6,000 games played, the identification segment will flash to indicate this.

Furthermore, for the instructed reel ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), and reel ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "70" or greater, the ratio segment is controlled to flash. Furthermore, for the continuous reel ratio (cumulative) and continuous reel ratio (6000 times), when the displayed value is "60" or greater, the ratio segment is controlled to flash. Furthermore, for the reel state ratio, when the displayed value is "50" or greater, the ratio segment is controlled to flash.

The above settings are made because the slot machine of this embodiment is designed so that the instructed feature ratio and feature ratio are less than 70%, the continuous feature ratio is less than 60%, and the feature state ratio is less than 50%. If the actual measured value is not within the range of the designed values, the ratio segment will flash to notify you.

In addition, in the blinking request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the blinking flag of the ratio of commanded reels, the D1 bit corresponds to the blinking flag of the ratio of consecutive reels (6000 times), ..., the D7 bit corresponds to the blinking flag of 175000 times. For example, when the calculated ratio of commanded reels is less than "70", the D0 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "0", and when it is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the blinking request flag becomes "1". Similarly, when the calculated ratio of consecutive reels (6000 times) is "
If the value is less than "70", the D1 bit of the blinking request flag is "0", and if the value is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the blinking request flag is "1".

Furthermore, when the calculated reel state ratio is less than "50", the D5 bit of the blinking request flag is "0", and when it is "50" or greater, the D5 bit of the blinking request flag is "1". Furthermore, when the total number of plays counter value is less than "6000", the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when it is "6000" or greater, the D6 bit of the blinking request flag is "0". Furthermore, when the total number of plays counter value is less than "175000", the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is "1", and when it is "175000" or greater, the D7 bit of the blinking request flag is "0".

The ratio display number at address "F292 (H)" is a memory area that stores a number corresponding to the ratio displayed in the interrupt process. When the ratio displayed in the interrupt process is the instructed role ratio, "1" is stored in the ratio display number at address "F292 (H)". Similarly, when it is the continuous role ratio (6000 times), "2" is stored, when it is the role ratio (6000 times), "3" is stored, when it is the continuous role ratio (cumulative), "4" is stored, when it is the role ratio (cumulative), "5" is stored, and when it is the role etc. state ratio, "6" is stored.

The blinking switch flag at address "F293(H)" is a flag used to determine whether the identification segment or ratio segment is on or off when blinking during the interrupt process. In this embodiment, when blinking, the flag is set to alternate between on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds. The blinking switch flag is set to "0" (a value indicating on) for the approximately 0.3 seconds that the segment is on, and to "1" (a value indicating off) for the approximately 0.3 seconds that the segment is off.

The display switching time at address "F294 (H)" is a counter that counts the approximately 5 seconds it takes to display one ratio, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, the following is displayed repeatedly: display of the reel ratio with instructions (approximately 5 seconds) → display of the continuous reel ratio (6000 times) (approximately 5 seconds) → ... → display of the reel ratio (cumulative) (approximately 5 seconds) → display of the reel status ratio (approximately 5 seconds) → reel ratio with instructions (approximately 5 seconds) → ... For this reason, the display switching time is stored to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have passed, i.e., whether the time to switch the displayed ratio has been reached.

As mentioned above, the blinking switching time at address "F296(H)" is a counter that counts approximately 0.3 seconds when the identification segment or ratio segment is blinking, and is updated by "1" each time an interrupt process is performed.

Address "F297(H)" is a 1-byte memory area where LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is stored. LED display counter 2 is a counter that determines which of digits 6 to 9 will be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt. Each bit of LED display counter 2 is assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 6 signal, bit D1 is the digit 7 signal, bit D2 is the digit 8 signal, and bit D3 is the digit 4 signal. Then, during one interrupt process, dynamic lighting of digits 6 to 9 is performed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in LED display counter 2 is lit.

In the third embodiment, the LED display counter 2 has an initial value of "00001000(B)." Then, as interrupts "1" → "2" → ... progress (at each interrupt), the LED display counter 2 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right. Furthermore, at the interrupt following interrupt "4," the LED display counter 2 shifts one digit to the right, becoming "00000000(B)." At that interrupt, the LED display counter 2 is initialized, setting it to "00001000(B)." As a result, the LED display counter 2 cycles through the following values for each interrupt: "4" → "3" → "2" → "1" → "4" → ... In other words, four interrupts make up one cycle.

From the above, the values of LED display counter 2 are as follows: "N" interrupt: 00001000 (B) "N+1" interrupt: 00000100 (B) "N+2" interrupt: 00000010 (B) "N+3" interrupt: 00000001 (B) "N+4" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00001000 (B) (initialized; same value as "N" interrupt) "N+5" interrupt: 00000100 (B) :

In the third embodiment, four interrupts constitute one cycle, dynamically lighting digits 6 to 9. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 2 is "00001000 (B)," the digit 9 signal is output. The output of the digit 9 signal enables digit 9 (the lower digit of the ratio segment) to light up. At the time of the next interrupt processing, the LED display counter becomes "00000100 (B)," the digit 8 signal is output, and digit 8 (the upper digit of the ratio segment) can be lighted up. Furthermore, when the LED display counter is "00000010 (B)," the digit 7 signal is output, enabling digit 7 (the lower digit of the identification segment) to light up, and when the LED display counter is "00000001 (B)," the digit 6 signal is output, enabling digit 6 (the upper digit of the identification segment) to light up.

The RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" is a memory area where the RWM checksum data calculated by the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is stored during power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN). Here, "RWM checksum data" is also referred to as "complement data," "error detection data," or "error detection information," and is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)"). In other words, if you add the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)"), the result will be "0". In other words, the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" will be "0".

The power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" is a flag used to determine whether the power-off processing was executed successfully, and is stored during power-off processing. If the power-off processing was executed successfully, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF); if the power-off processing was not executed successfully, a value other than "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF).

The power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) at address "F2A2(H)" is a flag used to determine whether the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power failure processing completion flag are normal, and is stored during program start processing. If the RWM53 checksum calculation result is normal (the sum of the data in the RWM35's used area and outside the used area (excluding "F2A0(H)") plus the RWM checksum data (complement data) of "F2A0(H)" is "0") and the power failure processing completion flag is normal ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored as the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). On the other hand, if at least one of the RWM53 checksum calculation result and the power failure processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored as the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON).

The stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (_SB_STACK2) at address "F2A3(H)" is a memory area (buffer) where the stack pointer of the used area is stored (saved) when a program (second program) outside the used area is executed. Here, "stack area" refers to the memory area of RWM53 where data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored). Also, the "stack pointer" is used to hold the address indicating the save (storage) destination of data in the stack area.

Then, when a program outside the used area (second program) is executed, the stack pointer of the used area is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, and when the program outside the used area (second program) is terminated and the program in the used area (first program) is returned to, the stack pointer of the used area is restored from stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2.

The 24-byte memory area from addresses "F3E8(H)" to "F3FF(H)" is a stack area outside the used area.

Next, we will explain how to initialize data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53. Data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53 is maintained without being initialized simply by cutting off/restarting the power supply (turning the power on/off, turning the power switch 11 on/off). Furthermore, data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM53 is maintained without being initialized even when recovering from a recoverable error state.

Furthermore, suppose an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 on), and a power failure recovery abnormality is determined. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 described below becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes in the event of a power failure recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, step S2712 in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. For this reason, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 (described later), initialization is performed on the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM 53, as well as the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"). When recovering from an unrecoverable error state, initialization of RWM 53 is also performed in the same range as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined.

Furthermore, suppose an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state, and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will be "Yes," and step S2712 will be "No," so the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes when power failure recovery is normal is set. Therefore, steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 perform initialization of addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

Therefore, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized. In other words, address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of the RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, if the power is turned off when the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 will start displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Also, suppose the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power recovery is normal. In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 is "No," step S2710 is "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power recovery is normal is set. Therefore, steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 perform initialization of addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM 53's used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area.

In other words, address "F292 (H)" (ratio display number) of RWM 53 is initialized. Therefore, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal, the control information display LED 74 will begin displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

Therefore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed to the same extent as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal. Therefore, even if you do not have the setting key or do not transition to the setting change state, you can initialize the RWM 53 to the same extent as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power-off recovery is normal.

Furthermore, at the end of the favorable zone, initialization processing is performed on a predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 where data related to the favorable zone is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33). Even when the favorable zone ends, address "F292(H)" of RWM53 is not initialized. For this reason, even if the favorable zone ends when the control information display LED74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") and initialization processing is performed on the predetermined range of the usage area of RWM53 where data related to the favorable zone is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33), the display item displayed on the control information display LED74 after the role ratio (cumulative) data will be role, etc. status ratio data (ratio display number "6").

Also, suppose the power is turned off, then turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and it is determined that the power recovery was normal. In other words, suppose the power was turned on/off as usual. In this case, the RWM 53 initialization process is not performed, so the data in the RWM 53's used area and outside of its used area at the time of power loss is maintained. For example, if the power is turned off when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and it is determined that the power recovery was normal, the state at the time of power loss will be restored. Therefore, the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, suppose the power is turned off, and then turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 in the OFF state, and a power failure recovery abnormality is determined. In this case, step S2708 in FIG. 41 returns "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2801, where unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed (an unrecoverable error state is reached), and therefore initialization processing of the RWM 53 is not executed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801 is executed, interrupt processing is prohibited (step S1490 in FIG. 43), and the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off (step S1495 in FIG. 43). For example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and it is determined that a power failure recovery abnormality has occurred, interrupt processing is prohibited, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off, and the control information display LED 74 remains off.

For example, in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." In this case, if the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, and a power failure recovery error is determined, "8888" will be displayed on the management information display LED 74.

Also, for example, even if the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) of step S2801, interrupt processing may not be prohibited, and the output of output ports 0 to 7 may be maintained without being turned off. In this case, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned off, even if a power interruption recovery abnormality is determined, the control information display LED 74 will first display the role ratio (cumulative) data, and then display the role status ratio data (ratio display number "6"), which is the next display item after the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Figure 36 (A) is a diagram showing various LEDs on a display board 75 in the third embodiment, and Figure 36 (B) is a diagram showing a management information display LED 74 in the third embodiment. As shown in Figure 36 (A), in the third embodiment, a credit number display LED 76, an acquired number display LED 78, and a status display LED 79 are provided on the display board 75. The credit number display LED 76 is composed of digit 1 (high-order digit) and digit 2 (low-order digit), and the acquired number display LED 78 is composed of digit 3 (high-order digit) and digit 4 (low-order digit). Digits 1 to 4 use 7-segment displays without dot segments. Note that digits 1 to 4 may be configured using 7-segment displays with dot segments, but the dot segments may not be illuminated.

Furthermore, the status display LEDs 79 include a 1 bet display LED 79a, a 2 bet display LED 79b, a 3 bet display LED 79c, a start of game display LED 79d, a deposit display LED 79e, and a replay display LED 79f, which are composed of six LEDs. Furthermore, the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not shown in Figure 36, but is composed of a segment P of digit 4 as shown in Figure 37. Furthermore, the setting value display LED 73 is not shown in Figure 36, but is provided on the main control board 50 as shown in Figure 1, and is composed of digit 5. Furthermore, digit 5 uses a 7-segment display without dot segments. Note that digit 5 may also be composed of a 7-segment display with dot segments, with the dot segments not illuminated.

As shown in Figure 36 (B), the management information display LED 74 is composed of digit 6 (high-order digit of identification segment), digit 7 (low-order digit of identification segment), digit 8 (high-order digit of ratio segment), and digit 9 (low-order digit of ratio segment). Digits 6 to 9 use a 7-segment display equipped with a dot segment (segment P). Furthermore, segment P of digit 7 (low-order digit of identification segment) functions as a digit separator display LED. The digit separator display LED is used to clearly indicate the separation between the information type (identification segment) and the ratio (ratio segment).

Figure 37 is a diagram explaining the details of the digits and segments in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the 7-segment display of digits 1 to 5 itself is composed of segments A to G, and does not have a dot segment (segment P). However, segment P of digit 1 constitutes the game start indicator LED 79d, segment P of digit 2 constitutes the insertion indicator LED 79e, segment P of digit 3 constitutes the replay indicator LED 79f, and segment P of digit 4 constitutes the advantageous zone indicator LED 77.

Figure 38 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 7 in the third embodiment. The third embodiment is characterized by having two output ports (output ports 3 and 6) that output digit signals, and two output ports (output ports 4 and 7) that output segment signals. The third embodiment has digits 1 to 9. The segment for digits 1 to 5 is segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P), and the segment for digits 6 to 9 is segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P).

In the third embodiment, output port 3 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals), and output port 6 is an output port that outputs digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals). In the third embodiment, output port 4 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals), and output port 7 is an output port that outputs segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals). When digits 1 to 5 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 3, and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4. When digits 6 to 9 are to be illuminated, a digit signal is output from output port 6, and a segment 2 signal is output from output port 7.

Next, external signals will be explained. An "external signal" is a signal that is output to an external device (such as the hall computer 200 or a data counter installed in the hall) outside the slot machine 10 via the external centralized terminal board 100. As shown in Figure 38, in the third embodiment, external signals 1 to 6 are output from output port 5. Specifically, a "setting change signal" is assigned to bit D0 (external signal 1) of output port 5, and a "setting confirmation signal" is assigned to bit D1 (external signal 2). Bits D2 to D5 are also assigned to the signals shown in Figure 38.

The "setting change signal" is an external signal indicating that a setting change is in progress and that a setting change has been made. The setting change signal is output continuously during the setting change and until the end of one game after the setting change (when all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process (step S294 in FIG. 46) has been completed). This is to ensure that the outside world is notified that a setting change has been made. When the D0 bit of the output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the setting change signal is on (the setting is being changed or one game after the setting change has not yet ended). When the D0 bit is "0", this indicates that the setting change signal is off (the setting is not being changed and one game after the setting change has not yet ended).

The "settings checking signal" is an external signal that indicates that settings are being checked. The settings checking signal is output while settings are being checked. When the D1 bit of output port 5 is "1", it indicates that the settings checking signal is on (settings are being checked), and when the D1 bit is "0", it indicates that the settings checking signal is off (settings are not being checked).

"Fraud detection signal 1" is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when door switch 17 is on (when the opening of front door 12 is detected), fraud detection signal 1 is output. When the D2 bit of output port 5 is "1", this indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is on (door switch 17 is on, front door 12 is open), and when the D2 bit is "0", this indicates that fraud detection signal 1 is off (door switch 17 is off, front door 12 is closed).

"Fraud Detection Signal 2," like Fraud Detection Signal 1, is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when a recoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 2 is output. When the D3 bit of output port 5 is "1," this indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is on (a recoverable error state exists), and when the D3 bit is "0," this indicates that the fraud detection signal 2 is off (no recoverable error state exists).

"Fraud Detection Signal 3," like Fraud Detection Signals 1 and 2, is an external signal that indicates the possibility of fraud. For example, when an irrecoverable error state occurs, the fraud detection signal 3 is output. When the D4 bit of output port 5 is "1," this indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is on (an irrecoverable error state exists), and when the D4 bit is "0," this indicates that the fraud detection signal 3 is off (no irrecoverable error state exists).

The "security signal" is an external signal that indicates that the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is on. When the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output, the security signal is also output at the same time. When the D5 bit of output port 5 is "1", this indicates that the security signal is on (the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or any of the fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output), and when the D5 bit is "0", this indicates that the security signal is off (none of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, or fraud detection signals 1-3 is being output).

As described above, the setting change signal continues to be output until the end of the first game after the setting change. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output. Specifically, for example, assume that the setting change state is ended and medals (gaming media, game value) can be bet. At this time, if the number of bets is "0" and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, both the setting change signal and the setting confirmation signal are output. Furthermore, if any of the setting change signal, setting confirmation signal, and fraud detection signals 1 to 3 is being output, a security signal is also output. Therefore, if the setting confirmation state is entered before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit, D1 bit, and D5 bit of output port 5 are turned on ("1"). If the setting confirmation state is then ended before the end of the first game after the setting change, the D0 bit and D5 bit of output port 5 remain on ("1"), and the D1 bit is turned off ("0"). Then, when the first game after the setting change ends, the D0 and D5 bits of output port 5 also turn off ("0").

Next, we will explain the lighting control of digits 1 to 9. The lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73) is controlled by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Figure 50, which will be described later. Furthermore, the LED display control process (I_LED_OUT) is a process performed by the program in the usage area (first program).

In contrast, the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) is controlled by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) in Figure 52, which will be described later. The ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is also processed by a program outside the usage area (second program). In the third embodiment, different output ports are used for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

Figure 39 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, there are digits 1 to 9, with the segments for digits 1 to 5 being segment 1 (segments 1A to 1P) and the segments for digits 6 to 9 being segment 2 (segments 2A to 2P). Segments 1A to 1G of digit 1 form the upper digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 1 forms the game start display LED 79d. Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 2 form the lower digits of the credit number display LED 76, and segment 1P of digit 2 forms the insertion display LED 79e.

Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 3 form the upper digits of the acquisition count display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 3 forms the replay display LED 79f. Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 4 form the lower digits of the acquisition count display LED 78, and segment 1P of digit 4 forms the advantageous zone display LED 77. Furthermore, segments 1A to 1G of digit 5 form the setting value display LED 73. Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 6 form the upper digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 7 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and segment 2P of digit 7 forms the digit separator display LED. Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 8 form the upper digits of the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74. Furthermore, segments 2A to 2G of digit 9 form the lower digits of the identification segment of the management information display LED 74.

Figure 40 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) and the signal output from output port 3 in the third embodiment. Also, Figure 40 (B) is a diagram showing the relationship between LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and the signal output from output port 6 in the third embodiment. Furthermore, Figure 40 (C) is a diagram showing the LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) in the third embodiment. In this example, LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) (address "F051(H)" in Figure 33) is provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in Figure 35) is provided outside the usage area of RWM 53.

LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is a counter that outputs digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals at each interrupt, with one cycle consisting of five interrupts. LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) is a counter that outputs digit 6 signals through digit 9 signals at each interrupt, with one cycle consisting of four interrupts. In this way, in the third embodiment, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 through 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 through 9 are provided separately and independently. Furthermore, because the cycles of the two LED display counters are different, the lighting timing of digits 1 through 5 differs from the lighting timing of digits 6 through 9.

The LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP) is data indicating which digits are allowed to be lit, and is stored at address "F052 (H)" in the RWM53's used area (see Figure 33). As shown in Figure 40 (C), the LED display request flag is 8-bit data, with bit D0 corresponding to the digit 1 signal, bit D1 corresponding to the digit 2 signal, ..., and bit D4 corresponding to the digit 5 signal. Each bit of the LED display request flag corresponds to a bit of output port 3 shown in Figure 38. Also, as shown in Figure 40 (C), digits 1 to 4 can be lit during normal operation (digit 5 is off), and digit 5 can be lit during setting changes and setting confirmations (digits 1 to 4 are off). Note that "normal operation" refers to game standby and game play.

Then, during interrupt processing, the value of the LED display counter 1 in the usage area is ANDed with the value of the LED display request flag, and the digit corresponding to the bit that becomes "1" becomes the digit that lights up during this interrupt processing. For example, if the value of the LED display counter 1 in the usage area is "00001000 (B)" and the value of the LED display request flag is "00001111 (B) (normal)," ANDing the two results in "00001000 (B)," and only the digit 4 signal becomes "1." Also, during setting changes and setting confirmations, at the interrupt timing when the digit 5 signal is turned on (LED display counter 1 in the usage area is "00010000 (B)"), a segment signal is output from output port 4, enabling the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) to light up.

Next, we will explain recoverable and non-recoverable errors. A "recoverable error" is an error that can be recovered without turning the power on and off. Examples of recoverable errors include: "HP" error: medal jam (backup) error in the hopper 35; "HE" error: medal empty error in the hopper 35; "H0" error: abnormality in the payout sensor 37 of the hopper 35; "CE" error: medal backup error in the medal selector; "CP" error: medal illegal passage error in the medal selector; "CH" error: abnormality in the passage sensor 46 located in the medal selector; "C0" error: abnormality in the insertion sensor 44 located in the medal selector; "C1" error: abnormal medal insertion error; "FE" error: sub-tank full; "dE" error: front door 12 open. Note that recoverable errors are not limited to those listed above.

In step S457 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 (described below), a read process is performed on the input port 51, and input signals from various switches (such as the start switch 41) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44) are read. Various data (level data, rising edge data, falling edge data) are then generated based on the read input signals and stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. Then, in step S463 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR), an input error check process is performed, and the above data is referenced. If any recoverable error is detected, an error detection flag indicating the detected recoverable error is stored at a specified address in the RWM 53.

Furthermore, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the error detection flag is checked before the operation of the start switch 41 is detected and after all the reels 31 have stopped. If any bit of the error detection flag is "1," it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, and the game is stopped and a recoverable error state is established. If a recoverable error occurs between the time the start switch 41 is operated and the time all the reels 31 have stopped when a specified number of medals have been bet, the game may continue until all the reels 31 have stopped, and after all the reels 31 have stopped, the game may be stopped and a recoverable error state established before the medal payout process is executed. Furthermore, when it is determined that a recoverable error has occurred, the winning count display LED 78 displays error information about the recoverable error that has occurred. This error information display (error display) is performed by the L during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47.
This is done in the ED display control (I_LED_OUT).

When a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error can be eliminated by an administrator (hall staff member) and the reset switch 153 can be operated, which will cancel the recoverable error state and resume gameplay. In this way, when a recoverable error occurs, the cause of the recoverable error can be eliminated and the game can be restored to a state in which gameplay can continue, without turning the power on/off or operating the setting key switch 152, by operating the reset switch 153.

In contrast, an "unrecoverable error" is a serious error that cannot be recovered from without turning off the power and performing an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 on). Examples of unrecoverable errors include: "E1" error: When recovery from a power outage is abnormal (when there is a power outage recovery abnormality) (when "Yes" is returned in step S2712 of Figure 41, described below); "E5" error: When the stopped symbol is abnormal when the reel 31 stops (when a display error occurs); "E6" error: When the setting value is outside the normal range (when a setting value error occurs) (when "No" is returned in step S458 of Figure 47); "E7" error: When a random number error occurs (when "Yes" is returned in step S460 of Figure 47). Note that unrecoverable errors are not limited to those listed above.

When any irrecoverable error occurs, error information is displayed on the winning count display LED 78. For example, when an "E1" error occurs, an "E" is displayed in digit 3 and a "1" is displayed in digit 4. Similar displays are also displayed when other irrecoverable errors occur. Furthermore, it is the processing of step S2715 (processing by the program in the use area (first program)) during the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 that determines that the recovery from a power outage is abnormal (power outage recovery abnormality) and judges it to be an "E1" error. Furthermore, it is the processing during the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46) (processing by the program in the use area (first program)) that determines that the stopped symbol is abnormal when the reel 31 stops (a display error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E5" error.

In contrast, it is step S458 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of Figure 47 (processing by the program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the set value is not within the normal range (a set value error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E6" error. Similarly, it is step S460 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of Figure 47 (processing by the program outside the area of use (second program)) that determines that the random number value is not normal (a random number error has occurred) and judges it to be an "E7" error. Then, if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program inside the area of use (first program), the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43, which will be described later, is executed. In contrast, if it is determined that an unrecoverable error has occurred in the program outside the area of use (second program), the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51, which will be described later, is executed.

When an unrecoverable error occurs, the power supply is cut off (power supply turned off, power switch 11 turned off), and then, with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the power supply is resumed (power supply turned on, power switch 11 turned on). As a result, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2711. Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power cut processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 48, which will be described later, is not executed, so step S2712 in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Furthermore, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 (described later), initialization is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the RWM 53's usage area, as well as the entire range outside the usage area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"). After that, the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 in Figure 44. If the setting value is reset here, the unrecoverable error state is released, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46). In this way, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the unrecoverable error state can be released and a state in which game play can be resumed can be restored by turning the power off, turning the setting key switch 152 on, and then turning the power on again.

Furthermore, when a recoverable error occurs, an error is displayed by the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in Figure 50. However, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is not executed either. When an irrecoverable error occurs, an error is displayed by the irrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 or the irrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51. Furthermore, when recovering from a recoverable error state, the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, but when recovering from an irrecoverable error state, the entire range of data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM 53 is initialized. Note that when recovering from a recoverable error state, data such as error detection flags stored at specified addresses in RWM 53 may be initialized.

Figure 41 is a flowchart showing the program start process (M_PRG_START) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment. When power is turned on (the power switch 11 is turned on, or power supply is resumed), execution begins with the program start process in Figure 41. In Figure 41, when the program starts in step S2701, in the next step S2702, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area in the used area of the RWM 53.

Next, proceeding to step S2703, the main control board 50 executes the checksum calculation process for the RWM 53. Specifically, in step S2703, the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM 53's used area and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together. That is, the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM 53's used area and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are added together. If the result is "0", the calculation result of the RWM 53's checksum is determined to be normal; if the result is not "0", the calculation result of the RWM 53's checksum is determined to be abnormal (abnormal).

Furthermore, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) at address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 is "55(H)." If it is "55(H)," it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is normal; if it is not "55(H)," it is determined that the power-off processing completed flag is abnormal (abnormal). Here, in this embodiment, during power-off processing, the power-off processing completed flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is set at address "F2A1(H)" of RWM 53 (step S2784 of RWM checksum set (S_SUM_SET) in Figure 49). Then, in step S2703, it is determined whether the power-off processing completed flag set during power-off processing is the normal value ("55(H)").

Also, in step S2703, if the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 is normal (the result of adding the data in the used area and outside the used area of RWM35 is "0") and the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is the normal value ("55(H)"), "55(H)" is stored at address "F2A2(H)" of RWM53 as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). On the other hand, in step S2703, if at least one of the calculation result of the checksum of RWM53 and the power-off processing completion flag is abnormal (abnormal), "00(H)" is stored at address "F2A2(H)" of RWM53 as the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON). Then, proceed to the next step S2704.

When processing proceeds to step S2704, the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2702. Processing then proceeds to the next step, S2705.

Here, the program for the program start processing is stored in the control area (first control area, first program area) of the usage area of ROM 54. In other words, the program for the program start processing is the first program. In contrast, the program for the checksum calculation processing of RWM 53 in step S2703 is stored in the control area (second control area, second program area) outside the usage area of ROM 54. In other words, the program for the checksum calculation processing in step S2703 is the second program.

For this reason, in Figure 41, when the program start processing, which is processing by the program in the used area (first program), proceeds to step S2703, the checksum calculation processing of RWM53, which is processing by the program outside the used area (second program), is executed, and when this checksum calculation processing is completed, the process returns to the program start processing, which is processing by the program in the used area (first program). Also, when transitioning from processing by the program in the used area (first program) to processing by the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area in the used area of RWM53, and when processing by the program outside the used area (second program) is completed and processing returns to processing by the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored.

In step S2705, the main control board 50 obtains the power-off recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) from address "F2A2(H)" in the RWM 53 and stores it in register A. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2706.

In step S2706, the main control board 50 determines whether the door switch signal is on. As described above, when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is on and the door switch signal is on. If it is determined that the door switch signal is on (the front door 12 is open), the process proceeds to the next step S2707. On the other hand, if it is determined that the door switch signal is off (the front door 12 is closed), the process proceeds to step S2715.

In step S2707, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on. As described above, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 152 turns on, and the setting key switch signal turns on. If it is determined that the setting key switch signal is on, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key switch signal is off, the process proceeds to step S2708.

In step S2708, the main control board 50 determines whether a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, if the value of register A (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) acquired in step S2705) is "55 (H)," it is determined that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, and the process proceeds to the next step, S2709. In contrast, if the value of register A is "00 (H)," it is determined that a power failure recovery error has occurred, and the process proceeds to step S2801, where unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is performed. The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later.

In step S2709, the main control board 50 sets reset determination data. Specifically, it stores "7" in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2710. In step S2710, the main control board 50 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting change switch 153, reset switch 153, and RWM clear switch 153 are configured as an integrated switch. When the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the reset switch signal is turned on, and the process proceeds to step S2713. On the other hand, when the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the reset switch signal is turned off, and the process proceeds to the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in step S2721. The specific contents of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) will be described later.

In step S2711, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for when a power failure recovery error occurs. In this embodiment, when the power failure recovery is abnormal (the power failure recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "00(H)"), the entire range of the used area and outside the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" and "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, is set as the initialization range. The initialization range is specified by the starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2712.

In step S2712, the main control board 50 determines whether a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it determines that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, the main control board 50 stores "7", the data used to determine that the setting has been changed, in the D register and proceeds to the next step, S2713. If it determines that a power failure recovery error has occurred, it proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific contents of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later.

In step S2713, the main control board 50 sets the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery. In this embodiment, when the power recovery is normal (power recovery data (_SW_POWER_ON) is "55(H)"), the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared). Therefore, in step S2713, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of the RWM 53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range. As described above, the initialization range is specified by the starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2714.

In step S2714, the main control board 50 determines whether the setting can be changed. In this embodiment, the setting is set to be unchangeable from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 are spinning, and the setting unchangeable flag is turned on during this period. Then, in step S2714, it determines whether the setting can be changed by determining whether the setting unchangeable flag is on. If it is determined that the setting cannot be changed (the setting cannot be changed), the process proceeds to the next step S2715. If it is determined that the setting can be changed, the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. The specific content of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) will be described later. Note that it is also possible to allow the setting to be changed at all times without providing a period during which the setting cannot be changed, and therefore without providing a setting unchangeable flag.

In step S2715, the main control board 50 determines whether a power failure recovery error has occurred. Specifically, this is the same as step S2708. If it determines that a power failure recovery error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2801, which performs unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). If it determines that a power failure recovery error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2721, which performs power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON). The specific contents of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) and unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2721 in Figure 41. First, in step S2722, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. In this embodiment, the stack pointer is saved during power-off processing (step S2774 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 48). Then, in step S2722, the stack pointer saved during power-off processing is restored.

In the next step S2723, the main control board 50 executes a read process for the input port 51. This updates each piece of data in the input port 51 to the latest data. In the next step S2724, the main control board 50 clears the power-off processing completion flag. Then, the main control board 50 proceeds to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (Figure 46) and ends the processing of this flowchart. Note that in this embodiment, after executing the processing of step S2724, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) of Figure 47 is started at a timing before proceeding to the main processing (M_MAIN) of step S248 (Figure 46).

Figure 43 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). The unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) program is stored in the used area of ROM 54, and the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) program is stored outside the used area of ROM 54. In other words, the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) program is the first program, and the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) program is the second program.

Furthermore, interrupt processing is prohibited during unrecoverable error processing. Unrecoverable errors are serious errors that would not normally occur, and in order to prevent processing based on abnormal data (such as updating data in RWM 53 based on input signals from input port 51, sending control commands to sub-control board 80, and control based on signal output from output ports based on data from RWM 53), interrupt processing is prohibited during unrecoverable error processing.

Here, unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is performed by the first program, and when unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) starts, the execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is first prohibited by the interrupt prohibition processing in step S1490. In contrast, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is performed by the second program, and because execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited while the second program is running, no interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP).

In Figure 43, when proceeding to step S1491, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the lower digits of the unrecoverable error. This process stores data for lighting digit 4 (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)") in the H register. Next, proceeding to step S1492, the main control board 50 sets error display data for the upper digits of the unrecoverable error. This process stores data for lighting digit 3 (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)") in the D register.

Furthermore, in step S1492, the main control board 50 stores segment data ("01111001B") in the E register to display "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error. Note that before proceeding to unrecoverable error processing, segment data to display the least significant digit of the unrecoverable error is stored in the L register. For example, when the unrecoverable error is an "E1" error, the least significant digit (digit 4) is "1", so segment data to display "1" ("00000110B") is stored in the L register. Note that in the following example, it is assumed that the current unrecoverable error 1 is an "E1" error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values at this point are as follows: D register value: Data for lighting the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)") E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)") H register value: Data for lighting the least significant digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)") L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the least significant digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)")

In the next step, S1493, the main control board 50 sets the address and number of output ports to be cleared. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) are output ports 0 to 7, and since an address is set for each output port, the address and number of output ports (8) are set. In the next step, S1494, the main control board 50 sequentially turns off the output of output ports 0 to 7. Specifically, for output ports 0 to 7, the output is turned off ("00000000(B)") one by one.

In the next step, S1495, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next output port. That is, it increments the address indicating the output port by "1." For example, if the address of output port 0 is "00F1(H)," it sets the address of output port 1, "00F2(H)," as the next address. Next, in step S1496, the main control board 50 determines whether or not it has finished turning off the output of all output ports, that is, whether it has turned off the output up to output port 7. If it determines that it has not finished, it returns to step S1494; if it determines that it has finished, it proceeds to step S1497. In this way, the processing of steps S1494 to S1496 is repeated until the output of all output ports has been turned off. If it determines that the output of all output ports has been turned off, it proceeds to step S1497.

In this way, by turning off all output ports, all active signals that were being output before this process was executed are turned off. This turns off all LEDs, including digits 1 to 9 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73, and management information display LED 74), preventing LED burn-in.

Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while an excitation signal for motor 32 is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the excitation signal for motor 32 will continue to be output until the irrecoverable error is cleared. However, by turning off all output ports, the excitation signal for motor 32 will be turned off, preventing motor 32 from burning out. Furthermore, if an irrecoverable error occurs while a blocker signal is being output, unless the output port is turned off, the blocker 45 will remain on (guiding medals to hopper 35) even though the medal detection process will not be executed, resulting in the medal being swallowed. However, by turning off all output ports, the blocker 45 will be turned off and the inserted medal will be returned, preventing the medal from being swallowed.

In the next step S1497, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the upper digits. Output port 3 outputs the data stored in the D register, and output port 4 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait period depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to approximately 0.1 ms, for example. Here, for example, a predetermined value (e.g., 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted, for example, using an internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and proceed to the next step, S1499.

In step S1499, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 3 and 4 ("0"). This process is to prevent image retention. Next, proceeding to step S1500, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent LED flickering. This process ensures that the LEDs are turned off after the output of output ports 3 and 4 is turned off ("0").

Next, proceed to step S1501, where the main control board 50 switches between the upper and lower digits. Specifically, it swaps the DE register value and the HL register value. As a result, <Before swap> D register value: Data for lighting up the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)") E register value: Segment data for displaying "E" in the most significant digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error ("01111001(B)") H register value: Data for lighting up the least significant digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)") L register value: Segment data for displaying "1" in the least significant digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error ("00000110(B)") <After swap> D register value: Data for lighting up the least significant digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 4 signal set to "1") ("00001000(B)") E register value: Segment data ("00000110(B)") for displaying "1" in the lower digit (digit 4) of an unrecoverable error. H register value: Data for lighting the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error (data with only the digit 3 signal set to "1") ("00000100(B)"). L register value: Segment data ("01111001(B)") for displaying "E" in the upper digit (digit 3) of an unrecoverable error.

Then, proceeding to step S1502, the main control board 50 outputs error display data from output ports 3 and 4 to display an error in the lower digits. As in step S1497, the D register value is output from output port 3, and the E register value is output from output port 4. As a result, "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 4 signal is set to "1"), which lights up digit 4, is output from output port 3, and segment data "00000110(B)" to display "1" is output from output port 4.

Next, proceeding to step S1503, the main control board 50 executes standby processing to prevent flickering. This processing is the same as step S1498. Next, proceeding to step S1504, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 3 and 4 ("0"), as in step S1499. In the next step, S1505, the main control board 50 executes standby processing to prevent flickering. This processing is the same as step S1500. Then, return to step S1497.

As a result of the above processing, for example, when an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. Note that LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by interrupt processing (I_INTR), but as mentioned above, in the event of an unrecoverable error, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed (prohibited), and instead, as shown in Figure 43, the display of the unrecoverable error is executed by calculation processing using registers and a hardware configuration.

Figure 44 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 in Figure 41. The main control board 50 first initializes the specified address of the RWM 53 in step S2732, then sets (specifies) the next address in the initialization range of the RWM 53 in the next step S2733, and proceeds to the next step S2734, where it determines whether initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53. If it determines that initialization has not been completed, it returns to step S2732, and if it determines that initialization has been completed, it proceeds to step S2735. As a result, the processes of steps S2732 to S2734 are repeated until initialization has been completed for the entire initialization range of the RWM 53.

As described above, the initialization range of RWM53 (starting address and number of bytes of the initialization range) is set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41. Then, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed on the initialization range of the used area, which is part of the initialization range of RWM53 set in step S2711 or S2713. Note that steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) are executed by the program for the used area (first program). Therefore, in steps S2732 to S2734 of the initialization processing (M_INI_SET), initialization is performed only on the initialization range of the used area, which is part of the initialization range of RWM53.

If it is determined in step S2734 that initialization has ended, the process proceeds to the next step S2735, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the RWM 53's used area. If it proceeds to the next step S2736, the main control board 50 executes initialization of the initialization range outside the used area of the RWM 53 that was set in step S2711 or S2713 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41.

As described above, steps S2732 to S2734 initialize the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53, but step S2736 initializes the area outside the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53. Note that step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is executed by the program outside the used area (second program). Therefore, step S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) initializes only the area outside the used area of the initialization range of RWM 53. Then, once initialization of the area outside the used area has been completed in step S2736, the process proceeds to the next step S2737, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2735. The process then proceeds to the next step S2738.

In step S2738, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, it determines whether step S2710 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 was "Yes." In this embodiment, in step S2709 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41, "7" is stored in the D register as reset determination data. Furthermore, if step S2710 of Figure 41 is "Yes," the D register is maintained at "7." If step S2710 of Figure 41 is "No," the D register is cleared ("0" is stored). Then, in step S2738 of Figure 44, it determines whether the D register is "7." If the D register is "7," it determines that it is time to reset ("Yes" in step S2710 of Figure 41), and proceeds to step S2739. On the other hand, if the D register is "0", it is determined that it is not reset ("No" in step S2710 of Figure 41), and step S2739 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2740.

When processing proceeds to step S2739, the main control board 50 sets the display at the time of reset. Specifically, "70(H)" is stored in the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. This allows the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) to display "70" through interrupt processing executed after processing in step S2739, thereby informing the manager (hall staff) that it is time to reset.

Proceeding to the next step S2740, the main control board 50 sets a setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2740 indicates whether it is a reset or a setting change. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S2740, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine whether it is a reset or a setting change.

Note that in this embodiment, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47 is started after the processing of step S2740 is executed and before proceeding to the processing of step S2741. In other words, before the interrupt processing (I_INTR) starts, the processing for initializing the initialization range of RWM53 (the processing of steps S2732 to S2734 and S2736 in Figure 44) is completed. This configuration prevents the interrupt processing (I_INTR) from being executed while RWM53 is being initialized. This makes it possible to prevent the contents of RWM53 from being changed (rewritten or overwritten) by the interrupt processing (I_INTR) while RWM53 is being initialized.

When proceeding to the next step S2741, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to reset. Specifically, this is the same as step S2738. If it is determined that it is not time to reset, it proceeds to step S2742; if it is determined that it is time to reset, it skips step S2742 and proceeds to step S2743. When proceeding to step S2742, the main control board 50 executes a setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). The specific contents of this process will be described later. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) is completed, it proceeds to the next step S2743.

In step S2743, the main control board 50 determines whether the wait time has elapsed. This wait time is for waiting for the transmission of the setting command. If it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process proceeds to the next step S2744, where the main control board 50 sets the initialization wait time, and in the next step S2745, executes a 2-byte wait process (wait process). The processes of steps S2744 and S2745 are intended to wait for the initialization of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80 to be completed.

Then, once the 2-byte wait process is complete, the process proceeds to the next step S2746, where the main control board 50 sets the setting command in the control command buffer of the RWM 53. The setting command set in step S2746 indicates that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value. As a result, the setting command set in the control command buffer is sent to the sub-control board 80 by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2746, making it possible for the sub-control board 80 to determine that the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) has ended and the setting value.

Proceeding to the next step S2747, the main control board 50 clears (stores "0") the acquisition count data (_NB_PAYOUT) at address "F011(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition count display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S2747. Then, after clearing of the acquisition count data in step S2747 is completed, the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) in step S248, and the process of this flowchart ends.

Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 in Figure 44. When the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) of step S2742 starts, first, in step S2751, the main control board 50 obtains the setting value data (_NB_RANK) from address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53 and stores it in register A. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2752.

In step S2752, the main control board 50 generates setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2752, the A register value is first stored in the C register, and then "1" is added to the A register value. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2753. As described above, in this embodiment, the setting values range from "1" to "6," and the setting value data is managed as "0" to "5." When the setting value is "N," "N-1" is stored as the setting value data. Therefore, "N," which is the setting value data "N-1" plus "1," is used as the setting value display data.

In step S2753, the main control board 50 saves the generated setting value display data. Specifically, in step S2753, the A register value is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to the next step, S2754. In step S2754, the main control board 50 executes interrupt wait processing. This processing waits until one interrupt time (2.235 ms) has elapsed. By waiting for the interrupt processing (I_INTR) to be executed once, the process waits for the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 to become OFF ("0").

In other words, when the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 is operated (turned on), the rising edge of the signal from the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes on ("1"). If the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed even once after that, the rising edge of the signal from the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes off ("0"). However, if the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 loops multiple times after the rising edge of the signal from the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 becomes on ("1") and before the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed, the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data will be repeatedly executed. Therefore, by waiting for the interrupt process (I_INTR) to be executed once in step S2754, the processing of steps S2752 to S2758 will not loop multiple times, preventing the processing of adding "1" to the setting value data from being repeatedly executed. Then, in step S2754, the process waits until one interrupt time has elapsed, and then proceeds to the next step, S2755.

Note that if the signal level data of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing and the signal level data of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will be "1." Note that if the signal level data of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and the signal level data of the reset switch 153 is "1" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will be "0."

Similarly, if the signal level data of the reset switch 153 was "0" during the previous interrupt processing and is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will be "0." Also, if the signal level data of the reset switch 153 was "1" during the previous interrupt processing and is "0" during the current interrupt processing, the falling edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 will be "1." The same applies to the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 for other switches such as the start switch 41, stop switch 42, and setting key switch 152.

In step S2755, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. This process determines whether it is time to confirm settings or time to change settings. In this embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets before the start of play is "0," the D register is set to store "1." In step S2755, the D register value is first stored in the A register, and then it is determined whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," it is determined that it is time to confirm settings, and the process proceeds to step S2760. If the A register value is not "1" (if the D register value is "0" or "7"), it is determined that it is not time to confirm settings (it is time to change settings), and the process proceeds to step S2756. After determining whether the A register value is "1," the C register value is stored in the A register. As described above, since the A register value was stored in the C register in step S2752, setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes the set value data. When the power is restored (when the power is turned on and the program start process (M_PRG_START) begins), the A register through L register are set to their initial value ("0").

In step S2756, the main control board 50 references the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal stored at a specific address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "1", i.e., if it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2759. On the other hand, if the rising edge data of the start switch 41 signal is "0", i.e., if it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S2757.

In step S2757, the main control board 50 references the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch (setting change switch) 153 stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. If the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "1", i.e., if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2758. On the other hand, if the rising edge data of the signal of the reset switch 153 is "0", i.e., if it is determined that the reset switch 153 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2752.

When the process proceeds to step S2758, the main control board 50 adds "1" to the setting value data. Specifically, it adds "1" to the A register value. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. If step S2757 returns "Yes," that is, if it is determined that the setting change (reset) switch 153 has been operated, it adds "1" to the setting value data. Note that if the A register value becomes "6" as a result of the addition, it rewrites the A register value to "0." Then, it returns to step S2752.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S2759, the main control board 50 saves the setting value data. Specifically, the A register value is stored as setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53. As described above, at the end of step S2755, the A register value is the setting value data. Then, when step S2756 returns "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S2759, the A register value remains the setting value data. Then, in step S2759, the A register value is stored at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53. This allows the setting value data to be saved in the RWM 53.

Proceeding to the next step S2760, the main control board 50 references the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal stored at a specified address in the RWM 53. The main control board 50 then repeats the processing of step S2760 until the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", i.e., until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. Once the falling edge data of the setting key switch 152 signal becomes "1", i.e., once the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S2761.

In step S2761, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. Then, processing according to this flowchart ends. Also, when processing according to this flowchart ends during a setting change, processing proceeds to step S2743 in FIG. 44.

Here, we will explain the transition to the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode, setting confirmation in progress). In this embodiment, when the power is on, the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open), and the number of bets is "0," turning on the setting key switch 152 stores "1" in the D register and transitions to the setting confirmation state. In the setting confirmation state, the setting value cannot be changed (the setting value does not change even if the setting change switch 153 is operated), but the current setting value can be confirmed. The current setting value is also displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends and the game returns to a state where medals can be bet.

More specifically, in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), the main control board 50 determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on before detecting the operation of the start switch 41. Then, when it determines that the setting key switch 152 is on while the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) and the number of bets is "0," it proceeds to the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45. Steps S2751 to S2754 of the setting change confirmation processing (M_RANK_CTL) in Figure 45 are as described above.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, when the number of bets before the start of play is "0," turning on the setting key switch 152 stores "1" in the D register. Then, when proceeding to step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45, the main control board 50 determines whether it is time to start setting confirmation. Specifically, it first stores the D register value in the A register, and then determines whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," it determines that it is time to start setting confirmation ("Yes"), and proceeds to step S2760.

Then, step S2760 is repeated until the setting key switch 152 is turned off. During this time, the current setting value continues to be displayed on the setting value display LED 73. If step S2760 determines that the setting key switch 152 is off, the process proceeds to step S2761, where the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at address "F001 (H)" of the RWM 53. The process according to this flowchart then ends. Also, when the process according to this flowchart ends during setting confirmation, the process proceeds to the next step in the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46) where it determines whether the setting key switch 152 is on (whether to transition to the setting confirmation state).

In this way, in the third embodiment, the setting change process and the setting confirmation process can be executed by the same module. That is, the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are created by the same module. Then, based on the information stored in the D register, it is determined whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. Note that it is also possible to determine whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in another register instead of the D register, or to determine whether to enter the setting change state or the setting confirmation state based on information stored in the RWM 53.

Figure 46 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the third embodiment. The main processing is the processing for one game. While a game is in progress, the main processing is repeated for each game. First, in step S271, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to the area of RWM53 that stores data at the time of power outage (e.g., register values, instruction processing of the main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) in the event of a power outage. Setting the stack pointer is a process of setting register values to their initial values in that area of RWM53.

The next step, S272, is a game start setting process. This process involves generating, updating, and saving the operating status flag. The next step, S273, is to read the bet medals. This process reads the number of medals currently bet, and reads bet number data or automatic bet number data. The next step, S274, is to determine whether or not there are any bet medals based on the number of bets read in step S273.

If step S274 determines that there are bet medals, the process proceeds to step S276. If it determines that there are no bet medals, the process proceeds to step S275 to wait for medal insertion, and then proceeds to step S276. The medal insertion wait process in step S275 determines whether the setting key switch is on, and if it is on, performs processing such as transitioning to setting confirmation mode. In step S276, management processing of the inserted medals is performed. This processing determines whether the medals have been maintained and whether the settlement switch 43 has been operated.

In the next step S277, a software random number update process is performed. This process updates (for example, by adding "1" at a time) the random number used for processing (calculation processing) into a random number (hard random number or built-in random number) used by the role selection means 61. The software random number is a 16-bit random number with a range of "0" to "65535 (D)". As an update method, a process may be performed in which the interrupt count value (count value (variable) that is incremented at the time of an interrupt) is added to the value before the update.

In the next step S278, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it determines that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S279; if it determines that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S273. Note that even if the start switch 41 has been operated, if the number of bets has not reached the specified number for the game, the determination in step S278 is "No."

In step S279, processing is performed when the start switch is accepted. This processing involves setting the setting change prohibition flag, setting the output request when the reels 31 start to spin, and setting the number of outputs to output a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer, etc. In the next step S280, the winning number data is cleared. This causes the winning number display LED 78 to display "00" (or turn off).

Next, the process proceeds to step S281, where the main control board 50 executes an update process for the number of AT plays. This process subtracts the number of AT plays when a predetermined condition is met during the AT. Therefore, this process is not executed during non-AT plays. Furthermore, whether or not to add to the number of AT plays during the AT is determined based on the result of the role lottery process in step S282. For example, when a rare role is won, the number of additional AT plays is determined. Therefore, when the number of AT plays is added and the added amount is added to the AT play count counter, this is executed after the process in step S282 (not shown in Figure 46). Note that after the start switch is accepted (step S279), the AT play count counter is updated in step S281. However, this is not limited to this, and the AT play count counter may also be updated after the role lottery process in step S282 or after all reels 31 have stopped (step S290 or later). In addition, in the specifications of a difference number management type AT, if an AT difference number counter is provided, the AT difference number counter is updated after all reels 31 have stopped and the medal payout process due to a winning combination has ended (after step S300).

In step S282, the role selection means 61 performs a role selection when the start switch 41 is operated, i.e., when an operation signal from the start switch 41 is received. The random number value used for role selection is obtained in step S279. Then, in step S282, a process is performed using the role selection table to determine whether the obtained random number value is a random number value that corresponds to one of the winning roles.

In the next step S283, the main control board 50 executes a lottery process for determining whether to transition to a favorable zone. In this embodiment, an AT lottery is also executed when the lottery for determining whether to transition to a favorable zone is executed. Next, the process proceeds to step S284, where a push order instruction number is set. This process generates a push order instruction number and displays push order instruction information when the instruction function is activated for the game during the AT (the push order instruction number is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).

In the next step S285, a reel spin start preparation process is executed. This process involves determining whether the minimum play time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed, and if so, proceeding to the next step S286. Here, the RWM 53 has an area for storing the timer value for the minimum play time, and the initial value is "1834 (D) (2.235 ms x 1834 ≒ 4099 ms)." If it is determined in step S279 that the minimum play time is "0," the initial value "1834 (D)" is set as the minimum play time (timer value). Then, the minimum play time is decremented by "1" for each interrupt process. When proceeding to step S285 for the next play, a determination is made as to whether the minimum play time is "0," and if it is determined to be "0," proceeding to step S286.

In step S286, the reel control means 65 controls the motor 32 to start rotating the reel 31. Then, when the reel 31 reaches a constant speed, it allows acceptance of operation of the stop switch 42 and proceeds to step S287. In step S287, it checks whether or not an operation signal for the stop switch 42 has been received. If an operation signal has been received, it determines the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to that stop switch 42 based on the result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31, and controls the reel 31 to stop at the determined position.

In the next step S288, the reel control means 65 checks whether all reels 31 have stopped and proceeds to step S289. In step S289, it is determined whether all reels 31 have stopped, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have stopped, it proceeds to step S290, and if it is determined that all reels 31 have not stopped, it returns to step S287.

In step S290, the acquisition count data is cleared (set to "0"). For example, during AT, activation of the instruction function may cause the acquisition count display LED 78 to display push order instruction information (e.g., "=1"). In this case, an interrupt process executed after step S290 causes the acquisition count display LED 78 to display "00". The acquisition count display LED 78 may also be turned off. Specifically, "00010011 (B)" may be stored in the LED display request flag, or data for turning off the LED may be provided as segment data and output.

In step S291, a symbol display determination is performed. Here, the winning determination means 66 determines whether a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has stopped on an active line. In the next step S292, a determination is made as to whether a symbol display error has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S304; if it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S293. Here, the reels 31 are stopped based on the stop position determination table, so normally the reels 31 will not stop at a position other than that determined by the stop position determination table. However, if a symbol that should not be displayed (a kick symbol) is displayed on an active line as a result of the symbol display determination, it is determined to be an abnormality, and unrecoverable error processing is executed.

If it is determined in step S292 that no display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S293, where the payout number update process is executed. This process stores the payout number for that game as payout number data and a payout number data buffer. In the next step S294, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, the process proceeds to step S295, where interrupt wait process is executed. In the next step S296, interrupt process is prohibited. By the processes of steps S295 and S296, interrupts are prohibited immediately after an interrupt.

In the next step S297, the AF register is saved. Next, the process proceeds to step S298, where the ratio set process is executed. This "ratio set process" is a process that updates various counter values and performs ratio calculations, etc., in order to display five types of ratios on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor). Then, in step S299, the AF register saved in step S297 is restored, and in the next step S300, interrupts are permitted (resumed). In this way, when the ratio set process is executed, the AF register is saved and interrupt processing is prohibited before it is executed.

Interrupt processing is prohibited while the ratio setting process is running because the ratio setting process uses a program stored outside the usage area. If an interrupt process occurs while the main process is executing a program outside the usage area, the program inside the usage area and the program outside the usage area will be mixed together, complicating the process.

Next, the program proceeds to step S301, where a game end check process is performed. This process clears the condition device (winning combination) flag, etc. Then, the program proceeds to step S302, where an output request is set at the end of the game, and in the next step S303, control command set 1 is performed. These processes set control command data to send to the sub-control board 80 that one game has ended. Then, once step S303 has been completed, the program returns to the beginning of the main process (step S248).

Figure 47 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 in the third embodiment. In the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in Figure 47, after step S452, the process proceeds to step S2770, where the main control board 50 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, where the main control board 50 executes power down processing (I_POWER_DOWN). On the other hand, if it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, step S2771 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S454.

In this way, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR). Therefore, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed due to interrupt prohibition or when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not executed because a program outside the use area (second program) is being executed, the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is also not executed. The specific contents of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) will be described later. Then, when the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is completed, the process proceeds to step S454.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, after step S455, the process proceeds to step S2821, where the main control board 50 executes LED display control (I_LED_OUT). In this way, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed in the interrupt processing (I_INTR). The specific contents of LED display control (I_LED_OUT) will be described later. Then, after LED display control (I_LED_OUT) ends, the process proceeds to step S2765, where the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) in the stack area of the used area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2221, where the main control board 50 executes ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

Here, LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is a process that controls the lighting of the credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, and setting value display LED 73 (digits 1-5), and is executed by a program in the usage area (first program). In contrast, ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is a process that controls the lighting of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6-9), and is executed by a program outside the usage area (second program). The specific content of ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) will be described later. Once ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is completed, the process proceeds to step S458.

In step S458, the main control board 50 determines whether the set value is within the normal range. Specifically, it reads the set value data (_NB_RANK) stored at address "F000(H)" in the RWM 53 and stores it in the A register. Next, it performs a comparison operation between the A register value and "5" (subtracts "5" from the A register value) and determines whether the carry flag is "1." If the carry flag is not "1," it determines that the set value data is within the normal range (the set value data is within the range of "0" to "5"); if the carry flag is "1," it determines that the set value data is not within the normal range. If it is determined that the data is within the normal range, it proceeds to step S459; if it is determined that the data is not within the normal range, it proceeds to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if step S458 is "No" or step S460 is "Yes," the process proceeds to step S2811, where the main control board 50 executes unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). The specific contents of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) will be described later. Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, if step S460 is "No," the process proceeds to step S2766, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) that was saved in step S2765. The process then proceeds to step S457.

Here, in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 47, steps S2221, S458, S459, and S460 are executed by the program outside the area of use (second program). When transitioning from processing by the program in the area of use (first program) to processing by the program outside the area of use (second program), step S2765 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area in the area of use of RWM 53, and when processing by the program outside the area of use (second program) ends and returns to processing by the program in the area of use (first program), step S2766 restores the AF register.

Figure 48 is a flowchart showing the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of step S2771 in Figure 47. When the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) of step S2771 begins, the main control board 50 first saves the registers in step S2772. This process saves various registers to the stack area in the RWM 53's usage area.

In the next step S2773, the main control board 50 clears all output ports 52. This turns off the output of all output ports 52, and, for example, stops the motor 32 while it is being driven (while the reels 31 are spinning) or the hopper motor 36 while it is being driven (while medals are being paid out). In the next step S2774, the main control board 50 saves the stack pointer at a specified address in the working area of the RWM 53's usage area. Note that the stack pointer saved in step S2774 is restored in step S2722 of the power restoration process (M_POWER_ON) in Figure 42.

In the next step, S2775, the main control board 50 saves the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) to the stack area in the used area of the RWM 53. Then, in step S2776, the main control board 50 executes the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET). Specific details of the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) will be described later. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is complete, the process proceeds to the next step, S2777, where the main control board 50 restores the AF register saved in step S2775. Then, in step S2778, the process proceeds to the next step.

The RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is executed by a program outside the used area (second program). When processing transitions from the program in the used area (first program) to the program outside the used area (second program), the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved to the stack area of the used area of RWM 53 in step S2775. When processing by the program outside the used area (second program) ends and processing returns to the program in the used area (first program), the AF register is restored in step S2777.

When processing proceeds to step S2778, the main control board 50 prohibits access to the RWM 53. Then, processing proceeds to the next step S2779, where the main control board 50 enters a reset wait state (loop processing state). Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

Figure 49 is a flowchart showing the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) of step S2776 in Figure 48. When the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) of step S2776 begins, the main control board 50 first, in step S2781, saves the stack pointer (SP register) to a specific address in a work area outside the used area of the RWM 53. In the next step S2782, it sets the stack pointer ("F400 (H)") outside the used area. In the next step S2783, it saves multiple registers to a stack area outside the used area of the RWM 53. Then, it proceeds to the next step S2784.

Here, in step S2781, the stack pointer (SP register) is stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in Figure 35). As described above, the RWM checksum set process (S_SUM_SET) is performed by the program outside the used area (second program). Therefore, while the program outside the used area (second program) is executing, the stack pointer used by the program in the used area (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (first program). Also, in step S2782, the stack pointer outside the used area (address "F400(H)") is stored in the stack pointer (SP register). Furthermore, in step S2783, various registers are saved to the stack area outside the used area.

When processing proceeds to step S2784, the main control board 50 sets the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) to address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53. Here, when the power-off processing is executed, "55(H)" is stored as the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF). When the power is restored, the power-off processing completion flag is cleared (to "0") in step S2724 of the power restoration processing (M_POWER_ON) in Figure 42. Therefore, after the processing of this step S2724 is executed, the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 becomes "00(H)". If the power-off processing is not executed, the power-off processing completion flag (_SF_POWER_OFF) is not set, and the address "F2A1(H)" of the RWM 53 remains "00(H)". Proceeding to the next step S2785, the main control board 50 clears (to "0") the RWM checksum data (_SW_SUM_CHK) at address "F2A0(H)" in the RWM 53. Then, proceed to the next step S2786.

In step S2786, the main control board 50 sets the starting address ("F000(H)") of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for address specification (for example, register B). In the next step S2787, it sets the number of bytes (number of checksum calculations) of the area used by RWM 53 in a register for the number of calculations (for example, register C). In the next step S2788, it sets the initial data ("00000000(B)") in a register for checksum calculation (for example, register D).

Then, proceeding to the next step S2789, the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the used area of RWM 53. In this embodiment, the used area of RWM 53 is set to the range of addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)", and the processing of steps S2789 and S2790 is repeated until it is determined in the next step S2790 that the checksum calculation processing has been completed up to address "F1FF(H)" of RWM 53. This calculates the checksum for the used area of RWM 53 (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)").

More specifically, in this embodiment, in step S2789, the data indicated by the value in the register for address specification (register B) is subtracted from the value in the register for checksum calculation (register D). In the next step S2790, the value in the register for the number of operations (register C) is updated (subtracted by "1"), and it is determined whether the result is "0." If it is determined to be "0," it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the used area of RWM 53 has ended, and the process proceeds to step S2791. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0," the value in the register for address specification (register B) is updated (added by "1"), and the process returns to step S2789.

Then, when the checksum calculation process for the area used by RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2791, where the main control board 50 sets the starting address ("F210(H)") outside the area used by RWM 53 in the address specification register (B register), and in the next step S2792, it sets the number of bytes outside the area used by RWM 53 (number of checksum calculations) in the calculation count register (C register).

Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2793, where the main control board 50 executes checksum calculation processing for the area outside the use area of the RWM 53. In this embodiment, the area outside the use area of the RWM 53 is set to addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)", and the processes of steps S2793 and S2794 are repeated until it is determined in the next step S2794 that the checksum calculation processing has been completed up to address "F3FF(H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the area outside the use area of the RWM 53 (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"
) to calculate the checksum.

More specifically, in this embodiment, when processing proceeds to step S2793, the checksum calculation register (D register) stores the checksum calculation result for the used area of RWM 53. Then, in step S2793, the data indicated by the value in the address specification register (B register) is subtracted from the value in the checksum calculation register (D register). In the next step, S2794, the value in the calculation count register (C register) is updated (subtracted by "1") and it is determined whether the result is "0." If it is determined to be "0," it is determined that the checksum calculation process for the area outside the used area of RWM 53 has ended, and processing proceeds to step S2795. On the other hand, if it is determined not to be "0," the value in the address specification register (B register) is updated (added by "1") and processing returns to step S2793.

In this way, in this embodiment, steps S2785 to S2794 are executed to calculate RWM checksum data (also referred to as complement data, error detection data, or error detection information). As described above, this RWM checksum data (complement data) is a value that becomes "0" when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area.

Then, when the checksum calculation process outside the used area of the RWM 53 is completed, the process proceeds to step S2795, where the main control board 50 stores (saves) the RWM checksum data (complement data) at address "F2A0(H)" in the RWM 53. Proceeding to the next step S2796, the main control board 50 restores the registers saved in step S2783, and in the next step S2797, restores the stack pointer saved in step S2781. The process according to this flowchart then ends.

Figure 50 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 in Figure 47. First, in step S2822, output ports 3 and 4 (Figure 38) are turned off. Output port 3 is the output port corresponding to digit 1 signals through digit 5 signals, and output port 4 is the output port corresponding to segment 1A through segment 1P signals. By outputting "00000000(B)" from output ports 3 and 4, the output of digits 1 through 5 is temporarily stopped. This prevents different LEDs from appearing to be lit simultaneously (overlapping displays) even for a moment when switching the LED display (preventing afterimages).

In the next step S2823, the LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) in the used area (Figures 33 and 40(A)) is updated. Updating LED display counter 1 involves shifting bit "1" one digit to the right. This updated value is stored at address "F051(H)" (Figure 33) in RWM53. Then, proceed to step S2824.

In step S2824, it is determined whether the value of LED display counter 1 is "00000000 (B)". If it is determined that the value is "00000000 (B)", the process proceeds to step S2825. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "00000000 (B)", step S2825 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2826.

In step S2825, LED display counter 1 is initialized. Here, the value of LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000(B)" and stored at address "F051(H)" (Figure 33) of RWM 53. Then, processing proceeds to step S2826. In step S2826, the values of LED display counter 1 (address "F051(H)" in Figure 33) and the LED display request flag (address "F052(H)" in Figure 33) stored in RWM 53 are obtained. Here, the value of LED display counter 1 is stored in register E, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in register A.

Next, proceed to step S2827, where the segment display confirmation and setting for the digit to be displayed this time is performed. This process performs an AND operation on the A register value (value of the LED display request flag) and the E register value (value of LED display counter 1) to create data for the LED to be lit this time.

For example, LED display counter value: 00001000B LED display request flag value: 00001111B After AND operation: 00001000B. Or, for example, LED display counter value: 10000000B LED display request flag value: 00001111B After AND operation: 00000000B. The result of this operation is then stored in register A. Furthermore, the value stored in register A is stored in register D.

Next, proceed to step S2828, where it is determined whether the A register value (the value obtained by ANDing the value of LED display counter 1 and the value of the LED display request flag) is "0." If it is "0," it is determined that there is no display request ("No"), and proceed to step S2844. On the other hand, if it is not "0," it is determined that there is a display request ("Yes"), and proceed to step S2829.

In step S2829, error display data is obtained. When an error occurs, the error display data is stored at a specified address in RWM 53. Then, in step S2829, the error display data is read from RWM 53 and stored in register B. In the next step, S2830, LED segment table 2 is set. In this embodiment, LED segment table 1 stores data for displaying English letters on a 7-segment display, and LED segment table 2 stores data for displaying numbers on a 7-segment display, and these are stored in the used area of ROM 54. Note that the specific configurations of LED segment tables 1 and 2 will not be described here. Then, in step S2830, the top address of LED segment table 2 is read, and its value is stored in register HL.

Next, proceed to step S2831, where the set value display data (address "F001(H)" in Figure 33) is read from RWM 53 and stored in the A register. Next, proceed to step S2832, where it is determined whether there is a set value display request. Specifically, it is determined whether the D4 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 5) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1" ("00010000(B)"). If the D4 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a set value display request ("Yes"), and proceed to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D4 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no set value display request ("No"), and proceed to step S2833.

In step S2833, the credit number data (address "F010(H)" in Figure 33) is read from RWM 53 and stored in the A register. In the next step S2834, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. This process divides the A register value (credit number data obtained in step S2833) by "10 (decimal)", stores the quotient value in the A register, and stores the remainder value in the C register.

In the next step S2835, it is determined whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D0 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 1) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D0 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D0 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the credit number ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2836.

When proceeding to step S2836, it is determined whether there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number. Specifically, it is determined whether the D1 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 2) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1". If the D1 bit is "1", it is determined that there is a request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("Yes"), and proceeds to step S2842. On the other hand, if the D1 bit is "0", it is determined that there is no request to display the lower digits of the credit number ("No"), and proceeds to step S2837.

In step S2837, the acquisition number data (address "F011(H)" in Figure 33) is read from RWM53 and stored in register A. In the next step S2838, it is determined whether an error is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value in register B is "0", and if it is "0", it is determined that an error is not being displayed ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2840. On the other hand, if the value in register B is not "0", it is determined that an error is being displayed ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2839.

In step S2839, LED segment table 1 is set. When processing proceeds to step S2839, the HL register stores the top address of LED segment table 2, which is used to display numbers on the 7-segment display. However, when an error is displayed, an English character corresponding to the type of error is displayed on the 7-segment display. Therefore, in step S2839, the top address of LED segment table 1, which is used to display English characters on the 7-segment display, is read and this value is stored in the HL register. As a result, the top address of LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register instead of the top address of LED segment table 2, which was set in step S2830.

In the next step, S2840, the offset for the upper digits is obtained. When processing proceeds to step S2840, the A register stores the acquisition count data obtained in step S2837, and the B register stores the error display data obtained in step S2829. If no error has occurred, the acquisition count data stored in the A register is divided by 10 (decimal), the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register. On the other hand, if an error has occurred, the error display data stored in the B register is divided by 10 (decimal), the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

The next step, S2841, determines whether there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count display LED 78. Specifically, it determines whether the D2 bit (the bit corresponding to digit 3) of the value obtained by the AND operation stored in the D register is "1." If the D2 bit is "1," it is determined that there is a request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2843. On the other hand, if the D2 bit is "0," it is determined that there is no request to display the upper digits of the acquisition count ("No"), and the process proceeds to step S2842.

In step S2842, the offset for the lower digits is obtained. This process stores the data stored in the C register in the A register. When processing advances to step S2842, the A register stores the quotient calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840, and the C register stores the remainder calculated by the division in step S2834 or S2840. Then, in step S2842, the C register value (remainder of the division) is stored in the A register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2843, where segment output data is acquired. Specifically, the data stored in the HL register (the start address of LED segment table 2 stored in step S2830, or the start address of LED segment table 1 stored in step S2839) is added to the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and the data corresponding to the address after the addition is stored in R.
The LED segment is obtained from LED segment table 1 or 2 of OM 54 and stored in the D register.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2844, where it is determined whether a display request for segment P has been made. Specifically, it first determines whether the D3 bit of LED display counter 1 (E register value) is "1" (the lighting timing of digit 4) and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag (obtained from address "F062(H)" of RWM53 in Figure 33) is "1." If the D3 bit of LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag is "1," it is determined that a display request for segment P has been made ("Yes"), and the process proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the D3 bit of LED display counter 1 is "1" and the D0 bit of the favorable zone display LED flag is not "1," it is determined that a display request for segment P has not been made ("No"), and step S2845 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S2846.

Next, if the D3 bit of LED display counter 1 is not "1", the following processing is carried out. An AND operation is performed on LED display counter 1 (E register value) and the status display LED lighting data (obtained from address "F044(H)" of RWM53 in Figure 33), and it is determined whether the result of the AND operation is "0". If the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request for segment P ("Yes"), and processing proceeds to step S2845. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is "0", it is determined that there is no display request for segment P ("No"), and processing skips step S2845 and proceeds to step S2846.

When processing proceeds to step S2845, the segment P output data is set. Specifically, an OR operation is performed on the segment output data (D register value) obtained in step S2843 and "10000000 (B)", and the result of the OR operation is stored in the D register. As a result, the D7 bit of the segment output data (the bit corresponding to segment P) becomes "1".

Then, proceed to the next step S2846, where a digit signal is output from output port 3 and a segment signal is output from output port 4. Specifically, the data stored in the E register (LED display counter 1) is output as a digit signal from output port 3, and the data stored in the D register (segment output data) is output as a segment signal from output port 4. Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

Figure 51 is a flowchart showing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). As mentioned above, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) is performed by the second program, and since execution of interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited during execution of the second program, no interrupt prohibition processing is provided after the start of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). Other than this, unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 is the same as unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43. Note that in Figure 51, the same processing as in Figure 43 is assigned the same step numbers.

Figure 52 is a flowchart showing the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47. The ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR). Furthermore, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, between the start switch acceptance processing (step S279 in Figure 46) and the game end check processing (step S301 in Figure 46) (during game play), and in the recoverable error state. Therefore, the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed, and various ratio information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

When the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) process begins, the main control board 50 first stores the stack pointer (SP register) in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F2A3(H)" in Figure 35) in step S2461. As described above, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) is processed by a program outside the used area (second program), so while the program outside the used area (second program) is running, the stack pointer used by the program in the used area (first program) is saved, and the stack pointer is restored when returning to the program in the used area (first program).

In the next step S2462, the main control board 50 sets a stack pointer outside the used area. This process stores "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register). In the next step S2463, the main control board 50 saves the registers. This process saves various registers to a stack area outside the used area. Next, proceeding to step S2464, the main control board 50 executes blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH). This process is the process shown in Figure 53, which will be described later, and updates the blink request flag (address "F291 (H)").

In the next step S2465, the main control board 50 performs a ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME). This process is shown in FIG. 55, which will be described later, and updates the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)"), display switch time (address "F294"), and blinking switch time (address "F296(H)"). In the next step S2466, the main control board 50 performs a ratio display process (S_LED_OUT). This process is shown in FIG. 56, which will be described later, and actually displays (turns on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2467, where the main control board 50 restores the registers. This process restores the various registers saved in step S2463. In the next step, S2468, the main control board 50 restores the stack pointer. This process stores the stack pointer saved in step S2461, i.e., the data stored in stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2, in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, this process causes the stack pointer to point to the address of the area in use. The process according to this flowchart then ends.

As described above, in this embodiment, the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed during game play in the setting change state, setting confirmation state, between the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and in a recoverable error state, and therefore the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) during the setting change state, setting confirmation state, between the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) and the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46) (during game play), and in a recoverable error state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed regardless of whether the door switch 17 is on or off (whether the front door 12 is open or closed). In other words, ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) can be executed whether the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) or off (the front door 12 is closed). Therefore, whether the door switch 17 is on (the front door 12 is open) or off (the front door 12 is closed), the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) can sequentially display various ratios related to information types and game results on digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor).

In contrast, if an unrecoverable error occurs and the game enters an unrecoverable error state (a state in which the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is not executed, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) no longer display various ratios related to the information type and game results. Furthermore, in this embodiment, in an unrecoverable error state, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)") in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 described above or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 described below.

As a result, in an unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6-9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6-9) will remain "00000000 (B)," and digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes. Digits 6-9 of the management information display LED 74 remaining off is a characteristic of an unrecoverable error state, and this allows the manager (hall staff) to be notified that an unrecoverable error state has occurred.

Figure 53 is a flowchart showing the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 of Figure 52. When the blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) process begins, the main control board 50 first sets the number of repetitions and initial values in step S2481. This process stores "6 (H)" in register B and "0" in register C. Here, the number of repetitions "6" is a value used to determine whether or not to blink the six ratio segments.

In the next step S2482, the main control board 50 sets the address of the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. This process stores the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register. Figure 54 is a diagram showing the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). The blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table defines predetermined values for the ratios of six items. For example, a command-inclusive role ratio of "70" means that when the command-inclusive role ratio is "70" or higher, the display will blink. As shown in Figure 54, the top address of the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table is "2500(H)." Therefore, "2500(H)" is stored in the DE register.

Furthermore, a "non-applicable item" refers to a machine that does not have the function (performance) corresponding to that item. For example, a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (Type 1 special feature)" does not display the consecutive feature ratio, so when the consecutive feature ratio is displayed, a "--" is displayed in the ratio segment. Note that in the third embodiment, the ratios of all six items are displayed, but when a non-applicable item is present, "DE (H)" is stored in the ROM 54 address corresponding to the non-applicable item in the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table.

For example, in a gaming machine that does not have an "RB (first-class special feature)," addresses "2502(H)" and "2504(H)" store "DE(H)" instead of "60(H)" in Figure 54. In this way, regardless of the gaming machine, even if it does not have an "RB (first-class special feature)," a control process is built in that allows for lighting control of management information by simply modifying some of the data in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table. This makes it easy to reuse the control program in other products. Note that the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to "DE(H)."

In the next step S2483, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the ratio data. This process stores the address where the reel and other status ratio data is stored in the HL register ("F28D (H)" in Figure 35). Next, proceeding to step S2484, the main control board 50 obtains the blinking or non-applicable item determination value. Here, the following processes are executed. (1) The data at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register. (2) "1" is subtracted from the A register value.

In the next step S2485, the main control board 50 determines whether the item value is non-applicable. This process subtracts "DD(H)" from the A register value, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it determines that the item value is non-applicable. In other words, if the item is non-applicable, as described above, "DE(H)" is stored in the blinking/non-applicable item determination value table, so if "1" is subtracted from "DE(H)" and then "DD(H)" is further subtracted, the result is "0" and the zero flag = "1".

When a predetermined value other than "DE (H)" is stored as the value corresponding to a non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value - 1 - (predetermined value - 1)" is calculated, and if the calculation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"), it is determined to be a non-applicable item value. Furthermore, the "predetermined value" may be a value greater than "70 (H)" for the instructed reel ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), and reel ratio (6000 times), a value greater than "60 (H)" for the continuous reel ratio (cumulative) and continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and a value greater than "50 (H)" for the reel state ratio. If it is determined that the value is not a non-applicable item value, proceed to the next step S2486; if it is determined that the value is a non-applicable item value, skip step S2486 and proceed to step S2487.

In step S2486, the main control board 50 acquires the ratio data. This process stores the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register. In the next step S2487, the main control board 50 saves the ratio data or the non-corresponding item value. This process stores the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. This process has the following meaning:

When there is a non-applicable item, the memory area of RWM53 where the ratio data is stored has no data stored before the above saving process. For example, when an "RB (Type 1 special feature)" is not provided, "00 (H)" is stored in the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data (address "F289 (H)") and the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) data (address "F28B (H)").

Details will be provided later, but when the ratio is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in that address. In this case, if "00 (H)" is stored in the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) data, when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) is displayed, "00" will be displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74. To prevent this, the value of register A obtained in step S2485 ("DD (H)" in this embodiment) is stored as the ratio data, so that "--" will be displayed. Note that this is also programmed so that it can be used in common between gaming machines that have non-relevant items and gaming machines that do not have non-relevant items.

In the next step S2488, the main control board 50 performs a blinking determination. This process subtracts the data at the address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. If a borrow occurs as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1". As will be explained in more detail later, when the carry flag becomes "1", this means that the item will be lit in a non-blinking manner when displayed, and when the carry flag becomes "0", this means that the item will be lit in a blinking manner when displayed.

Next, proceeding to step S2489, the main control board 50 generates a blink request flag. This process performs an arithmetic operation to rotate and shift the carry flag and C register value to the left. Specifically, if the carry flag value is "CY" and the C register value is "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0", the operation is performed to change "CY" and C register value "D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0" to "D7" and C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY".

For example, if the C register value is the initial value "00000000(B)" as shown in step S2481, and the carry flag is "1" in step S2488, an operation is performed to change "1" and the C register value "00000000(B)" to "0" and the C register value "00000001(B)". Therefore, the C register value becomes "00000001(B)". This C register value ultimately becomes the blink request flag. In other words, the processing of step S2488 is a process of storing in a register (storage area) information that determines whether or not to blink the ratio segment for the item in question, based on an operation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blink/non-applicable item judgment value table.

In the next step S2490, the main control board 50 sets the RWM address of the next ratio data. This process subtracts "1" from the HL register value. For example, the HL register value for the first blinking determination is "F28D(H)" (reel device status ratio data) as described above. If "1" is subtracted here, the HL register value becomes "F28C(H)" (reel device ratio (cumulative) data), which is the target for the second blinking determination.

In the next step, S2491, the main control board 50 sets the address of the next blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table. This process increments the DE register value by 1. For example, if the DE register value was initially set to 2500(H), this process changes it to 2501(H). As shown in Figure 54, the blinking/non-applicable item judgment values are stored in addresses 2500(H) through 2505(H) in the following order: reel/etc. status ratio, reel ratio (cumulative), continuous reel ratio (cumulative), reel ratio (6000 times), continuous reel ratio (6000 times), and instruction-included reel ratio. This simplifies the process by specifying the target address through a loop process (steps S2484 through S2492) in which the initial value of the blinking/non-applicable item judgment value table address (DE register value) is set to 2500(H), and then incremented by 1 when the next blinking/non-applicable item is judged.

Next, the process proceeds to step S2492, where the main control board 50 determines whether the repetition has ended. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The B register value is decremented by "1". (2) If the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended. Here, the B register value is set to "6" in the initial step S2481, so the number of repetitions is "6". If it is determined that the repetition has ended, the process proceeds to step S2493; if it is determined that the repetition has not ended, the process returns to step S2484. In this way, the blinking determination of six items is performed.

After completing the blinking determination for the six items and proceeding to step S2493, the main control board 50 obtains the total play count counter value. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The value of the lowest two bytes of the total play count counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in the HL register. (2) The value of the highest byte of the total play count counter (address "F26D(H)") is stored in the A register. As mentioned above, the total play count counter is composed of three bytes, with "F26D(H)" being the storage area for storing the first digit, and its value being stored in the L register. Furthermore, "F26E(H)" is the storage area for storing the second digit, and its value being stored in the H register. Furthermore, "F26F(H)" is the storage area for storing the third digit, and its value being stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter is "0." This process determines whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0." If it is determined to be "0," the process proceeds to step S2495; if it is determined not to be "0," the process proceeds to step S2496. In step S2495, the main control board 50 determines whether 6,000 games have been played. This process subtracts "6,000 (D)" from the HL register value (the lowest two bytes of the total number of games played counter). If a carry is made as a result of this calculation, the carry flag becomes "1." If the carry flag is "1," it is determined that 6,000 games have not been played, and the process proceeds to step S2497. On the other hand, if it is determined that 6,000 games have been played, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the main control board 50 updates the data for the blink request flag. This process sets bit D6 of the C register to "1." Here, the C register value is set to the value corresponding to the blink request flag at address "F291(H)" in Figure 35 (however, at this point, the bit is inverted). Therefore, when 6,000 games have passed, the process of setting bit D6 to "1" is executed.

In the next step S2497, the main control board 50 determines whether the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" ("3" or greater). Here, it performs a process to subtract "3" from the A register value. If there is no borrowing in this subtraction, the carry flag is ≠ "1". If the carry flag is ≠ "1", it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter exceeds "2" ("3" or greater).

The reason for this is that to determine whether 175,000 games have been played, the most significant byte is first compared with "3." Here, "175,000 (D)" is "2AB98 (H)" in hexadecimal, so if the A register value exceeds "2" (the A register value is "3" or greater), it is clear that the value of the total number of games played counter is greater than "175,000 (D)." If the carry flag is not "1" in step S2497, it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter exceeds "2" and the process proceeds to step S2500. If the carry flag is "1," it is determined that the most significant byte of the total number of games played counter does not exceed "2" and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S2498, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter is "2". This process subtracts "2" from the A register value, and if it determines that the value is not "0", it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter is not "2". If it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter is not "2", proceed to step S2501; if it determines that the value of the most significant byte of the total number of plays counter is "2", proceed to step S2499.

In step S2499, the main control board 50 determines whether 175,000 games have elapsed. Specifically, "AB98(H)" is subtracted from the HL register value, and if the result of this calculation is a borrow, the carry flag is set to "1". If the carry flag is set to "1", it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed. If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2500; if it is determined that 175,000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the main control board 50 updates the blink request flag data. This process sets bit D7 of register C to "1." Bit D7 of register C corresponds to bit D7 of the blink request flag (175000 game blink flag) at address "F291(H)" in Figure 35. Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2501, the main control board 50 generates a blink request flag. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) "01111111(B)" is stored in the A register. (2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) is performed on the A register value and the C register value, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

Before step S2501 is executed, as described above, the blinking item (bit) of the data stored in the C register is set to "0." For example, when 175,000 games have been played, bit D7 is set to "1," as described above. In other words, when 175,000 games have not been played, the value is set to "0." Therefore, by inverting the bit in the C register value, a blink request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes "1."

In the next step S2502, the main control board 50 saves the blink request flag generated in step S2501. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The address of the blink request flag ("F291(H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) The A register value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F291(H)" in Figure 35). As a result, items that blink will be "1" and items that do not blink will be "0". In this way, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the blink request flags for the eight items, including whether to blink or not, are stored at address "F291(H)" in Figure 35.

Figure 55 is a flowchart showing the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in Figure 52. When the rate display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) process begins, the main control board 50 first updates the display switching time in step S2511. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The address storing the display switching time ("F294 (H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address. This processing executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "2144 (D)" when expressed in decimal as the display switching time.

For this reason, if this processing is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) will be stored as the display switching time. Also, when this processing is performed when the time is "0" and "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag will be set to "1". Note that because interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, the value changes from "0" to "2144 (D)" approximately every 4792 ms, and the carry flag will be set to "1". This causes the ratio display content to be switched approximately every 5 seconds.

In the next step S2512, the main control board 50 determines whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag has become "1" in the processing of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed. If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513; if it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.

In step S2513, the main control board 50 saves the blinking switching time. This process stores "134(D)(86(H))" at the address (blinking switching time) indicated by the data obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value (i.e., "F296(H)"). In other words, the blinking switching time is saved when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed. The blinking switching time stored is "2.235 x 134 = 299.49 (ms)".

Next, proceed to step S2514, where the main control board 50 turns off the blinking switch flag. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293 (H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) "0" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value. As mentioned above, when the data stored in the blinking switch flag is "0", it indicates that the light is on, and when it is "1", it indicates that the light is off. In other words, when the display switch time has elapsed, the blinking switch flag becomes "0" (on).

Next, the process proceeds to step S2515, where the main control board 50 updates the ratio display number. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The HL register value is decremented by "1." In other words, the address of the RWM 53 corresponding to the ratio display number ("F292 (H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. This processing executes a cyclic addition process for the ratio display number, which cycles between "0" and "5." Therefore, if this processing is performed when the ratio display number is "5," "0" is stored as the ratio display number. Furthermore, if this processing is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5," the carry flag is set to "1."

In the next step S2516, the main control board 50 determines whether the updated ratio display number is "0". Here, when the carry flag = "1", it is determined that the ratio display number is not "0". In other words, when the ratio display number is "5", if the processing of step S2515 is executed, the carry flag will not be "1" (= "0"), and in this case, it is determined that the ratio display number is "0".

Then, in step S2516, if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is "0", the process proceeds to step S2517; if it is determined that the updated ratio display number is not "0", the process ends according to this flowchart. In step S2517, the main control board 50 corrects the ratio display number. This process adds "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value ("F292 (H)" in Figure 35). As a result of this process, if "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number will cycle between "1" and "6". The process then ends according to this flowchart.

If it is determined in step S2512 that the display switching time has not elapsed and the process proceeds to step S2518, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switching time. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The address of the blinking switching time ("F296(H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) "1" is subtracted from the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the subtraction is stored at that address. This processing executes a cyclic subtraction process that cycles between "0" and "134(D)" when expressed as a decimal number as the blinking switching time. Therefore, if this processing is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time. Furthermore, if this processing is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", and "134(D)" (86(H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag becomes "1".

Next, the process proceeds to step S2519, where the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switching time has elapsed. This determination is made by determining whether the carry flag is "1", and if the carry flag is not "1", it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blinking switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2520, and if it is determined that the blinking switching time has not elapsed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

In step S2520, the main control board 50 updates the blinking switch flag. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The address of the blinking switch flag ("F293 (H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) "1" is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored at that address. This processing performs a cyclic addition process on the blinking switch flag, which cycles between "0" and "1." Therefore, if this processing is performed when the blinking switch flag is "1," "0" will be stored as the blinking switch flag. Processing according to this flowchart then ends.

Figure 56 is a flowchart showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in Figure 52. When the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) starts, the main control board 50 first acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) (address "F297(H)" in Figure 35) in step S1471. This process acquires the value of LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) and stores it in the D register.

In the next step S1472, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display a ratio. Here, it determines whether there is a request to display any of digits 6 to 9. Specifically, it performs an AND operation on the value of the LED display counter 2 stored in the D register and "00001111 (B)." If the result of this AND operation is "0," it is determined that there is no request to display a ratio, and processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if the result of the AND operation is not "0," it is determined that there is a request to display a ratio, and processing proceeds to step S1475. Note that in the third embodiment, the result of the AND operation on the value of the LED display counter 2 and "00001111 (B)" will never be "0," and therefore step S1472 will never return "No."

The next step, S1475, obtains the ratio display number (address "F292 (H)" in Figure 35). This process obtains the ratio display number and stores it in the A register, and then executes a process to store the A register value in the E register. Here, the number of blinking bit checks, described below, is determined based on the ratio display number. Examples are as follows: Example 1) Ratio display number is "1": The number of blinking bit checks for the instruction-included role ratio is obtained. Example 2) Ratio display number is "2": The number of blinking bit checks for the continuous role ratio (6000 times) is obtained. Example 3) Ratio display number is "5": The number of blinking bit checks for the role ratio (total cumulative) is obtained. Example 4) Ratio display number is "6": The number of blinking bit checks for the role status ratio is obtained. Also, by executing a process to store the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same.

The next step, S2531, sets the address of the blinking bit check count table. This process stores the address obtained by subtracting "1" from the starting address of the blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK) in the HL register. Figure 57 is a diagram showing the blinking bit check count table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). As shown in Figure 57, a predetermined value (for example, the value corresponding to the indicator-included feature ratio is "8(H)") is stored for each ratio. The starting address is "2510(H)". Therefore, "250F(H)" is stored in the HL register.

Note that the "number of blinking bit checks" is a value indicating how many bits from bit D0 in the blinking request flag at address "F292 (H)" must be passed before reaching the bit to be checked. For example, in Figure 57, "8 (H)" is stored for the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature status ratio. This is a value used to determine whether the value of bit D7, the eighth bit counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag, is "1." Bit D7 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of plays has not reached 175,000. When bit D7 is "1," the identification segments for the command-indicated feature ratio, continuous feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature status ratio will be subject to blinking.

57, "7(H)" is stored for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times), which is a value for determining whether the value of the seventh bit D6 counting from bit D0 in the blinking request flag is "1." Bit D6 is a flag that becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000, and when bit D6 is "1," the identification segments for the consecutive feature ratio (6000 times) and the feature ratio (6000 times) will be subject to blinking.

In the next step S2532, the main control board 50 sets the number of times to check the identification segment blinking bit. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register. (2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register. For example, if the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3", then: 250F(H) + 3(H) = 2512(H) (= HL register value) 7(H) (= B register value).

In other words, "250F(H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F292(H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blinking bit inspection table, making it possible to obtain the data stored at that address. In the above example, "7(H)" is obtained, which is the information used to determine whether or not to blink the identification segment at the role ratio (6000 times) stored at address "2512(H)."

Next, the process proceeds to step S1476, where the main control board 50 sets the identification segment offset table. This process stores the starting address of the identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA) in the HL register. The starting address is "2520(H)", and the value obtained by subtracting "1" from this address, "251F(H)", is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1477, the main control board 50 obtains the identification segment offset value. This process reads the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value from the identification segment offset table. Specifically, the following processes are executed: (1) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register. (2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. As a result, for example, when the ratio display number is "1," "2520(H)," obtained by adding "1(H)" to "251F(H)," is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at that address, "7A(H)," is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is "2," "2521(H)," obtained by adding "2(H)" to "251F(H)," is stored in the HL register, and the data stored at that address, "6B(H)," is stored in the A register.

In the next step S1478, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit) (a request to display digit 6). Here, it determines whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (1000 digit), proceed to step S1482; if there is no display request, proceed to step S1479.

In step S1479, the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits) (a request to display digit 7). Here, it determines whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1", and if it is "1", it determines that there is a display request. If there is a request to display the ratio (100 digits), proceed to step S1483; if there is no display request, proceed to step S2533.

In step S2533, the main control board 50 sets the ratio segment blinking bit check count. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The E register value is stored in the A register. (2) The A register value is stored in the B register. Here, the E register stores the ratio display number obtained in step S1475. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, A register, and B register. Next, proceed to step S1480. Note that when proceeding to step S1480, there is no request to display the ratio (1000 digit) and ratio (100 digit), i.e., there is no request to display the identification segment (when the ratio segment is displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is obtained. In this step S1480, the main control board 50 obtains the numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register. For example, if the E register value is "00000001 (B)," which corresponds to the ratio display number "1," the instruction-inclusive game device ratio data is obtained.

Specific ratio data acquisition is as follows: (1) The value ("F287(H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address of the RWM 53 where the command-incorporated device ratio data is stored ("F288(H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the HL register. (2) The data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register. (3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register. In other words, the RWM address where the ratio data is stored can be calculated (specified) using "F287(H)" as the base address and the ratio display number as the offset value, and the data stored at that RWM address can be acquired (stored) in the register (storage area).

As a result of this processing, an offset value for displaying one of the following ratios is stored in register A: instruction-included reel ratio data, continuous reel ratio data (6000 times), reel ratio data (6000 times), continuous reel ratio data (cumulative), reel ratio data (cumulative), or reel state ratio. This offset value (register A value) is used when obtaining the ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, the process proceeds to step S1481, where the main control board 50 determines whether there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit) (a request to display digit 9). This process determines whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register (the value of LED display counter 2) is "1". If there is a request to display the ratio (1 digit), the process proceeds to step S1483; if there is no request, the process proceeds to step S1482. Note that if there is no request to display the ratio (1 digit) in step S1481, this means that there is a request to display the ratio (10 digits).

If the above processing has resulted in a request to display the ratio (thousands digit) or ratio (ten digit), the process proceeds to step S1482; if the request to display the ratio (hundreds digit) or ratio (single digit), the process proceeds to step S1483. In step S1482, the main control board 50 sets the offset for the upper digits. The reason for proceeding to step S1482 is to light up the upper digits of the identification segment or ratio segment. At this point, the A register stores the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480). The following processing is then executed.

(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits stored in the A register. For example, if the data before the swap is "0011/1001(B)" (the "/" indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), swapping the lower 4 bits and upper 4 bits results in "1001/0011(B)." (2) AND the A register value with "00001111(B)" and store the result in the A register. This process masks the upper 4 bits (setting them to "0") so that the lower 4 bits of the A register are used as the offset value. Of the 1-byte data for the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data for the offset value used to display the ratio, the upper 4 bits correspond to the upper offset value, and the lower 4 bits correspond to the lower offset value. Therefore, by performing the above process, an offset value for obtaining the upper segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the main control board 50 sets the ratio display segment data table. This process stores the starting address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register. The starting address is "2530(H)", and "2530(H)" is stored in the HL register. Note that the specific configuration of the ratio display segment data table will not be explained here.

Next, proceeding to step S1484, the main control board 50 obtains the segment output data. This process adds the A register value (offset value) to the HL register value (starting address of the ratio display segment data table), and stores the data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after the addition in the E register. Specifically, for example, if the HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; starting address value of the ratio display segment data table) and the A register value = 5 (H), then the HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition) and the E register value = 01101101 (B) (display data for "5").

Next, proceeding to step S1485, the main control board 50 determines whether segment P is being displayed. In this embodiment, when displaying digits 6 to 9, segment P (dot) for digit 7 is always displayed, so if there is a request to display ratio (100 digit), it is determined that segment P is being displayed. On the other hand, if there is a request to display ratio (1 digit), ratio (10 digit), and ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that there is no request to display segment P.

Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1." If it is "1," it is determined that there is a request to display segment P; if it is not "1," it is determined that there is no request to display segment P. Specifically, the following processing is performed: (1) "00000010(B)" is stored in the A register. (2) An AND operation is performed on the A register value and the D register value (the value of LED display counter 2 stored in step S1471). If the result is not "0," it is determined that there is a request to display segment P. If it is determined that there is a request to display segment P, proceed to step S1486; if it is determined that there is no request to display segment P, proceed to step S2534.

In step S1486, the main control board 50 sets the output data corresponding to segment P. Since segment P corresponds to bit D7 of the 8-bit data, it performs an OR operation on the segment data (E register value) obtained in step S1484 and "10000000 (B)", and stores the result of the operation in the E register.

In the next step S2534, the main control board 50 obtains the blink request flag. This process stores the data of the blink request flag (address "F291(H)" in Figure 35) in the A register. Next, proceeding to step S2535, the main control board 50 performs a blink bit check. This process shifts the A register to the right by "1" and stores the overflow result in the carry flag. In other words, the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step S2536, the main control board 50 determines whether the test has ended. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) "1" is subtracted from the value of the B register. (2) If it is determined that the value of the B register is "0", it is determined that the test has ended. If it is determined that the test has ended, proceed to step S2537, and if it is determined that the test has not ended, return to step S2535. Through the above processing, the value of the blink request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the overflow result from this shift is stored in the carry flag.

For example, if the blink request flag value is "10000000(B)" (the 175000 blink flag in bit D7 is on), and the B register value is "8(H)", 1st time: "10000000(B)" → "01000000(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 8 - 1 = 7(H) 2nd time: "01000000(B)" → "00100000(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 7 - 1 = 6(H) 3rd time: "00100000(B)" → "00010000(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 6 - 1 = 5(H) 4th time: "00010000(B)" → "00001000(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 5 - 1 = 4(H) 5th time: "00001000(B)" → "00000100(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 4 - 1 = 3(H) 6th time: "00000100(B)" → "00000010(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 3 - 1 = 2(H) 7th time: "00000010(B)" → "00000001(B)", carry flag = "0", B register value = 2 - 1 = 1(H) 8th time: "00000001(B)" → "00000000(B)", carry flag = "1", B register value = 1 - 1 = 0(H).

In step S2537, the main control board 50 determines whether the blink request flag is on. This process determines whether the carry flag is "1" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection has ended, and if it is "1", it determines that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, it proceeds to step S2538; if it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, it proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, the main control board 50 determines whether the blinking switch flag is on. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The data of the blinking switch flag (address "F293(H)" in Figure 35) is stored in the A register. (2) If the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on. If it is determined that the blinking switch flag is on, proceed to step S2539; if it is determined that the blinking switch flag is not on, proceed to step S1487. Note that from steps S2537 and S2538, a) if the blinking request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), proceed to step S2538 without proceeding, so the light will not be turned off even if the blinking switch flag is on. b) Even if the blinking request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the blinking switch flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light will be turned on. c) If the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537) and the blink switch flag is on ("Yes" in step S2538), proceed to step S2539 and the light will be turned off.

In step S2539, the main control board 50 clears the segment data. This process stores the B register value in the E register. Here, the B register value is always set to "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection is complete. Therefore, this process sets the E register to "0." In other words, when the blink request flag is on ("1") and the blink switch flag is on ("1", i.e., off), the display to be lit is turned off in this interrupt process, so step S2539 is executed to set the segment data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)." Then, proceed to step S1487.

In step S1487, the main control board 50 outputs a segment signal from output port 7 and a digit signal from output port 6 to output a digit signal and a segment signal. Here, the following processing is performed: (1) The DE register value and the HL register value are swapped. Here, the D register stores a digit signal. The E register stores a segment signal. Then, the data stored in the D register is swapped with the data stored in the H register, and the data stored in the E register is swapped with the data stored in the L register. As a result, the H register stores a digit signal, and the L register stores a segment signal. (2) The L register value is output to output port 7, and the H register value is output to output port 6. This completes the processing according to this flowchart.

Next, we will explain the operation of the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 when operated in the third embodiment. When the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, and a recoverable error state (for example, a medal retention error ("CE" error) in the medal selector) occurs, the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is operated to release the recoverable error state. In this case, as described above, even if the recoverable error state is released, the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, and therefore the data related to the advantageous zone is also maintained without being initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 also remains lit. Note that when recovering from the recoverable error state, error-related data such as error detection flags stored at specified addresses in the RWM 53 may be initialized.

In contrast, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on (operated). In this case, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No," step S2710 becomes "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set.

Also, since medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 returns "Yes" and processing proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of Figure 44, initialization processing is performed for addresses "F001 (H)" to "F1FF (H)" in the used area of RWM53, and addresses "F292 (H)" to "F3FF (H)" outside the used area. As a result, data related to the advantageous zone is initialized, and the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned off. However, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000 (H)" is maintained without being initialized, so the setting value is not changed. Furthermore, because it is reset, step S2741 in FIG. 44 returns "Yes," skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, and the system does not transition to the setting change state. It then proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (FIG. 46), returning to a state where medals can be bet.

In this way, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the recoverable error state can be canceled by operating the reset switch 153, allowing play to continue in the advantageous zone. In contrast, if a recoverable error state occurs when the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the recoverable error state can be canceled by turning the power off once and then turning the power on with the reset switch 153 turned on, allowing play to resume from the normal zone rather than the advantageous zone. This allows the administrator (hall staff) to choose whether to maintain play in the advantageous zone or resume play from the normal zone.

Also, for example, suppose a player stops playing in the advantageous zone (in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone). In such a case, if the next player is allowed to play in the middle of playing in the advantageous zone, that player will have too much of an advantage. On the other hand, changing the settings while the hall is open is undesirable, as it could encourage players' gambling instincts. Furthermore, turning off the power to a gaming machine and stopping its operation while the hall is open reduces the operating rate of the gaming machine, which is undesirable from the perspective of hall management. Therefore, while the advantageous zone display LED 77 is lit and medals can be bet, the power is turned off once, and then turned on with the reset switch 153 turned on. This allows play to resume from the normal zone without changing the settings.

Also, suppose the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated). In this case, it becomes possible to transition to the setting change state (setting change mode, setting change in progress), and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

Specifically, when the power is turned off under conditions where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on under conditions where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off (not operated), step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to step S2711. Furthermore, since there is no abnormal power recovery, step S2712 becomes "No", and processing proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when power recovery is normal is set. Furthermore, since medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731.

Furthermore, because it is not reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 returns "No," and the system proceeds to step S2742, which is the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL). Then, because it is not the start of setting confirmation, step S2755 of the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in FIG. 45 returns "No," and steps S2752 to S2758 are repeated until step S2756 returns "Yes." In other words, the system enters the setting change state. Thereafter, when the start switch 41 is operated, step S2756 returns "Yes," and when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, step S2760 returns "Yes," and the setting change state ends. Then, through steps S2743 to S2747 in FIG. 44, the system proceeds to step S248, which is the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), and the system returns to a state in which medals can be bet.

As described above, in the main process (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46), the setting is set to be unchangeable during the period from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 are spinning, and the setting unchangeable flag is turned on during this period. If the power is turned off while the setting unchangeable flag is on, and then the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, the result in step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "No." Therefore, the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731 is executed.
Therefore, the state does not change to the setting change state.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so if the power is turned off under these circumstances, and then the power is turned on under the circumstances where the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, step S2714 in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 is started, allowing the system to transition to the setting change state.

Also, as mentioned above, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed when the power is restored normally after a power outage, the process proceeds to step S2713 in FIG. 41, and the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and the addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of RWM53. Furthermore, the initialization range of the used area of RWM53 includes the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)".

For this reason, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is between "1" and "3", and the credit number is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is between "1" and "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the bet number will be "0" and the credit number will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the number of bets will be "0" and the number of credits will also be "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on and the setting change state is entered when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, when the setting change state ends and medals can be bet, the number of bets will be "0" and the number of credits will also be "0".

Also, suppose the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on (operated). In this case, initialization processing of a specified memory area of the RWM 53 can be performed, and after the initialization processing is performed, the game returns to a state where medals can be bet without transitioning to a setting change state.

Specifically, when the power is turned off in a situation where medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No", step S2710 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to step S2713, where the initialization range of the RWM 53 at the start of setting changes when the power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Also, because medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off, so step S2714 becomes "Yes", and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731.

Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization is performed on addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM 53's used area, and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Also, since this is a reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 returns to "Yes," skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 and proceeding to step S2743. Therefore, the setting change state is not entered. After that, steps S2744 to S2747 are performed, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46), returning to a state in which medals can be bet.

Also, if the power is turned off while the setting change disable flag is on, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 will return "No," so the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731 will not be executed, and therefore the initialization process of the RWM 53 will not be executed.

In contrast, when medals can be bet, the setting change prohibition flag is off. Under these circumstances, the power is turned off. If the power is then turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2714 in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes," and the process moves to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) of step S2731, whereupon the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, in step S2713 of FIG. 41, the addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area are set as the initialization range of the RWM 53. This initialization range is the same as the initialization range set when an operation is performed to transition to the setting change state when the power is restored normally after a power outage.

In other words, provided that the power has been restored normally (not abnormally), the initialization process for the RWM 53 is executed to the same extent when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this way, in this embodiment, even without operating the setting key switch 152, and therefore even without possessing the setting key, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the initialization process of the RWM 53 can be executed to the same extent as when transitioning to the setting change state, without transitioning to the setting change state.

For this reason, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is between "1" and "3", and the credit number is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the RWM 53 initialization process is executed, and then, when medals can be bet again, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the bet number is one between "1" and "3", and the credit number is "0", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process for the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when medals can be bet again, the bet number becomes "0" and the credit number also becomes "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is between "1" and "50", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process for the RWM 53 is executed, and then, when medals can be bet again, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Furthermore, if the power is turned off when medals can be bet, the number of bets is "0", and the number of credits is "0", and then the power is turned on when the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of the RWM 53 is executed, and then when it becomes possible to bet medals, the number of bets becomes "0" and the number of credits also becomes "0".

Also, suppose the power is turned off when medals can be bet, and then turned on when the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In other words, suppose the power is turned on when both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on. In this case, it becomes possible to transition to the setting change state, and then the start switch 41 is operated, the setting key switch 152 is turned off, and when the setting change state ends, the state returns to one in which medals can be bet.

As shown in FIG. 41, in the program start process (M_PRG_START), step S2707 determines whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then step S2710 determines whether the reset switch signal is on. That is, first it is determined whether the setting key switch signal is on, and then it is determined whether the reset switch signal is on. Therefore, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, step S2707 becomes "Yes" and the process does not proceed to step S2710. That is, when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, the setting key switch 152 takes priority. Then, when the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in FIG. 44 is started, step S2741 returns "No" and the process proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, allowing the system to transition to the setting change state.

Also, suppose that when transitioning to the setting change state, the setting value display LED 73 initially displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for "F001(H)" is "M". Suppose that the setting change switch 153 is then operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) for address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1", and the value of the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) for "F001(H)" becomes "N".

Furthermore, the set value display LED 73
Suppose the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated while the setting value "N" is displayed on the display. In this case, because the start switch 41 has not been operated, the changed setting value data has not been saved (stored) in address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and the value of "F000(H)" remains "M-1." In addition, because the start switch 41 has not been operated and the setting key switch 152 has not been turned off, the power is turned off without ending the setting change state (while remaining in the setting change state).

Then, suppose the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 and reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are both off. In this case, the power is simply turned on/off, and the data in the used area and outside the used area of the RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized, so the system returns to the same state as when the power was interrupted, and the setting change state is restored. Also, since "M-1" is stored in the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of the RWM 53, and "N" is stored in the setting value display data (_NB_RANK_DSP) at "F001(H)" of the RWM 53, the setting value "N" is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 when the system returns to the setting change state.

In contrast, suppose that when the setting change state is entered, the setting value display LED 73 first displays the setting value "M" (for example, "2"). Then, suppose that the setting change switch 153 is operated, causing the setting value display LED 73 to display the setting value "N" (for example, "3"). Furthermore, suppose that while the setting value display LED 73 is displaying the setting value "N," the power is turned off without the start switch 41 being operated. Up to this point, the situation is the same as above. Now, suppose that the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

In this case, step S2707 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 is "No" and step S2710 is "Yes," so the process proceeds to step S2731, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes when power is restored normally after a power outage is set. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization processing is performed for addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM53 and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. Therefore, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 remains "M-1." Also, since this is a reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 returns "Yes," skipping the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 and proceeding to step S2743. As a result, the setting change state is not entered. After that, steps S2744 to S2747 are processed, and the main process (M_MAIN) (Figure 46) in step S248 is entered, making it possible to bet medals. At this time, the value of the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 remains "M-1," so the setting value becomes "M."

Also, suppose the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on. In this case, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed in the unrecoverable error state, and therefore the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed either. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the power-off process completed flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved.

Furthermore, because the power was turned on with the setting key switch 152 off, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 results in "No," and the program proceeds to step S2708. Furthermore, because the power-off processing completed flag is not set and the RWM checksum data is not saved, step S2708 results in "Yes," and the program proceeds to step S2801, which is the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). In other words, if the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the unrecoverable error state will occur again.

Note that even though the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 does not proceed to step S2710, so the power-off recovery process (M_POWER_ON) is not executed, and the initialization process (M_INI_SET) is not executed. Furthermore, while the second program is executing, the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed, and the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. Therefore, if the power is turned off while the second program is executing, when the power is turned on again, the power-off process completion flag is not set, and the RWM checksum data is not saved. Therefore, step S2708 returns "Yes," and the process proceeds to step S2801, where the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) is executed. In other words, an unrecoverable error state occurs.

Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the program outside the used area (second program) is executing unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will be "No", step S2708 will be "Yes", and the program will proceed to step S2801, whereupon unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) will be executed by the program in the used area (first program).

Similarly, if the power is turned off while the program in the used area (first program) is executing unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), and then the power is turned on again while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 will be "No," step S2708 will be "Yes," and the program will proceed to step S2801, so that the program in the used area (first program) will execute unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP).

Also, suppose the power is turned off in an unrecoverable error state, and then the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off. In this case, step S2707 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to step S2711, where the initialization range of RWM 53 at the start of setting changes during a power outage recovery abnormality is set. Also, since a power outage recovery abnormality has occurred, step S2712 becomes "Yes", and processing proceeds to the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) of step S2731. Then, in steps S2732 to S2736 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44, initialization is performed for the entire range (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)") including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) in the used area of RWM53, and the entire range outside the used area (addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)"). As a result, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 becomes "0", and the setting value becomes "1".

Also, since it is not a reset state, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 becomes "No," proceeds to the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742, and transitions to the setting change state. Then, in this setting change state, assume that the power is turned off without the setting change switch (reset switch/RWM clear switch) 153 being operated. In this case, since the interrupt process (I_INTR) is executed in the setting change state, the power off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed. Then, assume that the power is turned on while the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. In this case, since it is not a power off recovery abnormality, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "No." Also, since the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, step S2710 becomes "Yes." Then, proceed to step S2713, where the initialization range of RWM53 at the start of setting changes when power is restored normally after a power outage is set.

Also, because the setting change prohibition flag is OFF, step S2714 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 becomes "Yes," and the process proceeds to the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in step S2731. Furthermore, because it is reset, step S2741 of the initialization process (M_INI_SET) in Figure 44 becomes "Yes," and the setting change confirmation process (M_RANK_CTL) in step S2742 is skipped. Therefore, this time, the process does not transition to the setting change state. After that, steps S2744 to S2747 are processed, and the process proceeds to the main process (M_MAIN) in step S248 (Figure 46), where medals can be bet. At this time, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is "0" as described above, so the setting value becomes "1."

Also, in this embodiment, power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) is executed in step S2771 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in Figure 47. Furthermore, RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) is executed in step S2776 of the power-off processing (I_POWER_DOWN) in Figure 48. Then, in the RWM checksum set processing (S_SUM_SET) in Figure 49, steps S2785 to S2794 are executed to calculate RWM checksum data (complement data), and the calculated RWM checksum data is stored at address "F2A0(H)" of RWM 53 in step S2795.

As mentioned above, this RWM checksum data is a value that, when added to the sum of the data at addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area of RWM 53 and the data at addresses "F210(H)" to "F3FF(H)" (excluding "F2A0(H)") outside the used area, results in "0".

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a recoverable error occurs and the system enters a recoverable error state (a state in which the error detection flag is turned on and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed as described above. Therefore, even if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the recoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) can be executed. In contrast, if an irrecoverable error occurs and the system enters an irrecoverable error state (a state in which the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited as described above. Therefore, if an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (the power is turned off) in the irrecoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed.

In this way, if the power is turned off during an unrecoverable error state, the power-off process (I_POWER_DOWN) is not executed. When the power is turned on again, the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 determines in step S2708 that a power-off recovery error has occurred, and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. In other words, once an unrecoverable error state has occurred, simply turning the power on and off will again result in an unrecoverable error state. Furthermore, once an unrecoverable error state has occurred, the system cannot return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which a game can be played) unless the power is turned off and an operation to transition to a setting change state (turning the power on with the setting key switch 152 turned on) is performed.

Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error state occurs, even if the power is turned off and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on, step S2708 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 determines that there is a power outage recovery abnormality, and the system proceeds to unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801. As a result, the system does not proceed to the main processing (M_MAIN) (Figure 46), and it is not possible to return to a state in which medals can be bet (a state in which games can be played).

Furthermore, even if a recoverable error occurs and the system enters a recoverable error state (the error detection flag is turned on and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed. However, if an irrecoverable error occurs and the system enters an irrecoverable error state (the irrecoverable error process (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the irrecoverable error process 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51 is executed and game progress is stopped), the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited. Furthermore, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) that controls the lighting of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, set value display LED 73), and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) that controls the lighting of digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) are executed in the interrupt process (I_INTR).

For this reason, in a recoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) can be executed, and so LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) can also be executed. Therefore, even in a recoverable error state, error information can be displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) using LED display control (I_LED_OUT), and various ratios related to information type and game results can be displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) using ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

In contrast, in an unrecoverable error state, interrupt processing (I_INTR) is prohibited, and therefore LED display control (I_LED_OUT) and ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) are not executed. Therefore, during an unrecoverable error state, error information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 51 described above.

Furthermore, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the output of output ports 0 to 7 is turned off ("00000000 (B)"). As a result, during the unrecoverable error state, the output from output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) remains "00000000 (B)." Therefore, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off until the unrecoverable error state is released and interrupt processing (I_INTR) resumes. Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remaining off is a characteristic of the unrecoverable error state, and this allows the administrator (waiting room staff) to be notified that an unrecoverable error state has occurred.

The above describes the third embodiment of the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to the above and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows: (1) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 all remain unlit. However, the display mode of digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 during an unrecoverable error state is not limited to this.

For example, during an unrecoverable error state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." In other words, the display on the management information display LED 74 may read "8888." Figure 58 is a flowchart showing a modified example of unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP), and corresponds to Figure 51. In Figure 58, steps that differ from Figure 51 have their step numbers underlined, and steps that are the same as those in Figure 51 have the same step numbers. The following will mainly explain the differences from Figure 51.

In unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) shown in Figure 58, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506, where the main control board 50 outputs data to display "8" in digit 6 from output ports 6 and 7. Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000001 (B)" (data where only the digit 6 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111 (B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1").

Next, proceeding to step S1507, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent the LED from flickering. The length of the wait depends on the performance of the LED, but can be set to approximately 0.1 ms, for example. For example, a predetermined value (e.g., 255) is stored in the B register, and this value is subtracted using the internal system clock. When the B register value becomes 0, it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, and proceed to the next step, S1508.

In step S1508, the main control board 50 turns off the output of output ports 6 and 7 ("00000000(B)"). This process is to prevent image retention. Next, in step S1509, the main control board 50 executes a wait process to prevent LED flickering. This process ensures that the LEDs are turned off after the output of output ports 6 and 7 has been turned off.

Proceeding to the next step, S1510, the main control board 50 outputs data to display "8" in digit 7 from output ports 6 and 7. Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000010(B)" (data in which only the digit 7 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1"). Steps S1511 to S1513 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1514, the main control board 50 outputs data to display "8" in digit 8 from output ports 6 and 7. Specifically, output port 6 outputs "00000100(B)" (data where only the digit 8 signal is "1"), and output port 7 outputs "01111111(B)" (data where the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1"). Steps S1515 to S1517 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509.

Then, proceeding to step S1518, the main control board 50 outputs data to display "8" in digit 9 from output ports 6 and 7. Specifically, "00001000(B)" (data in which only the digit 9 signal is "1") is output from output port 6, and "01111111(B)" (data in which the segment 2A to 2G signals are "1") is output from output port 7. Steps S1519 to S1521 are the same as steps S1507 to S1509. Then, after executing the processing of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

In this way, during an irrecoverable error state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may each display "8." The display of all digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 displaying "8" is a characteristic of an irrecoverable error state, and this allows the manager (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

The display on the management information display LED 74 may be "---" instead of "8888." That is, only the G segments of digits 6 to 9 may be lit. The display on the management information display LED 74 may also be "...." That is, only the P segments of digits 6 to 9 may be lit. The display on the management information display LED 74 may also be "8.8.8.8." That is, all segments of digits 6 to 9 (segments A to G and P) may be lit, as shown in Figure 30 (a) or (c).

(2) In the above embodiment, during an unrecoverable error state, the output of output port 6 (output port for signals for digits 6 to 9) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) is turned off ("00000000(B)"), so that digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 remain unlit. However, in step S1494 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 43 or the unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in FIG. 51, the output of output ports 6 and 7 may be maintained rather than turned off ("00000000(B)"). In this case, the display of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 will be as follows:

As mentioned above, digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 are dynamically lit with four interrupts as one cycle. Therefore, for example, when digits 6 through 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65," digit 9 "5," digit 8 "6," digit 7 "P.", and digit 6 "7" will light up in sequence. Suppose, for example, that an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 through 8 of the management information display LED 74 are off and digit 9 is lit with "5." In this case, the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops while signals (digit signals and segment signals) that turn off digits 6 through 8 and light up digit 9 with "5" are being output from output ports 6 and 7.

Specifically, while output port 6 outputs "00001000(B)" (digit 9 signal is "1" and the rest are "0") and output port 7 outputs "01101101(B)" (segment 2G, 2F, 2D, 2C, and 2A signals are "1" and the rest are "0"), the interrupt process (I_INTR) stops, and the signals (data) output from output ports 6 and 7 are no longer rewritten. As a result, the output of signals (digit signals and segment signals) from output ports 6 and 7 continues until the unrecoverable error state is cleared and interrupt process (I_INTR) resumes, so digits 6 to 8 remain unlit and digit 9 remains lit with "5" displayed.

Similarly, suppose an unrecoverable error state occurs when digit 6 of the management information display LED 74 is lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are unlit. In this case, until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt process (I_INTR) resumes, the signals (digit signal and segment signal) that cause digit 6 to light with "7" and digits 7 to 9 to turn off will continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 will light with "7" and digits 7 to 9 will remain unlit.

Also, for example, suppose that unrecoverable error processing 2 is executed by the second program under the circumstances where digit 6 of management information display LED 74 is lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 are unlit. Then, suppose that the outputs of output ports 6 and 7 are maintained without being turned off during unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program. In this case, as described above, the signals (digit signals and segment signals) that cause digit 6 to light up and digits 7 to 9 to be unlit continue to be output from output ports 6 and 7, so digit 6 remains lit with "7" and digits 7 to 9 remain unlit.

When the power is turned off in this state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are extinguished. If the power is then turned on with the setting key switch 152 off, step S2708 of the program start process (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 becomes "Yes," and processing proceeds to step S2801, where unrecoverable error processing is executed by the first program. In this case, the initialization process of step S2731 does not proceed, and the data in RWM 53 is maintained without being initialized. Therefore, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in RWM 53 (for example, the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to the LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) at "F297(H")) is also maintained without being initialized.

Here, let's assume that during the unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is not prohibited but is instead enabled to run. In this case, the lighting of the management information display LED 74 is controlled by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt processing (I_INTR), so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 first display the ratio information immediately before the unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed, i.e., "7P.65" (instruction-included reel ratio, ratio display number "1").

Also, assume that immediately before the second program executes the unrecoverable error processing 2, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65" for, say, 2000 ms. In this case, when the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during the first program's unrecoverable error processing, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 display "7P.65" for 4791.84 ms - 2000 ms = 2791.84 ms. Thereafter, the display items from ratio display number "2" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY).

In this way, when the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the display begins (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information immediately before unrecoverable error processing 2 by the second program is executed. In contrast, if the interrupt process (I_INTR) is prohibited during unrecoverable error processing by the first program, the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) during the interrupt process (I_INTR) is not executed either, and digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 remain off.

Also, as mentioned above, for the instructed feature ratio, consecutive feature ratio (cumulative), feature ratio (cumulative), and feature etc. state ratio, the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 175,000. For the consecutive feature ratio (6,000 plays) and feature ratio (6,000 plays), the identification segment will flash when the total number of plays is less than 6,000. Also, for the instructed feature ratio, feature ratio (cumulative), and feature ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 70 or greater. For the consecutive feature ratio (cumulative) and consecutive feature ratio (6,000 plays), the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 60 or greater. For the feature etc. state ratio, the ratio segment will flash when the displayed value is 50 or greater. Also, when flashing, the light will alternate between turning on and off approximately every 0.3 seconds.

For this reason, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 may all be off. For example, suppose an unrecoverable error state occurs when digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 are all off, that is, when the output from output ports 6 and 7 is "00000000 (B)" (off). In this case, the output from output ports 6 and 7 will remain "00000000 (B)" (off) until the unrecoverable error state is released and the interrupt process (I_INTR) resumes, so digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 will all remain off.

The above display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 is a display mode specific to an irrecoverable error state, which allows the manager (hall staff) to be notified that an irrecoverable error state has occurred.

(3) In the above embodiment, provided that the power supply was recovered normally (not abnormally), the RWM 53 initialization process was executed to the same extent when the power supply was turned on (to transition to the setting change state) with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power supply was turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on.

However, this is not limiting, and the initialization range of RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on (when transitioning to the setting change state) while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on. For example, when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is on, the initialization process of RWM 53 may be performed within the same range as when the advantageous period ends. Specifically, initialization processing is performed for a specified range of the usage area of the RWM 53 where data related to the advantageous zone is stored (for example, addresses "F061(H)" to "F068(H)" in Figure 33), and other ranges (for example, the credit number data (_NB_CREDIT) at address "F010(H)" in Figure 33 and the bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) at address "F043(H)" in Figure 33) can be maintained without initialization. In any case, it is preferable to set the initialization range when the power is turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on to be narrower than the initialization range when transitioning to the setting change state.

(4) In the above embodiment, step S458 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 determines whether the set value is within the normal range, and if it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S2811 for unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP). However, this is not limited to this. For example, the main processing (M_MAIN) (FIG. 46) may determine whether the set value is within the normal range immediately after determining that the start switch 41 has been turned on (operated).

(5) In the above embodiment, if the power was turned off while in the setting change state, and then the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 was turned on, and then the power was turned on, the state transitioned to a state where medals could be bet without transitioning to the setting change state. However, this is not limited to this. For example, if the power was turned off while in the setting change state, and then the setting key switch 152 was turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 was turned on, and then the power was turned on, an unrecoverable error state could occur.

Specifically, for example, a setting change status flag is set, and when the setting change status is entered, the setting change status flag is set in a specified storage area in the RWM 53. When the conditions for terminating the setting change status are met, the setting change status flag is cleared. Then, when the power is turned off in the setting change status and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, step S2714 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in FIG. 41 determines whether the setting change status flag is on. If it is determined that the setting change status flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2801, which is an unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP), and the system enters an unrecoverable error state. This prevents a setting value from being set even though an operation to confirm the setting value (for example, turning on the start switch 41) has not been performed.

(6) In the above embodiment, address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 stores one of the values "0(D)" to "5(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data is managed as "0(D)" to "5(D)". However, this is not limited to this, and address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 may store one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" as the setting value data (_NB_RANK). That is, the setting value data may be managed as "1(D) to "6(D)".

When transitioning to the setting change state, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53 is cleared (to "0"), and when an operation to confirm the setting value is performed (for example, turning on the start switch 41), one of the values "1(D)" to "6(D)" may be stored as the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM 53. In this case, if the power is turned off in the setting change state and then turned on with the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, it may be determined in step S458 of FIG. 47 that the setting value is not within the normal range (a setting value error has occurred), and the process may proceed to unrecoverable error processing 2 (S_ERROR_STOP) in step S2811, resulting in an unrecoverable error state.

(7) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) were output from output port 3, segment signals for digits 1 to 5 (segment 1A to 1P signals) were output from output port 4, digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) were output from output port 6, and segment signals for digits 6 to 9 (segment 2A to 2P signals) were output from output port 7. When lighting digits 1 to 5, digit signals were output from output port 3 and segment 1 signals were output from output port 4. When lighting digits 6 to 9, digit signals were output from output port 6 and segment 2 signals were output from output port 7. In other words, separate output ports were used for digits 1 to 5, whose lighting is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose lighting is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program).

However, this is not a limitation. For example, the same output port may be used for digits 1 to 5, whose illumination is controlled by a program in the usage area (first program), and digits 6 to 9, whose illumination is controlled by a program outside the usage area (second program). Figure 59 is a diagram showing a modified example of the output port in the third embodiment. As shown in Figure 59, segment signals for digits 1 to 9 (segment A to P signals) may be output from output port 3. Furthermore, digit signals for digits 1 to 5 (digit 1 to 5 signals) may be output from output port 2, and digit signals for digits 6 to 9 (digit 6 to 9 signals) may be output from output port 4. In this case, during an unrecoverable error state, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 can all remain off by turning off the output of output port 4 (the output port for digits 6 to 9 signals) ("00000000(B)").

(8) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 40, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) for outputting digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals is provided in the usage area of the RWM 53, and an LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for outputting digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals is provided outside the usage area of the RWM 53. In other words, an LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and an LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 are provided separately and independently. However, this is not limited to this.

Figure 60 shows a modified example of the LED display counter in the third embodiment. As shown in Figure 60, an LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) with 5 interrupts per cycle may be provided in the usage area of RWM 53, and based on the value of this LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1), digit 1 signals to digit 5 signals may be output, as well as digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals. In other words, the LED display counter for lighting digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting digits 6 to 9 may be combined into one.

In this case, in step S1471 of the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in Figure 56, the value of LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is obtained and stored in the D register. The next step, S1472, determines whether a ratio display request has been made. Specifically, an AND operation is performed on the value of LED display counter 1 stored in the D register and "11110000 (B)." If the result of the AND operation is "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has been made and processing proceeds to step S1475. If the result of the AND operation is not "0," it is determined that a ratio display request has not been made and processing according to this flowchart ends.

Here, if the value of LED display counter 1 is "00001000(B)", "00000100(B)", "00000010(B)", or "00000001(B)", the AND operation result will be "0", so it is determined that a ratio display request has been made and the process proceeds to step S1475. On the other hand, if the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000(B)", the AND operation result will not be "0", so it is determined that a ratio display request has not been made and the process according to this flowchart ends. In this case, the output of output ports 6 and 7 is maintained, so the display mode of digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74 will be the same as the display mode during the previous interrupt processing. For example, if digit 6 was lit to display "7" during the previous interrupt processing, digit 6 will also be lit to display "7" during this interrupt processing.

Note that if it is determined in step S1472 that there is no request for ratio display, the outputs of output port 6 (output port for signals for digits 6 to 9) and output port 7 (output port for segment signals for digits 6 to 9) may be turned off ("00000000(B)"), thereby turning off all digits 6 to 9 on the management information display LED 74.

(9) For example, provided that the power recovery is normal (not abnormal), the initialization range of RWM 53 may be different when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, and when the power is turned on with both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on. Specifically, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 off, the initialization range of RWM 53 is set to, for example, addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" of RWM53 and addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared).

In contrast, when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is set to, for example, the entire range of the used area (addresses "F000(H)" to "F1FF(H)"), including the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)", and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. In this case, addresses "F210(H)" to "F291(H)" outside the used area are maintained without being initialized (cleared), but the setting value data (_NB_RANK) at address "F000(H)" is initialized (cleared). In this case, the setting value data (_NB_RANK) becomes "0", so the setting value becomes "1". This allows the setting value to be changed to "1" simply by transitioning to the setting change state.

Furthermore, it is possible to transition to the setting change state in both cases when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 152 is on and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 is off, and when the power is turned on while both the setting key switch 152 and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 are on.

(10) In the above embodiment, the initialization range of the RWM 53 for normal power recovery after a power outage was set to addresses "F001(H)" to "F1FF(H)" in the RWM 53's used area and addresses "F292(H)" to "F3FF(H)" outside the used area. However, the initialization range of the RWM 53 is not limited to the above range and can be set appropriately depending on the specifications of the slot machine 10.

For example, the initialization range of RWM53 can be varied depending on the contents of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" of RWM53 in Figure 33. Specifically, for example, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) at "F030(H)" is "1" and 1BB is in operation, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)" can be excluded from the initialization range of RWM53. On the other hand, when the D2 bit of the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) at "F030(H)" is "0" and 1BB is not in operation, the initialization range of RWM53 can include the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) at address "F030(H)".

(11) In the above embodiment, interrupt processing was prohibited in step S1490 of the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in Figure 43. However, this is not limited to this, and, for example, interrupt processing does not have to be prohibited in the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP). Specifically, when the answer is "Yes" in step S2708 or S2715 of the program start processing (M_PRG_START) in Figure 41 and the process proceeds to the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) in step S2801, interrupt processing does not have to be prohibited.

Furthermore, even while the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 may be executed, and the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S2821 and the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 may be executed. This may allow the lighting control of digits 1 to 5 (credit number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, setting value display LED 73) and digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 74) to be executed even while the unrecoverable error processing (C_ERROR_STOP) is being executed.

(12) In the above embodiment, if an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on) and it is determined that the power recovery is normal, address "F292(H)" (ratio display number) of RWM 53 is initialized. For this reason, for example, if the power is turned off while the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) is displaying the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), an operation to transition to the setting change state is then performed, and if it is determined that the power recovery is normal, the control information display LED 74 will start displaying the role ratio data with instructions (ratio display number "1"), which is the first display item of various ratio information.

However, this is not limiting. For example, if an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 on) and it is determined that the power failure recovery is normal, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information other than ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying the first display item of various ratio information, the special feature ratio data (ratio display number "1"). This makes it possible to check whether all segments digits 6 through 9 are lit, making it possible to check whether any segments are faulty or whether any segment signal lines are broken. Similarly, if an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power failure recovery is abnormal, the management information display LED 74 may first display specific information other than ratio information such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8.", and then start displaying the first display item of various ratio information, the special feature ratio data (ratio display number "1").

(13) For example, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 turned off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch 153 turned on, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on and the reset switch 153 also turned on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) can first display specific information different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8."

Digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) then display the on/off status of various switches when the power is turned on, and information indicating whether the power-off recovery is determined to be normal or abnormal. This makes it possible to check whether all segments of digits 6 to 9 are lit when the power is turned on, making it possible to check whether a segment is faulty or whether the segment's signal line is broken.

Furthermore, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 off, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch 153 on, or when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on and the reset switch 153 also on, digits 6 to 9 of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) will display specific information that is different from the ratio information, such as "8888" or "8.8.8.8." However, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 also off, the management information display LED 74 does not have to display the above specific information.

(14) In the above embodiment, when an operation to transition to the setting change state (turning on the power with the setting key switch 152 on) is performed and it is determined that the power recovery from power failure is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") is initialized. However, this is not limited to this. When an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed and it is determined that the power recovery from power failure is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) for the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose the power is turned off when the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displays the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5"), and then an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the control information display LED 74 first displays the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, that is, the role ratio (cumulative) data.

Also, let's assume that immediately before the power was turned off, the control information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) displayed the role ratio (cumulative) data (ratio display number "5") for, say, 1000 ms. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) resumes, the role ratio (cumulative) data is displayed on the control information display LED 74 for 4791.84 ms - 1000 ms = 3791.84 ms. After that, the display items from ratio display number "6" onwards are displayed sequentially on the control information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY). In this way, when an operation to transition to the setting change state is performed, the power outage recovery is determined to be normal, and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) resumes, the display begins (resumes) from the continuation of the ratio information from immediately before the power was turned off.

(15) In the above embodiment, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on and it is determined that the power recovery from power failure is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") is initialized. However, this is not limited to this. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 on and it is determined that the power recovery from power failure is normal, data related to the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) in the RWM 53 (for example, LED display counter 2 (_SC_LED_DSP2) of the ratio display number (_SN_DSP_NO) at address "F292(H)" to "F297(H)") may be maintained without being initialized.

For example, suppose the power is turned off when the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data (ratio display number "2") is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), and then the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and it is determined that the power has returned to normal after being turned off. In this case, when the interrupt process (I_INTR) is started and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the management information display LED 74 will first display the ratio information immediately before the power was turned off, i.e., the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data.

Also, assume that immediately before the power was turned off, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data (ratio display number "2") was displayed on the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor) for, for example, "3000 ms." In this case, when the interrupt processing (I_INTR) is activated and the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the consecutive feature ratio (6000 plays) data will be displayed on the management information display LED 74 for "4791.84 ms" - "3000 ms" = "1791.84 ms." Thereafter, the display items from ratio display number "3" onwards are displayed sequentially on the management information display LED 74 by the ratio display preparation processing (S_DSP_READY). In this way, when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned off and the reset switch (RWM clear switch) 153 turned on, and the power recovery is determined to be normal and the ratio display preparation process (S_DSP_READY) is resumed, the display will begin (restart) from the continuation of the ratio information from just before the power was turned off.

(16) In the above embodiment, the setting was set to be unchangeable (during play) from the start switch acceptance process (step S279 in FIG. 46) to the game end check process (step S301 in FIG. 46), including while the reels 31 were spinning, and the setting unchangeable flag was turned on during this time. However, this is not limiting, and the setting may be changed at all times without providing a period during which the setting is unchangeable, and therefore without providing a setting unchangeable flag.

(17) In the above embodiment, step S2770 of the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 determines whether a power outage has occurred. If it is determined that a power outage has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2771, which is the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN). If it is determined that a power outage has not occurred, the process skips step S2771, which is the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN), and proceeds to step S454. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may not be executed during the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47, and when a power outage is detected, an interrupt processing other than the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG. 47 may be executed, and the power outage processing (I_POWER_DOWN) may be executed in this other interrupt processing. In this case, if a power outage is detected during execution of the interrupt process (I_INTR) in Figure 47, another interrupt process will not be started while the interrupt process (I_INTR) is being executed. Instead, the other interrupt process will be started after the interrupt process (I_INTR) has finished, and the power down process (I_POWER_DOWN) will be executed during this other interrupt process.

(18) In the above embodiment, a slot machine 10 was used as an example of a gaming machine, but this is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to Parrot, which uses gaming balls as gaming media, enclosed gaming machines (medalless gaming machines) that use electronic information (electronic medals) instead of physical (tangible) medals, and casino machines.

<Fourth Embodiment> The fourth embodiment relates to interrupt processing and interrupt disabled periods. Note that "interrupt (processing)" is also referred to as "timer interrupt (processing)," but will be simply referred to as "interrupt (processing)" in the following description. Furthermore, an interrupt disabled period may be set in the interrupt processing in the fourth embodiment. As explained in the third embodiment, interrupt processing includes maskable interrupts (INT), which can be disabled, and non-maskable interrupts (NMI), which cannot be disabled. However, in the fourth embodiment, "interrupt" refers to a "maskable interrupt," for which an interrupt disabled period can be set. Note that when referring to a "non-maskable interrupt," the term "interrupt" is not abbreviated and is referred to as a "non-maskable interrupt." Note that an "interrupt disabled period" is also referred to as an "interrupt disabled interval" or an "interrupt disabled state." Similarly, an "interrupt enabled period" is also referred to as an "interrupt enabled interval" or an "interrupt enabled state." Furthermore, in this specification and claims, the term "when doing something" is used as a general term that includes "before doing something ('before' includes 'immediately before')," "at the same time as doing something," and "after doing something ('after' includes 'immediately after')." Specifically, for example, "when starting interrupt processing" means "before (immediately before) starting interrupt processing," "at the same time as starting interrupt processing," and "after (immediately after) starting interrupt processing."

The information processing executed by the gaming machine 10 includes main processing (Figure 46), which is executed once per game, and interrupt processing (Figure 66, described below), which is executed by suspending the main processing during execution of the main processing and temporarily escaping the main processing. The interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Note that in this embodiment, the system is configured to transition to the main processing after the initialization processing is completed (see Figure 65), but the processing that occurs before the start of a game, such as program start processing (Figure 63), power recovery processing (Figure 64), and initialization processing (Figure 65), may also be included in the concept of main processing.

Figure 61 is a block diagram showing a timer circuit 500 and other components used to execute interrupt processing. The timer circuit 500 is built into the main chip (MPU (main CPU 55)) of a one-chip microprocessor. The timer circuit 500 includes a PTC 8-bit counter (hereinafter simply referred to as the "8-bit counter") 501, a PTC prescaler register (also referred to as the "PTC prescaler setting register"; hereinafter simply referred to as the "prescaler register") 502, a PTC counter setting register (also referred to as the "PTC count value setting register"; hereinafter simply referred to as the "counter setting register") 503, and a PTC interrupt flag (hereinafter simply referred to as the "interrupt flag") 504.

The 8-bit counter 501 is an 8-bit (1 byte) counter used to measure the timing of interrupt processing. When the power is turned on (the power supply (switch) is turned on), the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0." The timing at which the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" is, for example, before or at the same time as the program starts, as shown in Figure 63, which will be described later.

Prescaler register 502 is an internal register that can be set to a value that selects the clock to be supplied to 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is an internal register that can be set to the frequency division of the system clock (SCK) (at what rate) to supply to 8-bit counter 501. For example, if the system clock is 16 MHz and 143 is set in prescaler register 502, then 16 (MHZ) / 143 = approximately 111.8881 KHZ becomes the clock source for 8-bit counter 501. The system clock (SCK) is the clock supplied to the main chip (MPU). Various programs (instructions) can be executed based on the system clock.

Counter setting register 503 is an internal register that can set the count value of 8-bit counter 501. Specifically, it is an internal register that can set the number of clocks input from prescaler register 502 that will cause interrupt processing to be executed. For example, as described above, the clock source of 8-bit counter 501 is approximately 111.8881 KHZ, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out when a clock of approximately 111.8881 KHZ is input 125 times. In this case, interrupt processing can be executed at a period of 125/111.8881 (KHZ) = approximately 1.117 ms. Furthermore, after a value is set in counter setting register 503, the count value of 8-bit counter 501 begins to be updated (e.g., by subtracting or adding 1) based on the clock from prescaler register 502. The value of the prescaler register 502 may be stored before the program (instruction) that stores the value of the counter setting register 503.

After power is turned on, the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0." Then, when, for example, "125" is written to the counter setting register 503, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from "0" to "125," and the 8-bit counter 501 begins updating from the point at which it reaches "125." As described above, "1" is subtracted approximately every "111.8881" KHz. When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated while it is "1," it becomes "125." Therefore, the cycle repeats as follows: "0" (when power is turned on) → "125" → "124" → ... → "2" → "1" → "125" → "124" → ... In other words, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" when power is turned on; otherwise, it does not become "0" but cycles between "125" and "1."

Furthermore, the time when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (either immediately before the update or the moment of the update) corresponds to the timeout of the 8-bit counter 501. The period for the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to change from "125" to "1" is approximately 1.117 ms as mentioned above, which is the interrupt processing period (interrupt period; "Tc" in Figure 71, described below).

Furthermore, for example, if the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "n" (n = any value between "1" and "125"), when the power is turned off and then turned on again, the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" as described above. In this way, the 8-bit counter 501 cycles between "125" and "1" while the power is on and never becomes "0" again. It becomes "0" only when the power is turned off and then turned on again. On the other hand, regardless of whether the power is turned off when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is any value between "125" and "1," the initial value of the 8-bit counter 501 becomes "0" the next time the power is turned on. In this way, the time from when the power is turned on until the 8-bit counter 501 first times out can be kept constant, and the time until the first time out can be made longer compared to when the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is stored when the power is turned off.

Meanwhile, a timer storage area is provided in the specified storage area of RWM53. Examples of timers include a timer for measuring 4.1 seconds, the shortest time for one game, a timer for determining errors, and a timer used to output test signals. These timer values are backed up when the power is turned off, maintained even while the power is off, and return to the value before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. In this way, the timer values provided in RWM53 are configured to be able to maintain the value before the power was turned off, while the value of the 8-bit counter 501 always becomes "0" when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, even if the main processing or interrupt processing goes out of control or the processing takes an unexpected amount of time, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and as long as the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1." Furthermore, even during interrupt processing, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and as long as the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1." Furthermore, even during interrupt prohibition periods, the 8-bit counter 501 does not stop, and as long as the system clock is normal, the 8-bit counter 501 can cycle between "125" and "1."

At least one interrupt prohibition period is provided during main processing. For example, in Figure 46, this can be the period between step S296 and step S300. Note that interrupt prohibition here is intended to prohibit interrupt processing during the ratio set processing in step S298. Interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of the ratio set processing because the ratio set processing is a process that uses a program stored outside the usage area, and if interrupt processing occurs while a program outside the usage area is being executed during main processing, the program processing within the usage area and the program processing outside the usage area will be mixed (running simultaneously in parallel), complicating the processing.

In addition, although not shown, other examples of interrupt prohibitions include: a) prohibiting interrupt processing before and after writing a control command to the control command buffer or updating the control command write pointer when sending a control command from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80; b) prohibiting interrupt processing before and after turning the blocker signal on (medal acceptance permitted) and the blocker state on (insertion indicator LED lit); c) prohibiting interrupt processing before and after turning the blocker signal off (medal acceptance rejected) and the blocker state off (insertion indicator LED off); d) prohibiting interrupt processing before and after setting the number of times a medal bet signal is output; e) prohibiting interrupt processing before and after setting the number of times a medal payout signal is output.

The above a) is intended to prevent malfunctions (such as writing to an address different from the normal write address) caused by an interrupt being executed during the control command write process. Furthermore, the above b) and c) are intended to prevent an inconsistency that occurs when an interrupt is executed between the process of turning the blocker signal on or off and the process of turning the blocker state on or off, resulting in one being on and the other being off, resulting in an on output to the blocker but not an on output to the insertion indicator LED (it is turned off). Furthermore, the above d) and e) are intended to prevent an interrupt being executed during the process of setting the medal bet signal or medal payout signal, causing the medal bet signal or medal payout signal to be updated.

Interrupt flag 504 is a flag that indicates that 8-bit counter 501 has timed out. Interrupt flag 504 is set (turned on) when the value of 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1" to "125" (when 8-bit counter 501 times out). The timing at which the set interrupt flag 504 is released (turned off) is arbitrary. For example, the timing at which the interrupt flag 504 is released (turned off) can be either: a) when interrupt processing is executed b) when predetermined information (hereinafter simply referred to as "information") indicating that an interrupt request notification signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "interrupt request signal") has been generated is set in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 (described below).

The interrupt wait monitor register 301 is one of the MPU's built-in registers that can store information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal after the interrupt flag 504 is set. The interrupt flag 504 is set when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. When the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in a specified bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Note that, hereinafter, "information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in a specified bit of the interrupt wait monitor register 301" is simply referred to as "information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301." The interrupt request signal is then output to the main CPU 55 via the interrupt wait monitor register 301, allowing interrupt processing to be executed. The information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is cleared when the main CPU 55 accepts the interrupt request (executes the interrupt processing).

Here, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" may also be referred to as: a) a situation in which an interrupt request exists b) a situation in which a specific flag related to the interrupt request is on ("1") c) a situation in which a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is on ("1") Similarly, "a situation in which information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301" may also be referred to as: a) a situation in which there is no interrupt request b) a situation in which a specific flag related to the interrupt request is off ("0") c) a situation in which a specific flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out is off ("0")

If the 8-bit counter 501 times out again while the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, an interrupt request signal based on the 8-bit counter 501 timing out again will be output to the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 will not be re-saved based on this interrupt request signal (in this case, the interrupt request signal will be ignored).

When the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, interrupt processing is not initiated during the interrupt disable period, but the state in which the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is maintained. Even in this state, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle without interruption. Then, after approximately 1.117 ms has elapsed and the 8-bit counter 501 times out again, if the interrupt disable period is still in effect, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 will still store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Here, processing to set the interrupt flag 504 may be executed regardless of whether the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated. Alternatively, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, it is determined whether or not information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 is not executed, but if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 is executed. Note that the following description will be given assuming that when the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the process for setting the interrupt flag 504 is executed regardless of whether or not the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Furthermore, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 when the interrupt disable period ends, interrupt processing is initiated and the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. As a result, when interrupt processing is initiated, the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during the period when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, the number of interrupt processing operations executed after the end of the interrupt disable period based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is limited to "1." Note that the 8-bit counter 501 continues to cycle through the values "m" to "1" even during interrupt processing.

Also, as shown in Figure 61, the one-chip microprocessor includes an interrupt disable flag 302. The interrupt disable flag 302 in the fourth embodiment corresponds to the IFF1 register. The IFF1 register is a register used to determine whether maskable interrupts are enabled or disabled. The IFF2 register is used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and to restore the IFF2 register using the RETEX instruction after executing a CALLEX instruction.

When a (maskable) interrupt process is executed, both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "0" to switch from an interrupt enabled state to an interrupt disabled state. When the IFF1 register is "0", it indicates that the interrupt is disabled. Then, when the interrupt process ends, an instruction to enable interrupts (EI instruction) is executed just before the end of the interrupt process to switch from an interrupt disabled state to an interrupt enabled state, and both the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "1". When the IFF1 register is "1", it indicates that the interrupt is enabled.

The interrupt inhibit period is first set in the main processing. For example, in FIG. 46, it is between step S296 and step S300. Second, the interrupt inhibit period is set during execution of interrupt processing. For example, as shown in FIG. 66, which will be described later, when executing interrupt processing, the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register become "0." As described above, this is because overlapping interrupts are inhibited during interrupt processing.

When the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and the IFF1 register is set to "1," the main CPU 55 will accept the interrupt request signal when it is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, interrupt processing is executed. On the other hand, when the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and the IFF1 register is set to "0," the main CPU 55 will not accept the interrupt request signal when it is output to the main CPU 55. In other words, interrupt processing is not executed. In this case, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, and continues to output the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55. Then, when the IFF1 register changes from "0" to "1" (when the interrupt permission period begins), interrupt processing is executed based on the interrupt request signal. When interrupt processing is performed based on an interrupt request signal, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared. In other words, the output of the interrupt request signal to the main CPU 55 is stopped.

Next, we will use a simple program to explain the relationship between the interrupt enabled and disabled states and the IFF1 and IFF2 registers. Figure 62 shows an example program that explains interrupt disable and interrupt enable. In the figure, (A) and (B) show the main processing program, and (C) shows the interrupt processing program. In Figure 62 (A), the "DI" instruction is an instruction to disable interrupts. The "EI" instruction is an instruction to enable interrupts. Furthermore, "AAAA", "BBBB", and "CCCC" are arbitrary programs (instructions). When the "DI" instruction is executed, the IFF1 and IFF2 register values both become "0", and the interrupts are disabled.

After that, the program's "AAAA" and "BBBB" are executed, and when the "EI" instruction is executed next, the IFF1 and IFF2 register values both become "1," enabling interrupts. An example of the program "CCCC" after the "EI" instruction is the "RET" instruction. In this case, the interrupt can be executed after the "RET" instruction is executed (i.e., after "CCCC" is executed). Note that the condition is that, at least immediately after the "RET" instruction, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated must be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As described above, even if the interrupt enable instruction "EI" is executed, by not executing the interrupt process until the next instruction (in this example, "CCCC," e.g., "RET") is executed, the instruction after the interrupt enable instruction "EI" can be reliably executed.

In Figure 62 (B), the "CALLEX" instruction is an instruction that disables interrupts and executes a call to a specified address, regardless of whether the current state is interrupt enabled or disabled. The "RETEX" instruction returns the interrupt state to the state before the "CALLEX" instruction and returns ("RET") (returning to the state before the "CALLEX"); in other words, it is an instruction that executes a return to the instruction following the "CALLEX" (the program at the return address).

Here, when the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes "0," and the IFF2 register value remains unchanged. Also, when the "RETEX" instruction is executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, and the IFF2 register value remains unchanged. And because the "RETEX" instruction includes the "RET" instruction, interrupt processing can be executed immediately after the "RETEX" instruction. For example, if the IFF1 register value is "1" and the IFF2 register value is "1" immediately before the "CALLEX" instruction is executed, the "CALLEX" instruction changes the IFF1 register value to "0" and the IFF2 register value to "1." Also, the "RETEX" instruction changes the IFF1 register value to "1" and the IFF2 register value to "1." In this way, having the IFF2 register makes it possible to restore the IFF1 register and IFF2 register values to the values they had before the "CALLEX" instruction was executed.

In Figure 62 (C), when executing interrupt processing (maskable interrupt (INT)), both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value become "0". This causes interrupts (multiple interrupts) to be disabled. Therefore, the "DI" instruction is not required when starting interrupt processing. Furthermore, when ending interrupt processing, the "EI" instruction is executed immediately before the end of interrupt processing, i.e., immediately before the "RETI" instruction, in order to change from the interrupt disabled state to the interrupt enabled state. This "EI" instruction causes both the IFF1 register value and the IFF2 register value to become "1".

Note that when the "RETI" instruction is subsequently executed, the IFF1 register value becomes the IFF2 register value, just like the "RETEX" instruction above, and the value of the IFF2 register remains unchanged. As a result, the IFF1 and IFF2 registers change as follows: When interrupt processing begins: IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0 ↓ "EI" instruction: IFF1 = 1, IFF2 = 1 ↓ "RETI" instruction: IFF1 = IFF2, IFF2 = maintain The instruction is configured so that interrupt processing can be executed after the "RETI" instruction. This prevents overlapping interrupt processing, such as when interrupt processing is executed immediately after the "EI" instruction, and then again after the "RETI" instruction.

Data retention/clearing due to power on/off in the interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), and in the timer storage area of RWM 53, is as follows. An example of the timer storage area of RWM 53 is a "timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, the shortest time for one game." However, the timer storage area of RWM 53 is not limited to the above-mentioned "timer storage area for measuring 4.1 seconds, the shortest time for one game," and may include predetermined timer storage areas capable of measuring various predetermined times, such as a "storage area for a standby timer for displaying a game standby display." Furthermore, the predetermined timer storage area may be a 1-byte storage area or a multi-byte storage area.

a) When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met When the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met, the 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt prohibition flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are all cleared (set to "0"). In contrast, the specified timer storage area of RWM 53 is not cleared. For example, suppose the value stored in the specified timer storage area of RWM 53 is "X" and the value of 8-bit counter 501 is "Y," and the power is turned off. In this case, when the power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state because the setting change conditions are not met, the value stored in the timer storage area is "X," and the value of 8-bit counter 501 returns to "0."

b) When the power is turned on to transition to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met. In this case, not only are the 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register), but also a specified timer storage area in RWM 53 cleared (to "0"). Therefore, the 8-bit counter 501, interrupt flag 504, interrupt wait monitor register 301, and interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF1 register and IFF2 register) are cleared (to "0") when the power is turned on, regardless of whether the setting change conditions are met (whether or not the setting change state is transitioned to). On the other hand, the specified timer storage area is not cleared (does not become "0") when the power is turned on to not transition to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions not being met, but is cleared (to "0") when the power is turned on to transition to the setting change state due to the setting change conditions being met.

As explained in the third embodiment, inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion slot 151 and rotating the setting key 90 degrees clockwise turns on the setting key switch 152. When the power is turned on in this state, in FIG. 63 described below, it is determined that the door switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2706) and the setting key switch signal is on ("Yes" in step S2707), and if other predetermined conditions are met, the process proceeds to initialization processing in step S2863 (FIG. 65 described below). Then, in FIG. 65, the process proceeds to setting change confirmation processing in step S2742 (see FIG. 45; also referred to as setting change confirmation mode, setting change confirmation state, setting change confirmation (processing), etc.). Meeting the conditions for transitioning to this setting change confirmation processing corresponds to the above-mentioned "power-on when transitioning to the setting change state due to setting change conditions being met."

The above is an example in which the gaming machine is a slot machine 10. In contrast, when the gaming machine is a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), "satisfying the setting change conditions" corresponds to the door switch (frame open switch) signal being on, the setting change key switch signal being on, and the reset switch being on. In a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), when it is determined that all three of these conditions are met, the setting change conditions are met and the machine transitions to the setting change state. Note that in a pinball gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), when the door switch (frame open switch) signal is on, the setting change key switch signal is on, and the reset switch is off, the setting confirmation conditions are met (although the setting change conditions are not met), and the machine transitions to the setting confirmation state.

As described above, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is not retained when the power is turned off (the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is set to "0" when the power is restored). This allows for a constant time until the first interrupt processing begins after the power is turned on. Furthermore, since the update period of the 8-bit counter 501 (8.9375 microseconds) is shorter than the update period of the timer value of the RWM 53 (the interrupt processing period, 1.117 ms), the impact of clearing the 8-bit counter 501 on the gaming machine as a whole is minor. Therefore, when comparing a) a configuration that retains the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off and resumes counting the 8-bit counter 501 from the value when the power was turned off when the power is turned on (backing up the value of the 8-bit counter 501), with b) a configuration that sets the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to "0" when the power is restored (this embodiment), even the configuration in b) above can restore the value with an error of within "1" interrupt. Furthermore, the configuration in b) above eliminates the need for a means to back up the value of the 8-bit counter 501 when the power is turned off.

Next, the on/off timing of the interrupt disable flag 302 (IFF register) will be explained based on a flowchart. Fig. 63 is a flowchart showing the program start (M_PRG_START) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Fig. 41 in the third embodiment. In Fig. 63, the same steps as in Fig. 41 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Fig. 63, step numbers that differ from those in Fig. 41 are underlined. Step S2
When the program start is executed in 701, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0", and the IFF1 register and the IFF2 register are "0". Since the IFF1 register is "0", interrupts are disabled until the IFF1 register becomes "1".

When the process proceeds to step S2861, an initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503. In the fourth embodiment, examples of setting the initial value "m" in the counter setting register 503 are shown, one before the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process and one after the execution of the RWM abnormality determination process. The "RWM abnormality determination process" here is a process for determining whether the data stored in the RWM 53 before power-off is normal, and corresponds to the processes of steps S2708, S2712, and S2715. Step S2861 in FIG. 63 is an example of setting an initial value in the counter setting register 503 before RWM abnormality determination. As described above, the initial value "m" is, for example, "125." Once the initial value is set in the counter setting register 503, the 8-bit counter 501 starts updating the count value and continues to update the count value until the power is turned off. As described above, when the power is turned on and the program starts, interrupts are initially disabled, and if an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 before an RWM abnormality is detected, the 8-bit counter 501 begins updating based on that value.

Figure 64 is a flowchart showing the power recovery process (M_POWER_ON) (step S2862 in Figure 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 42 in the third embodiment. In Figure 64, the same processes as in Figure 42 are given the same step numbers, and their explanations will be omitted. In Figure 64, step numbers that differ from those in Figure 42 are underlined. The power recovery process in Figure 64 shows an example in which the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined. In this example, after step S2724, the process proceeds to step S2871, where the counter setting register 503 is set to the initial value "m".

When an initial value is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2861 of FIG. 63 (when the counter setting register 503 is set before an RWM abnormality is determined), the processing of step S2871 of FIG. 64 is not performed. On the other hand, when step S2861 of FIG. 63 is not performed (when the counter setting register 503 is set after an RWM abnormality is determined), if the initialization processing (M_INI_SET) in step S2863 in FIG. 63 is not proceeded to, the initial value "m" is set in the counter setting register 503 in step S2871 of FIG. 64. After step S2871, the processing proceeds to the return address of the interrupt processing immediately before the power-off (FIG. 66, described later). The power-off processing is executed in the interrupt processing (step S2771 of FIG. 66), and when the power is turned off, the return address of the interrupt processing at that time is stored. Then, after the power-on processing in FIG. 64, the processing proceeds to the return address of the interrupt processing, and the interrupt processing continues. In step S2892 of the interrupt processing (Figure 66), the IFF1 and IFF2 registers become "1", enabling interrupts.

As described above, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating before an RWM abnormality is determined, the 8-bit counter 501 can be timed out earlier (information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal can be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301) than when the 8-bit counter 501 is started updating after an RWM abnormality is determined. This allows interrupt processing to be executed without delay when an interrupt enable instruction (EI instruction) is executed after an RWM abnormality is determined. On the other hand, when the 8-bit counter 501 is configured to start updating after an RWM abnormality is determined, even if a malfunction occurs in which the IFF1 register becomes "1" due to noise or the like before an RWM abnormality is determined or the IFF1 register becomes "1" when the power is turned on (a malfunction resulting in an unintended interrupt enable state), the 8-bit counter 501 has not timed out before the RWM abnormality is determined (information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301), so interrupt processing will not be executed before the RWM abnormality is determined. In other words, it is possible to prevent the RWM data from changing from before the power was turned off due to interrupt processing before an RWM abnormality is determined. This allows for accurate determination of RWM abnormalities.

Figure 65 is a flowchart showing the initialization process (M_INI_SET) (step S2863 in Figure 63) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 44 in the third embodiment. In Figure 65, the same processes as in Figure 44 are assigned the same step numbers, and their explanations are omitted. In Figure 65, step numbers that differ from those in Figure 44 are underlined. In Figure 63, if step S2712 returns "Yes," or if step S2714 returns "Yes," the system proceeds to the initialization process in Figure 65. In this initialization process, after the AF register is restored in step S2737, the counter setting register is set in step S2881. This process is an example of executing the counter setting register after determining an RWM abnormality, and is an example of executing the counter setting register when the system proceeds to the initialization process (without proceeding to the power restoration process).

Furthermore, in step S2740, the setting command set process is executed. This process stores the control command in the control command buffer in order to send a control command to the sub-control board 80 to start the setting change confirmation process (step S2742). As described above, interrupt processing is prohibited before writing the control command to the control command buffer or updating the control command write pointer, and interrupt processing is permitted after these processes are completed. Therefore, in step S2740, the following processes (instructions) are executed: (1) DI (IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0) (2) actual setting command set (processing for writing the control command to the control command buffer and updating the control command write pointer, etc.) (3) EI (IFF1 = 1, IFF2 = 1) As a result, when the program proceeds from the program start (Figure 63) to the initialization process (Figure 65), the "EI" command in the setting command set in step S2740 enables interrupts. In this way, the state is changed from interrupt disabled to interrupt enabled by executing the disable interrupt instruction (DI) and enable interrupt instruction (EI) before and after the processing.

Note that the setting command set in step S2746 is a process that sends an end command for the setting change confirmation process to the sub-control board 80, and similar to step S2740, executes the "DI" command and the "EI" command at the beginning and end of the process, respectively.

As described above, when a value is written to the counter setting register 503 after an RWM abnormality determination is made, it is possible to prevent interrupt processing from starting due to a malfunction or other reason while the RWM abnormality determination is being made. Note that when interrupt processing starts, the RWM data may be updated.

Figure 66 is a flowchart showing interrupt processing (I_INTR) in the fourth embodiment, and corresponds to Figure 47 in the third embodiment. In Figure 66, the same processing as in Figure 47 is assigned the same step numbers, and explanations will be omitted. In Figure 66, step numbers that differ from Figure 47 are underlined. When interrupt processing begins, the IFF1 and IFF2 registers are set to "0." This sets the interrupts disabled state (duplicate interrupts disabled state). In step S452 of Figure 47, initial processing including duplicate interrupts disabled is performed, but in the fourth embodiment, register value saving processing is performed in step S2891.

Furthermore, after the register values are restored in step S469, the "EI" instruction is executed in step S2892. This sets the IFF1 and IFF2 registers to "1," enabling interrupts. Furthermore, in the final step S2893, the "RETI" instruction, which corresponds to a return instruction, sets the IFF1 register value to the IFF2 register value. The IFF2 register value is maintained. As described above, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 enables interrupts, but the interrupt process is configured to be executable after the "RETI" instruction in the next step S2893. Note that if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 does not store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is executed, execution resumes from the main process program (return address) before the interrupt process was executed. On the other hand, if the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the "RETI" instruction is executed, the interrupt process is executed again.

Next, the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing will be explained using a time chart. Figure 67 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Figure 67 shows an example in which there is no interrupt prohibited period in main processing. In Figure 67, the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is "0" when power is turned on, but the counter value "m" is set by the counter setting register set process described above. In the above example, the counter value "m" is "125". Then, as in the above example, the count value of the 8-bit counter 501 is decremented by "1" at a clock of approximately "111.8881" KHZ (every "8.9375" microseconds).

When the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is updated from "1," it returns to "m." The time when the counter is updated from "1" to "m" ("T1" in the figure) is the "timeout" of the 8-bit counter 501. When the timeout occurs, the interrupt flag 504 is set, an interrupt request signal is output, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In the figure, the OFF state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is not stored, while the ON state of the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicates that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored (the same applies to Figures 68 to 75 below). When information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set (interrupt enabled state), interrupt processing begins. Note that even at the moment when information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, some processing (instruction) is still being executed in the main processing, and interrupt processing begins when that processing (instruction) is completed. In other words, actual processing in the main processing and interrupt processing do not occur simultaneously. The example in Figure 67 shows an example in which, after information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1", interrupt processing begins at timing "T2".

Furthermore, when interrupt processing is started, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. This corresponds to "IFF1 = 0, IFF2 = 0" shown to the right of step S2890 in FIG. 66. Then, when the interrupt processing is ended, the set state of the interrupt disable flag 302 is released. This process corresponds to the process related to step S2892 in FIG. 66 (IFF1 = 1, IFF2 = 1). In the following description, unless otherwise specified, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "1" (IFF2 may be "0" or "1"). Furthermore, "the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from the set state" and "the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set" refers to at least IFF1 becoming "0" (is "0") (IFF2 may be "0" or "1").

Figure 68 is a time chart showing the relationship between the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. Figure 68 shows an example in which an interrupt disabled period is set in the main processing. In Figure 68, timing "T0", which is the start of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction shown in Figure 62. Timing "T3", which is the end of the interrupt disabled period, corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction shown in Figure 62. Similarly, in Figure 69 and beyond, the start of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "DI" instruction or the "CALLEX" instruction, and the end of the interrupt disabled period corresponds to the "EI" instruction or the "RETEX" instruction. The example in Figure 68 shows an example in which an interrupt disabled period is set in the main processing at timing "T0", which is before timing "T1", when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. In this case, as in the example of Figure 67, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1" when the 8-bit counter 501 times out. However, at timing "T1", the interrupt disable period is still in effect and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so interrupt processing does not begin. However, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 continues to store information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated.

Then, at timing "T3," the interrupt disable period ends. As a result, "information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set," enabling interrupt processing. The example in FIG. 67 shows an example in which interrupt processing begins at timing "T4." Note that if timing "T3" corresponds to the "EI" instruction and interrupt processing begins at timing "T4" after execution of another instruction (e.g., a "RET" instruction), there is a time lag of one instruction between timing "T3" and "T4." In contrast, if a "CALLEX" instruction is executed at timing "T0" and a "RETEX" instruction is executed at timing "T3," interrupt processing begins immediately after the execution of the "RETEX" instruction without executing another instruction, so there is no time lag between timing "T3" and "T4." When interrupt processing begins, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. At the same time, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set to disable duplicate interrupts.

Figure 69 is a time chart showing an example (1) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to interrupt processing. In this example, after the interrupt disabled period begins at timing "T0," the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1," the interrupt flag 504 is set, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, and the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2." The interrupt disabled period has not yet ended at timing "T2." As will be described in detail later, if the interrupt period (the timeout period of the 8-bit counter 501) is "Tc" and the designed period of the interrupt processing is "Tp," the designed maximum period of the interrupt disabled period is configured to be less than "Tc - Tp." Therefore, normally, when an interrupt disabled period begins immediately after the end of interrupt processing, the next interrupt period arrives after the end of the interrupt disabled period.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 69, it is possible that the 8-bit counter 501 times out more than twice during the interrupt disabled period due to the main process running out of control or the main process taking longer than necessary during the interrupt disabled period. Even in such a case, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update its count value if the system clock is normal, and sets the interrupt flag 504 when a timeout occurs. The example in Figure 69 shows that the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T1," the interrupt flag 504 is set, and information indicating the generation of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Even if the interrupt disabled period continues, the 8-bit counter 501 continues to update its count value if it is normal. When the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set. If the interrupt wait monitor register 301 already stores information indicating the generation of an interrupt request signal, the state is maintained. Next, when the interrupt disabled period ends at timing "T3" (entering the interrupt enabled state), the interrupt process becomes executable. Then, at "T4", interrupt processing begins, and the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared. The information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is not stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 until the 8-bit counter 501 next times out and the interrupt flag 504 is set.

As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated only once. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the interrupt disabled period, the number of timeouts is not counted. After the interrupt disabled period ends, the number of interrupts executed based on the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is one. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out "n" times (n≧2), the interrupt processing is not executed "n" times (continuously). This prevents the interrupt processing from being repeated multiple times consecutively after the interrupt disabled period ends, preventing the main processing from being executed during that time. Each time the 8-bit counter 501 times out, the interrupt flag 504 is set, and the interrupt flag 504 is unset at a predetermined timing thereafter.

Figure 70 is a time chart showing an example (2) in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times in relation to the 8-bit counter 501 and interrupt processing. In Figure 70, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T1." Based on this information, interrupt processing is initiated at timing "A1." However, for example, if an unexpected amount of time is required during the interrupt processing or a runaway occurs, the interrupt processing does not end by the time the 8-bit counter 501 next times out (timing "T2"). This example shows an example in which the 8-bit counter 501 times out twice (timings "T2" and "T3") during the interrupt processing initiated at timing "A1." When the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T2" during the interrupt processing, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Furthermore, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored.

After that, when the interrupt processing ends at timing "A2," the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, so the next interrupt processing is immediately executed. In other words, interrupt processing is executed continuously without executing the main processing. Furthermore, when the interrupt processing is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared (timing "T4"). Next, when the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T5," information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Meanwhile, the interrupt processing that started at timing "A2" ended before timing "T5." As a result, the next interrupt processing is started based on the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated being stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "T5." As described above, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing is executed only once after the interrupt processing is completed, based on the fact that information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. In other words, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times during interrupt processing, the interrupt processing will not be executed multiple times consecutively after the interrupt processing is completed. Furthermore, even if the 8-bit counter 501 times out multiple times (two or more times) during the execution of interrupt processing, the number of timeouts is not counted.

Next, the execution timing of interrupt processing will be explained. Figures 71 to 75, which will be explained below, show interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 (however, in the example of Figure 74, interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 3), but interrupt processing 1 to interrupt processing 4 are all the same processing (the interrupt processing shown in Figure 66). To be more specific, in the example of Figure 71, after interrupt processing 1 (the interrupt processing shown in Figure 66) is started, interrupt processing 2 (the same processing as interrupt processing 1) is started after "Tc" has elapsed. Figure 71 is a time chart showing the interrupt period, etc., when there is no interrupt prohibited period in the main processing. As described above, when the system clock is set to 16 MHZ, the value of the prescaler register 502 is set to 143, and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to 125, the interrupt period "Tc" is the period from when the value of the 8-bit counter 501 changes from 125 to the next 125, and corresponds to approximately 1.117 ms.

As shown in Figure 71, if there is no interrupt prohibition period during the period in which interrupt processing is executed four times, the interrupt processing is executed at each interrupt period "Tc." The example in Figure 71 shows an example in which interrupt processing is started at timings "A1," "A2," "A3," and "A4." The time "Tp" required for one interrupt processing operation varies depending on the content of the interrupt processing, but the design value for the interrupt processing time "Tp" is at least shorter than the interrupt period "Tc" (Tp < Tc). Also, as with the example above, interrupts are prohibited during the interrupt processing period, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

Note that, as is clear from Figure 71, no matter what the value of the 8-bit counter 501 is, the execution of an interrupt process will not return the value of the 8-bit counter 501 to "m," and the value will continue to be updated at regular intervals even during the interrupt process. Furthermore, Figure 71 shows the period (time) of each interrupt process as if it were a constant (Tp), but in reality, the period of an interrupt process is not necessarily constant. For example, the current interrupt process may take longer than the previous interrupt process.

FIG. 72 shows an example in which an interrupt inhibit period in the main process is set between interrupt processing 1 and interrupt processing 2. In this example, interrupt processing 1 starts at timing "A1," ends at timing "A1'," and then the interrupt inhibit period in the main process starts at timing "T1." The interrupt inhibit period ends (the interrupt is enabled) at timing "T2." Here, timing "T2" occurs before the start timing "A2" of the next interrupt processing 2. As is clear from FIG. 72, if the interrupt inhibit period is "Td," then "Td<Tc-Tp" holds. Thus, even if an interrupt inhibit period is set, the timing of the interrupt processing is not limited by the interrupt inhibit period when it is within the time between the end of one interrupt processing and the start of the next interrupt processing. 72, even if an interrupt inhibit period is set after the end of interrupt processing 1 and before the start of interrupt processing 2, interrupt processing 2 can be started when the interrupt period "Tc" arrives after the start of interrupt processing 1. In particular, when the interrupt inhibit period "Td" that satisfies "Td<Tc-Tp" is the maximum period in design for the interrupt inhibit period, if the interrupt processing ends and the process returns to the main processing, and an interrupt inhibit period is immediately set in the main processing, the start timing of the next interrupt processing can be set to arrive after the end of the interrupt inhibit period.

Figure 73 is a time chart showing an example (Example 1) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed falls within an interrupt disable period. In this example, the interrupt disable period for the main process is set at timing "T1" after interrupt process 1 ends and before timing "A2" of the next interrupt process arrives. Note that timing "A2" occurs after the elapse of the interrupt cycle "Tc" from timing "A1" when interrupt process 1 starts. During the interrupt disable period, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, when timing "A2" arrives, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, preventing the interrupt process from starting. In the figure, the two-dot chain line indicates the interrupt process assuming that interrupt process 2 starts at timing "A2" (although it does not actually start). Meanwhile, just before timing "A2" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, causing information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal to be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301.

Then, at timing "T2", when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is unset. Also, at timing "T2", the information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated remains stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. As a result, interrupts are enabled at timing "T2", and the second interrupt processing 2 is started. Figure 73 shows an example in which interrupt processing 2 is started at timing "A5". When interrupt processing 2 is executed, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared. Also, when interrupt processing 2 is executed, the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

Next, at time "A5'" when interrupt processing 2 ends, time "A3", when the third interrupt processing 3 is to begin, has not yet arrived. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 can begin when time "A3" arrives. As a result, interrupt processing 2 cannot be executed at time "A2", but interrupt processing 2 can be executed at the subsequent time "A5", and then interrupt processing 3 can be executed at time "A3", so the number of interrupt processing operations at this point is the same as if there were no interrupt prohibited period.

In this way, the interrupt period "Tc" is kept constant regardless of whether or not there is an interrupt disabled period, so the interrupt period "Tc" does not become unstable. Furthermore, even if interrupt processing is not possible due to an interrupt disabled period, this does not affect the update of the 8-bit counter 501. Also, if information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at the end of the interrupt disabled period, executing interrupt processing without waiting for the next interrupt period will not affect the update of the 8-bit counter 501.

Figure 74 is a time chart showing an example (Example 2) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed falls within an interrupt disabled period. In this example, after interrupt process 1 ends, the interrupt disabled period for the main process begins at timing "T1" before timing "A2" for the next interrupt process 2 arrives. This causes the interrupt disabled flag 302 to be set. Therefore, at timing "A2," the interrupt wait monitor register 301 stores information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated, but because the interrupt disabled flag 302 is also set, the interrupt process cannot be executed.

When another interrupt period "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A2" and timing "A3" has arrived, the interrupt disable period is still ongoing. Therefore, at timing "A3," information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal continues to be stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301, but the interrupt disable flag 302 is also set, so interrupt processing cannot be executed. Although the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "A3," the situation remains unchanged: the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. After timing "A3," when the interrupt disable period ends at timing "T2," the interrupt disable flag 302 is released from its set state. At this point, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Subsequently, at timing "A6," interrupt processing 2 begins. When interrupt processing 2 begins, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set.

In this example, interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", which is before timing "A4", i.e., the point when "3 x Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1". Therefore, after interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A6'", the 8-bit counter 501 times out at timing "T3", and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. This causes interrupt processing 3 to start at the following timing "A4". When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is cleared, and the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is set.

As described above, interrupt processing cannot be executed when "Tc" has elapsed since timing "A1" (timing "A2"), nor when "Tc" has further elapsed since that point (timing "A3"); however, interrupt processing 2 is executed immediately after the interrupt inhibition period ends at timing "T2." Then, interrupt processing 3 can be executed at timing "A4," when there is no interrupt inhibition period and interrupt processing 4 would normally be executed. This allows interrupt processing to be executed three times between timing "A1" and timing "A4," which is only one less than the number of interrupt processing times (four times) that would occur if there were no interrupt inhibition period. Furthermore, at timing "A4," the interrupt cycle "Tc" from timing "A1" is not disrupted. Furthermore, the update status of the 8-bit counter 501 is also consistent and not disrupted.

Figure 75 is a time chart showing an example (Example 3) in which the timing at which an interrupt process is scheduled to be executed falls within an interrupt disable period. In this example, the interrupt disable period begins at timing "T1" after interrupt process 1 ends and before timing "A2" of the next interrupt process arrives, and ends at timing "T2." In other words, during the interrupt disable period, timing "A2," when interrupt process 2 would normally be executed, arrives. At timing "A2," the interrupt disable flag 302 is set, so the interrupt process cannot be executed. However, because the 8-bit counter 501 times out just before timing "A2" arrives, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 at timing "A2." Next, at timing "T2," when the interrupt disable period ends, the interrupt disable flag 302 is unset. At this point, information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 2 begins at the following timing "A7".

Meanwhile, while interrupt processing 2 is being executed, timing "T3" arrives, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. However, because interrupt processing 2 is being executed at this point, duplicate interrupts are not possible. In other words, interrupt processing 3 cannot be executed at timing "A3," when interrupt processing 3 would normally be executed. When interrupt processing 2 ends at timing "A8," the interrupt prohibition flag 302 is unset. Note that at this point, information indicating the occurrence of an interrupt request signal is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. Therefore, interrupt processing 3 starts immediately at timing "A8." In other words, no program (instruction) in the main processing is executed between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3, and interrupt processing 3 starts immediately after interrupt processing 2 ends. However, when interrupt processing 2 ends, the "EI" instruction in step S2892 in FIG. 66 sets the IFF1 register to "1," thereby clearing the interrupt disable flag 302. Next, when the "RETI" instruction is executed in step S2893, the interrupt processing of step S2890 starts again. When this interrupt processing starts, the IFF1 register becomes "0," so the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. Therefore, the interrupt disable flag 302 is cleared for just a moment between interrupt processing 2 and interrupt processing 3. When interrupt processing 3 starts, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. When interrupt processing 3 ends, timing "A4," which is the start timing of interrupt processing 4 (3 x Tc has elapsed since timing "A1"), has not yet arrived.

After interrupt processing 3 ends, the 8-bit counter 501 times out, and information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301. At this point, the interrupt disable flag 302 is not set, so interrupt processing can be executed. Therefore, interrupt processing 4 starts at timing "A4". When interrupt processing 4 starts, the information stored in the interrupt wait monitor register 301 indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated is cleared, and the interrupt disable flag 302 is set. In this way, four interrupt processes can be started after "3 x Tc" has passed since timing "A1", and the same number of interrupt processes can be executed as if there were no interrupt disable period in the main processing.

In this way, if the timing to start interrupt processing falls within an interrupt disabled period, the next interrupt processing will start immediately after the end of that interrupt disabled period. Furthermore, if an interrupt period occurs while the next interrupt processing is being executed, the next interrupt processing will start immediately after the end of the next interrupt processing. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to minimize the reduction in the number of interrupts and quickly return to a situation where interrupt processing starts when the original interrupt period arrives.

The fourth embodiment of the present invention has been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and various modifications are possible, as follows. (1) In the fourth embodiment, when the system clock is 16 MHZ, the setting value of the prescaler register 502 is set to 143 and the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to 125 in order to set the interrupt period to approximately 1 ms. Therefore, the setting values of the prescaler register 502 and the counter setting register 503 vary depending on the interrupt period setting, and are not limited to the above values. Note that the system clock is not limited to 16 MHZ and can be set to various values, such as 12 MHZ or 24 MHZ. For example, if the value of the counter setting register 503 is set to 250 under the above conditions, the interrupt period can be calculated as follows: 250/(16/143) = 2.234 (ms). In this case, even if the value of the counter setting register 503 is 250, the value can be within one byte. On the other hand, the counter setting register 503 may have a storage area of, for example, 2 bytes instead of 1 byte. If the counter setting register 503 has a storage area of 2 bytes, the 8-bit counter 501 may be changed to a 16-bit counter 501.

(2) In Figures 63, 64, and 65, the counter setting register is set before and after an RWM abnormality is determined, but the counter setting register is not limited to the timing shown in Figures 63, 64, and 65. It is sufficient to execute the counter setting register setting process by the time you want to start interrupt processing.

(3) When transitioning to the initialization process (FIG. 65), the process of setting the IFF1 register to "1" (processing to enable interrupts) uses the set command set in step S2740, but this is not limited to this. For example, it may be possible to execute the "EI" command after step S2747. In this way, even if each process during the initialization process, as in steps S2740 and S2746, is composed only of processes that do not have the "DI" and "EI" commands, it is possible to enable interrupts. (4) The fourth embodiment is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pinball gaming machines (pachinko gaming machines), mahjong ball gaming machines, casino machines, etc.

<Fifth Embodiment> The fifth embodiment relates to the display of error history. Figure 76 is a time chart showing the relationship (example 1) between the rotation of the reels 31 and the detection (occurrence) and notification of an error. In this embodiment, "reels spinning" refers to a situation in which at least one reel 31 is spinning. Furthermore, "reels stopped" refers to a situation in which all reels 31 have stopped. Furthermore, in this embodiment, when an error occurs, the error is detected with almost no time lag. In other words, in this embodiment, "when an error occurs" and "when an error is detected" are considered to be almost the same.

Furthermore, "error" in this embodiment corresponds to "recoverable error" in the other embodiments described above. Figure 76 shows an example in which an error is detected while the reels 31 are spinning. Types of errors in this case include, for example, selector-related errors (such as an error in the passage sensor 46 due to medal accumulation or an error in the insertion sensor 44) and hopper errors (such as an error in the payout sensor 37 due to an abnormal payout).

Note that while the reels 31 are spinning, medals are not accepted, and even if medals are inserted through the medal slot 47, they are returned by the blocker 45. However, if fraudulent activity (cheating) is performed while the reels 31 are spinning, a selector error may be detected. Also, while the reels 31 are spinning, the hopper 35 is not driven, so medals are not paid out, but fraudulent activity (cheating) may cause the hopper 35 to be driven, resulting in the payment of medals. In this way, there are cases where an error may be detected while the reels 31 are spinning.

When the main control board 50 detects an error (time t0), it turns on the corresponding bit (the bit corresponding to the detected error) of the abnormal input flag stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. The main control board 50 also transmits a notification of the error detection (an error command) to the sub-control board 80. In this embodiment, the transmission timing is when the error is notified ("t1" in Figure 76). However, this is not limited to this, and the error command may be transmitted when an error is detected, as indicated by the two-dot chain line in Figure 76. The main control board 50 determines whether an error has been detected during interrupt processing. Specifically, it determines whether the bit of the abnormal input flag is on. This determination is performed, for example, in step S463 (input error check processing) during the interrupt processing shown in Figure 47.

Furthermore, when an error command is sent to the sub-control board 80, this is done, for example, by the control command sending process of step S464 in the interrupt process of Figure 47. If an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 immediately when an error is detected, it can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after the abnormal input flag bit is turned on. Alternatively, if an error command is to be sent to the sub-control board 80 after all reels 31 have stopped (at the timing to notify an error), it can be sent to the sub-control board 80 in the first interrupt process after all reels 31 have stopped.

When all reels 31 have stopped and an error command has been received, the sub-control board 80 will report an error using the effect lamp 21, speaker 22, and image display device 23. If an error command is sent at time t1 in Figure 76, the sub-control board 80 will report an error after all reels 31 have stopped. In other words, an error will not be reported while the reels 31 are spinning. Note that the main control board 50 will also report an error if an error occurs when all reels 31 have stopped. For example, the winning number display LED 78 may display "En" (where "n" is an integer whose value indicates the type of error).

Then, when the error cause is eliminated and the reset switch 153 (see the third embodiment; not shown in Figure 1) is operated, the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 end the error notification. In other words, when the error cause is eliminated and the reset switch 153 is operated, the state before the error is detected is restored, provided that no error is detected. Therefore, even if the error cause is eliminated, the state before the error is not restored unless the reset switch 153 is operated. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated and no error is detected, the abnormal input flag bit stored in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 is turned off. Furthermore, the sub-control board 80 stores error history (data) in a specified storage area of the RWM 83 and displays the error history upon request. Note that the error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on or off or by changing settings. The error history is not erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM of the sub-control board 80.

Figure 77 shows an example of an error history including the process shown in Figure 76 (Example 1) displayed on the image display device 23, with two examples shown as (A) and (B). In the fifth embodiment, power off, power on, door open, and door close are not errors themselves, but are displayed along with the error history. Furthermore, when the device transitions to a setting confirmation state or setting change state, they are not displayed on the error history screen, but are displayed on a setting change history screen (not shown) separate from the error history screen. Furthermore, although the history of detected errors is displayed, the recovery from the error is not displayed on the error history screen. However, this is not a limitation, and the recovery from the error may also be displayed on the error history screen.

The error history can be displayed, for example, during setting confirmation. The setting confirmation process in this embodiment is similar to the setting change confirmation process shown in Figure 45 (third embodiment). Specifically, as described in the third embodiment, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets is "0" during game standby (before game play begins), a "1" is stored in the D register. Then, in step S2755 of Figure 45, the main control board 50 stores the D register value in the A register and determines whether the A register value is "1." If the A register value is "1," the main control board 50 determines that it is time to confirm the setting and proceeds to step S2760. After determining whether the A register value is "1," the main control board 50 stores the C register value in the A register. As described in the third embodiment, since the A register value was stored in the C register in step S2752, setting value data is stored in the C register. Therefore, when the C register value is stored in the A register, the A register value becomes setting value data.

In this way, when the setting key switch 152 is turned on while the number of bets in the waiting game state is "0," the setting confirmation state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and a menu screen for the gaming machine 10 administrator is displayed on the image display device 23. This menu includes an "Error History" item, and when "Error History" is selected with the directional pad and a confirmation operation is performed (in this case, the push button is turned on), the error history screen shown in Figure 77 is displayed.

For example, in Figure 77 (A), the time of the error with error number "003," "January 29, 2021, 1:27:45 PM," corresponds to time t1 in Figure 76. In other words, if the error is reported at time t1, three minutes after the time the error was detected (time t0 in the figure), the error was actually detected three minutes before the time of the error displayed on the error history screen. However, by displaying the start date and time of the error notification as the time of the error, as described above, even if the error is detected while the reels 31 are spinning and time passes between the time the error was detected and the time it was reported, there is no discrepancy between the time the error was reported and the displayed time of the error. This prevents the administrator from recognizing that there is a malfunction in the gaming machine 10 or that fraud may have occurred. As mentioned above, if the time of recovery from an error is displayed in the error history, "○× Error Recovery" will be displayed between the error numbers "001" and "002" in the figure, along with the time.

In Figure 77 (A), the date and time when the sub-control board 80 started notifying the error is displayed as the error time. The sub-control board 80 stores the error content and the time in association with each other. Information related to the time is obtained, for example, using the RTC (real-time clock) function provided in the sub-control board 80. On the other hand, Figure 77 (B) shows an example in which the time is displayed as the date and time elapsed from the current time. In this way, the actual time may be displayed as shown in Figure 77 (A), or the number of days elapsed from the current time may be displayed as shown in Figure 77 (B). Also, while the example in Figure 77 displays "time," it may also be displayed as "notification time," "occurrence time," or "detection time." However, even when "occurrence time" or "detection time" is displayed, the actual time when the error occurred or was detected is not displayed; it is actually the time when the error notification started.

In the example of FIG. 76 , if an error is detected while the reels 31 are spinning, the detected error cannot be immediately reported because the reels 31 are still spinning. Therefore, the error is reported after the reels 31 have stopped. The reason for not reporting the error while the reels 31 are spinning is that game progress (stopping the spinning reels 31) takes priority over reporting the error. On the other hand, if an error is detected when the reels 31 are not spinning (for example, during game standby after all reels 31 have stopped), an error command is immediately sent to the sub-control board 80, and the sub-control board 80 reports the error (corresponding to the first error in FIG. 82 , described later). Therefore, in this case, the time displayed in the error history is the same as the time the error was detected.

Example 2 in Figure 78 is a time chart showing a case where a setting change is made after an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating. In the third embodiment described above, a setting change disable flag is provided in the gaming machine 10. When the start switch 41 is operated (when the reels 31 start to rotate), the setting change disable flag is turned on, and when all the reels 31 stop, the setting change disable flag is turned off. In this case, the setting change state cannot be entered while the setting change disable flag is on. When the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, the setting change disable flag is stored as on, and even if the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the setting change state cannot be entered (because the setting change disable flag is on). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the setting change disable flag of the third embodiment is not provided. Therefore, when the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating and then turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the setting change state can be entered.

If an error is detected while the reels 31 are rotating, a "1" is stored in the corresponding bit of the abnormal input flag provided in the RWM 53 of the main control board 50, as described above. Furthermore, if the power is turned off while the reels 31 are rotating, the power supply to the motor 32 that drives the reels 31 is cut off, and the reels 31 then stop rotating. Next, if the front door is opened and the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the process will proceed to the initialization process (Figure 44) and then the setting change confirmation process (Figure 45), as shown in Figures 41 and 44.

Here, when the initialization process (Figure 44) is executed, the abnormal input flag is also initialized in the memory area of the RWM 53 of the main control board 50 ("RWM clear when setting changed" in Figure 78). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, the data of errors detected before the setting change process is erased. For this reason, when the gaming machine 10 starts up via the setting change state, errors detected before transitioning to the setting change state (errors based on the data stored in the abnormal input flag) are not notified.

As described above, as in Example 2 of Figure 78, if an error is detected during rotation of the reels 31 and then the setting change state is entered, the error detection data for an error detected during rotation of the reels 31 but before the transition to the setting change state is erased by the RWM clear process in the setting change state, so the error will not be reported after the setting change state ends. Also, in Example 2, the transition to the setting change state erases the data for the error detected before the transition to the setting change state, so no error command is sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80 after the setting change state ends. When power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 turned on, the first interrupt process occurs after step S2740, as shown in Figure 44. In this case, because the initialization process has already been executed in step S2732, the error command stored before the power was turned off is erased by the time the first interrupt process is executed. Therefore, even if the interrupt process (Figure 47) is entered and the control command transmission process of step S464 in Figure 47 is executed, no error command is sent to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, the error is not stored as error history in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80, nor is it displayed.

Figure 79 is a diagram showing the error history screen of Figure 78 (Example 2). In Figure 79, the power-off for error number "004" corresponds to time t3 in Figure 78. Also, the power-on for error number "003" corresponds to time t4 in Figure 78. In this example, after the power is turned off, the door is opened, the setting key switch 152 is turned on, and then the power is turned on, so the door opening is detected at the same time as the power is turned on. Then, a setting change process is performed between error numbers "001" and "002", and then the door is closed. Note that, as mentioned above, the setting change process is not displayed on the error history screen.

As mentioned above, data on errors detected before transitioning to the setting change state (before the power is turned off) is erased, so errors are not reported even after the setting change state ends, and are not displayed in the error history. Therefore, errors that have not been reported are not displayed in the error history, ensuring consistency between reported errors and errors displayed in the history and preventing misunderstandings by administrators. In other words, errors that have not been reported will not be displayed in the error history.

Figure 80 is a time chart showing a case where multiple errors are detected during the setting confirmation state (Example 3). In Figure 80, the transition from the game standby state to the setting confirmation state is the same as above. In this example, a first error is first detected during the setting confirmation state, followed by a second error. As with the above, examples of the first and second errors include selector errors (errors related to the passage sensor 46 and the input sensor 44) and hopper errors (errors related to the payout sensor 37). When a first or second error is detected during the setting confirmation state, the main control board 50 stores information about the type of error detected in the memory area of the RWM 53, as described above. In the setting confirmation state, as with the rotation of the reels 31, even if an error is detected, the error is not reported; instead, the error is reported after the setting confirmation state ends. This is because the control processing for the setting confirmation state takes priority over error reporting.

When the main control board 50 ends the setting confirmation state, it first sends an error command to the sub-control board 80 based on the detection of the second error (timing t5 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 notifies the second error based on receiving the error command. In other words, if errors are detected in the setting confirmation state in the order of the first error and the second error, the sub-control board 80 is configured to notify the errors in the order of the second error and the first error after the setting confirmation state ends (the reverse of the order in which the errors were detected). Note that when the sub-control board 80 receives a second error command from the main control board 50, it stores the details of the second error as error history in a specified memory area of the RWM 83, linking it to the notification start date and time. The sub-control board 80 continues to notify the second error until the cause of the second error is eliminated. When the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the second error has been eliminated, it sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it will end the notification of the second error.

Furthermore, once the cause of the second error has been removed, the main control board 50 then sends an error command to the sub-control board 80 based on the detection of the first error (time t6 in the figure). The sub-control board 80 issues a first error alert based on receiving the error command. When the sub-control board 80 receives the first error command from the main control board 50, it stores the details of the first error as error history in a specified memory area of the RWM 83, linking it to the alert start date and time. The first error alert continues until the cause of the first error has been removed, and when the main control board 50 determines that the cause of the first error has been removed, it sends a command to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives this command, it ends the first error alert. As with Example 1 in Figure 76, a first error command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 when a first error is detected (dash-dotted line in the figure), and a second error command may be sent to the sub-control board 80 when a second error is detected (dash-dotted line in the figure).

Here, in Example 3 of Figure 80, it is assumed that the notification priority of the first error and the second error is the same (there is no difference in notification priority). However, priorities may be set for error notifications. For example, if the notification priority of the first error is higher than the notification priority of the second error, the first error will be notified first after the setting confirmation state ends, and the second error will be notified once the cause of the first error is removed. In this case, the error history will display the first error first, followed by the second error, in accordance with the order in which the errors were notified.

Figure 81 shows the error history for Example 3 in Figure 80. In this example, after the door with error number "004" is opened, the setting confirmation state is entered, and when this setting confirmation state ends, a second error with error number "003" is detected. The "setting confirmation state" may or may not be displayed in the error history. Then, when the cause of the second error is removed, the first error is reported. The first error is displayed in the error history with error number "002" (time t6 in Figure 80). The error history also lists the second error, followed by the first error, in this order, matching the reported error order. This eliminates the discrepancy between the error reporting order and the display order of the history, preventing misunderstandings by the administrator. As described above, in this embodiment, if multiple errors occur under conditions where error reporting is not possible, the system will report the errors in order, starting with the last detected error, when conditions allow for error reporting.

Figure 82 is a time chart showing a case (Example 4) in which a first error and a second error are detected during game standby (after all reels 31 have stopped and before the start switch 41 is operated (before game play begins)). During game standby, the reels 31 are not rotating or the setting is not being checked, so if an error is detected, the detected error can be immediately reported. First, when the main control board 50 detects a first error during game standby, it sends a first error command to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving the first error command, the sub-control board 80 begins reporting the first error (time t7 in the figure). The received information about the first error is linked to information about the reporting start time and stored in the error history. If a second error is detected after a first error is detected but before the cause of the first error is eliminated (while the first error is being reported), as described below, the main control board 50 will send a command to the sub-control board 80 at the timing when it becomes possible to report the second error (time t8 in the figure), as in the above example. However, this is not limited to this, and the second error command may also be sent to the sub-control board 80 at the time the second error is detected (two-dot chain line in the figure).

When the cause of the first error is removed, the main control board 50 sends information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives information to the effect that the cause of the first error has been removed, it terminates the notification of the first error. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 detects that the cause of the first error has been removed, it sends a command for a second error to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the command for the second error, it begins to notify the second error (time t8 in the figure). The received information about the second error is linked to information about the notification start time and stored in the error history. When the cause of the second error is removed, the main control board 50 sends information to that effect to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives information to the effect that the cause of the second error has been removed, it terminates the notification of the second error. In this way, when errors are detected in the order of the first error and the second error during game standby, the first error and then the second error are reported, unlike during the setting confirmation state. This is because when the first error is detected, there is no need to suspend the reporting of the first error, and reporting of the first error can begin immediately.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the error history in Example 4 of FIG. 82. In Example 4, when a first error is notified, the history of the first error is displayed with error number "004." The time of the first error with error number "004" corresponds to time t7 in FIG. 82. Furthermore, when the cause of the first error is removed, a second error is notified next, and the second error is displayed with error number "002." The time of the second error with error number "002" corresponds to time t8 in FIG. 82. Therefore, the notification order of the first error and the second error matches the error history order.

In addition, although not illustrated in this embodiment, if an error is detected consecutively, the following processing is performed. For example, if a medal retention error (an error in the insertion sensor 44) is detected in the selector while the game is in standby mode, a medal retention error command is sent to the sub-control board 80. This causes the sub-control board 80 to notify the medal retention error. Next, suppose that after the administrator clears the medal retention error, they insert a medal into the medal insertion slot 47 before operating the reset switch 153, resulting in another medal retention error. In this case, the main control board 50 does not resend the medal retention error command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the administrator clears the medal retention error again and operates the reset switch 153, it is determined whether the cause of the error has been cleared, and if it is determined that the cause of the error has been cleared, information to that effect is sent to the sub-control board 80. Upon receiving this information, the sub-control board 80 terminates the medal retention error notification.

In this way, even if two medal retention errors are detected on the main control board 50 side, the medal retention error command will only be sent once to the sub-control board 80 as long as the reset switch 153 is not operated. Therefore, the error history from the sub-control board 80 will display one medal retention error. Note that while the above example uses a medal retention error, this is not limited to medal retention errors; it also applies to other errors that are resolved by operating the reset switch 153 after the cause of the error has been removed.

<Sixth Embodiment> The sixth embodiment relates to the structure of a main control board 50, a socket (also called a "chip socket") 56, and a main chip 55. In the sixth embodiment and the seventh embodiment described below, "mounting" refers to soldering various electronic components (CPU, ROM, RAM, resistors, connectors, 7-segment displays, etc.) to the main control board 50 or other boards (printed wiring boards) or attaching them to sockets to make them function (operate) as an electronic circuit. Furthermore, the "main chip 55" in this embodiment refers to a one-chip microprocessor that includes a main CPU 55 and built-in memory, and further includes a ROM 54 and RWM 53 within the built-in memory, as described in Figure 32 (third embodiment).

Figure 84 is an external perspective view showing the main control board 50, socket 56, and main chip 55 not yet installed in socket 56 in the sixth embodiment. The socket 56 is used to install the main chip 55 and electrically connect the main chip 55 to the main control board 50. The socket 56 is mounted in a predetermined position on the main control board 50. As will be described in detail later, the socket 56 is made of a transparent resin material (it can be translucent as long as the internal cavity 56a is visible). The top surface of the socket 56 is formed with a pin insertion opening 56c into which the pin 55a (terminal) of the main chip 55 is inserted. Note that the resistor 50a is also shown on the main control board 50 in Figure 84 to contrast the height of the resistor 50a with the height of the notch 56e of the socket 56. This point will be described in detail later.

Figure 85 is a plan view (viewed vertically downward from above) showing the main chip 55 mounted in the socket 56 in more detail. Figure 86 is a view (front view) taken along the arrow Z1 in Figure 85. Figure 87 is a view (side view) taken along the arrow Z2 in Figure 85. In Figure 85, the "upper side of the drawing" and the "lower side of the drawing" are defined as shown. In this example, the main chip 55 has "71" pins 55a. Here, "pin 55a(1)" refers to the first pin 55a, "pin 55a(2)" refers to the second pin 55a, and so on, and "pin 55a(71)" refers to the 71st pin 55a.

The main chip 55 has a recess 55b cut out in a generally arc-shaped pattern at approximately the center of the upper and lower longitudinal edges (left-right direction in the figure). Of the 71 pins 55a, the first pin 55a (1) through the 35th pin 55a (35) are provided on the lower longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, excluding the area where the recess 55b is formed. Similarly, the 36th pin 55a (36) through the 71st pin 55a (71) are provided on the upper longitudinal edge of the main chip 55, excluding the area where the recess 55b is formed. Of the first through 71st pins 55a, the 17th (pin 55a (17)), 35th (pin 55a (35)), 54th (pin 55a (54)), and 71st (pin 55a (71)) serve as GND (ground) lines. All pins other than these four are signal lines.

Here, the 35th pin 55a (35) is located at the right end of the lower edge of the main chip 55, and the 71st pin 55a (71) is located at the left end of the upper edge of the main chip 55. The 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), which are GND lines, are located adjacent to the recessed portion 55b. When a worker grasps the main chip 55, they first press and hold the areas near the 35th pin 55a (35) and the 71st pin 55a (71) (holding the diagonal corners of the main chip 55), thereby being able to grasp the area near the GND line, thereby reducing the number of signal lines that come into contact with the worker's fingers.

Secondly, the main chip 55 can be held by gripping the areas near the recessed portions 55b on the lower and upper edges of the main chip 55. The recessed portions 55b make it easier to hold the main chip 55. Furthermore, when gripping the recessed portions 55b, by pressing and holding the areas near the 17th pin 55a (17) and the 54th pin 55a (54), it is possible to hold the area near the GND line, as described above, thereby reducing the number of signal lines that the operator's fingers come into contact with.

Furthermore, a two-dimensional code 55e is printed in the left region of the top surface of the main chip 55. Furthermore, a model number sticker 55f displaying the model number of the gaming machine 10 is affixed to the right region. The regions where the two-dimensional code 55e is printed and where the model number sticker 55f is affixed are flat surfaces (surfaces without steps). In particular, displaying the two-dimensional code 55e on a flat surface makes it easier to read. Furthermore, providing the model number sticker 55f on a flat surface makes the information displayed on the model number sticker 55f easier to read. Furthermore, affixing the model number sticker 55f to a flat surface makes it less likely to peel off. Furthermore, an approximately semicircular stepped portion 55c is formed on the left edge of the main chip 55. Note that this stepped portion 55c, as well as the stepped portions 55d and 55i described below, are all recessed from the surface. The stepped portion 55c is a recessed area formed in an approximately semicircular shape. Additionally, step portion 55d is formed near step portion 55c and closer to pin 55a(1). Step portion 55d is formed by recessing a roughly circular area, with the number "1" displayed within the roughly circular area. The number "1" may be recessed further than the roughly circular area, or conversely, may be formed to be convex from the roughly circular area (however, it does not protrude above the surface of main chip 55). Also, while the number "1" is shown in this example, other numbers, symbols, etc. may also be used.

On the top surface of the main chip 55, between the two-dimensional code 55e and the model number sticker 55f, the product name 55g (in bold letters in the figure) and the company name 55h (in dotted letters in the figure) are displayed. The product name 55g is printed. The company name 55h also has a stepped portion 55i. Figure 88(A) is an enlarged view of the product name 55g and the company name 55h. Figure 88(B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the arrow Z3-Z3 in (A). As shown in Figure 88, an area corresponding to the thickness of the line of the company name 55h is recessed from the surface, forming the stepped portion 55i. Figure 89 is a cross-sectional view showing the relationship between the above-mentioned stepped portion 55c (semicircular portion), stepped portion 55d (circular portion with the number "1" displayed inside), and stepped portion 55i. When the depth of step portion 55c is D1, the depth of step portion 55d is D2, and the depth of step portion 55i is D3, the magnitude relationship is "D1 > D2 > D3." In this way, by making the depths of the three step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i different, counterfeiting is made more difficult. Furthermore, because the depths of these multiple step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i are different, the worker can determine the installation orientation by feeling the top surface of the main chip 55.

Also, as shown in Figure 88(A), the product name 55g is positioned so that at least a portion of it overlaps the company name 55h. In this example, the "B" and "C" in the product name overlap the "A" in the company name, the "D," "E," and "F" in the product name overlap the "B" in the company name, and the "G" in the product name overlaps the "C" in the company name. In other words, the letters "BCDEFG" in the product name "ABCDEFG" are positioned so that they overlap the stepped portion 55i. Displaying the product name 55g in this manner makes counterfeiting difficult. For example, if an attempt is made to form the company name 55h with the stepped portion 55i after printing the product name 55g, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps the stepped portion 55i may be erased. On the other hand, if an attempt is made to print the product name 55g after forming the company name 55h with the stepped portion 55i, the portion of the product name 55g that overlaps the stepped portion 55i may not be printed clearly.

Furthermore, hidden characters 55j are displayed within the product name 55g. The size of each character in hidden characters 55j is equal to or smaller than the line thickness of the product name 55g. As shown in Figure 88 (A), the letter "A" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within the line of the letter "C" of product name 55g. Similarly, the letter "B" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within the line of the letter "D" of product name 55g, and the letter "C" of hidden characters 55j is displayed within the line of the letter "E" of product name 55g. Furthermore, of the letters "A," "B," and "C" of hidden characters 55j, the letters "A" and "C" of hidden characters 55j are positioned so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of company name 55h. Therefore, the letter "C" of product name 55g and the letter "A" of hidden characters 55j are displayed so as to straddle the stepped portion 55i of the letter "A" of company name 55h. Similarly, the letter "E" in the product name 55g and the letter "C" in the hidden text 55j are displayed across the stepped portion 55i of the letter "B" in the company name 55h. This configuration makes counterfeiting more difficult. Furthermore, by checking for the presence or absence of the hidden text 55j, it is possible to determine whether the product is a counterfeit.

As described above, the main body of the socket 56 is formed, for example, from a transparent resin material. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87 , socket pins 56d (terminals) are provided inside the socket 56 at positions corresponding to the pins 55a of the mounted main chip 55. Note that FIG. 87 only illustrates the 35th socket pin 56d (35) and the 36th socket pin 56d (36), and FIG. 86 omits the socket pins 56d, but the socket pins 56d have socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) that are connected to pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of the main chip 55, respectively. By soldering the socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of the socket 56 to the main control board 50, the socket pins 56d and the main control board 50 are electrically connected, and the socket 56 is mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, when main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, pins 55a(1) to 55a(71) of main chip 55 are electrically connected to socket pins 56d(1) to 56d(71) of socket 56, respectively. This electrically connects main chip 55 to main control board 50. After main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, it is coupled so that main chip 55 cannot be easily pulled out of socket 56.

As shown in Figure 85, on the surface of the main control board 50, mark numbers 50b and mark 50c are printed around the area where the socket 56 is mounted. There are four mark numbers 50b: mark number 50b(1) displaying the number "1", mark number 50b(35) displaying the number "35", mark number 50b(36) displaying the number "36", and mark number 50b(71) displaying the number "71". These four mark numbers 50b(1), mark number 50b(35), mark number 50b(36), and mark number 50b(71) correspond to pins 55a(1), pin 55a(35), pin 55a(36), and pin 55a(71) of the main chip 55, respectively. Specifically, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, pin 55a (1) is located near the mark number 50b (1), pin 55a (35) is located near the mark number 50b (35), pin 55a (36) is located near the mark number 50b (36), and pin 55a (71) is located near the mark number 50b (71).

Furthermore, on the surface of the main control board 50, six marks 50c(5), 50c(10), 50c(15), 50c(20), 50c(25), and 50c(30) are printed between mark number 50b(1) and mark number 50b(35). These marks 50c are printed dots. In Figure 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above, the mark 50c(5) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(5) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c(10) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(10), the mark 50c(15) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(15), the mark 50c(20) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(20), the mark 50c(25) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(25), and the mark 50c(30) is located approximately directly below the pin 55a(30).

Meanwhile, on the surface of the main control board 50, seven marks 50c (40), 50c (45), 50c (50), 50c (55), 50c (60), 50c (65), and 50c (70) are printed between mark number 50b (36) and mark number 50b (71). These marks 50c are printed dots, similar to the mark 50c described above. In Figure 85, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56 and viewed vertically downward from above the main chip 55, the mark 50c (40) on the main control board 50 is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (40) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (45) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (45) of the main chip 55, the mark 50c (50) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (50), the mark 50c (55) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (55), the mark 50c (60) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (60), the mark 50c (65) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (65), and the mark 50c (70) is located approximately directly above the pin 55a (70).

With the above configuration, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the pin number of the main chip 55 can be easily determined when viewed from directly above. For example, in Figure 85, it is easy to determine that pin 55a (36) of the main chip 55, located approximately directly below the mark number 50b (36), is the 36th pin. Furthermore, for example, pin 55a (17) (GND) can be easily determined to be the 17th pin 55a by the mark number 50b (1), mark 50c (5), mark 50c (10), and mark 50c (15).

In Figure 85, a step portion 56b (56b(1) and 56b(71)) is formed at the left end of the surface (top surface) of the socket 56. The step portion 56b(1) has a substantially rectangular area recessed from the surface, and the number "1" is displayed within this substantially rectangular area. The amount of recess in the step portion 56b is arbitrary, but may be approximately the same as the amount of recess in the step portion 55c of the main chip 55, for example. The number "1" in the step portion 56b(1) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in Figure 85. Therefore, when the main chip 55 is attached to the socket 56, the number "1" displayed on the step portion 55d of the main chip 55 and the number "1" displayed on the step portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 are 90 degrees apart. By doing this, when the main chip 55 and socket 56 are viewed in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 is oriented correctly. Therefore, when the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10 in the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 can be viewed in the correct orientation. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10 in an orientation rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the orientation shown in FIG. 85, the number "1" displayed on the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be viewed in the correct orientation. Therefore, regardless of the orientation in which the main control board 50 is installed in the gaming machine 10, the number on either the stepped portion 55d of the main chip 55 or the stepped portion 56b(1) of the socket 56 can be viewed in the correct orientation, making it easier to check the pin numbers when installing the main chip 55 in the socket 56.

The orientation of the main chip 55 can also be confirmed by looking at the position of the stepped portion 55c. That is, the side of the main chip 55 having the stepped portion 55c is the side with pin numbers "1" and "71." When viewed from above, the outline of the main chip 55 is chamfered only at the corner on the lower left side in Figure 85. The chamfered corner corresponds to pin number "1." Therefore, the position of pin number "1" can be easily confirmed simply by checking this chamfered corner.

Furthermore, step portion 56b (71) has a roughly rectangular area recessed from the surface, with the number "71" displayed within this roughly rectangular area. Like the number "1" on step portion 56b (1), the number "71" on step portion 56b (71) is displayed rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85. When main chip 55 is mounted in socket 56, the first pin 55a (1) of main chip 55 is located near step portion 56b (1) of socket 56, and the 71st pin 55a (71) (GND) of main chip 55 is located near step portion 56b (71) of socket 56.

Step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) of socket 56 also have recesses with numbers displayed within those areas, making counterfeiting socket 56 difficult. Furthermore, the number of pins 55a on main chip 55 is 71, an odd number; in Figure 85, there are 35 on the bottom side and 36 on the top side. Because socket 56 is also shaped to accommodate these pins 55a, the main chip 55 cannot be installed upside down (inserting the side with 36 pins 55a as the bottom side in the figure). This prevents incorrect installation. Furthermore, when inserting main chip 55 into socket 56, aligning the number "1" displayed on step portion 55d of main chip 55 with the number "1" displayed on step portion 56b(1) of socket 56 ensures that main chip 55 is installed in the correct orientation relative to socket 56.

Furthermore, when the main chip 55 is mounted in the socket 56, the number "1" on the stepped portion 56b(1) makes it easy to identify that pin 55a(1) of the main chip 55 is the "1"th pin 55a. Similarly, the number "71" on the stepped portion 56b(71) makes it easy to identify that pin 55a(71) (GND) of the main chip 55 is the "71"th pin 55a.

As shown in FIG. 86, two notches 56e (height H1) are formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the longitudinal direction. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 87, a notch 56f (height H2) is formed on the bottom surface of the socket 56 in the lateral direction. These notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized components are attached to the bottom surface of the socket 56. As described above, the socket 56 body is formed from a transparent or translucent resin material, making it possible to visually confirm that no unauthorized components are attached to the interior (cavity 56a). Furthermore, these notches 56e and 56f allow visual confirmation that no unauthorized components are attached to the contact surface between the socket 56 and the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. 87, a socket pin 56d is provided inside the socket 56. Therefore, if the height H1 of the notch 56e is higher than necessary in the longitudinal direction of the socket 56 (the side where the socket pins 56d are aligned), it may be possible to insert a wire or other object through the notch 56e, which could lead to fraud.

However, in this embodiment, as shown in Figure 86, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is lower than the height H3 of the resistor 50a mounted on the main control board 50 (H1 < H3). Specifically, the height H1 of the cutout 56e is, for example, less than 1 millimeter, and the height H3 of the resistor 50a is, for example, approximately 1 to 3 millimeters. Note that the height H3 of the resistor 50a is the shortest of the multiple types of resistors mounted on the main control board 50. As a result, the socket 56 is configured to make it difficult to insert foreign objects such as wires through the cutout 56e. This makes it difficult to access the socket pins 56d through the cutout 56e, thereby preventing cheating.

<Seventh Embodiment> The seventh embodiment relates to the positional relationship between the circuit board and electronic components. In the seventh embodiment, "circuit board" refers to the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 described above, as well as other control boards or relay boards connected to the main control board 50 or sub-control board 80. Furthermore, "electronic components" refer to (cable) connectors and 7-segment displays. When the electronic components are 7-segment displays, examples include the setting value display LED 73 (1 digit), the credit number display LED 76 (2 digits), the acquisition number display LED 78 (2 digits), and the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 (4 digits) (see Figures 1 and 36). Furthermore, in this embodiment, the "front surface" of the circuit board refers to the surface on which specific electronic components are mounted (the so-called "component surface"), and the "back surface" refers to the surface opposite the surface on which specific electronic components are mounted (the so-called "solder surface").

In the seventh embodiment, a predetermined gap is provided between the circuit board and the bottom surface (the surface facing the circuit board) of a predetermined electronic component, allowing visual confirmation of whether or not an unauthorized component has been installed between the bottom surface of the predetermined electronic component and the circuit board. When the circuit board is installed in the gaming machine 10, depending on the installation position of the circuit board, the gap may not be easily visible. However, during assembly of the gaming machine 10 or maintenance after installation of the gaming machine 10, a worker can easily visually check the gap. Furthermore, as described below, by illuminating the gap with an LED, the gap can be confirmed even in a dimly lit environment after the circuit board is installed in the gaming machine 10.

Figure 90 shows the positional relationship (Example 1) between the board and a specified electronic component in the seventh embodiment, with (A) showing a plan view and (B) showing a front view. The "specified electronic component" in Example 1 corresponds to the connector 57. Also, Figure 91 (A) is a view seen from the Z4 direction in Figure 90 (A), with the board not shown. Also, Figure 91 (B) is a view seen from the Z5 direction (bottom side of the connector) in Figure 90 (B), with the board not shown. In the example of Figure 90, the connector 57 is mounted on the board. The connector 57 corresponds to a cable connector for connecting to another board (for example, the main control board 50) via a cable.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 91 (B), multiple legs 57a are formed on the bottom side of connector 57. As a result, the entire bottom surface of connector 57 does not come into contact with the board; only legs 57a of the connector come into contact with the board, leaving a certain gap between the bottom surface of connector 57 (excluding legs 57a) and the surface of the board. In other words, connector 57 is positioned so that it is raised above the surface of the board by the height of legs 57a. This configuration makes it possible to visually check the gap between connector 57 and the board, making it possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized component has been installed.

The lead wires 57b of the connector 57 are arranged in two rows as shown in Figure 91(B), and are positioned to avoid the legs 57a. This allows the legs 57a and lead wires 57b to be visually inspected so as not to overlap when viewed from the front as shown in Figure 90(B) or from the rear as shown in Figure 91(A), allowing for accurate determination of whether or not unauthorized components have been installed in the gap between the board and the connector 57. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 91(A), the lead wires 57b are visible when viewed from behind the connector 57, but are not visible when viewed from directly above the connector 57 as shown in Figure 90(A). For example, if this board is installed inside the gaming machine 10 (e.g., inside the cabinet or behind the front door), and is installed in a manner that appears as shown in Figure 90(A) when the front door is opened, the lead wires 57b of the connector 57 cannot be seen from that position, thereby enhancing security.

Figure 92 shows the positional relationship (Example 2) between the board and specified electronic components in the seventh embodiment, with (A) showing a plan view and (B) showing a side view (enlarged view). The board in Example 2 corresponds to the display board 75 shown in Figure 36 (Third embodiment). The "specified electronic components" correspond to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. To provide a brief overview of the display board 75 again, as shown in Figure 1, the display board 75 is a board that is electrically connected to the main control board 50, and therefore it is preferable that it be equipped with fraud prevention measures.

As shown in Figure 92, a credit number display LED 76 and an acquired number display LED 78 are mounted on the display board 75. Each of these consists of two 7-segment displays (one for the upper digit and one for the lower digit) arranged side by side. Also, on the display board 75, six status display LEDs 79 are mounted below the credit number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78 in Figure 92 (A). Each of these is an independent LED.

As shown in Figure 92 (B), the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78, like the connector 57 shown in Figure 90, have feet (foot 78a in the case of the acquired number display LED 78) on their bottom surfaces, and the height of these feet 78a is formed to be "H4". As a result, when the acquired number display LED 78 is mounted on the display board 75, a gap "H4" is formed between the bottom surface of the acquired number display LED 78 and the top of the display board 75. This is also true for the credit number display LED 76.

Furthermore, when the status display LED 79 (Figure 92 (B) shows the game start display LED 79d, but this applies to all status display LEDs 79) is mounted on the display board 75, the lead wires of the status display LED 79 are soldered to the display board 75, similar to the connector 57. At this time, the gap "H5" between the bottom of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 is almost "0" or very small. Therefore, the gap "H4" between the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75 is larger than the gap "H5" between the bottom of the status display LED 79 and the display board 75 (H5 < H4). With this configuration, when the status display LED 79 is lit, light can illuminate the gap "H4" between the bottom of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 and the display board 75.

In particular, the status display LED 79 is located close enough to the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 that the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit reaches the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78. This makes it possible to visually check the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 using the light emitted from the status display LED 79 when lit. For example, when medals are bet, at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c will light up, so if medals are bet, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be visually checked.

Furthermore, if the power to the gaming machine 10 is turned off while medals have been bet, when the power is turned on again, the bet number data before the power was turned off is read, and at least one of the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, or 3 bet display LED 79c will light up again when the gaming machine 10 starts up. Therefore, the LEDs can be turned on with the simple operation of turning on the power, allowing the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the winning number display LED 78 to be visually confirmed. Note that the above is not limited to the 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, and 3 bet display LED 79c, but is similar for other LEDs as well. For example, after a replay symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state, the replay display LED 79f will remain lit unless the next game is started. Even if the power is turned off/on under these circumstances, the replay display LED 79f will light up again when the gaming machine 10 starts up. Therefore, the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and the acquired number display LED 78 can be visually confirmed using the light emitted by the replay display LED 79f when it is lit. The display board 75 is attached to the back side of the front door of the gaming machine 10, and is positioned so that the credit number display LED 76, acquired number display LED 78, and status display LED 79 are visible from the control panel 12c. When the display board 75 is attached to the gaming machine 10 in this manner, even if the status display LED 79 is lit, it may not be easy to visually confirm the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78. Therefore, if the display board 75 is electrically connected to the gaming machine 10 (when the display board 75 is connected by a harness), the operator can remove the display board 75 from the front door, hold the display board 75, and turn on the status display LED 79, thereby easily visually confirming the bottom surfaces of the credit number display LED 76 and acquired number display LED 78.

Figure 93 shows the positional relationship (Example 3) between the board and a specified electronic component in the seventh embodiment, where (A) shows a front view (the surface on which the specified electronic component is mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. The board in Example 3 corresponds to the main control board 50. The "specified electronic component" corresponds to the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. The management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is the same as that shown in Figure 1 (First embodiment) and Figure 36 (B) (Third embodiment).

First, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example of Figure 93 is composed of four independent 7-segment displays (digits in Figure 36 (B)) arranged side by side. Furthermore, as in the example of Figure 36 (B), each 7-segment display has a DP (decimal point) (segment P in Figure 37). Furthermore, as shown in Figure (B), the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, like the other examples of the seventh embodiment, has feet (not shown in Figure 93) on its bottom surface, creating a gap between the bottom of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 and the surface of the main control board 50. This configuration makes it possible to visually check whether any unauthorized parts have been installed in the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74.

Furthermore, on the back side of the main control board 50, in the area where the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is attached on the front side, a boundary line 50d having approximately the same dimensions as the outline of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is printed. If the main control board 50 is, for example, green, the boundary line 50d is displayed in, for example, white to make it easier to see. Furthermore, a DP mark 50e is also printed in the position corresponding to the DP of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 on the front side. The DP mark 50e is displayed in, for example, white, just like the boundary line 50d.

This configuration makes it possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed in the correct position on the main control board 50. Specifically, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed correctly on the front surface at a position corresponding to the boundary line 50d on the back side of the main control board 50. Furthermore, by making the external dimensions of the boundary line 50d approximately the same as the external dimensions of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to check whether a different 7-segment display (for example, a 7-segment display with a different number of digits) has been installed. Furthermore, by checking the positions of the four DP markers 50e on the back surface of the main control board 50 and the DP position of each 7-segment display of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74, it is possible to check whether the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is installed in the correct orientation.

Figure 94 shows a modified example of Example 3 in Figure 93. As with Figure 93, (A) shows a front view (the surface on which certain electronic components are mounted), (B) shows a side view, and (C) shows a back view. Unlike the example in Figure 93, the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 in the example in Figure 94 is an integrated, four-digit, seven-segment display (one that cannot be separated into individual digits). In other words, this management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is a single component. In such a case, the boundary line 50d on the back of the main control board 50 is printed (displayed) as an outline only, with no boundary lines for each digit printed. Therefore, the number of components can be easily confirmed by whether the boundary line 50d is printed like the boundary line 50d in Figure 93(B) or the boundary line 50d in Figure 94(B).

On the other hand, the DP marks 50e are printed at positions corresponding to the positions of the DPs provided on the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74. This makes it possible to check whether the four-digit management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correctly attached and whether the orientation of the management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is correct.

The fifth to seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above and various modifications are possible, such as those described below. A. Fifth Embodiment (1) The error history to be stored and displayed can be determined arbitrarily, taking into account the storage capacity of the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80. For example, the error history may be stored without being erased until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, and all of the stored error history may be displayed. Then, when the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached, the oldest error history data may be erased sequentially. Furthermore, for example, data that is older than a predetermined number of days (e.g., six months or one year) from the current time may be erased from the error history data. Alternatively, error history data may be stored until the upper limit of the storage area of the RWM 83 that stores the error history is reached (preferably configured so that this error history can be viewed in some way), but the error history may be displayed only if it is within one month prior to the current time.

(2) Although not illustrated in the above embodiment, if an error occurs while the reels 31 are spinning, the power is turned off before the reels 31 stop, and the power is then turned on (without transitioning to the setting change state), the following processing is performed. Note that when the power is turned off after an error is detected, the error data is stored in the abnormal input flag as described above. If the system starts up after power is turned on without transitioning to the setting change state, the processing in Figure 41 (program start) proceeds to step S2721 (power recovery processing). Then, after step S2724 in Figure 42 (power recovery processing), an interrupt processing occurs, and the error command stored before the power was turned off is sent to the sub-control board 80. When the sub-control board 80 receives the error command, it begins reporting the error. The time in the error history for that error becomes the time when reporting of that error began.

(3) The error content and time shown on the error history screen are examples and are not limited to these. For example, door open and door close events do not need to be displayed in the error history. Also, power on/off events do not need to be displayed in the error history. On the other hand, when a setting change state or setting confirmation state is entered, something may be displayed on the error history screen along with the time to indicate this fact. Furthermore, the time may be displayed in any way, such as the date and time, the month and date and time, or the year, month, date, and time.

(4) While the error history screen can be displayed in the setting confirmation state, this is not limiting. For example, it may be possible to switch to store manager mode by performing a specific operation when the door is opened, and the error history screen may be displayed in that store manager mode (the setting key may not be required to display the error history screen). Alternatively, conversely, the error history screen may not be displayed unless the setting change state is entered. (5) When an error is being reported, the error report may be terminated even if the reset switch 153 is not operated once the cause of the error has been eliminated. Alternatively, when an error is being reported, even if the cause of the error has been eliminated and the reset switch 153 has been operated, the error report may continue from that point until a predetermined time has elapsed, and the error report may be terminated once the predetermined time has elapsed.

B. Sixth Embodiment (1) The socket 56 has two stepped portions 56b(1) and 56b(71), which display the letters "1" and "71," respectively. However, this is not limited to this. For example, even if only stepped portion 56b(1) is provided, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on stepped portion 55d on the main chip 55. (2) In addition to four marking numerals 50b, thirteen marking numerals 50c are displayed on the main control board 50. However, this is not limited to this. It is also possible to display only marking numerals 50b. Furthermore, the marking numerals 50b may be only marking numeral 50b(1), or only marking numerals 50b(1) and 50b(71). Even if only marking numeral 50b(1) is provided, it is possible to align it with the number "1" on stepped portion 55d on the main chip 55.

(3) In the above embodiment, the main chip 55 has a recess 55b, a model number sticker 55f attached, and a two-dimensional code 55e, product name 55g, company name 55h, and hidden text 55j displayed (printed), but these do not necessarily mean that these are essential requirements for the main chip 55. (4) In the above embodiment, the number of pins on the main chip 55 is 71, but this is not limited to this and an even number (for example, 72) is also acceptable. Furthermore, if an odd number is used, the number is not limited to 71, and can be, for example, 75 (32 + 33). The number of pins on the main chip 55 is determined by the number of signal lines and GNDs required.

(5) The notches 56e and 56f of the socket 56 are not necessarily required. However, it is preferable to provide a notch 56e or 56f in at least one location on the bottom of the socket 56 so that the space between the bottom of the socket 56 and the main control board 50 can be visually confirmed. Furthermore, even if the notches 56e and 56f are provided, it is not essential that the height be as described above. (6) The socket 56 can also be formed from an opaque material. However, from the perspective of preventing fraud, it is preferable to form the socket 56 from a transparent or translucent material that allows the interior to be visually observed. (7) The step 55i of the company name 55h is not necessarily required. Even if the company name 55h is provided, it may be a character that does not have a step. Furthermore, the depths of the step portions 55c, 55d, and 55i (D1, D2, and D3 in FIG. 89) may be partially the same (for example, D1 = D2 and D1 ≠ D3), or may all be the same (D1 = D2 = D3).

(8) The orientation of the characters in step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise relative to the character "1" in step portion 55d and the character of mark number 50b, but this is not limited to this. The orientation of the characters in step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be the same as the orientation of the character "1" in step portion 55d and the character of mark number 50b. Alternatively, the orientation of the characters in step portions 56b(1) and 56b(71) may be rotated 90 degrees clockwise in FIG. 85, and the orientation of the character "1" in step portion 55d and the character of mark number 50b may be rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise in FIG. 85. (9) In the main chip 55, the pin numbers for the GND (ground) lines are 17, 35, 54, and 71, but this is not limited to this. For example, pins 1, 35, 36, and 71 may be used as GND (ground) lines. Alternatively, pins 17, 18, 53, and 54 (all pins adjacent to the recessed portion 55b) may be used as GND (ground) lines.

C. Seventh Embodiment (1) The foot portion (used to ensure a gap with the board) provided on the bottom of a specified electronic component may have any shape. For example, as shown in Figure 91(B), foot portion 57a of connector 57 is formed in a line shape, but this is not limited to this. Approximately cylindrical foot portions may be provided at the four corners of a specified electronic component. This is not limited to connector 57, but is similar to seven-segment displays (Figures 92, 93, and 94). (2) As shown in Figure 92(B), "H5" is used as an example of the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the board. However, in reality, the bottom surface of the LED and the board are almost in contact, and the gap between the bottom surface of the LED and the board is almost "0."

(3) In the examples of Figures 93 and 94, a management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 74 is illustrated, but this is not limiting. For example, the display board 75 shown in Figure 92 can also be configured in a similar manner. For example, if the credit number display LED 76 is a juxtaposition of two 7-segment displays, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the two juxtapositioned 7-segment displays is displayed on the back of the display board 75, and two DP markers 50e are also displayed. Furthermore, if the credit number display LED 76 is an integrated 7-segment display in which the upper and lower digits are connected, a boundary line 50d indicating its outline is displayed on the back of the display board 75, and two DP markers 50e are also displayed. The same applies to the acquisition number display LED 78. Furthermore, a similar configuration can be used for, for example, a single-digit setting value display LED 73. In this case, a boundary line 50d corresponding to the outline of the set value display LED 73 is displayed on the back of the board (main control board 50 or the board on which the set value display LED 73 is mounted), and one DP mark 50e is also displayed. Note that if the set value display LED 73 does not have a DP, only the boundary line 50d is displayed on the back of the board.

<Eighth Embodiment> The eighth embodiment relates to timer interrupt processing and vector addresses (also referred to as "interrupt vector addresses"). In the eighth embodiment, the following terms are used: (1) "Timer interrupt processing" in the eighth embodiment is the same as "Interrupt processing (I_INTR)" in the fourth embodiment (Figure 66). In the following description of the eighth embodiment, "Timer interrupt processing" may be abbreviated to simply "Interrupt processing" as necessary. (2) "Address value" refers to the numerical value of an address in the internal memory. For example, in Figure 96, described below, the "vector address value" is "0004H." Note that in this specification, the terms "address" and "address" may be used as necessary, but they are synonymous.

(3) "Data value of an address" refers to the value of the data stored at that address. For example, the "vector address" mentioned above is actually composed of two byte addresses, "0004H" and "0005H." However, when referring to the "data value of a vector address," it refers to the data value (2-byte (16-bit) value) stored at addresses "0004H" and "0005H." (4) "H" is appended to the address value. "H" indicates "hex" in hexadecimal. Also, "B" is appended to the bit value stored at the address. "B" indicates "bit" in binary. Also, when indicating a 2-byte bit value (16-bit value), a "/" is appended between the upper byte (8-bit) value and the lower byte (8-bit) value. For example, "00000000/00000100B."

(5) On the other hand, registers do not have addresses, and a "register value" refers to the value of the data stored in that register. (6) In this embodiment, the names of storage areas within the internal memory are "program area," "data area," "register area," "program management area," "work area," and "stack area." However, without being limited to these, these may also be called "program area," "data area," "register area," "program management area," "work area," and "stack area," respectively. Furthermore, the "program area" is also called the "program code area" or "program code area."

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter simply referred to as "chip") according to the eighth embodiment. This one-chip microprocessor is mounted on the main control board 50 in FIG. 1 and integrates the RWM 53, ROM 54, and main CPU 55 into a single chip. In FIG. 95, the chip includes the main CPU 55 (same as in FIG. 1) and an internal memory. Note that the chip also includes various other hardware components in addition to these two, but these will not be described or illustrated here. The internal memory includes an internal ROM 54 with an address range of "0000H" to "3FFFH" (16,384 bytes) and an internal RWM 53 with an address range of "F000H" to "F3FFH" (1,024 bytes). The internal ROM 54 is the same as the "ROM 54" in FIG. 1, and the internal RWM 53 is the same as the "RWM 53" in FIG. 1.

Furthermore, the built-in memory includes a function setting register area and a function control register area as built-in memory register areas. The function setting register area is a storage area for registers for operation settings including interrupt processing (for example, initial settings for interrupt processing, etc.). Specific examples of registers (including counters) stored in the function setting register area include the prescaler register 502 and counter setting register 503 in Figure 61 (fourth embodiment). Furthermore, although not shown in Figure 95, registers for setting the maximum value of random numbers, etc., are also provided in the function setting register area. As with the fourth embodiment, the prescaler register 502 is a register that can set a setting value that selects the clock to be supplied to the 8-bit counter 501. The counter setting register 503 is an built-in register that can set the count value of the 8-bit counter 501.

The function control register area is a storage area for registers responsible for monitoring and control, such as registers that monitor interrupt processing and store random values. For example, in Figure 61 (fourth embodiment), the interrupt wait monitor register 301, 8-bit counter 501, and interrupt flag 504 are provided in the function control register area. As in the fourth embodiment, the interrupt wait monitor register 301 is a register for storing information indicating that an interrupt request signal has been generated after the interrupt flag 504 is set. The 8-bit counter 501 is a storage area for a counter value consisting of 8 bits (1 byte) for measuring the timing of interrupt processing. The interrupt flag 504 is a flag indicating that the 8-bit counter 501 has timed out. Note that the internal memory register area is not limited to the function setting register area and function control register area shown in Figure 95.

Meanwhile, the main CPU 55 has a CPU register area. This CPU register area is a different register area from the internal memory register area provided in the internal memory. The CPU register area has the general-purpose registers A, B, C, D, E, F, H, and L registers. The F register is a flag register. The Q register stores the upper address "F0H" of the working area (see Figure 97) in the internal RWM 53's used area, and is used for instructions. It is used for instructions to read data with the upper address "F0H" in the internal RWM 53's memory area. The I register is also known as the interrupt page address register, and is used to determine the upper byte value of the vector address, as will be described in more detail later.

The interrupt disable flags (IFF1, IFF2) 302 are the same as those shown in Figure 61 (fourth embodiment). The IFF1 register is a register used to determine whether maskable interrupts are enabled or disabled. The IFF2 register is used to restore the IFF1 register after processing a non-maskable interrupt, and to restore the IFF1 register by the RETEX instruction after executing a CALLEX instruction. In addition to the above, various other registers are provided, such as the Q register and U register, but these are not shown or described in the eighth embodiment.

Furthermore, the registers, counters, and flags shown in Figure 95 are merely examples and are not limited to those shown in Figure 95. For example, the 8-bit counter 501 is provided in the function control register area, but this is not limiting and it can also be provided in the CPU register area within the main CPU 55 or configured as a circuit. Similarly, the interrupt flag 504 can be any flag that has the function of storing on/off, and can be provided in the CPU register area rather than in the function control register area, or configured as a circuit. Similarly, the prescaler register 502, counter setting register 503, and interrupt wait monitor register 301 can also be provided in the CPU register area or other areas within the internal memory, or configured as a circuit.

Figure 96 is a diagram showing the memory map in the internal ROM 54 in Figure 95 in more detail. The internal ROM 54 has a use area and an outside use area. The "use area" is a memory area where information related to the progress of the game is stored. The "outside use area" is a memory area where information unrelated to the progress of the game is stored, such as a program for controlling the illumination of the management information display LED 74 (role ratio monitor), a program used during testing, and a program for preventing cheating. The use area and outside use area of the internal ROM 54 each have a program area and a data area. The "program area," also known as the "control area," is a memory area where various programs executed by the main control means 50 are stored. The "data area" is a memory area where information other than programs is stored, and is a memory area where data used when executing programs is stored.

Here, as shown in parentheses in Figure 96, the "usage area" may be referred to as the "first area." The "outside the use area" may be referred to as the "second area." The program area of the use area may be referred to as the "first program area" or the "first control area." The data area of the use area may be referred to as the "first data area." Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the use area may be referred to as the "first program." Similarly, the program area of the outside the use area may be referred to as the "second program area" or the "second control area." The data area of the outside the use area may be referred to as the "second data area." Furthermore, the program stored in the program area of the outside the use area may be referred to as the "second program."

As shown in Figure 96, in this embodiment, there is an unused area (address "11FFH") between the program area and data area of the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the program area and data area of the used area may be arranged contiguously. Also, there is an unused area (addresses "1DF7H" to "1FFFH") between the used area and the area outside the used area, but this unused area may be eliminated and the used area and the area outside the used area may be arranged contiguously. Furthermore, in the area outside the used area, the program area and data area are arranged contiguously, but as with the used area, there may be an unused area of one or more bytes between the program area and the data area. Note that the terms used area and area outside the used area may refer only to the program area and data area, excluding the unused area. On the other hand, if there is an unused area between the program area and data area, as in the used area in Figure 96, this unused area may be included in the term used area (or area outside the used area).

In addition to the used area, non-used area, and unused area described above, the built-in ROM 54 also has a memory area storing the company name, date, model name (of the gaming machine 10), etc., as well as a program management area. In this embodiment, the vector address (0004H), described in detail below, is located in the program area of the used area. Furthermore, the program code area start/end addresses (3FD3H-3FD8H) and the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) are located in the program management area. The program management area contains the program code area setting addresses (3FD3H-3FD8H) and the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), which will be described later.

Figure 97 is a diagram showing in more detail the memory map within the internal RWM 53 in Figure 95. Similar to the internal ROM 54, the internal RWM 53 has a used area (which may be referred to as the "first area") and an area outside the used area (which may be referred to as the "second area"). The concepts of these "used area" and "outside the used area" are the same as those of the internal ROM 54. Furthermore, the used area and outside the used area in the internal RWM 53 each have a working area, an unused area, and a stack area. The working area (also referred to as the "first working area") and the stack area (also referred to as the "first stack area") in the used area are memory areas used (updated, referenced) during the execution of a program (a program related to the progress of the game) stored in the program area of the used area of the internal ROM 54.

Similarly, the working area (also referred to as the "second working area") and stack area (also referred to as the "second stack area") in the area outside the used area are memory areas used (updated and referenced) during the execution of programs (programs unrelated to the progress of the game, for example, programs related to the display of the winning ratio monitor) stored in the program area of the area outside the used area of the built-in ROM 54. The "stack area" is a memory area where data such as various registers and program return addresses can be temporarily saved (stored).

Next, we will explain the interrupt initial setting address. First, a "vector address" refers to the address that stores the start address (first address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) that is executed when a timer interrupt processing trigger occurs. In other words, the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR) itself is not stored in the vector address; rather, it refers to the address that stores the location (first address) of the timer interrupt processing program (I_INTR). An "interrupt initial setting address" is an address that stores data that makes it possible to identify the value of the vector address. In particular, in this embodiment, the vector address cannot be identified from the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address alone; the value of the vector address can be identified based on the value of the I register and the data stored in the interrupt initial setting address.

Figure 98 is a diagram explaining the interrupt initial setting address. In the figure, (A) shows the details of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, and (B) shows the relationship between the interrupt priority and the interrupt priority setting value. As explained in Figure 96, the interrupt initial setting address is set in the program management area of the built-in ROM 54, and in this embodiment, this address is "3FDAH" (1 byte). However, this is an example and is not limited to this. After the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the data value stored in this interrupt initial setting address is read, and this data value is used to determine the vector address.

In FIG. 98A, the upper four bits (bits A7 to A4) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address have a predetermined value as the vector address setting value, which in this embodiment is "0000B." This vector address setting value constitutes part of the vector address value, as described below. Note that in this embodiment, the vector address setting value is "0H (0000B)," but this is not limiting and various settings are possible, such as "8H (1000H)" or "FH (1111B)." Furthermore, in the data value of the interrupt initial setting address, bits A3 and A2 are fixed values, which in this embodiment are set to "00B." Note that, as will be described in detail later, this fixed two-bit value is configured to be checked upon startup of the gaming machine 10 (in security mode), and if the two-bit value is not "00B," an error occurs. Furthermore, this fixed value is not limited to "00B," and various settings are possible, such as "11B." Furthermore, the two lowest bits A1 and A0 of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are the interrupt priority setting values. In this embodiment, four types of interrupt priority setting values are provided: "00B", "01B", "10B", and "11B", as shown in Figure 98(B).

Figure 98 (B) shows the relationship between interrupt priority setting values and interrupt causes. In this embodiment, there are five types of interrupt causes, "IR0" to "IR5," with the smaller the last number, the higher the interrupt priority. In other words, the "IR0" interrupt cause has the highest interrupt priority, and the "IR5" interrupt cause has the lowest interrupt priority. The types of interrupts include "PTC0" to "PTC2," "RX0" to "RX1," and "XINT." Here, "PTC0" to "PTC2" are interrupt causes used in timer interrupt processing, and "PTC2" in particular corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment.

In this embodiment, "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value. As a result, the interrupt priorities, in order from highest to lowest, are "PTC0," "PTC1," "PTC2," "XINT," "RX0," and "RX1." Furthermore, when "01B" is used as the interrupt priority setting value, the A1 and A0 bits of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address are "01B." As a result, in this embodiment, the value of the interrupt initial setting address is "3FDAH," and the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "00000001B."

Figure 99 explains vector address values and data values stored at vector addresses. Figure 99(A) shows vector address values. In this embodiment, vector addresses are located in the program area of the used area in the internal ROM 54 and are 2 bytes in size. As shown in Figure 99(A), the value of the upper byte of the vector address value is the I register value, and the value of the lower byte consists of the vector address setting value and the automatically assigned value.

Here, the I register value in this embodiment is "00H". As shown in Figure 95, the I register is located in the CPU register area, and is set to "00H" after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. In other words, immediately after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the values of each register located in the CPU register area are cleared. If no value other than "00H" is subsequently stored in the I register, the I register value remains "00H". In this embodiment, no value is set in the I register after the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Therefore, the I register value remains "00H". Therefore, the value of the most significant byte of the vector address is "00H".

Next, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A7 to A4 bit values correspond to the A7 to A4 bit values (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH). As shown in Figure 98 (A), the A7 to A4 bit value of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address is "0000B", so this value becomes the A7 to A4 bit value of the lower byte of the vector address.

Furthermore, in the lower byte of the vector address value, the A3 to A0 bit values are automatically assigned values. Figure 99 (B) shows the relationship between interrupt causes and automatically assigned values. As shown in Figure 98 (B), this embodiment uses "01B" as the interrupt priority setting value, and the priority of the interrupt cause of PTC2, which is the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment, is "IR2." Therefore, as shown in Figure 99 (B), the automatically assigned value for the interrupt cause "IR2" and the interrupt "PTC2 (I_INTR)" is "0100B" (04H). This "0100B" becomes the A3 to A0 bit value of the vector address value.

From the above, as shown in Figure 99 (A), the vector address value is "00000000/00000100B" = "0004H". As a result, in Figure 96, in the memory area of the internal ROM 54 starting from "0000H", "0004H" becomes the vector address. Note that the vector address value is 2 bytes as mentioned above, so the actual vector addresses are "0004H" and "0005H".

Figure 99 (C) is a diagram showing an example of data values at a vector address. In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored starting at "1134H" in the program area of the internal ROM 54's used area. In other words, the starting address of the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is "1134H." Therefore, the data value at the vector address (0004H) is "1134H." When storing "1134H" in a two-byte vector address, the lower byte value "34H" is stored in the first "0004H," and "11H" is stored in the next "0005H." As a result, the following is stored: 0004H: 34H (00110100B) 0005H: 11H (00010001B)

When the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the main CPU 55 starts up, it is configured to be able to determine the location of the vector address based on the data value of the interrupt initial setting address and the I address value. Specifically, since the value of the upper four bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is "0000B," the value of the upper four bits of the lower byte of the vector address is "0000B." Furthermore, since the value of the interrupt priority setting value, which is the value of the lower two bits of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), is "01B," the value of the lower four bytes of the lower byte of the vector address corresponding to PTC2 (timer counter ch2 interrupt) is assigned to "0100B" by the interrupt controller.

On the other hand, when the power is turned on, the value of the I register becomes "00H," so the value of the upper byte of the vector address becomes "00000000B." From the above, the main CPU 55 can recognize that the vector address (the address where the starting address of "I_INTR" is stored) corresponding to PTC2 (the interrupt of timer counter ch2, which corresponds to the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) in this embodiment) is "0004H." Therefore, from the data value stored in the vector address, it can recognize the address at which the timer interrupt processing (I_INTR) program is stored (the starting address of the timer interrupt processing program).

Note that the process of setting the I register to "00H" is not executed after the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the CPU register area on the main CPU 55 side in FIG. 95 is initialized, which causes the I register value to become "00H" like the other register values. Also, when the registers are initialized after the power is turned on, "F0H" is stored in the Q register. When "F0H" is stored in the Q register, the Q register is specified when specifying the upper address "F0H" in the memory area of the built-in RWM 53. In this embodiment, when the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) of PTC2 is initiated, the program (i.e., the timer interrupt process (I_INTR)) at the address corresponding to the data (1134H) stored in the vector addresses (0004H and 0005H) is called. In other words, the program code for the timer interrupt process (I_INTR) can be executed.

Figure 100 shows the process from when the power is turned on until the transition to user mode in this embodiment. First, before the power is turned on (when the power is off), "XSRST" is "L (low)." Here, "XSRST" indicates the operating status of the main CPU 55, and when the main CPU 55 is in a state where it should not operate (stopped), "XSRST = L" (indicating that the main CPU 55 is stopped). When the power is turned on under these conditions, the system reset is released, and once a stable power supply is achieved, the main CPU 55 circuit changes from "L (low)" to "H (high)."

Next, the registers in the CPU register area are initialized, and a determination is made as to whether or not a PROM mode request has been made. Here, "PROM mode" refers to a mode in which data is written to ROM (ROM is burned). If a request to switch to PROM mode is made, the machine switches to PROM mode; if a request to switch to PROM mode is not made, the machine then switches to security mode. Note that gaming machines installed in the market are configured to determine that no request to switch to PROM mode has been made after the system reset is released. In security mode, a security check is performed, and if the security check is determined to be successful, the machine switches to user mode. If the security check is determined to be unsuccessful, execution (processing) is halted. As a security check in security mode, the program code area setting address in the program management area, the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH), etc. are read. Then, the presence or absence of setting errors in the program management area and self-diagnosis are performed. In security mode, the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) is read, and the vector address value is recognized.

Here, the data for the interrupt initial setting address is read, and if the fixed value (A3 and A2 bits) in Figure 98 (A) is not "00B," a setting error occurs in the program management area. If the security check is determined to be OK in security mode, the system then transitions to user mode. This user mode corresponds to program processing that starts from "0000H" in the program area of the internal ROM 54's used area. Note that "driving outside the designated area" will be discussed later in Figure 100.

Figure 101 is a diagram showing an example of a program starting at "0000H" in the program area of the used area of the internal ROM 54. In this embodiment, special call instructions and normal call instructions are provided as call instructions by the main CPU 5. The special call instruction is called the "RST instruction," and the normal call instruction is called the "CALLF instruction." The RST instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 1-byte (4-cycle) program. On the other hand, the CALLF instruction is an instruction that can be expressed as a 2-byte (4-cycle) program. Therefore, the number of bytes required to write an RST instruction is fewer than the number of bytes required to write a CALLF instruction, so using the RST instruction rather than the CALLF instruction can reduce the program size. Therefore, frequently called programs are called using the RST instruction.

Here, a "program that is called frequently" is, for example, a program that is called many times (multiple times) during one game. However, "programs that are called frequently" also include, for example, a program that is called at least once during one game, or a program that is likely to be called during play, although it may not necessarily be called at least once during one game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the addresses that can be called using the RST instruction are limited to specific addresses. Specifically, the "specific addresses" consist of the following eight addresses: 0008H 0010H 0018H 0020H 0028H 0030H 0038H 0040H. Note that these eight addresses are merely examples, and the values (addresses) and number of "specific addresses" can be set to various values depending on the chip specifications, etc.

By storing programs that can be called with the RST instruction in these eight addresses, the program capacity can be reduced. Meanwhile, as mentioned above, the program area in the used area starts at "0000H," and the power-on program is stored from this "0000H." The power-on program corresponds to, for example, the "program start process (M_PRG_START)" shown in FIG. 41 (third embodiment).

Also, as mentioned above, the vector address is "0004H." Therefore, as shown in Figure 101, the data (including instructions and programs) is arranged as follows: 0000H: Power-on program (start program): 0004H: Vector address: 0008H: Program 1 called with the RST instruction: 0010H: Program 2 called with the RST instruction: 0018H: Program 3 called with the RST instruction: 0020H: Program 4 called with the RST instruction: 0028H: Program 5 called with the RST instruction: 0030H: Program 6 called with the RST instruction: 0038H: Program 7 called with the RST instruction: 0040H: Program 8 called with the RST instruction.

In addition, in this embodiment, a jump instruction requires a capacity of 3 bytes. Therefore, jump instructions are stored at "0001H" to "0003H," and "0050H," for example, is specified as the jump destination address. The program following "0000H" is stored from "0050H" onwards. Here, the jump instruction may be included in the term "power-on program," or the program without the jump instruction may be referred to as "power-on program." This allows the power-on program to start at "0000H," jump to "0050H" with the next jump instruction at "0001H," and continue executing the power-on program from "0050H." By setting it up in this way, the power-on program can be started at "0000H," while placing a vector address at "0004H." Furthermore, the power-on program can be started at "0000H," while placing a RST instruction at "0008H," "0010H," etc.

Following the power-on program, a determination is made as to whether to transition to setting change mode, for example. Here, due to unstable voltage at power-on, there is a risk that the jump command may not be executed correctly. If the jump command is not executed correctly, it may take a long time to transition to setting change mode, or the device may not transition to setting change mode at all. Therefore, when the power is turned on by performing an operation to transition to setting change mode (for example, by operating a specific setting key), if the device does not transition to setting change mode within a predetermined time (T), it can be determined that the program containing the jump command was not executed correctly. If the administrator determines that the device will not transition to setting change mode within the predetermined time (T), the administrator should power cycle the gaming machine 10. When the power is turned back on, the device will again go through security mode and then start the program from address "0000H." Furthermore, it is preferable to execute the jump command in the power-on program from "0000H" to "0007H." This is to allow "0008H" to be used as the RST command.

Furthermore, when storing program 1 called by the RST instruction at "0008H," program 1 should be placed in the 8-byte area from "0008H" to "000FH," or a program that requires less than 8 bytes of space. Similarly, when storing program 2 called by the RST instruction at "0010H," program 2 should be placed in the 8-byte area from "0010H" to "0017H," or a program that requires less than 8 bytes of space.

Here, if program 2 consists of, for example, four bytes from "0010H" to "0013H," the addresses from "0014H" to "0017H" may be used in any way. For example, first, addresses from "0014H" to "0017H" may be unused (storing "00000000B"). Second, another program that fits within four bytes may be stored in "0014H" to "0017H." Third, a program following the power-on program starting at "0000H" may be stored in "0014H," and a jump command (a command to jump to the address where the program following "0014H" is stored) may be stored in "0015H" to "0017H."

The above also applies to "0018H", "0020H", "0028H", "0030H", "0038H", and "0040H". For example, if program 4 called by the RST instruction is stored at "0020H", and program 4 has a capacity of 14 bytes from "0020H" to "002DH", program 5 that calls "0028H" with the RST instruction may not be provided. However, if the program called by the RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, it is preferable to store it at "0040H" or later, where there is no limit on program capacity. By configuring it in this way, eight programs that can be called by the RST instruction can be stored. Furthermore, when a program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, there are other ways to place the program, such as storing it at "0040H" or later. For example, in the example above, the program can be stored from "0020H" to "0024H," and a jump command can be stored at "0025H" to "0027H" to jump to "0040H" or later using that jump command. This allows a program that can be called by an RST instruction to be stored at "0028H." Using this method, even if the program called by an RST instruction exceeds 8 bytes, eight programs can be stored that can be called by the RST instruction. Figure 101 shows an example in which an instruction to jump to "0050H" is stored at "0001H," and the program following "0000H" is stored at "0050H" or later.

While the vector address is set to "0004H" in this embodiment, this is not a limitation. The upper byte of the vector address is the value of the I register. In this embodiment, the I register is not set to a specific value after power-on; instead, it is initialized as a register of the main CPU 55 and remains at "00H." Therefore, the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H." However, this is not a limitation. If the I register is initialized after power-on and a process to set a specific value is then executed, the upper byte of the vector address can be set to that specific value. However, as shown in FIG. 96, if the vector address is set in the program area of the used area in the internal ROM 54, the value of the I register will be in the range of "00H" to "11H." As will be described later, vector addresses are not limited to being set in the program area of the used area; they can also be set in the data area of the used area, the program area outside the used area, or the data area outside the used area.

However, if the I register is initialized after power-on and then a process is executed to set a specific value in the I register, this requires a corresponding amount of program space. For example, if the specific value is "02H," then after power-on, the I register must be initialized and then an "LD I, 02H" instruction (program) must be provided to load "02H" into the I register. If this program requires, for example, two bytes of space, this consumes that much program storage area. In contrast, if the initialized value "00H" is used as the I register value, as in this embodiment, there is no need to set a specific value in the I register, thereby saving that much program storage area. As a result, setting the upper byte value of the vector address to "00H" reduces program space.

Furthermore, when the I register value is set to "00H," the vector address value is not limited to "0004H." Specifically, the vector address value can be set to any value, such as "00FEH" or "00FFH," as long as it is not an address that is called by the RST instruction (such as the aforementioned "0008H" or "0010H"). For example, it can be set to "00F4H." If the lower 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address are set to "0100B (4H)," the automatically assigned value of this embodiment shown in Figure 99(B) can be used as is. Also, when the upper 4 bits of the lower byte of the vector address are set to "FH" (1111B) as described above, the upper 4 bits (vector address setting value) of the data value of the interrupt initial setting address (3FDAH) in Figure 98(A) will be "1111B."

Figure 102 shows an example where the vector address value is "00F4H". In this case, since "0004H" is not a vector address, the power-on program can be stored in "0000H" to "0004H". Also, if 3 bytes are required as the program capacity for a jump instruction, the jump instruction can be placed in the 3-byte memory area from "0005H" to "0007H", and Program 1, which is called by the RST instruction, can be stored in "0008H", as in Figure 101.

Next, we will explain programs called by the RST command, i.e., programs called multiple times per game. Figure 103 is a flowchart showing an example of processing called by the RST command, with (A), (B), and (C) showing examples 1, 2, and 3, respectively. Example 1 in Figure 103 (A) is a flowchart showing control command set 1 (R_CMD_SET). This processing corresponds to the processing of step S303 in Figure 46 (third embodiment), for example, and is processing for setting command data to be sent from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, although not shown, in the game start setting processing in step S272 in Figure 46 (third embodiment), an output request for the operating status (whether or not a BB operating symbol has been displayed, whether or not a replay operating symbol has been displayed, etc.) is set, and control command set 1 is executed. Similarly, although not shown, in the start switch acceptance process in step S279 of Figure 46 (third embodiment), an output request is set when the reels start spinning, and control command set 1 is executed.

In Figure 103 (A), first, in step S151, the main control board 50 executes interrupt prohibition processing. In the next step S152, control command set 2 (C_CMD_SET) is executed. Then, proceeding to step S503, the interrupt processing prohibited in step S151 is released (i.e., interrupts are permitted). Through the above processing, interrupt processing is prohibited while control command set 2 is being executed. Note that detailed processing of control command set 2 will be omitted, but this processing is processing for writing control commands. Furthermore, because interrupt processing is prohibited while control command set 2 is being executed, malfunctions caused by interrupt processing being executed during the control command writing process can be prevented.

Example 2 in FIG. 103B is a flowchart showing the interrupt wait process (R_INTR_WAIT). This process corresponds to, for example, step S2754 in FIG. 45 (third embodiment) or step S295 in FIG. 46 (third embodiment). First, in step S161, the main control board 50 acquires the interrupt counter value. This process stores the interrupt counter value in the A register. Note that a 16-bit (2-byte counter) interrupt counter value is stored at a specific address in the work area of the used area of the built-in RWM 53. In step S161, the value stored in the address of the lowest 8 bits is stored in the A register. In the next step S162, the main control board 50 determines whether the value of the lowest 8 bits of the interrupt counter value has changed. Specifically, the main control board 50 subtracts the value of the lowest 8 bits from the A register value, and if the calculation result is not "0" (if the zero flag is "0"), it determines "Yes." If it is determined that there has been a change, the process according to this flowchart is terminated, and if it is determined that there has not been a change, the process of step S162 continues.

Example 3 in Figure 103 (C) is a flowchart showing countdown (R_CNT_DOWN). This process is used, for example, in the process of decrementing the advantageous zone clear counter in step S301 (game end check process) in Figure 46 (third embodiment), the process of updating the timer value in step S455 (timer measurement) in Figure 47 (third embodiment), or the process of updating the number of AT games during AT play (not shown). In this process, in step S171, the counter value is decremented by "1" and the process of this flowchart ends. Note that the three processes shown in Figure 103 are examples of processes that are called multiple times in one game, and are not limited to these three processes; many more processes can be used. Then, a program that has a program capacity that can be stored in the address mentioned above and is called the most frequently in one game is set as the process to be called with the RST command.

Figure 104 is a diagram showing program code area designation addresses and their data values. Note that, hereinafter, these will be referred to as "program code area designation addresses," but may also be referred to as "program code area setting addresses." As shown in Figure 96, in the program management area of the internal ROM 54, addresses "3FD3H" to "3FD8H" are set as program code area designation addresses. The main CPU 55 determines that the program code is normal when program code stored within the address range designated in the program code area is executed, and determines that the program code is abnormal (traveling outside the designated area) when program code stored outside the address range designated in the program code area is executed. If the main CPU 55 determines that the program code is abnormal (traveling outside the designated area), it generates a reset. In other words, a reset is generated when program code (instructions) stored outside the designated area are called (instructions are fetched).

This is done for the following reasons. The first reason is that there is a risk of fraudulent activity, where malicious program code is stored in an area other than the original program area, and then the malicious program code is jumped to from the original program area using, for example, a jump command, and executed. The second reason is that there is a risk of runaway occurring when the voltage is unstable immediately after power is turned on, or runaway occurring due to heat, causing the instruction to jump to an area other than the program area. Specifically, for example, if there is an instruction to jump from address A to address B, if that instruction is not executed correctly, the instructions stored after address B may not be executed within the designed time. In such cases, the power is turned off and then turned back on (restarted).

Figure 100 also illustrates the processing that occurs when traveling outside the designated area. As shown in Figure 100, when traveling outside the designated area is detected while user mode is being executed, a reset is generated. In this case, the main CPU 55 initializes the registers, goes through security mode, and executes user mode again (executes the program from address "0000H"). However, this is not limited to this, and when traveling outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, the registers may be initialized and then execution may begin from user mode without going through security mode. Also, in the example of Figure 100, the presence or absence of a PROM mode request is determined after the registers are initialized, but this is not limited to this, and when traveling outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, it is also possible not to determine whether or not a PROM mode request is generated. However, when traveling outside the designated area is detected and a reset is generated, register initialization is always executed.

Figure 104 (A) shows an address for specifying the end address of program code area 1. "Program code area 1" corresponds to the program area in the used area in Figure 96. Note that "program code area 2," described below, corresponds to the program area in the area outside the used area in Figure 96. Here, as shown in Figure 96, the address range of the program area in the used area is "0000H" to "11FEH." For this reason, in this embodiment, the start address "0000H" is not specified, and only the end address "11FEH" is specified. In this way, a memory area (2 bytes) for specifying the start address "0000H" is not required. If only the end address and not the start address are specified, the main CPU 55 will inevitably recognize the range from the start address to the end address of the internal memory as program code area 1. And since program code area 1 (the program area in the used area) actually starts at "0000H," there is no problem with the main CPU 55 recognizing it as described above.

The end address of program code area 1 is stored at addresses "3FD3H" and "3FD4H" (2-byte area) in the program management area. In this embodiment, as shown in Figure 104 (A), the lower byte is stored at address "3FD3H" and the upper byte is stored at address "3FD4H". Therefore, "FEH" (11111110B) is stored at address "3FD3H" and "11H" (00010001B) is stored at address "3FD4H".

Figure 104 (B) shows addresses used to specify the start address of program code area 2. The addresses used to specify the start address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD5H" and "3FD6H". As shown in Figure 96, the address range of the program area outside the used area is "2000H" to "245DH". Therefore, the start address of program code area 2 is "2000H". Therefore, "00H" (000000000B) is stored in address "3FD5H", and "20H" (00100000B) is stored in address "3FD6H".

Figure 104 (C) shows the addresses used to specify the end address of program code area 2. The addresses used to specify the end address of program code area 2 are set to "3FD7H" and "3FD8H." Address "3FD7H" stores "5DH" (01011101B), and address "3FD8H" stores "24H" (00100100B).

As described above, when the end address of program code area 1 and the start and end addresses of program code area 2 are stored in the program management area, the main CPU 55 determines that program code within these specified address ranges is executing normally, but determines that program code outside the specified address range is executing abnormally.

It is also possible not to specify a program code area. In this case, "0000H" is stored in the program code area 1 end address, program code area 2 start address, and program code area 2 end address. Also, if you specify the address of only program code area 1 and not the address of program code area 2, you can set the program code area 1 end address to "11FEH" as shown in Figure 104, and the program code area 2 start address and end address to "0000H."

The eighth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows. (1) While the vector address is provided in the program area of the used area, it is also possible to provide the vector address in the data area of the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "12H," the I register will store "12H" after power is turned on. The vector address may also be provided in the program area of an area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "20H," the I register will store "20H" after power is turned on. The vector address may also be provided in the data area of an area outside the used area. For example, if the upper byte value of the vector address is set to "24H," the I register will store "24H" after power is turned on. Note that in all cases where the vector address is provided in the data area of the used area, the program area of the outside used area, or the data area of the outside used area, simply reading the data value stored in the vector address will result in running outside the specified area and will not cause a reset.

(2) The data value stored in the vector address, i.e., the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored, can be set arbitrarily. In the example of Figure 99 (c), it is set to "1134H," but this is not limited to this. Furthermore, the starting address where the timer interrupt processing program is stored may be after the vector address or before the vector address. (3) In the above embodiment, two address ranges were defined as the executable range (runnable area) of the program code, as shown in Figure 104, but this is not limited to this and only one address range may be defined. Furthermore, when defining the executable range of the program code in the program area of the used area of the internal ROM 54, in the above embodiment, only the end address was defined and not the start address, but this is not limited to this and both the start address and end address may be defined.

(4) In the above embodiment, the addresses storing programs called by the RST command were set to "0008H," "0010H," "0018H," "0020H," "0028H," "0030H," "0038H," and "0040H," but these eight addresses are not limited to these. However, it is preferable to set the upper byte of the addresses storing programs called by the RST command to "00H." By doing this, modules that are called multiple times in one game can be placed near the top address (0000H), allowing the module to be designed first during the development stage, and other modules to be designed (considered) later.

(5) The relationship between the address where the program called by the RST instruction is stored and the vector address is as follows. First, as shown in FIG. 101, the vector address may be placed before all addresses where the program called by the RST instruction is stored. Second, as shown in FIG. 102, the vector address may be placed after all addresses where the program called by the RST instruction is stored. Third, the vector addresses may be placed between one address (e.g., "0020H") where the program called by the RST instruction is stored and another address (e.g., "0028H") where the program called by the RST instruction is stored (e.g., "0026H" and "0027H").

In this case, if the vector address is located within the program area of the used area (within the range of "0000H" to "00FFH"), there is no need to set the upper byte value of the vector address in the I register after power-on. In other words, if the I register value is set to "00H", the program capacity can be reduced. Also, as shown in FIG. 99B, in this example, the value of bits A3-A0 in the lowest byte of the vector address value is "0100B". Therefore, at this point, the vector address value becomes "00000000/####0100B" (where "#" is an arbitrary value of "0" or "1"). Here, the above "####B" (vector address setting value) is "0000B" in the example of FIG. 99A. However, this is not limiting, and "####B" may be, for example, "1000B (8H)" or "1111B (FH)". When "####B" is set to "1000B (8H)", the vector address value is "00000000/10000100B", and when "####B" is set to "1111B (FH)", the vector address value is "00000000/11110100B".

(6) The upper byte value of the vector address value is the I register value, set to "00H." However, this is not limited to this, and although this overlaps with what was stated above, the upper byte value of the vector address may be a value other than "00H," for example, "02H." In this case, after the gaming machine 10 is powered on, the I register is initialized, and then a process is executed to store "02H" in the I register. In particular, when the vector address is set in the program area of the used area in the built-in ROM 54, the value of the I register, i.e., the upper byte value of the vector address, may be in the range of "00H" to "11H."

However, since the I register is initialized (to "00H") each time the gaming machine 10 is powered on, after this initialization, a process is executed to store, for example, "02H" in the I register. As described above, for example, program code "LD I, 02H" is provided, and a process to store "02H" in the I register is executed. On the other hand, as in this embodiment, if the value of the upper byte of the vector address is set to "00H," the I register value becomes "00H," so after the gaming machine 10 is powered on and the I register is initialized, there is no need to store a specific value in the I register. In other words, there is no need to provide program code "LD I, 00H." This allows for a corresponding reduction in program capacity.

(7) The first to eighth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to eighth embodiments may not be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Ninth Embodiment> The ninth embodiment relates to a slot machine 10 having a medal selector 110 for selecting medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47, a chute member 120 for guiding medals M permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, and a return member 130 for guiding medals M not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal tray 19.

The ninth embodiment will now be described with reference to the drawings. Figure 105 is a side cross-sectional view of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment, and Figure 106 is a block diagram showing an outline of the control of the slot machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. Note that Figure 106 adds a door switch 17, a setting key insertion slot 151, a setting key switch 152, a setting change (reset) switch 153, a push button 86, and a cross key 87 to Figure 1.

As shown in Figure 105, the slot machine 10 comprises a box-shaped cabinet 13 with an opening at the front, and a front door 12 attached to cover the opening of the cabinet 13. The cabinet 13 is configured into a box shape with an opening at the front by assembling a bottom plate 13a, a back plate 13b, a top plate 13c, a right side plate, and a left side plate (not shown), etc. Furthermore, the front door 12 is attached to the cabinet 13 so as to cover the opening at the front of the cabinet 13.

The front door 12 is normally closed, but is opened, for example, when the power is turned on, settings are changed, settings are checked, an error occurs, or medals are replenished. Specifically, the front door 12 and cabinet 13 are attached via hinges (not shown). In addition, a locking device (not shown) is provided on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite the side facing the player).

Furthermore, a door key insertion slot (not shown) is provided on the front of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the locking device. The door key insertion slot is where a door key for operating the locking device is inserted. When the front door 12 is closed and locked, inserting the door key into the door key insertion slot and turning the door key clockwise in this state will unlock the door. Then, when the front door 12 is unlocked and pulled, the front door 12 rotates around the hinges, opening the front door 12.

Furthermore, the cabinet 13 or the front door 12 is provided with a door switch 17 (Figure 106) for detecting whether the front door 12 is open. When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off, and when the front door 12 is open, the door switch 17 is turned on. Furthermore, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (Figure 106). The main control board 50 is configured to determine that the front door 12 is closed when the door switch 17 is off, and to determine that the front door 12 is open when the door switch 17 is on.

A display window 18 is provided in the center of the front door 12. The display window 18 is configured to be located in front of the symbol display device 14 when the front door 12 is closed. The three reels 31 provided on the symbol display device 14 can be seen through the display window 18. A bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, settlement switch 43, and medal insertion slot 47 are also provided below the display window 18 on the front surface of the front door 12 (the side facing the player). The medal insertion slot 47 is where the player inserts medals M when betting or crediting medals M.

Furthermore, at the lower front of the front door 12, there are provided a medal payout opening 16 and a medal tray 19 that receives medals M ejected from the medal payout opening 16. The medal payout opening 16 is an opening through which medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 and medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 pass. Also, on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite the side facing the player), at a position corresponding to the medal insertion opening 47, there is provided a medal selector 110 for sorting medals M inserted through the medal insertion opening 47.

Specifically, a selector base 113 (Figure 107) is fixed to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47, and the medal selector 110 is removably attached to this selector base 113. The selector base 113 is designed to removably hold the medal selector 110 and is formed by bending sheet metal. It is fixed with screws to the rear surface of the front door 12 at a position corresponding to the medal insertion slot 47. The medal selector 110 is then removably attached to the selector base 113.

Furthermore, a chute member 120 is provided on the back side of the front door 12, adjacent to the medal selector 110, for guiding medals M that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35. Furthermore, a return member 130 is provided on the back side of the front door 12, at a position corresponding to the position between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout opening 16, for guiding medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal tray 19.

Furthermore, a medal payout device 15 is located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The medal payout device 15 includes a hopper 35 for storing medals M, a hopper motor 36 (Figure 106) that is driven when paying out medals M stored in the hopper 35, and a payout sensor 37 (Figure 106) for detecting medals M paid out from the hopper 35.

The hopper 35 is used to store medals M. The top of the hopper 35 is provided with a storage receiving port 35a, which is an opening that receives medals M guided by the chute member 120. The storage receiving port 35a opens below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide path 121). As explained in the first embodiment, the payout sensor 37 is composed of a pair of payout sensors 37a and 37b (Figure 106) arranged at a predetermined distance. When a medal M is paid out, the medal M moves a predetermined moving member (not shown), and the movement of the predetermined moving member turns the payout sensors 37a and 37b on and off.

Also, in FIG. 106, the hopper motor 36 is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52, and the payout sensors 37a and 37b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. The main control board 50 drives the hopper motor 36 when paying out medals M from the medal payout device 15. The main control board 50 also determines whether the medals M have been paid out normally based on whether the payout sensors 37a and 37b have been turned on/off within a predetermined time range.

In Figure 105, a power supply unit (not shown) is located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13 (above the bottom plate 13a). The power supply unit includes a power supply board (not shown) that supplies power to the main control board 50, sub-control board 80, etc., a power switch 11 (Figure 106) that is operated to turn the power on and off, a setting key switch 152 (Figure 106) that is operated to transition to the setting change state or setting confirmation state, and a setting change (reset) switch 153 (Figure 106) that is operated to change the setting value or to clear an error.

The power switch 11 is a switch that is operated to turn the power on and off. Turning on the power switch 11 may be referred to as "powering on," "turning on the power," or "resuming the power supply." Turning off the power switch 11 may be referred to as "turning off the power" or "cutting off the power supply."

The setting key switch 152 is a switch that is operated to transition to a setting change state where the setting value can be changed, or a setting confirmation state where the setting value cannot be changed but can be confirmed. When the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion slot 151 (Figure 106) and rotated clockwise approximately 90 degrees, the setting key switch 152 turns on, and when the setting key is returned to its original position, the setting key switch 152 turns off.

The setting change (reset) switch 153 is a switch that serves as both the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153. The setting change switch 153 is a switch that is operated when changing the setting value in the setting change state. The reset switch 153 is a switch that is operated when canceling an error notification after the cause of the error has been removed. In this way, the setting change (reset) switch 153 functions as the setting change switch 153 in the setting change state, and functions as the reset switch 153 when an error notification is issued.

Hereinafter, the switch may be referred to as the "setting change (reset) switch 153," the "setting change switch 153," or the "reset switch 153." Furthermore, for various switches such as the setting change (reset) switch 153, turning them on may be referred to as "operating," being in the on state may be referred to as "being operated," and being in the off state may be referred to as "not being operated." Note that in the ninth embodiment, the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 are combined into one switch, but this is not limiting, and the setting change switch 153 and the reset switch 153 may be provided separately.

In Figure 106, the setting key switch 152 and setting change (reset) switch 153 are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. When the power is turned on with the setting key switch 152 on, the system transitions to the setting change state, and when the power is on and the setting key switch 152 is turned on, the system transitions to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the setting change state is entered, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 mounted on the main control board 50. Furthermore, in the setting change state, the setting value changes (increases by "1") each time the setting change switch 153 is operated. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting value is confirmed, the setting change state ends, and the setting value display LED 73 goes out. Furthermore, when the setting confirmation state is entered, the setting value cannot be changed, but the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Then, when the setting key switch 152 is turned off, the setting confirmation state ends, and the setting value display LED 73 goes out.

Next, the medal selector 110, chute member 120, and return member 130 will be described in more detail with reference to Figures 107 to 115. Figure 107 is a diagram showing the medal selector 110, chute member 120, and return member 130, and is a diagram explaining the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and chute member 120. Figure 108 adds a hopper 35 to Figure 107, and is a diagram explaining the relationship between the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and chute member 120 and the hopper 35.

Figure 109 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the spacing of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and the thickness of the medal M. Figure 110 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the dimensions of each part of the chute member 120 and the diameter and radius of the medal M. Figure 111 is a diagram explaining the relationship between one medal M that has entered the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and other medals M heading from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Figure 112 is a diagram explaining the relationship between the width of the medal guide passage 121 of the chute member 120 and the dimensions of each part of the screw 127 that secures the chute member 120. Figure 113 is a diagram explaining an example in which neither the return receiving opening 131 nor the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

Figure 114 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a blocking member 140 is placed vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, and a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is blocked by this blocking member 140. Figure 115 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a portion of the return receiving opening 131 is placed vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

As shown in Figure 107, the medal selector 110 has a medal passage 111 through which medals inserted through the medal insertion port 47 pass. The medal passage 111 is formed in a roughly L-shape, and in Figure 107, has a vertical section 111a extending roughly vertically downward from the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an inclined section 111b that slopes gently downward to the right from the bottom end of the vertical section 111a and reaches the lower right side of the medal selector 110. In addition, an entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is provided on the left side of the top surface of the medal selector 110, and an exit 111d of the medal passage 111 is provided on the lower right side of the medal selector 110.

When the medal selector 110 is attached to a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the entrance 111c of the medal passage 111 is positioned vertically below the medal insertion port 47. A medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is then sent to the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. As shown in FIG. 107, a blocker 45 for permitting/prohibiting the insertion of a medal M is provided at the midpoint of the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111, and an insertion sensor 44 capable of detecting a medal M passing through the medal passage 111 is provided downstream of the blocker 45 on the inclined portion 111b of the medal passage 111.

The blocker 45 allows or disallows the insertion of medals M, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the output port 52 (Figure 106). The main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to disallow the insertion of medals M during play (from the time the reels 31 start to spin, until all reels 31 stop, and, in the case of a winning combination, until the end of the payout of medals M corresponding to the winning combination).

Furthermore, when the specified number of medals M have already been bet and the number of credits has reached the upper limit, further medals M cannot be bet or credited, so the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to prohibit the insertion of medals M. In contrast, when no game is being played (after the payout of medals M has finished and before the reels 31 start spinning), if the number of medals M bet has not reached the specified number or the number of credits has not reached the upper limit, the main control board 50 controls the blocker 45 to permit the insertion of medals M.

When the insertion of medals M is not permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to remove medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 from the medal passage 111 at the blocker 45 position and cause them to fall downward. Furthermore, medals M that have fallen downward after leaving the medal passage 111 at the blocker 45 position are guided by the return member 130, discharged from the medal payout port 16, and stored in the medal tray 19.

In contrast, when the insertion of medals M is permitted, the blocker 45 is configured to guide medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111. Furthermore, medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 pass through insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b (hereinafter collectively referred to as "insertion sensors 44"), are discharged from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111, are guided by the chute member 120, and are stored in the hopper 35.

The insertion sensor 44 is used to detect medals M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, and as shown in Figure 107, is composed of a pair of insertion sensors 44a and 44b arranged at a predetermined distance. The insertion sensor 44a is arranged upstream, and the insertion sensor 44b is arranged downstream. The insertion sensors 44a and 44b are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51 (Figure 106).

A medal M guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111 is first detected by the upstream insertion sensor 44a, and then detected by the downstream insertion sensor 44b. Specifically, when a medal M is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a first detects the medal M (changes from off to on). As the medal M further flows down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b then detects the medal M (changes from off to on).

As the medal M continues to flow down the medal passage 111, the upstream insertion sensor 44a no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off). As the medal M continues to flow down the medal passage 111, the downstream insertion sensor 44b no longer detects the medal M (changes from on to off). The main control board 50 then determines whether the medal M has passed through the medal passage 111 normally based on whether the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b have each been turned on/off within a specified time range.

The chute member 120 guides medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and are ejected from the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 to a hopper 35 located at the bottom inside the cabinet 13, and is located adjacent to the medal selector 110 on the back side of the front door 12.

The chute member 120 also has a medal guide passage 121 for guiding medals M from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream). The medal guide passage 121 is gently inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the medal selector 110 (upstream) side toward the hopper 35 (downstream).

Also, in Figure 107, when a medal M is permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and passes through the medal passage 111, it is discharged from the exit 111d of the medal passage 111. Here, as shown in Figure 105, the medal selector 110 is attached to the back surface of the front door 12. Therefore, the exit 111d is located closer to the back surface of the front door 12. In contrast, as shown in Figure 105, the hopper 35 is located closer to the center inside the cabinet 13. In other words, in the direction perpendicular to the plane of Figure 107, the hopper 35 is located closer to the front than the exit 111d. Therefore, there is a certain distance between the exit 111d and the hopper 35. Therefore, the medal guide passage 121 is curved in an arc toward the hopper 35 in order to guide the medal M discharged from the exit 111d toward the hopper 35.

Also, as shown in Figure 107, the chute member 120 has a bottom surface portion 122 that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage 121, an inner wall portion 123 that forms the inner side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121, and an outer wall portion 124 that forms the outer side surface of the arc-shaped medal guide passage 121. The top of the medal guide passage 121 is open. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 110, the chute member 120 has a step portion 125 at a position on the bottom surface portion 122 that corresponds to the middle of the medal guide passage 121, where the height on the hopper 35 (downstream) side is lower than the medal selector 110 (upstream) side.

As described above, the medal guide path 121 is formed in an arc-shaped curve. As a result, the medal M moves from upstream to downstream on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide path 121, and its speed slows down as it comes into contact with the inner wall portion 123 and outer wall portion 124 along the medal guide path 121.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 110, a step 125 is provided on the bottom surface 122 at a position corresponding to the middle of the medal guide path 121, with the downstream side being lower in height than the upstream side. Then, medals M moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path 121 are dropped down the step 125. This allows medals M that have decelerated due to contact with the inner wall 123 and outer wall 124 to be accelerated.

107, a fixing portion 126 is provided near the end of the outer wall portion 124 of the chute member 120 on the medal selector 110 side. The fixing portion 126 is for fixing the chute member 120 to the rear surface of the front door 12, and protrudes upward from the upper end of the outer wall portion 124. The fixing portion 126 is also provided with a screw hole (not shown) that penetrates from the front side to the rear side.
Furthermore, the screw hole that passes through the fixing portion 126 is provided above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124 .

The chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. When the chute member 120 is fixed to a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12 by the screw 127, the screw 127 is positioned above the upper end of the outer wall portion 124.

Here, as shown in Figure 109, the thickness of the medal M is "T". Also, as shown in Figure 110, the diameter of the medal M is "D", and the radius of the medal M is "R". Furthermore, the height of the step portion 125 is "H1", the height of the inner wall portion 123 is "H2", and the height of the outer wall portion 124 is "H3". Furthermore, as shown in Figure 112, the width of the medal guide passage 121 (the distance between the inner wall portion 123 and the outer wall portion 124) is "L1", the total length of the screw 127 is "L2", and the diameter of the screw head is "L3".

The width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the thickness "T" of the medal M, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "L1 > T" and "L1 < D." In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is wider (larger) than the thickness "T" of the medal M, and narrower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M. This allows the medal M to move upright on the bottom surface 122 of the medal guide passage 121.

Furthermore, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the diameter "D" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H2 < D" and "H3 < D." In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 is lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M, and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 is also lower (smaller) than the diameter "D" of the medal M. This allows the medal M to move over the bottom surface portion 122 of the medal guide passage 121 with the top of the medal M protruding above the upper ends of the inner wall portion 123 and outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the height "H1" of the step portion 125, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and the radius "R" of the medal M are configured to satisfy "H1 < H2", "H1 < H3", and "H1 < R". In other words, the height "H1" of the step portion 125 is lower (smaller) than the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123, lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, and lower (smaller) than the radius "R" of the medal M. This prevents the medal M from climbing over the inner wall portion 123 or the outer wall portion 124 and flying out of the medal guide passage 121 when it falls down the step portion 125.

The height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 and the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124 may be configured to satisfy "H2 = H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 < H3", or may be configured to satisfy "H2 > H3". In other words, the height "H2" of the inner wall portion 123 may be equal to the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, may be higher (larger) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124, or may be lower (smaller) than the height "H3" of the outer wall portion 124.

Furthermore, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the total length "L2" of the screw 127, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head are configured to satisfy "L1 < L2" and "L1 < L3." That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the diameter "L3" of the screw head is thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121. This prevents the removed screw 127 from entering the medal guide passage 121 even if it comes off the back surface of the front door 12, thereby preventing the passage of medals M. The screw 127 is also configured to satisfy "L2 > L3." That is, the total length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the diameter "L3" of the screw head. This allows the chute member 120 to be firmly fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127.

Note that a locking portion (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120. This locking portion is used to lock the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. With the sheet member 120 locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not fall off the back surface of the front door 12.

The medal insertion slot 47 also has a medal placement section (not shown) on which multiple medals M can be placed in a lined up state. In the ninth embodiment, the medal placement section is capable of placing 10 medals M in a lined up state. Then, multiple medals M placed in a lined up state on the medal placement section can be inserted successively from the medal insertion slot 47.

Furthermore, when the thickness of the medal M is "T," the width of the medal guide passage 121 is "L1," and the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement section is "M," the medal guide passage 121 is configured to satisfy "L1 < (M ÷ 2) × T." In other words, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121 is narrower (smaller) than the thickness "(M ÷ 2) × T" of half the number of medals M that can be placed in the medal placement section of the medal insertion port 47.

The return member 130 is used to guide medals M that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 and medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal tray 19, and is provided at a position on the back surface of the front door 12 that corresponds to between the medal selector 110 and the medal payout opening 16. When the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, a medal return passage 132 and a medal payout passage 134 are formed between the back surface of the front door 12 and the return member 130, as shown in Figure 107.

Furthermore, the medal return passage 132 is a passage that guides medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 to the medal payout opening 16. Furthermore, the medal payout passage 134 is a passage that guides medals M that have been paid out from the medal payout device 15 to the medal payout opening 16. The medal return passage 132 and the medal payout passage 134 merge midway to form a single passage.

Also, as shown in Figure 107, a return acceptance opening 131 is provided at the top of the return member 130. The return acceptance opening 131 is an opening for receiving medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and have fallen downward after falling off the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45. It is an opening that serves as the entrance to the medal return passage 132 and is configured to be located vertically below the blocker 45 of the medal selector 110. After passing through the return acceptance opening 131, medals M that have been prohibited from being inserted by the medal selector 110 and have fallen downward after falling off the medal passage 111 at the position of the blocker 45 are guided by the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and are stored in the medal tray 19.

Furthermore, a payout receiving opening 133 is provided below the center of the return member 130, toward the right in Figure 107. The payout receiving opening 133 is an opening for receiving medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15, and serves as the entrance to the medal payout passage 134. It is configured to be located in front of the medal payout device 15 when the front door 12 is closed. After passing through the payout receiving opening 133, the medals M paid out from the medal payout device 15 are guided by the medal payout passage 134, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and are stored in the medal tray 19.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 107, the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131 at the top of the return member 130 is referred to as the "upper edge 135." In other words, the upper edge 135 is the part that corresponds to the peripheral edge of the return receiving opening 131. When the return member 130 is fixed in a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 107, a gap 112 is provided between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. The upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112. As a result, the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112.

Also, as shown in Figure 109, the thickness of the medal M is "T", the spacing of the gap 112 is "W", and the width of the upper edge 135 is "B". The thickness "T" of the medal M and the spacing "W" of the gap 112 are configured to satisfy "W > T". In other words, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is larger than the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, as shown in Figure 111, the medal M can be placed in the gap 112. More specifically, it is configured to satisfy "W ≒ 2 x T". In other words, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M. Therefore, "2" medals M can be placed in the gap 112.

Furthermore, the upper edge 135 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, and is configured so that the thickness "T" of the medal M, the spacing "W" of the gap 112, and the width "B" of the upper edge 135 satisfy "B > T" and "B > W." In other words, the width "B" of the upper edge 135 is greater than the thickness "T" of the medal M and greater than the spacing "W" of the gap 112. In addition, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. Therefore, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on top of the upper edge 135.

For example, during maintenance of the medal selector 110, a hall employee may place a medal M in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. At this time, the medal M rests on the upper edge 135, allowing the medal M to remain in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. However, the hall employee may forget that the medal M is still in the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120 and close the front door 12. In this case, the impact of closing the front door 12 may cause the medal M to fall out of the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120.

At this time, the upper edge 135 is located vertically below the gap 112, and the return receiving opening 131 is not located there, so medals M that fall through the gap 112 do not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Therefore, medals M that fall through the gap 112 do not pass through the medal return passage 132, the medal payout opening 16, and reach the medal tray 19. This prevents hall staff from giving medals M that have been placed in the gap 112 for maintenance of the medal selector 110 to players.

Also, as shown in Figure 108, the gap 112 is positioned above the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35. In other words, the storage receiving opening 35a of the hopper 35 opens at a lower position than the gap 112. This allows medals M that fall through the gap 112 when the front door 12 is closed to fall into the storage receiving opening 35a, and can therefore be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, as described above, the distance "W" between the gaps 112 is approximately twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, and therefore when "one" medal M is placed in the gap 112, there is a gap between the gap 112 and the medal M, and therefore the "one" medal M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112. When the front door 12 is closed with this "one" medal M left in the gap 112, the impact causes this "one" medal M to fall from the gap 112 into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, if the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly wider (larger) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, when "two" medals M are placed in the gap 112, these "two" medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112. Even when the front door 12 is closed with these "two" medals M in the gap 112, the impact of closing the front door 12 will cause the medals to fall through the gap 112, into the storage receiving port 35a, and be stored in the hopper 35, just as when the front door 12 is closed with "one" medal M in the gap 112.

Conversely, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower (smaller) than twice the thickness "T" of the medal M, two medals M will be pushed into the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112. However, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M still pushed into the gap 112, there is a chance that the two medals M will remain in the gap 112.

Here, as shown in Figure 111, the medal M that has been inserted into the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 remains in the gap 112, blocking the outlet 111d of the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110. Therefore, when one medal M remains in the gap 112, other medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop when they pass through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Furthermore, when another medal M passing through the medal passage 111 hits one medal M in the gap 112, the upper end of the one medal M in the gap 112 is positioned above the center of the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111. Therefore, the other medal M passing through the medal passage 111 will not climb over the one medal M in the gap 112. Therefore, when the one medal M has entered the gap 112, the other medal M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120.

Furthermore, although it is not possible to directly detect whether a medal M is remaining in the gap 112, as described above, when one medal M is remaining in the gap 112, other medals M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 will hit the one medal M in the gap 112 and stop. At this time, the other medals M will remain stuck near the exit 111d of the medal passage 111, causing the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b to remain on.

Furthermore, if the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which a medal M has become stuck (remained) in the medal selector 110, and issues a notification to that effect. This makes it possible to indirectly detect that a medal M is stuck in the gap 112. Error detection and notification will be described later.

Furthermore, when the chute member 120 is fixed in a predetermined position on the back surface of the front door 12 with the screw 127, the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the screw 127. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes off the back surface of the front door 12, the removed screw 127 will not fall into the return receiving opening 131. Therefore, the removed screw 127 will not pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and reach the medal tray 19.

Also, as shown in Figure 106, the medal selector 110 is equipped with a passage sensor 46. The passage sensor 46 is a sensor provided to determine whether or not there is an error such as a medal M becoming stuck (retained) or cheating. Although not shown in Figure 107, the passage sensor 46 is provided in the vertical section 111a of the medal passage 111. In other words, the passage sensor 46 is provided upstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111.

For this reason, a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is first detected by the passage sensor 46. Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 can detect a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 regardless of whether the blocker 45 is in a state that allows the insertion of a medal M (on state) or a state that does not allow it (off state).

In addition, although not shown in Figures 105 to 115, the chute member 120 is equipped with a chute sensor midway along the medal guide passage 121. Similar to the passage sensor 46, the chute sensor is a sensor provided to determine whether or not there is an error such as a medal M becoming stuck (retained) or cheating. Because the chute member 120 is intended to guide medals M that have been permitted to be inserted by the medal selector 110 to the hopper 35, the chute sensor is provided downstream of the insertion sensors 44a and 44b.

Furthermore, the passage sensor 46 and chute sensor are electrically connected to the main control board 50 via the input port 51. Note that both the passage sensor 46 and the chute sensor may be provided, or only one of them may be provided, or neither may be provided.

Next, we will explain error detection, error notification, and cancellation of error notification in the ninth embodiment. For example, when the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which a medal M is jammed (remains) in the medal selector 110 (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention error"), and issues a notification indicating the selector retention error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector retention notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating a selector retention error (for example, "CE") on the winning number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector congestion error, it sends a command indicating the selector congestion error (hereinafter referred to as the "selector congestion command") to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector congestion command, it issues a selector congestion notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a selector congestion notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "selector error" on the image display device 23, for example.

Also, for example, if the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not turn on in this order (the medal M does not pass through normally), the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which the medal M has not passed through normally (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error"), and issues a notification indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as a "selector passage error notification").

As described above, when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is guided downstream of the blocker 45 in the medal passage 111, first the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the insertion sensor 44a changes from on to off, and finally the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off. If the insertion sensors 44a and 44b turn on/off in the above order, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed through normally, and if the insertion sensors 44a and 44b do not turn on/off in the above order, it determines that a selector passage error has been detected.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 determines that a medal M has passed through the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b normally, it adds "1" to the number of bets or credits for that medal M. In contrast, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays a code indicating the selector passage error (for example, "CP") on the winning number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it sends a command indicating the selector passage error (hereinafter referred to as the "selector passage error command") to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector passage error command, it issues a selector passage error notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a selector passage error notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "selector error" on the image display device 23, for example.

It may also be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on while the input sensor 44a is off. It may also be determined that a selector passage error (or selector backflow error) has been detected when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, then the input sensor 44b changes from on to off, and finally the input sensor 44a changes from on to off.

Furthermore, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from when it first detected the medal M, and then stops detecting the medal M after the predetermined time has elapsed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally. In contrast, if the passage sensor 46 continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has elapsed since it first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected. Furthermore, if the passage sensor 46 stops detecting the medal M before the predetermined time has elapsed since it first detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

Furthermore, if the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M for a predetermined time from the time it detected the medal M, and then stops detecting the medal M after the predetermined time has passed, the main control board 50 determines that the medal M has passed normally. In contrast, if the chute sensor continues to detect the medal M even after a predetermined time has passed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal retention error has been detected. Furthermore, if the chute sensor stops detecting the medal M before the predetermined time has passed since it detected the medal M, the main control board 50 determines that a medal passage error has been detected.

The main control board 50 also has a throw-in monitoring counter (not shown). The throw-in monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented by "1" when a medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally when the blocker 45 is in the on state (a state in which the passage of medals M is permitted), and is decremented by "1" when the medal M passes through the throw-in sensor 44a and the throw-in sensor 44b normally. Therefore, the throw-in monitoring counter alternates between "1" and "0" under normal conditions. Note that when the blocker 45 is in the off state (a state in which the passage of medals M is not permitted), the throw-in monitoring counter is not incremented by "1" even if a medal M passes through the passage sensor 46. The throw-in monitoring counter is cleared when the blocker 45 changes from the off state (a state in which the passage of medals M is not permitted) to the on state (a state in which the passage of medals M is permitted).

When the blocker 45 is on and a medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, the main control board 50 increments the insertion monitoring counter by "1," and when the medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b normally, the main control board 50 decrements the insertion monitoring counter by "1." When the blocker 45 is on and the passage sensor 46 does not detect the passage of a medal M, but only the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b detect the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "-1," and the main control board 50 determines that a insertion monitoring error has been detected.

Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, but the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M, and then the passage sensor 46 detects the passage of a medal M, the insertion monitoring counter becomes "2", and the main control board 50 determines that an insertion monitoring error has been detected.

Furthermore, the insertion monitoring counter may be a counter that increments "1" when a medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b normally when the blocker 45 is in the on state, and decrements "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally. In other words, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 may increment "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when a medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b normally, and decrement "1" from the insertion monitoring counter when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally.

When the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44b detect the passage of a medal M but the chute sensor does not detect the passage of a medal M, and then the throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44b detect the passage of a medal M, the throw-in monitoring counter becomes "2," and the main control board 50 may determine that a throw-in monitoring error has been detected. Also, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, if the throw-in sensor 44a and throw-in sensor 44b do not detect the passage of a medal M, and only the chute sensor detects the passage of a medal M, the throw-in monitoring counter becomes "-1," and the main control board 50 may determine that a throw-in monitoring error has been detected.

Note that the normal value of the input monitoring counter is not limited to "0" to "1." In other words, the main control board 50 does not necessarily determine that an input monitoring error has occurred when the input monitoring counter reaches "2" or "-1." For example, the main control board 50 may determine that an input monitoring error has been detected when the input monitoring counter reaches a predetermined value of "3" or greater, or a predetermined value of "-2" or less.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signal from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b, it clears the input monitoring counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state. However, when the main control board 50 increments/decrements the input monitoring counter using the input signal from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor, it may or may not clear the input monitoring counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state. In other words, when the input signal from the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor is used to increment/decrement the input monitoring counter, it may or may not clear the counter when the blocker 45 is changed from the off state to the on state.

Furthermore, a separate input monitoring counter for the passage sensor 46 and a separate input monitoring counter for the chute sensor may be provided. That is, a first input monitoring counter and a second input monitoring counter may be provided as input monitoring counters. The first input monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented based on the input signal from the passage sensor 46 and the input signals from the input sensors 44a and 44b. The second input monitoring counter is a counter that is incremented/decremented based on the input signal from the input sensors 44a and 44b and the input signal from the chute sensor.

In other words, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 increments the first insertion monitoring counter by "1" when a medal M passes through the passage sensor 46 normally, and decrements the first insertion monitoring counter by "1" when a medal M passes through the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b normally. The main control board 50 then determines that a insertion monitoring error has been detected when the first insertion monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more).

Furthermore, when the blocker 45 is in the on state, the main control board 50 increments the second input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b normally, and decrements the second input monitoring counter by "1" when the medal M passes through the chute sensor normally. The main control board 50 determines that a input monitoring error has been detected when the second input monitoring counter is no longer a normal value (for example, when it reaches a predetermined value of "-1" or less or a predetermined value of "2" or more).

Furthermore, for example, if the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b do not turn on/off even though the hopper motor 36 is being driven, the main control board 50 determines that an error has been detected in which no medals M are stored in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty error"), and issues a notification indicating the hopper empty error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper empty notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 issues a hopper empty notification by displaying a code indicating a hopper empty error (for example, "HE") on the winning number display LED 78 (Figure 106).

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it sends a command indicating that the hopper is empty (hereinafter referred to as the "empty command") to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it issues a hopper empty alert using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a hopper empty alert, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "hopper empty" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, for example, if the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that an error in which medals M are jammed in the hopper 35 (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam error") has been detected, and issues an alert indicating the hopper jam error (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam alert"). Specifically, the main control board 50 issues a hopper jam alert by displaying a code indicating a hopper jam error (for example, "HP") on the winning number display LED 78.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it sends a command indicating a hopper jam (hereinafter referred to as a "hopper jam command") to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it issues a hopper jam alert using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a hopper jam alert, the sub-control board 80 outputs a voice message such as "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "hopper jam" on the image display device 23.

When the main control board 50 detects any of the above-mentioned errors, it halts gameplay until the error notifications are canceled. Furthermore, once the cause of any of the above-mentioned errors is eliminated, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the errors. However, once an error notification has been issued, it will not be canceled simply by eliminating the cause of the corresponding error (the error will no longer be detected), and will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on). Then, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 will cancel the error notifications.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as "door open") by the door switch 17 being turned on, it issues a notification indicating that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as "door open notification"). Specifically, the main control board 50 displays a code indicating that the front door 12 has been opened (for example, "dE") on the number of wins display LED 78 as the door open notification. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, it sends a command indicating that the front door 12 has been opened (hereinafter referred to as "door open command") to the sub-control board 80.

Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, as a door open notification, the sub-control board 80 outputs, for example, a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

In addition, a release switch (not shown) for releasing the door opening notification is provided near the locking device on the back side of the front door 12 (the side opposite the side facing the player). When the door key is inserted into the door key slot and turned counterclockwise by approximately 45 degrees in this state, the release switch changes from off to on. In other words, when the door key is turned by approximately 45 degrees in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12, the release switch changes from off to on. As mentioned above, inserting the door key into the door key slot and turning it clockwise by 90 degrees in this state releases the lock. When the front door 12 is pulled in its unlocked state, it rotates around the hinges, opening the front door 12.

When the front door 12 is closed, the door switch 17 is turned off. However, once the door open notification is activated, it will not be canceled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning the door switch 17 off; it will continue until the release switch is turned from off to on. Then, while the door open notification is being activated, close the front door 12 to turn the door switch 17 off, and then turn the door key counterclockwise by about 45 degrees (the opposite direction from when unlocking the front door 12) to turn the release switch from off to on, thereby canceling the door open notification.

In this way, turning the door key in the opposite direction to unlocking the front door 12 cancels the door open notification. Furthermore, when the door open notification is canceled, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win count display LED 78. Furthermore, when the release switch changes from off to on, the main control board 50 sends a command indicating the cancellation of the door open notification (hereinafter referred to as the "notification release command") to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the notification release command, the sub-control board 80 terminates the door open notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

Next, referring to Figures 116 to 126, the operational modes when an error is detected, when an error is notified, and when an error is cleared in the ninth embodiment will be described. Figures 116 to 123 are time charts showing the operational modes when an error is detected and when an error is cleared in the ninth embodiment. Figure 116 is a time chart showing the operational modes when the reset switch 153 is operated after the cause of the selector retention error has been removed, and when the release switch is operated after the front door 12 is closed.

In Figure 116, when a selector retention error occurs at timing "X11", the main control board 50 detects the selector retention error. The main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 also execute a selector retention notification. Specifically, when a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 at timing "X11" in Figure 116 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected. The main control board 50 then displays "CE", indicating a selector retention error, on the winning number display LED 78 as a selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects a selector congestion error, it transmits a selector congestion command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector congestion command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector congestion notification, and displays the words "SELECTOR STAGING ERROR" on the image display device 23.

Thereafter, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in Figure 116, the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X12" in Figure 116, the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the opening of the front door 12, and continues the selector dwell notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the front door 12 has been opened. However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 will not execute the door open notification even if it receives a door open command, and will continue to execute the selector dwell notification.

Then, at timing "X13" in Figure 116, if the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, if the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, once the selector retention notification has been issued, it will not be released simply by removing the cause of the selector retention error (the selector retention error will no longer be detected), and will continue until the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on).

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X14" in Figure 116, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stagnation notification. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stagnation notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

However, at timing "X14" in Figure 116, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector dwell notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on. Then, when the main control board 50 cancels the selector dwell notification, it then issues a door open notification using the acquisition count display LED 78. Specifically, the main control board 50 switches the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open (door open). Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector dwell notification, it then issues a door open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Specifically, the sub-control board 80 outputs the audio message "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23 as the door open notification.

Then, when the front door 12 is closed at timing "X15" in Figure 116, the door switch 17 is turned off. As a result, the main control board 50 no longer detects that the front door 12 is open. However, once the door open notification has been issued, it will not be canceled simply by closing the front door 12 and turning off the door switch 17; it will continue until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Then, at timing "X16" in Figure 116, when the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. This causes the main control board 50 to display the number of wins before the error code was displayed on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the release of the door open notification. Then, upon receiving the notification release command, the sub-control board 80 releases the door open notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

Figure 117 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error. In Figure 117, at timing "X21," when a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Then, at timing "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open. However, while the selector stagnant notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute a door open notification even if it detects that the front door 12 is open, and continues the selector stagnant notification. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the front door 12 is open. However, while the selector stagnant notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 does not execute a door open notification even if it receives the door open command, and continues the selector stagnant notification.

Then, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, if a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stagnation notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. However, although the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, it is then executed again at timing "X24."

Specifically, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the selector stagnation notification and will now control the system to issue a door open notification. Then, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and will again control the system to issue a selector stagnation notification.

That is, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X24," controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "CE." Furthermore, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 sends a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stagnation notification and controls the system to execute a door open notification. Then, when a selector stagnation command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute a selector stagnation notification again.

In other words, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open." Then, at timing "X24," the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Here, various errors such as selector retention errors, selector passing errors, hopper empty errors, and hopper jam errors are managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50, but door opening errors are sometimes managed (detected, notified, and released) by the main control board 50, and sometimes managed (detected, notified, and released) by the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, door opening notifications are released (terminated) when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the door opening was detected, when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, or when the release switch is operated (from off to on, or from off to on and back to off) with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off.

Furthermore, the door open notification can be displayed in three ways: by displaying a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, by outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; by outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23; by only outputting a voice such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22; or by only displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Furthermore, depending on the processing performed between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily released at "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time when the selector stagnation notification is re-executed at "X24," the time required from "X23" to "X24" can be extremely short (e.g., 1 ms to 5 ms) so that it cannot be perceived by human perception, or relatively long (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) so that it can be perceived by human perception. Therefore, by combining the various cases described above, various operational modes can be considered between the time when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily released at "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time when the selector stagnation notification is re-executed at "X24."

In other words, in Figure 117, between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily released at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are cases where the door open notification is executed and cases where the door open notification is not executed. Also, in Figure 117, between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily released at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are cases where the execution of the door open notification is recognizable to humans visually and audibly, and cases where the execution of the door open notification is not recognizable to humans visually or audibly, or where it is only recognizable for an instant.

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", there are times when it is possible for a human to visually or aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again, and times when it is not possible for a human to visually or aurally recognize that the selector dwell notification has been cancelled and then executed again, or when it is recognized, it is only for an instant.

For example, door opening may be managed by the main control board 50, and the door open notification may be released (ended) when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 closed and the door switch 17 turned off. The door open notification may be displayed in one of three ways: by displaying a code such as "dE" on the acquisition count display LED 78, by outputting a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, or by displaying text such as "Door open" on the image display device 23.

In this case, the door open notification can be executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117 and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24". Also, if the time required from the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117 to the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24" is relatively long enough to be noticeable by human perception (for example, 3 to 5 seconds), then when the door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X24", this door open notification can be recognized by human sight and hearing.

In contrast, in Figure 117, if the time required from canceling the selector dwell notification at timing "X23" to executing the selector dwell notification again at timing "X24" is so short that it cannot be detected by human perception (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms), even if a door open notification is executed between "X23" and "X23", it will be difficult for a human to recognize this door open notification visually or audibly. However, even if the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short that it cannot be detected by human perception, there may be cases where it is possible for a human to recognize that the selector dwell notification was canceled at timing "X23" and then executed again at timing "X24".

In other words, when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is cut off midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is restarted from the beginning. As a result, it sounds like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," for example, so it is possible for a human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled and then executed again. Note that if an alarm sound such as a "beep" or "beep" is output from speaker 22 as the selector stagnation notification, the human ear may not be able to recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled and then executed again, or even if it is recognized, it will only be for an instant.

Furthermore, for example, door opening may be managed by the sub-control board 80, and the door open notification may be canceled (terminated) when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the door was detected as being open. The door open notification may be issued in two ways: by audio output from the speaker 22, such as "Door is open," and by text display, such as "Door open," on the image display device 23. In this case, if the selector dwell notification is canceled and then executed again before the predetermined time has elapsed since the door was detected as being open, the door open notification can be executed between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in FIG. 117 and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24."

In contrast, the door open notification is not executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was detected as open. Therefore, if the selector dwell notification is canceled and then executed again after a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was detected as open, the door open notification will not be executed between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117 and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24."

Furthermore, in FIG. 117, if the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily released at "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at "X24," the time required from "X23" to "X24" can be relatively long (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) enough to be noticeable to humans. In this case, from "X23" to "X24," the winning number display LED 78 displays the winning number before displaying "CE," the speaker 22 outputs the sound before outputting the sound "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 displays the screen before displaying the words "Selector Error" (e.g., the game screen or game standby screen). These displays from "X23" to "X24" are perceptible to humans visually and audibly. Therefore, the fact that the selector dwell notification was released and then executed again is also perceptible to humans visually and audibly.

Furthermore, in Figure 117, if the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and then the door open notification is not executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24," there may be times when the time required from "X23" to "X24" is so short (for example, 1 ms to 5 ms) that it cannot be perceived by human senses. In this case, the display on the acquisition number display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22 from "X23" to "X24" are difficult for humans to perceive visually or aurally.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24," if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification was canceled and then executed again.

Furthermore, in Figure 117, the following patterns (1) to (6) are possible patterns for processing executed between "X23" and "X24." (1) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is temporarily canceled and then executed again during the same interrupt processing (Figure 47). (2) A pattern in which the selector congestion notification is temporarily canceled during one interrupt processing and then executed again during the next interrupt processing.

(3) In one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is canceled, and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt process. This requires multiple interrupt processes between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during this time. (4) In one interrupt process, the selector dwell notification is canceled, and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt process. This requires multiple interrupt processes between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during this time.

(5) A pattern in which the selector dwell notification is canceled during one interrupt process, and then executed again during a subsequent interrupt process. A predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. (6) A pattern in which the selector dwell notification is canceled during one interrupt process, and then executed again during a subsequent interrupt process. A predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is executed during that time.

First, we will explain the pattern (1) above, in which the selector congestion notification is temporarily canceled and then executed again using the same interrupt processing. In this case, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b). Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector congestion notification.

Then, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. When the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and executes a selector stagnation notification. When the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the control command transmission processing (step S464), the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, in Figure 117, the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24" without executing the door open notification. Furthermore, the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification and the re-execution of the selector stagnation notification are executed by the same interrupt process. Furthermore, the interrupt process is executed every 2.235 ms. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the re-execution of the selector stagnation notification is less than the time of one interrupt (2.235 ms).

For this reason, in Figure 117, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23", and then executed again at timing "X24". However, between "X23" and "X24", it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the displays on the acquisition count display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24," if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification was canceled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain the pattern in which the selector congestion notification is temporarily canceled in the above (2) first interrupt processing, and then executed again in the next interrupt processing. In this case, as with the above (1) pattern, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading processing (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising data, and falling data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector congestion notification.

Thereafter, as in the case of pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (FIG. 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 refers to the storage area for the various data described above, and if it determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) during the main processing (Figure 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, too, the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24." However, unlike pattern (1) above, the selector stagnation notification is canceled in one interrupt process, and then in the main process executed afterwards, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state. Then, in the interrupt process executed afterwards, the selector stagnation notification is executed again. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification again is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

In this case, too, the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, and then executed again at timing "X24." However, between "X23" and "X24," it is difficult for humans to visually or aurally recognize the displays on the acquisition count display LED 78 and image display device 23, and the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24," if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification was canceled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled in the above (3)-1 interrupt processing, and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt processing, in which multiple interrupt processing operations are required between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and in which the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector stagnation notification.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) during the main processing (Figure 46) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "CE" on the win number display LED 78. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the input error check process (step S463) begins, the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. An error flag indicating a selector retention error is then stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, too, the selector stagnation notification is cleared at timing "X23" in Figure 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24." Furthermore, in the "Z" interrupt processing ("Z" is an integer), the selector stagnation notification is cleared once, and in the main processing executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is cleared once. Then, in the "Z+1" interrupt processing, the number of wins before "CE" was displayed is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and in the "Z+2" interrupt processing, a selector stagnation error is detected. Then, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as a selector stagnation error state. Then, in the "Z+3" interrupt processing, the selector stagnation notification is executed.

As a result, the time required from the cancellation of the selector stagnation notification to the execution of the next selector stagnation notification is approximately the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms). Therefore, in Figure 117, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at timing "X23", and then the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24". However, between "X23" and "X24", it is difficult for the human eye or ear to perceive the displays on the acquisition count display LED 78 and image display device 23, or the sound from the speaker 22.

However, when the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," the voice output from speaker 22 saying "Please call an attendant" is interrupted midway, and when the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24," if the voice "Please call an attendant" is output from the beginning, it will sound like "Call an attendant...call an attendant," for example, so it is possible for the human ear to recognize that the selector stagnation notification was canceled and then executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the above (4)1 interrupt process, and then executed again during a subsequent interrupt process. This requires multiple interrupt processes between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and during this time the door open notification is executed.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector stagnation notification.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the front door 12 has been opened and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the processing to determine whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the processing to determine whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a door open notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the input error check process (step S463) begins, the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled at the timing of "X23" in FIG. 117, and the door open notification is executed.
At timing "24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed again. Furthermore, in the "Z"th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector stagnation notification is cancelled and the door open is detected, and in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the door is in an open state. Thereafter, in the "Z+1"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is executed, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is cancelled and a selector stagnation error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the selector stagnation error state. Thereafter, in the "Z+3"th interrupt processing, the selector stagnation notification is executed.

As a result, the time required from the cancellation of the selector dwell notification to the execution of the selector dwell notification again is approximately the time for 3 interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to 4 interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms). Therefore, in Figure 117, the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at timing "X23", but the fact that the door open notification has been executed is not discernible visually or audibly by humans, or even if it is discernible, it is only for an instant. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector dwell notification is executed again.

Next, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the interrupt processing described above (5)1, and then executed again during the subsequent interrupt processing. A predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time.

In this case, similar to pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector stagnation notification. Then, unlike pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the timer set process (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation notification was canceled.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "CE" on the win number display LED 78. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was canceled. If it determines that the predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation notification was canceled, and if the input error check processing (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and the input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, in Figure 117, the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23," but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24." Furthermore, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation notification was canceled. In the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily canceled. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error cancellation command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since the selector stagnation notification was canceled, a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation notification is executed, and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

For this reason, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again. Also, in Figure 117, between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24," the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but instead displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (e.g., the game screen or game standby screen).

Therefore, in FIG. 117, the cancellation of the selector dwell notification can be recognized visually and audibly by a human being between the time when the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24." Note that instead of the condition being that a predetermined time has elapsed between the time when the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again, the condition can be, for example, that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, too, the cancellation of the selector dwell notification can be recognized visually and audibly by a human being between the time when the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24."

Furthermore, in the above (5)1 interrupt processing, if the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and then executed again in a subsequent interrupt processing, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and the door open notification is not executed during that time. Examples of patterns that can be considered include the following:

First, in the interrupt process (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector retention notification.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and temporarily cancels the selector retention error state.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is cleared in the error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "CE" on the win number display LED 78. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), if the input error check processing (step S463) determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a specified memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during main processing, when the process proceeds to timer setting processing (not shown), the main control board 50 sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation error state was entered. In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since the selector stagnation error state was entered.

If it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation error state was entered, the main control board 50 proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), where it displays the code "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when it proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24" without executing the door open notification.

Furthermore, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is temporarily cleared, and in the main process executed thereafter, the selector stagnation error state is temporarily cleared. In the interrupt process executed thereafter, the number of wins before displaying "CE" is displayed on the win number display LED 78, and an error clear command is sent to the sub-control board 80. If a selector stagnation error is detected in the interrupt process executed thereafter, the main process executed thereafter executes error processing to stop the progress of the game as a selector stagnation error state, and in the interrupt process executed thereafter, a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the selector stagnation error state was established. Then, in the interrupt process executed thereafter, if it is determined that a predetermined time has elapsed since the selector stagnation error state was established, a selector stagnation notification is issued and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

For this reason, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again. Also, in Figure 117, between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but instead displays the screen before the words "SELECTOR ERROR" were displayed (e.g., the game screen or game standby screen).

Furthermore, in Figure 117, from the time the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" until the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 does not output the audio message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22, but outputs the audio message that precedes the audio message "Please call an attendant". Therefore, from the time the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" until the selector stagnation notification is executed again at timing "X24", it is possible for a human to visually and audibly recognize that the selector stagnation notification has been canceled.

Finally, we will explain a pattern in which the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled during the above (6)1 interrupt processing, and then executed again during the subsequent interrupt processing. A predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) must pass between the time the selector dwell notification is canceled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again, and a door open notification is executed during that time.

In this case, as with pattern (1) above, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from the various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data are generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector stagnation notification.

Then, unlike pattern (1) above, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the opening of the front door 12 has been detected and stores an error flag indicating door open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. Then, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the timer set processing (not shown), the main control board 50 detects the opening of the front door 12 and sets a timer to measure the elapsed time since it stored the error flag indicating door open.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a door open notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

In the subsequent interrupt processing (Figure 47), when the process proceeds to the elapsed time check processing (not shown), the main control board 50 determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating the door was open. If the main control board 50 determines that the predetermined time has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating the door was open, and determines in the input error check processing (step S463) that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected, and stores an error flag indicating the selector retention error in a predetermined memory area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the selector stagnation notification is canceled and a door open notification is issued. Then, at timing "X24," the door open notification is canceled and a selector stagnation notification is issued again. Also, in one interrupt process, the selector stagnation notification is canceled, the door open is detected, and a timer is set to measure the elapsed time since the door open was detected. In the main process that is executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the game from progressing as the door is open. In the interrupt process that is executed after that, the door open notification is issued and a door open command is sent to the sub-control board 80. In the interrupt process that is executed after that, if it is determined that a predetermined time has passed since the door open was detected, the door open notification is canceled and a selector stagnation error is detected. In the main process that is executed after that, error processing is executed to stop the game from progressing as the selector stagnation error state. In the interrupt process that is executed after that, the selector stagnation notification is issued and a selector stagnation command is sent to the sub-control board 80.

For this reason, a predetermined time (e.g., 3 to 5 seconds) is required between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again. Also, in Figure 117, between the time the selector dwell notification is cancelled at timing "X23" and the time the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24," the sub-control board 80 does not display the words "SELECTOR ERROR" on the image display device 23, but rather displays the words "DOOR OPEN."

Therefore, in FIG. 117, from the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" until the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24," it is possible for a person to visually and audibly recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed. Note that instead of the condition being that a predetermined time has elapsed between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again, it is also possible for the condition to be that the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned from on to off. In this case, too, it is possible for a person to visually and audibly recognize that the selector dwell notification has been canceled and that the door open notification has been executed between the time when the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and the time when the selector dwell notification is executed again at timing "X24."

Furthermore, the system measures the time that has elapsed since detecting the opening of the front door 12 and storing an error flag indicating that the door is open, and continues to issue a door-open notification until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed. During that time, the door-open notification will not be canceled even if the reset switch 153 or cancel switch is operated. This ensures that the driver is notified that the front door 12 has been opened.

The same applies when an error such as a selector stuck error is detected. That is, the time elapsed since an error such as a selector stuck error was detected and an error flag indicating this was stored is measured, and an error notification such as a selector stuck error notification is executed until a predetermined time (for example, 3 to 5 seconds) has elapsed, and during that time, the error notification such as a selector stuck error notification will not be canceled even if the reset switch 153 or release switch is operated. This ensures that the detection of an error such as a selector stuck error is notified reliably.

Here, Figure 117 uses the example of a selector retention error to explain the operation that occurs when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without eliminating the cause of the error. However, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) without eliminating the cause of the error in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

For example, in Figure 117, if the hopper motor 36 is being driven at timing "X21" but the payout sensor 37a and the payout sensor 37b are not turning on/off, the main control board 50 determines that a hopper empty error has been detected. When the main control board 50 detects a hopper empty error, it displays "HE," indicating a hopper empty error, on the winning count display LED 78 as a hopper empty notification, and sends an empty command indicating a hopper empty error to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the empty command, it outputs the audio message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper empty notification, and displays the words "Hopper empty" on the image display device 23. Then, at timing "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened.

However, while the hopper empty alert is being issued, the main control board 50 will not issue a door open alert even if it detects that the door is open, and will continue to issue the hopper empty alert. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door is open, it will send a door open command to the sub-control board 80. However, while the hopper empty alert is being issued, the sub-control board 80 will not issue a door open alert even if it receives a door open command, and will continue to issue the hopper empty alert.

117, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while no medals M remain stored in the hopper 35, that is, while the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper empty notification. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will send an error cancellation command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 will cancel the hopper empty notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc.

However, although the hopper empty notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, it is then executed again at timing "X24." Specifically, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in Figure 117 when the cause of the hopper empty error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper empty notification and will now control the system to execute a door open notification. Then, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and will control the system to execute a hopper empty notification again.

That is, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "HE," which indicates a hopper empty error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X24," controls the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "HE." Furthermore, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 sends an empty command to the sub-control board 80.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper empty notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when an empty command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper empty notification again.

In other words, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper empty" to "Door open". Then, at timing "X24", the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper empty".

Also, for example, in Figure 117, when the input sensor 44b changes from off to on at timing "X21" and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector passage error has been detected. Then, when the main control board 50 detects a selector passage error, it displays "CP," indicating a selector passage error, on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a selector passage error notification, and sends a selector passage error command indicating a selector passage error to the sub-control board 80.

Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives a selector passage error command, it outputs the audio message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector passage error notification, and displays the words "Selector Error" on the image display device 23. Then, at timing "X22" in Figure 117, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the door opening. However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door opening notification even if it detects the door opening, and continues to issue the selector passage error notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that a door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. However, while the selector passage error notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 will not execute the door open notification even if it receives a door open command, and will continue to issue the selector passage error notification.

Then, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector passage error has not been eliminated (the insertion sensor 44b changes from off to on, and then the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on, so that the insertion sensors 44a and 44b remain on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector passage error notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector passage error notification that had been being issued by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. Here, although the selector passage error notification has been canceled, because the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 now determines that a selector congestion error has been detected, and issues a selector congestion notification at timing "X24."

Specifically, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, if the cause of the selector passage error has not been eliminated (the input sensor 44b changes from off to on, and then the input sensor 44a changes from off to on, leaving the input sensors 44a and 44b on), and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the selector passage error notification and performs control to issue a door open notification. Since the input sensors 44a and 44b continue to remain on after that, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has now been detected, and at timing "X24" in Figure 117, it cancels the door open notification and performs control to issue a selector retention notification.

That is, at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to switch from "CP," which indicates a selector pass error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open. Then, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to switch from "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open, to "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error. Furthermore, at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the main control board 50 sends a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector passing error notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when a selector dwell command is received at timing "X24" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a selector dwell notification.

That is, at the timing of "X23" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector error" to "Door open." Then, at the timing of "X24" in Figure 117, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector error."

In this way, when a selector passage error is detected, a selector passage error notification is issued. If the reset switch 153 is then operated while the cause of the selector passage error has not been removed, the selector passage error is cleared, and then a selector congestion error is detected and a selector congestion notification is issued. Also, as described above, when a selector congestion error is detected, a selector congestion notification is issued. If the reset switch 153 is then operated while the cause of the selector congestion error has not been removed, the selector congestion notification is cleared and then issued again. In other words, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, there are times when the same error notification is issued before and after operating the reset switch 153, and times when different error notifications are issued before and after operating the reset switch 153.

Note that in Figure 117, the selector passing error notification is cancelled at timing "X23", but there are cases where the door open notification is not executed at this timing. And there are also cases where the selector stagnant notification is executed at timing "X24" without executing the door open notification. For example, in the same interrupt processing (Figure 47), if the input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 47), an input error check (step S463 in Figure 47), and error processing (not shown) is executed, the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 reading process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads input signals from various switches (such as the reset switch 153) and various sensors (such as the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b). Based on the read input signals, the main control board 50 generates various data, such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data, and stores them in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if it determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, the main control board 50 cancels the selector pass error notification.

Then, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector stagnation error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating the selector stagnation error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. When the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the error processing (not shown), the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and executes a selector stagnation notification. When the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the control command transmission processing (step S464), the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area and transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, in Figure 117, the selector passage error notification is canceled at timing "X23", but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed at timing "X24". Furthermore, the cancellation of the selector passage error notification and the selector stagnation notification are executed in the same interrupt process. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification is less than the time of one interrupt (2.235 ms).

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the input port 51 is read (step S457 in Figure 47) and an input error check (step S463 in Figure 47) is performed, and then in the main processing (Figure 46) that is executed subsequently, if error processing (not shown) is performed, the door open notification is not executed.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data is generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Subsequently, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check process (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, the main control board 5
In the main processing (FIG. 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all the reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 refers to the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the progress of the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, too, the selector stagnation notification is canceled at timing "X23" in Figure 117, but the door open notification is not executed at this timing. Then, without executing the door open notification, the selector stagnation notification is executed at timing "X24". Furthermore, in one interrupt process, the selector passage error notification is canceled, and in the main process executed afterwards, a selector stagnation error state is entered and game progress is stopped, and in the interrupt process executed afterwards, the selector stagnation notification is executed. Therefore, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification is approximately the time for one interrupt (2.235 ms) to the time for two interrupts (2.235 ms x 2 = 4.47 ms).

Also, in Figure 117, at timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is cancelled and a door open notification is issued, but the execution of the door open notification may not be discernible to the human eye or ear, or may only be discernible for a moment. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification may be cancelled and a selector stagnant notification may be issued instead. After the input port 51 is read and an input error check is performed in the interrupt processing, multiple interrupt processes may be required before error processing is executed in the main processing. In such cases, the door open notification is issued, but the execution of the door open notification may not be discernible to the human eye or ear, or may only be discernible for a moment.

Specifically, when the interrupt process (Figure 47) proceeds to the input port 51 read process (step S457), the main control board 50 reads the input signals from various switches and sensors. Then, based on the read input signals, various data such as level data, rising edge data, and falling edge data is generated and stored in a specified memory area of the RWM 53. At this time, if the main control board 50 determines that the reset switch 153 has changed from off to on, it cancels the selector pass error notification.

Then, when the interrupt processing (Figure 47) proceeds to the input error check processing (step S463), the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the door switch 17 is on, it determines that the front door 12 has been detected as open, and stores an error flag indicating that the door is open in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the processing to determine whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the processing to determine whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the door to the open state, and stops the game.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the door is set to the open state during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "dE" indicating that the door is open on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a door open notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a door open command to the sub-control board 80.

Then, in the next interrupt process (Figure 47), when the input error check process (step S463) begins, the main control board 50 references the storage area for the various data described above. If it determines that the input sensor 44a and input sensor 44b remain on, it determines that a selector retention error has been detected. It then cancels the door open notification and stores an error flag indicating a selector retention error in a specified storage area of the RWM 53.

Then, in the main processing (Figure 46), the main control board 50 executes error processing (not shown) before the process of determining whether the start switch 41 is on (step S278) or after the process of determining whether all reels 31 have stopped (step S289). At this time, the main control board 50 references the error flag storage area, sets the selector to a stuck error state, and stops the game from proceeding.

Then, in the interrupt processing (Figure 47) after the selector stagnation error state is entered during error processing during the main processing, when the process proceeds to LED display control (step S2821), the main control board 50 displays the code "CE" indicating a selector stagnation error on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification. Then, when the process proceeds to control command transmission processing (step S464) during the interrupt processing (Figure 47), the main control board 50 transmits a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80.

In this case, in Figure 117, at timing "X23", the selector passing error notification is canceled and a door open notification is issued. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification is canceled and a selector stuck notification is issued. Furthermore, in the "Z"th ("Z" is an integer) interrupt processing, the selector passing error notification is canceled and the door open is detected, and in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the door is open. Then, in the "Z+1"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is issued, and in the "Z+2"th interrupt processing, the door open notification is canceled and a selector stuck error is detected. Furthermore, in the main processing executed thereafter, error processing is executed to stop the game progress as the selector stuck error state. Then, in the "Z+3"th interrupt processing, the selector stuck notification is issued.

As a result, the time required from the cancellation of the selector passage error notification to the execution of the selector stagnation notification is approximately the time for three interrupts (2.235 ms x 3 = 6.705 ms) to four interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms). During this time, the door open notification is executed. Therefore, in Figure 117, the selector passage error notification is cancelled and the door open notification is executed at timing "X23", but the execution of the door open notification is not perceptible to the human eye or ear, or if it is perceptible, it is only for an instant. Then, at timing "X24", the door open notification is cancelled and the selector stagnation notification is executed.

In addition, the sub-control board 80 stores the error history in a specified memory area of the RWM 83, and is capable of displaying the stored error history when a request to display the error history is made. In the ninth embodiment, the error history can be displayed in the setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the power is on, the game is in standby mode (before the game starts), and the number of bets is "0," turning on the setting key switch 152 will cause the game to transition to the setting confirmation state.

Furthermore, when the system transitions to the setting confirmation state, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73, and the image display device 23 displays a menu screen for the administrator. Furthermore, the administrator menu screen has an "Error History" item. While the administrator menu screen is displayed, the cross key (Figure 106) is operated to select the "Error History" item, and in this state, the push button 86 is operated (turned on), and the error history screen is displayed on the image display device 23.

The error history screen also displays an error code indicating the type of error (e.g., "CE," "CP," "dE," etc.) and the time the error was reported (e.g., "September 17, 2021, 15:35:25"). For example, in FIG. 117, a selector dwell notification is issued at timing "X21," the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and a door open notification is issued at timing "X23," and the door open notification is canceled and a selector dwell notification is issued again at timing "X24." In this case, the following is displayed, for example: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45 "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in Figure 117, a selector dwell notification is issued at timing "X21", the selector dwell notification is canceled at timing "X23", but a door open notification is not issued, and then a selector dwell notification is issued again at timing "X24" without a door open notification being issued. In this case, for example, the following would be displayed: "CE" September 17, 2021 15:35:25 "CE" September 17, 2021 15:36:45

Also, for example, in Figure 117, a selector passing error notification is issued at timing "X21", the selector passing error notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X23" and a door open notification is issued, and then the door open notification is canceled at timing "X24" and a selector stagnant notification is issued. In this case, for example, the following will be displayed: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "dE" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45 "CP" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

Also, for example, in Figure 117, a selector passing error notification is issued at timing "X21", the selector passing error notification is canceled at timing "X23", but a door open notification is not issued, and then, without a door open notification being issued, a selector stagnant notification is issued at timing "X24". In this case, for example, the following would be displayed: "CE" September 17, 2021, 15:35:25 "CP" September 17, 2021, 15:36:45

The push button 86 is also referred to as a sub button 86, effect button 86, effect switch 86, etc., and is operated when progressing (developing) the effect, etc. The cross key 87 is also referred to as a selection switch 87, etc., and is operated when moving the cursor position on a menu screen, etc. The push button 86 and cross key 87 are electrically connected to the sub-control means 80 via the input port 81. The error history of the sub-control board 80 is not erased by turning the power on/off or by changing settings. The error history will not be erased unless a serious error (an unrecoverable error) occurs in the RWM 83 of the sub-control board 80.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be issued, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of the reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is first canceled and then can be issued again. This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally and to once again notify that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

118 is a time chart showing the operation modes when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the selector retention error, and when the release switch is operated with the front door 12 open. In FIG. 118, at the timing of "X31," when a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and the insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Then, at timing "X32" in Figure 118, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the door being opened. However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, the main control board 50 does not execute the door open notification even if it detects the door being opened, and continues the selector dwell notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that a door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 will not execute the door open notification even if it receives a door open command, and will continue to execute the selector dwell notification.

Then, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, if a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, i.e., the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector retention notification.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the error clear command, it clears the selector stagnation notification that has been executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc. However, although the selector stagnation notification is cleared once at timing "X33" in Figure 118, it is then executed again at timing "X34".

Specifically, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the selector stuck notification and will now control the system to issue a door open notification. Then, at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and will again control the system to issue a selector stuck notification.

In other words, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to switch from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X34," controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "CE." Furthermore, at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 sends a selector dwell command to the sub-control board 80.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X33" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stagnation notification and controls the system to execute a door open notification. Then, when a selector stagnation command is received at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification and controls the system to execute a selector stagnation notification again.

In other words, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open." Then, at timing "X34," the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Then, at timing "X35" in Figure 118, if the medal M stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 is removed, that is, if the cause of the selector retention error is removed, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the selector retention error. However, simply removing the cause of the selector retention error (no longer detecting the selector retention error) will not cancel the selector retention notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 cancels the selector stagnation notification. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stagnation notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

However, at timing "X36" in Figure 118, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the selector stuck notification is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now issues a door open notification. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector stuck error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Also, at timing "X36" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the selector stuck notification and then issues a door open notification. That is, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in Figure 118, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 will continue to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 remains on), the main control board 50 does not send an alarm release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the cancellation of the door open alarm. Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 remains on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open alarm without releasing it.

Here, Figure 118 uses a selector stagnation error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, and when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error. However, in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the operation is the same as in the case of a selector stagnation error when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, or when the reset switch 153 is operated after removing the cause of the error.

For example, in Figure 118, if the dispensing sensor 37a remains off and the dispensing sensor 37b remains on at the timing of "X31", the main control board 50 determines that a hopper jam error has been detected. When the main control board 50 detects a hopper jam error, it displays "HP", indicating a hopper jam error, on the winning count display LED 78 as a hopper jam alert, and sends a hopper jam command indicating a hopper jam error to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the hopper jam command, it outputs the audio message "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a hopper jam alert, and displays the words "Hopper jam error" on the image display device 23.

Then, at timing "X32" in Figure 118, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects the door being opened. However, while the hopper jam alert is being issued, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open alert even if it detects the door being opened, and continues to issue the hopper jam alert. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects the door being opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. However, while the hopper jam alert is being issued, the sub-control board 80 does not issue a door open alert even if it receives a door open command, and continues to issue the hopper jam alert.

Then, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) while medals M remain stuck in the hopper 35, i.e., while the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification. Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification that had been performed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

However, although the hopper jam notification is temporarily canceled at timing "X33" in Figure 118, it is then executed again at timing "X34." Specifically, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X33" in Figure 118 when the cause of the hopper jam error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will cancel the hopper jam notification and will now control the system to execute a door open notification. Then, at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 will cancel the door open notification and will control the system to execute a hopper jam notification again.

In other words, at timing "X33" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "HP," which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open, and then at timing "X34," controls the display of the acquired number display LED 78 to switch from "dE" to "HP." Furthermore, at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 sends a hopper jam command to the sub-control board 80.

Also, when an error clear command is received at timing "X33" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the hopper jam notification and controls the system to issue a door open notification. Then, when a hopper jam command is received at timing "X34" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 clears the door open notification and controls the system to issue a hopper jam notification again.

118, the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open" at the timing of "X33." Thereafter, at the timing of "X34," the sub-control board 80 controls the speaker 22 to switch the audio output from "The door is open" to "Please call an attendant" and the image display device 23 to switch the display from "Door open" to "Hopper jam error."

Then, at timing "X35" in Figure 118, if the medal M stuck in the hopper 35 is removed, that is, if the cause of the hopper jam error is eliminated, the main control board 50 will no longer detect the hopper jam error. However, simply removing the cause of the hopper jam error (no longer detecting the hopper jam error) will not cancel the hopper jam notification.

Thereafter, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X36" in Figure 118, the main control board 50 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification. Also, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error cancellation command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error cancellation command, the sub-control board 80 performs control to cancel the hopper jam notification that was being performed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

However, at timing "X36" in Figure 118, even though the reset switch 153 is operated and the hopper jam alert is canceled, the front door 12 remains open and the door switch 17 remains on, so the main control board 50 now controls the LED 78 to issue a door open alert. That is, the main control board 50 controls the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "HP," which indicates a hopper jam error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Also, at timing "X36" in Figure 118, the sub-control board 80 cancels the hopper jam alert and then controls the door open alert. That is, the sub-control board 80 switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "The door is open," and controls the display on the image display device 23 to switch from "Hopper jam error" to "Door open."

Thereafter, at timing "X37" in Figure 118, even if the door key is turned counterclockwise and the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open, i.e., while the door switch 17 remains on, the main control board 50 will continue to execute the door open notification without canceling it.

Furthermore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 remains on), the main control board 50 does not send an alarm release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the cancellation of the door open alarm. Therefore, even if the release switch is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 remains open (door switch 17 remains on), the sub-control board 80 continues to execute the door open alarm without releasing it.

In this way, when a specified error is detected, a specified error notification can be issued, and when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated and an operation to cancel the specified error notification, i.e., operation of the reset switch 153, is performed, the specified error notification is first canceled and then can be issued again. This makes it possible to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally and to once again notify that the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

Furthermore, when the opening of the front door 12 (door open) is detected, a door open notification can be issued, and even if the release switch for canceling the door open notification is operated (turned on) while the front door 12 is open, the door open notification can continue to be issued without being cancelled. This prevents fraudulent activity from occurring when the front door 12 remains open without any notification being issued.

In the above configuration, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 turns on and issues a door-open notification. However, for example, the door-open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. Specifically, when a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 is ready to be opened. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is ready to be opened.

The main control board 50 may be configured to issue a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can now be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed. In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the main control board 50 may be configured to cancel the door open notification by turning the door key counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can now be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 should be opened, even if the front door 12 is closed. The sub-control board 80 may then be configured to issue a door open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc., when it receives the door open command, even if the front door 12 is closed.

In other words, when it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be issued, and even if an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed when the front door 12 is open or can be opened, the door open notification can continue to be issued without being cancelled. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent activity when the front door 12 is open or can be opened without issuing any notification.

Figure 119 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector retention error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again, and the time "T2" from when a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

In Figure 119, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, on/off of door open detection, on/off of selector stagnation notification, on/off of door open notification, on/off of reset switch 153, and on/off of release switch are the same as in Figure 117. Also, the timing of "X41", "X42", "X43", and "X44" in Figure 119 correspond to the timing of "X21", "X22", "X23", and "X24" in Figure 117, respectively.

In Figure 119, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X43" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then at timing "X44", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again. The time from "X43" to "X44" is the time "T1" from the time the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 119, if we assume that a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 just before "X43" and that medal M is detected by insertion sensor 44a at time "X43", then at time "X45", that medal M is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b. The time from "X43" to "X45" is the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by insertion sensor 44a to when it is no longer detected by insertion sensor 44b.

Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a" refers to the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, approaches the insertion sensor 44a, and the insertion sensor 44a changes from off to on. Furthermore, "when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b" refers to the moment when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is permitted to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a, passes through the insertion sensor 44b, and the insertion sensor 44b changes from on to off.

Here, it is assumed that the medal M falls from the medal insertion slot 47 at an initial velocity of "0", passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and then the insertion sensor 44b as it passes through them. It is also assumed that the blocker 45 allows the medal M to pass through. In other words, the medal M is released from the hand at the medal insertion slot 47 without gaining momentum, passes through the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110, is allowed to pass through the blocker 45, passes through the insertion sensor 44a and then the insertion sensor 44b, and is detected by the insertion sensor 44a and then the insertion sensor 44b.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1 < T2." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector retention notification is temporarily canceled until the selector retention notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T2" from when the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a until it is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

For example, suppose the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) and a medal M is inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 to check whether the selector retention error has been cleared. Then, at timing "X43" in Figure 119, the selector retention notification is cleared and the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is detected by the insertion sensor 44a. If the cause of the selector retention error has not been removed at this time, the selector retention notification is issued again at timing "X44" in Figure 119, and then, at timing "X45", the medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 is no longer detected by the insertion sensor 44b.

As a result, a medal M inserted through the medal insertion slot 47 will not pass through insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b normally, and although the medal M will be swallowed, the process of adding "1" to the bet number or credit number for that medal M can be prevented. Note that Figure 119 uses a selector retention error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, but in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector retention error.

Figure 120 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error. It shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the time "T3" from when digit 5 is lit until digit 1 is lit.

The ninth embodiment also has digits 1 to 5, similar to the third embodiment. Digit 1 corresponds to the upper digit of the credit number (reserved number) display LED 76, and digit 2 corresponds to the lower digit of the credit number display LED 76. Digit 3 corresponds to the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78, and digit 4 corresponds to the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78. Furthermore, digit 5 corresponds to the set value display LED 73.

Furthermore, address "F051(H)" shown in Figure 33 of the third embodiment is a 1-byte storage area where LED display counter 1 (_CT_LED_DSP1) is stored. LED display counter 1 is a counter that determines which digit out of digits 1 to 5 will be lit, and is continuously updated with each interrupt. Furthermore, the bits of LED display counter 1 are assigned as follows: bit D0 is the digit 1 signal, bit D1 is the digit 2 signal, bit D2 is the digit 3 signal, bit D3 is the digit 4 signal, and bit D4 is the digit 5 signal. Then, in one interrupt process, dynamic lighting control of digits 1 to 5 is executed so that the digit corresponding to the bit set to "1" in LED display counter 1 is lit.

LED display counter 1 has an initial value of "00010000 (B)". LED display counter 1 updates its bit "1" by shifting it one digit to the right with each interrupt. Furthermore, at the next interrupt after the value of LED display counter 1 reaches "00000001 (B)", LED display counter 1 shifts one digit to the right to become "00000000 (B)". However, at the time of this interrupt, LED display counter 1 is initialized, and the value of LED display counter 1 is set to "00010000 (B)". As a result, LED display counter 1 has one cycle of five interrupts.

From the above, the values of LED display counter 1 are: "N" interrupt: 00010000 (B) "N+1" interrupt: 00001000 (B) "N+2" interrupt: 00000100 (B) "N+3" interrupt: 00000010 (B) "N+4" interrupt: 00000001 (B) "N+5" interrupt: 00000000 (B) → 00010000 (B) (initialized; same value as "N" interrupt) "N+6" interrupt: 00001000 (B) :

In the ninth embodiment, as in the third embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, dynamically lighting up digits 1 to 5. Specifically, when the value of LED display counter 1 is "00010000 (B)," a digit 5 signal is output. The output of the digit 5 signal enables digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to light up (digits 1 to 4 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00001000 (B)," at which point a digit 4 signal is output, enabling digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) to light up (digits 1 to 3 and 5 are turned off).

At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000100 (B)", at which point the digit 3 signal is output, enabling digit 3 (the most significant digit of the acquired number display LED 78) to light up (digit 1, digit 2, digit 4, and digit 5 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000010 (B)", at which point the digit 2 signal is output, enabling digit 2 (the least significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) to light up (digit 1 and digits 3 to 5 are turned off). At the time of the next interrupt processing, the value of LED display counter 1 becomes "00000001 (B)", at which point the digit 1 signal is output, enabling digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) to light up (digits 2 to 5 are turned off).

In Figure 120, the on/off of selector stagnation detection, on/off of door open detection, on/off of selector stagnation notification, on/off of door open notification, on/off of reset switch 153, and on/off of release switch are the same as in Figure 117. Also, the timing of "X51", "X52", "X53", and "X54" in Figure 120 correspond to the timing of "X21", "X22", "X23", and "X24" in Figure 117, respectively.

In Figure 120, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" when the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then at timing "X54", the main control board 50 will execute the selector stuck notification again. The time from "X53" to "X54" is the time "T1" from the time the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be executed again.

Also, in Figure 120, if we assume that digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) lights up at timing "X53", then digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) lights up at timing "X55". The time from "X53" to "X55" is the time "T3" from lighting up digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) to lighting up digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76).

As described above, in the ninth embodiment, dynamic lighting control is executed to sequentially light up digits 5 through 1 for each interrupt. Furthermore, there are four interrupts between lighting up digit 5 and lighting up digit 1. Therefore, time "T3" is the time for four interrupts (2.235 ms x 4 = 8.94 ms). The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1 < T3." That is, the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stagnation notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the time "T3" from when digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) is turned on until digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) is turned on.

Here, in FIG. 120, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X53" while the cause of the selector stagnation error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stagnation notification and control the system to issue a door open notification. At this time, the main control board 50 will control the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "CE," which indicates a selector stagnation error, to "dE," which indicates the front door 12 is open (door open). Then, at timing "X54," the main control board 50 will control the system to issue a selector stagnation notification again. At this time, the main control board 50 will control the display of the acquisition count display LED 78 to change from "dE" to "CE." Then, assuming that digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) is lit at timing "X53," digit 1 (the most significant digit of the credit number display LED 76) will then be lit at timing "X55." In other words, between "X53" and "X55", digits 5 to 1 will light up once each.

For this reason, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 is controlled to switch from "CE" to "dE" at timing "X53," and then from "dE" to "CE" at timing "X54." However, between "X53" and "X54," "dE" will only light up once on the acquisition count display LED 78, or "dE" will not light up at all. Therefore, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm that "dE" has been lit on the acquisition count display LED 78, preventing the user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the selector jam error has been eliminated. Note that Figure 120 uses a selector jam error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error. However, the same operation as for a selector jam error occurs when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error.

Figure 121 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error, and shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 121, the on/off of selector dwell detection, door open detection, selector dwell notification, door open notification, reset switch 153, and release switch are the same as in Figure 117. Also, the timings of "X61," "X62," "X63," and "X64" in Figure 121 correspond to the timings of "X21," "X22," "X23," and "X24" in Figure 117, respectively.

In Figure 121, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification, and then at timing "X64", the main control board 50 will control the selector stuck notification to be executed again. The time from "X63" to "X64" is the time "T1" from the time the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be executed again.

Furthermore, in Figure 121, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X63," the event in which the power supply is cut off is then detected at timing "X65," and power-off processing is executed at timing "X66." The time from "X63" to "X65" is the design value "T4" of the period from when the event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs to when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. Furthermore, the time from "X65" to "X66" is "T5," the time from when the event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) is detected to when power-off processing is executed.

Figure 121 also shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power outage) (for example, when the power switch 11 is turned off, the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the breaker trips, a power outage occurs, etc.). In Figure 121, the voltage level when the power is on is "V0." The voltage level (power outage detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is "V1." When the power supply voltage is at voltage level "V0," the slot machine 10 operates normally. When the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1," it becomes possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off.

Figure 121 shows an example in which an event (power outage) occurs at timing "X63" in which the power supply is cut off. When the power outage occurs at timing "X63", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X65". The time from "X63" to "X65" is "T4". In other words, when the power outage occurs, the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at time "T4".

Furthermore, the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when that event is detected is designed to be at least 20 interrupt times (2.235 ms x 20 = 44.7 ms). Note that the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when that event is detected is not limited to 20 interrupt times, and can be set appropriately depending on the performance of the voltage monitoring device (power outage detection circuit) and the main CPU 55.

A voltage monitoring device (power interruption detection circuit) is provided on the main control board 50. When the power supply voltage drops below the power interruption detection level "V1," a power interruption detection signal is input to a predetermined bit in the input port 51, and a power interruption is detected by checking whether or not the signal has been input.

Furthermore, if the power supply voltage drops further from the power interruption detection level "V1" and falls below the main CPU 55's drive limit voltage level, the main CPU 55 will no longer be able to be driven (the operation of the main CPU 55 will no longer be guaranteed). Because the main control board 50 cannot execute power interruption processing when the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, it is set so that if a power interruption occurs at timing "X63", the power interruption processing can be completed by timing "X66".

Power interruption detection is performed within the interrupt process, which is executed every 2.235 ms. However, if two consecutive interrupts detect that the power supply voltage is below the power interruption detection level "V1," power interruption processing is performed in the next interrupt process. Therefore, in Figure 121, timing "X65" is the timing when the interrupt process detects that the power supply voltage is below the power interruption detection level "V1" twice in a row. The main control board 50 then performs power interruption processing in the next interrupt process (timing "X66" in Figure 121).

During power-off processing, the main control board 50 backs up data in a specified storage area of the RWM 53. When power supply is subsequently resumed (power is turned on, power is supplied, or power is restored from a power-off state), the main control board 50 executes power restoration processing and restores the backed-up data to a specified storage area of the RWM 53. This allows the state to be restored to the state it was in when the power-off state was detected when power is restored from a power-off state.

Figure 121 also illustrates the timing (timing "X63") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, and the timing (timing "X64") when the selector stuck notification is canceled and then executed again. Furthermore, Figure 121 matches the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated.

The ninth embodiment is configured to satisfy "T1 < T4." In other words, the time "T1" from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stagnation notification can be executed again is configured to be shorter than the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 121, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X63" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and control the system to issue a door open notification. Also, let's assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, at timing "X64" in Figure 121, the system will control the system to issue the selector stuck notification again, and then at timing "X65" it will detect the event in which the power supply is cut off, and then at timing "X66" it will execute the power outage process.

For this reason, if the cause of the selector jam error has not been eliminated and an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the device is controlled to execute the selector jam notification again before detecting the power outage and executing the power outage process. Therefore, during the power outage process, data indicating that the selector jam notification is being executed can be backed up, so that the selector jam notification can be executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from the power outage). Note that Figure 121 uses the selector jam error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error. However, when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, the device operates in the same way as in the case of a selector jam error.

Figure 124 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during a door-open notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed. In Figure 124, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, or when a power outage occurs.

When the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Specifically, when the front door 12 is opened at timing "X91" in Figure 124, the door switch 17 turns on, and the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it issues a door-open notification. Specifically, as a door-open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE," indicating that the front door 12 has been opened.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the door has been opened, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it executes a door open notification. Specifically, as a door open notification, it outputs a voice message saying "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Then, at timing "X92" in Figure 124, if the power supply is cut off (for example, the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, the breaker trips, or a power outage occurs), neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing. This causes data in specified memory areas on the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 to be backed up. Then, at timing "X93" in Figure 124, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Then, when power supply resumes at timing "X94" in Figure 124, the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to a specified storage area in the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power outage was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

Then, at timing "X95" in Figure 124, when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 cancels the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification cancel command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the cancellation of the door open notification. Then, upon receiving the notification cancel command, the sub-control board 80 cancels the door open notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door-open notification is issued. However, for example, the door-open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. Specifically, when a door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes ready to be opened. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is ready to be opened. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door-open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door-open notification can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door-open notification is being issued, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, the door-open notification can be issued when the power supply is resumed.

Here, it is conceivable that a perpetrator might fraudulently open the front door 12, then fraudulently cut off the power supply while the door-open notification is being issued, and then close the front door 12 while the power supply is cut off in an attempt to conceal the fraud. Even in such a case, the above-described configuration makes it possible to issue a door-open notification when the power supply is resumed, even if the front door 12 is closed, thereby preventing the above-described fraudulent activity.

Figure 125 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the power supply is cut off during a door-open notification, the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and then the door key is turned left (the release switch is operated) and the power supply is resumed. In Figure 125, as in Figure 124, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, or when a power outage occurs.

In Figure 125, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X101," the main control board 50 determines that the door has been opened. Then, as a door-open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE," indicating that the front door 12 is open. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, it sends a door-open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door-open command, it outputs the sound "Door is open" from the speaker 22 and displays the words "Door Open" on the image display device 23 as a door-open notification.

Then, at timing "X102" in Figure 125, when the power supply is cut off, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 operates, and the door-open notification also stops. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off process and back up data in a specified storage area. Then, at timing "X103" in Figure 125, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off.

Then, at timing "X104" in Figure 125, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12). This state continues until timing "X105" in Figure 125. Then, at timing "X105" in Figure 125, the power supply is resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12). At this time, because the door key is turned counterclockwise, the release switch is turned on when the power supply is resumed. Therefore, the main control board 50 does not issue a door-open alert. The main control board 50 also sends an alert release command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the door-open alert has been released. The sub-control board 80 then receives the alert release command and does not issue a door-open alert.

Furthermore, instead of being configured such that the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued when the front door 12 is opened, the door open notification may be issued, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. That is, when a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes ready to be opened, and the door switch 17 may be configured to detect this state. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door open notification may be issued even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being issued, and the front door 12 is then closed with the power supply cut off, and the power supply is then resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the release switch operated), the door open notification can be prevented from being issued.

Note that while the door open notification is being issued, if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and the door key is turned counterclockwise in this state (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12), the release switch will turn on and the door open notification will be released. However, it may also be configured as shown below, for example.

The door open notification can be canceled by closing the front door 12 and turning the door switch 17 off while the door open notification is being issued, then turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) to change the release switch from off to on, and then returning the door key to its original position to change the release switch from on to off. In this case, turning the door key in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position is the operation to cancel the door open notification.

Figure 126 is a time chart showing the operation of a system configured so that the door open notification is canceled when the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) to change the release switch from OFF to ON, and then the door key is returned to its original position to change the release switch from ON to OFF.

In Figure 126, as in Figure 125, the power supply is cut off during the door opening notification, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, and then the power supply is resumed when the door key is turned left (the release switch is operated). Also, in Figure 126, as in Figures 124 and 125, when the power supply is cut off means, for example, when the power plug is unplugged from the outlet, when the breaker trips, when a power outage occurs, etc.

In Figure 126, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on at the timing of "X111", the main control board 50 determines that it has detected the opening of the front door 12 (door open). Then, as a door open notification, the acquired number display LED 78 displays "dE", indicating that the front door 12 is open. Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it outputs the sound "Door is open" from the speaker 22 as a door open notification, and displays the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

Then, when the power supply is cut off at timing "X112" in Figure 126, neither the main control board 50 nor the sub-control board 80 will operate, and the door open notification will also stop. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute power-off processing and back up the data in the specified memory area.

Then, at timing "X113" in Figure 126, the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off. Then, at timing "X114" in Figure 126, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked). This state continues until timing "X116" in Figure 126.

Then, at timing "X115" in Figure 126, the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 was unlocked) and power supply is resumed. At this time, the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a power-off recovery process. This restores the data backed up during the power-off process to the specified storage areas of the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80. This restores the state to the state when the power-off was detected. At this time, the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is off, but the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 each execute a door-open notification.

Furthermore, because the door key is turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 is unlocked), the release switch turns on when power supply is resumed. However, simply turning on the release switch does not release the door open notification, so the main control board 50 and sub-control board 80 continue to output the door open notification without releasing it.

Then, at the timing of "X116" in Figure 126, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the main control board 50 releases the door open notification. As a result, the main control board 50 displays the number of wins before displaying "dE" on the win number display LED 78, and sends a notification release command to the sub-control board 80 indicating the release of the door open notification. Then, upon receiving the notification release command, the sub-control board 80 releases the door open notification that had been being executed by the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, instead of configuring the door switch 17 to turn on and issue a door-open notification when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 may be configured to issue a door-open notification, for example, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. In other words, when the door key is inserted into the door key slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 is ready to be opened, and the door switch 17 may be configured to detect this state. Then, when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened, the door switch 17 may be configured to issue a door-open notification even if the front door 12 is closed.

In this way, when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door 12 is open or can be opened, a door open notification can be issued. Furthermore, if the power supply is cut off while the door open notification is being issued, and then the front door 12 is closed with the power supply cut off, the door open notification can be issued when the power supply is subsequently resumed with the door key turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction from when the front door 12 was unlocked). Then, when the door key is returned to its original position and the release switch changes from on to off, the door open notification is cancelled.

This prevents the above-mentioned fraudulent behavior by fraudulently opening the front door 12, then cutting off the power supply while the door open alert is being issued, and then closing the front door 12 with the power supply cut off, even if the fraudulent behavior is concealed. When the power supply is resumed, the door open alert can be issued even if the front door is closed, preventing the fraudulent behavior described above.

The ninth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above and various modifications are possible, for example, as follows. (1) In the ninth embodiment, the door switch 17 is configured to be turned off when the front door 12 is closed and turned on when the front door 12 is open, but this is not limited to this. For example, the door switch 17 may be configured to be turned on when the front door 12 is closed and turned off when the front door 12 is open, thereby detecting whether the front door 12 is closed or open.

(2) In the ninth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on and the opening of the front door 12 is detected, an alert indicating that the front door 12 is open (door open alert) is issued, but this is not limited to this. For example, if a door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and then turned clockwise in this state, the door will be unlocked. At this time, the door switch 17 may detect that the door has been unlocked.

Then, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may issue a door-open notification even if the front door 12 is closed. Furthermore, the main control board 50 may, for example, display "dE" on the acquisition number display LED 78 as a door-open notification.

Furthermore, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked by the door switch 17 being turned on, it may send a command (door open command) indicating the opening of the front door 12 to the sub-control board 80, even if the front door 12 is closed. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door open command, it may execute a door open notification using the speaker 22, the image display device 23, etc., even if the front door 12 is closed. Furthermore, as the door open notification, the sub-control board 80 may, for example, output a voice message such as "Door is open" from the speaker 22, or display the words "Door open" on the image display device 23.

(3) In the ninth embodiment, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect that the front door 12 is open, both the main control board 50 and the sub-control board 80 issue a notification indicating that the front door 12 is open (door open notification). However, this is not limited to this. When the door switch 17 is turned on to detect that the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 issues a door open notification, but the sub-control board 80 does not necessarily have to issue a door open notification.

Furthermore, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect that the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 may not issue a door-open notification, and only the sub-control board 80 may issue a door-open notification. In this case, when the door switch 17 is turned on to detect that the front door 12 is open, the main control board 50 may not issue a door-open notification, but may send a command (door-open command) indicating that the front door 12 is open to the sub-control board 80. Then, when the sub-control board 80 receives the door-open command, it can issue a door-open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

(4) In the ninth embodiment, the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the main control board 50, but this is not limiting and the door switch 17 may also be electrically connected to the sub-control board 80. When the door switch 17 is turned on and the sub-control board 80 detects that the front door 12 has been opened, the sub-control board 80 can issue a door-open notification using the speaker 22, image display device 23, etc.

Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, commands are transmitted unidirectionally from the main control board 50 to the sub-control board 80. Therefore, if the door switch 17 is electrically connected to the sub-control board 80 and the opening of the front door 12 is detected by the sub-control board 80, the main control board 50 cannot detect the opening of the front door 12, nor can it receive a door open command from the sub-control board 80. Therefore, even if the front door 12 is opened, the main control board 50 does not issue a door open notification, nor does it stop the game from proceeding as if the door were open. In other words, the main control board 50 can continue the game even when the front door 12 is open.

(5) In the ninth embodiment, the door open notification is canceled when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off while the door open notification is being executed, and the door key is then turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on. However, this is not limited to this. For example, the door open notification may be canceled when the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off while the door open notification is being executed, and the door key is then turned counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when the front door 12 is unlocked) to change the release switch from off to on, and then the door key is returned to its original position to change the release switch from on to off.

In this case, simply turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) and turning the release switch from off to on will not cancel the door open notification, but will continue. Turning the door key in the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12 and then returning the door key to its original position will cancel the door open notification.

(6) In the ninth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, thereby preventing the return receiving opening 131 from being positioned there. However, this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 113, the return receiving opening 131 and the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 may be positioned to the left of the vertically below gap 112, thereby preventing the return receiving opening 131 from being positioned vertically below gap 112. In this case, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is also not positioned vertically below gap 112.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the distance "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, it is possible to push one medal M into the gap 112 and have it remain within the gap 112. In this case, the pushed-in one medal M will not become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, since the return receiving opening 131 is not located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but instead falls into the storage receiving opening 35a and can be stored in the hopper 35.

Furthermore, even if the upper edge 135 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the distance "W" between the gaps 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medals M, it is possible to push two medals M into the gap 112 and have the two medals remain within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become impossible to remove from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Just as when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M pushed into the gap 112, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will not fall into the return receiving port 131, but will fall into the storage receiving port 35a and be stored in the hopper 35.

(7) In the ninth embodiment, the upper edge 135 of the return member 130 is positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120, but this is not limited to this. For example, as shown in FIG. 114, a blocking member 140 may be provided vertically below the gap 112, and this blocking member 140 may block the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below the gap 112. In other words, the blocking member 140 may block the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below the gap 112. The blocking member 140 may also be configured to be approximately horizontal.

In this case, the medal M placed in the gap 112 can be placed on top of the blocking member 140. When the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the impact causes the medal M to fall from the gap 112. At this time, the portion of the return receiving opening 131 that is vertically below the gap 112 is blocked by the blocking member 140, so the medal M that falls from the gap 112 does not fall into the return receiving opening 131, but instead falls into the storage receiving opening 35a and can be stored in the hopper 35.

(8) In the ninth embodiment, the return receiving opening 131 is not positioned vertically below the gap 112 between the medal selector 110 and the chute member 120. However, this is not limiting. For example, as shown in FIG. 115, part of the return receiving opening 131 may be positioned vertically below the gap 112. Furthermore, even if part of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, for example, if the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than the thickness "T" of the medal M, pushing one medal M into the gap 112 will cause the medal M to remain within the gap 112. In this case, the pushed-in medal M will not become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

If the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause one medal M to fly out of the gap 112. In this case, because part of the return receiving opening 131 is located vertically below the gap 112, the one medal M that flies out of the gap 112 falls into the return receiving opening 131, passes through the medal return passage 132, passes through the medal payout opening 16, and is guided to the medal tray 19.

Furthermore, even if part of the return receiving opening 131 is positioned vertically below the gap 112, if, for example, the spacing "W" of the gap 112 is slightly narrower than twice the thickness "T" of the medals M, pushing two medals M into the gap 112 will allow the two medals to remain within the gap 112. In this case, the two pushed-in medals M will not become unable to be removed from the gap 112.

Furthermore, if the front door 12 is closed with two medals M still pushed into the gap 112, the impact may cause two medals M to fly out of the gap 112. Just as when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still pushed into the gap 112, the two medals M that fly out of the gap 112 will fall into the return receiving opening 131, pass through the medal return passage 132, pass through the medal payout opening 16, and be guided to the medal tray 19.

(9) In the ninth embodiment, the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, the length "L2" of the screw 127, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 are configured to satisfy "L1 < L2" and "L1 < L3." In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 is longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, and the width "L3" of the screw 127 is also thicker (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but this is not limited to this.

For example, the screw 127 may be configured so that "L1 < L2" and "L1 > L3" are satisfied. In other words, the length "L2" of the screw 127 may be longer (larger) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121, but the width "L3" of the screw 127 may be thinner (smaller) than the width "L1" of the medal guide passage 121. This allows the removed screw 127 to enter the medal guide passage 121 when it comes off the back surface of the front door 12, preventing the removed screw 127 from being lost.

As mentioned above, a locking portion is provided at a predetermined position on the chute member 120 to lock the chute member 120 to the back surface of the front door 12. Then, with the sheet member 120 locked to the back surface of the front door 12 by the locking portion, the chute member 120 is fixed to the back surface of the front door 12 by a screw 127 passed through a threaded hole in the fixing portion 126. Therefore, even if the screw 127 comes loose, the chute member 120 will not fall off the back surface of the front door 12.

(10) In the ninth embodiment, when one medal M has fallen into the gap 112, other medals M cannot pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120. However, this is not limiting, and the other medals M may be allowed to pass from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120 even when one medal M has fallen into the gap 112. As a result, when the front door 12 is closed with one medal M still in the gap 112, even if the one medal M remains in the gap 112, it does not prevent the other medals M from passing from the medal selector 110 toward the chute member 120, so progress of the game can be unimpeded.

(11) In the ninth embodiment, five digits (displays), digit 1 to digit 5, were provided, and dynamic lighting control was performed to sequentially light up digits 5 to 1 with five interrupts as one cycle. However, this is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be used in which four digits, digit 1 to digit 4, are provided, and digits 4 to 1 are sequentially lighted up by dynamic lighting control with four interrupts as one cycle. In other words, the number of digits (displays) is not limited to five and can be set appropriately as needed. Furthermore, the cycle of dynamic lighting control is not limited to five interrupts and can be set appropriately depending on the number of digits, etc.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, the design value "T1" of the time from when the selector stagnation notification is temporarily canceled until when the selector stagnation notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the time from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected, are configured to satisfy "T1 < T4." However, conversely, they may also be configured to satisfy "T1 > T4."

Figure 122 is a time chart showing the operation mode when the reset switch 153 is operated without removing the cause of the selector stuck error. It shows the relationship between the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily released until the selector stuck notification can be executed again, and the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs until the event that cuts off the power supply is detected.

In Figure 122, the on/off of the selector dwell detection, the on/off of the door open detection, the on/off of the selector dwell notification, the on/off of the door open notification, the on/off of the reset switch 153, and the on/off of the release switch are the same as in Figure 117. Also, the timing of "X71", "X72", and "X73" in Figure 122 correspond to the timing of "X21", "X22", and "X23" in Figure 117, respectively.

In Figure 122, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification. If there is no event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) thereafter, at timing "X76", the main control board 50 will again be able to issue the selector stuck notification. The time from "X73" to "X76" is the time "T1" from when the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled until the selector stuck notification can be issued again.

Furthermore, in Figure 122, assuming that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at timing "X73", the event in which the power supply is cut off is then detected at timing "X74", and power-off processing is executed at timing "X75". The time from "X73" to "X74" is the design value "T4" of the period from when the event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs to when the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. Furthermore, the time from "X74" to "X75" is the time "T5" from when the event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) is detected to when power-off processing is executed.

Furthermore, as with FIG. 121, FIG. 122 also shows the voltage level when an event occurs in which the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off (power outage). In FIG. 122, the voltage level when the power is on is set to "V0." Furthermore, the voltage level (power outage detection level) at which it is possible to detect the occurrence of an event in which the power supply is cut off is set to "V1."

Figure 122 also shows an example in which an event (power outage) occurs at timing "X73" in which the power supply is cut off. When a power outage occurs at timing "X73", the power supply voltage drops to voltage level "V1" at timing "X74". The time from "X73" to "X74" is "T4". Furthermore, since power outage processing cannot be executed if the power supply voltage falls below the drive limit voltage level, when a power outage occurs at timing "X73" in Figure 122, the power outage processing is set to end by timing "X75".

Figure 122 also illustrates the timing (timing "X73") when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation where the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, and the timing (timing "X76") when the selector stuck notification can be executed again after it has been temporarily canceled, provided that no event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power failure). Figure 122 also matches the timing when an event occurs in which the power supply is cut off (power failure) with the timing when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) in a situation in which the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated.

The system is configured to satisfy "T1 > T4." In other words, the design value "T4" of the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs to when that event that cuts off the power supply is detected is configured to be shorter than the time "T1" until the selector stuck notification can be executed again after the selector stuck notification has been canceled, provided that no event that cuts off the power supply (power outage) occurs.

In Figure 122, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X73" while the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated, the main control board 50 will temporarily cancel the selector stuck notification and issue a door open notification. Also, assume that an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation (on) of the reset switch 153. In this case, the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected at timing "X74" in Figure 122, and then power off processing is executed at timing "X75". If no event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs thereafter, the selector stuck notification can be issued again at timing "X76" in Figure 122.

For this reason, if the cause of the selector stuck error has not been eliminated and an event in which the power supply is cut off (power outage) occurs at approximately the same time as the reset switch 153 is operated (on), the selector stuck notification is temporarily canceled, and then the power outage is detected and power outage processing is executed before the selector stuck notification is executed again. Therefore, since the data indicating the execution of the selector stuck notification is not backed up during the power outage processing, it is possible to prevent the selector stuck notification from being executed when the power supply is resumed (recovered from power outage).

In Figure 122, at timing "X75", a door open notification is issued, not a selector jam notification. For this reason, data indicating that a door open notification is being issued is backed up during power-off processing, so when power supply is resumed (recovered from power outage), a door open notification is issued. Also, in Figure 122, the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error was explained using a selector jam error as an example, but in the case of a selector pass error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error, if the reset switch 153 is operated without eliminating the cause of the error, the operation will be the same as in the case of a selector jam error.

(13) In the ninth embodiment, when the reset switch 153 is operated in a situation where the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, the selector dwell notification is temporarily canceled and then executed again without any operation. However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, if the reset switch 153 is operated, the selector dwell notification is canceled and a door open notification is executed. Thereafter, when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, if the release switch is operated, the door open notification is canceled and the selector dwell notification is executed again.

Figure 123 is a time chart showing the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated. In Figure 123, at timing "X81," if a medal M becomes stuck in the medal passage 111 of the medal selector 110 and the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b remain on, the main control board 50 determines that a selector retention error has been detected.

When the main control board 50 detects a selector stagnation error, it displays "CE," indicating a selector stagnation error, on the acquisition count display LED 78 as a selector stagnation notification, and sends a selector stagnation command to the sub-control board 80. Furthermore, when the sub-control board 80 receives the selector stagnation command, it outputs a voice message saying "Please call an attendant" from the speaker 22 as a selector stagnation notification, and displays the words "Selector stagnation error" on the image display device 23.

Then, at timing "X82" in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened and the door switch 17 is turned on, the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, but while the selector dwell notification is being executed, it does not execute a door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification. Also, when the main control board 50 detects that the front door 12 is open, it sends a door open command to the sub-control board 80 indicating that the front door 12 is open. However, while the selector dwell notification is being executed, the sub-control board 80 does not execute a door open notification and continues the selector dwell notification even if it receives the door open command.

Then, at timing "X83" in Figure 123, if the front door 12 is opened and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, and the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will cancel the selector dwell notification and issue a door open notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 will switch from "CE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "dE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an error clear command to the sub-control board 80. Then, upon receiving the error clear command, the sub-control board 80 clears the selector stuck notification and issues a door open notification. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Please call an attendant" to "Door is open," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Selector stuck error" to "Door open."

Then, at timing "X84" in Figure 123, if the front door 12 is closed while the cause of the selector retention error has not been eliminated, the door switch 17 will turn off. As a result, the main control board 50 will no longer detect that the front door 12 is open. However, the door open notification will not be canceled even if the front door 12 is closed and the door switch 17 is turned off, and will continue until the release switch is operated (turned on).

Then, at timing "X85" in Figure 123, if the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the selector dwell error has not been eliminated, and the door key is turned counterclockwise (counterclockwise) and the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 will release the door open notification and issue a selector dwell notification. Specifically, the display on the acquisition count display LED 78 will change from "dE," which indicates a selector dwell error, to "CE," which indicates that the front door 12 is open.

Furthermore, when the release switch is operated (turned on), the main control board 50 sends an alarm release command to the sub-control board 80, indicating that the door open alarm should be released. Then, upon receiving the alarm release command, the sub-control board 80 releases the door open alarm and issues a selector stuck alarm. Specifically, it switches the audio output from the speaker 22 from "Door is open" to "Please call an attendant," and switches the display on the image display device 23 from "Door open" to "Selector stuck error."

Here, Figure 123 uses a selector retention error as an example to explain the operation when the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been eliminated, and when the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been eliminated. However, this is not limited to this, and the same operation as in the case of a selector retention error occurs in the case of a selector passage error, hopper empty error, or hopper jam error when the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the error has not been eliminated, or when the release switch is operated when the front door 12 is closed and the cause of the error has not been eliminated.

In addition, in Figure 123, when the front door 12 is opened, the door switch 17 is turned on and a door open notification is issued. However, for example, the door open notification may be issued when it is detected that the front door 12 is ready to be opened. Specifically, when the door key is inserted into the door key insertion slot of the front door 12 and turned clockwise in this state to unlock the front door 12, the front door 12 becomes ready to be opened. At this time, the door switch 17 may be configured to detect that the lock has been released and the front door 12 is ready to be opened.

The main control board 50 may be configured to issue a door open notification when it detects that the front door 12 has been unlocked and can now be opened by the door switch 17 being turned on, even if the front door 12 is closed. In this case, after the front door 12 is closed and locked, the main control board 50 may be configured to cancel the door open notification by turning the door key counterclockwise to operate (turn on) the release switch.

In this way, when a predetermined error is detected, a predetermined error notification can be made. After that, when it is detected that the front door 12 has been opened or can be opened, and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (reset switch 1) is performed.
When the operation of 53 is performed, the predetermined error notification is cancelled once, and then the door open notification is enabled. After that, when the front door 12 is closed or locked and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of the release switch) is performed, the door open notification is cancelled, and then the predetermined error notification is enabled again.

This allows you to confirm that the reset switch 153 is functioning normally and provides a reminder that the cause of the error has not been eliminated. In addition, if the reset switch 153 is operated when the front door 12 is open and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification can be canceled and a door open notification can be issued, providing a reminder that the front door 12 is open, thereby preventing fraudulent activity.

(14) In the ninth embodiment, the processes related to error detection, error notification, and cancellation of the error notification are executed in interrupt processing. Furthermore, there are cases where the same interrupt processing cancels the error notification and then executes the error notification again. In the example shown in FIG. 117, when the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) at timing "X23" in a situation where the cause of the selector jam error has not been eliminated, the selector jam notification is canceled and a door open notification is executed. Thereafter, at timing "X24," the door open notification is canceled and a selector jam notification is executed again.

However, there are cases in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then executed again during the same interrupt process. In such cases, the door open notification is not executed. In this way, depending on the order of error detection, error notification execution, and error notification cancellation during the interrupt process, there are cases in which the selector dwell notification is cancelled and then the selector dwell notification is executed again without executing the door open notification.

Furthermore, a single interrupt process may execute only one of the processes related to error detection, error notification, and error notification cancellation. In such a case, if the reset switch 153 is operated (turned on) when the cause of the selector jam error has not been eliminated, the selector jam notification may be canceled, a door open notification may be issued, and then the door open notification may be canceled and the selector jam notification may be issued again.

(15) In the ninth embodiment, when the return member 130 is fixed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the front door 12, the upper edge 135 is configured to be approximately horizontal. However, this is not limited to this, and the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the front side to the back side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height is higher on the front side and lower on the back side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the back surface of the front door 12. For this reason, the medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 tends to remain within the gap 112. Therefore, if the front door 12 is closed with the medal M still in the gap 112, the medal M is unlikely to fall out of the gap 112 even if an impact is applied when the front door 12 is closed.

When one medal M remains in the gap 112, another medal M inserted through the medal insertion port 47 hits the first medal M in the gap 112 and stops. At this time, the other medal M remains in the medal passage 111, causing the insertion sensor 44a and insertion sensor 44b to remain on, which causes a selector retention notification, making it possible to indirectly detect that a medal M has remained in the gap 112.

Also, conversely to the above, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height gradually decreases from the back side to the front side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107. In other words, the upper edge 135 may be inclined so that its height is higher on the back side and lower on the front side in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107.

In this case, when a medal M is placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135, a force acts on the medal M to slide toward the front in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the paper in Figure 107. In other words, a force acts on the medal M to slide in the opposite direction from the back surface of the front door 12 (toward the interior of the cabinet 13). For this reason, a medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 will easily slide down from the gap 112 toward the interior of the cabinet 13. Therefore, a medal M placed in the gap 112 and placed on the upper edge 135 will be less likely to remain in the gap 112.

(16) In the ninth embodiment, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 is the storage receiving port 35a. The storage receiving port 35a is located below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). However, this is not limiting, and for example, the upper edge of the side wall of the hopper 35 may be located above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). In other words, the opening at the top of the hopper 35 may be located above the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121).

In this case, for example, a recess is provided at a predetermined position on the side wall of the hopper 35, cutting out from the upper end of the side wall of the hopper 35 downward. The lower end of this recess is positioned below the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121). This recess can then be used as a storage receiving port 35a that receives medals M guided by the chute member 120.

In this case, when the front door 12 is closed, the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) faces the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a. Also, when the front door 12 is closed, the vicinity of the end of the chute member 120 on the hopper 35 side (the downstream end of the medal guide passage 121) may be inserted inside the recessed portion serving as the storage receiving port 35a.

(17) The first to ninth embodiments and the various modifications shown in the first to ninth embodiments may not be implemented alone, but may be implemented in appropriate combinations.

<Addendum> The inventions (original inventions) described in the original specification, etc. of this application can be, for example, Original Invention 1 to Original Invention 15 below. The problems that the original inventions attempt to solve, the means for solving the problems related to the original inventions, and the effects of the original inventions are as follows. However, this does not mean that the inventions described in this specification are limited to Original Invention 1 to Original Invention 15.

1. Original Invention 1 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 1 The original invention relates to a gaming machine having a medal selector that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port, a chute member that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper, and a return member that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray. Gaming machines that have a medal selector that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port, a chute member that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper, and a return member that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray are known (see, for example, JP 2016-013339 A). The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately position the medal selector, chute member, and return member.

(b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 1 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a medal tray (19). A gap (112) with a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member; a return acceptance port (131) is provided above the return member to accept medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector; and the return acceptance port is not located vertically below the gap (for example, an upper edge 135 is located as shown in FIG. 107).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 1 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return slot and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, medals placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to players.

2. Original Invention 2 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 2: Same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 2 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a medal tray (19). A gap (112) is provided at a predetermined interval between the medal selector and the chute member. A return receiving port (131) is provided above the return member to receive medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector. A storage receiving port (35a) is provided above the hopper to receive medals guided by the chute member. The return receiving port is not located vertically below the gap, and the gap is located above the storage receiving port.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 2 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls from the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return receiving port and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, medals placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to players. Furthermore, according to the original invention, medals that fall from the gap can be made to fall into the storage receiving port and be stored in the hopper. Therefore, medals placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from scattering inside the cabinet.

3. Original Invention 3 (a) The problem that Original Invention 3 aims to solve is the same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 3 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted from a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19); a gap (112) with a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member; a return receiving port (131) is provided above the return member to receive medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector; the return receiving port is not located vertically below the gap; and when the distance between the gap is "W"("W" in Figure 109) and the thickness of the medal is "T"("T" in Figure 109), It is characterized by being configured so that "W ≒ 2 × T" (Figure 109).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 3 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return slot and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player. Furthermore, according to the original invention, the gap spacing is approximately twice the thickness of the medal, so when only one medal is placed in the gap, the medal will not become unable to be removed from the gap. Furthermore, according to the original invention, when only one medal is placed in the gap, the medal can be made to fall through the gap when the front door is closed, so that the medal will not interfere with the passage of other medals subsequently inserted through the medal insertion slot.

4. Original Invention 4 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 4: Same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 4 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector to a medal tray (19). A gap (112) is provided at a predetermined interval between the medal selector and the chute member. A return acceptance port (131) is provided above the return member to accept medals not permitted for insertion by the medal selector. The return acceptance port is located vertically below the gap (Fig. 115).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 4 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, it can be made to fall into the return acceptance port, allowing it to be dispensed into the medal tray.

5. Original Invention 5 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 5: Same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problems of Original Invention 5 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted from a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19), wherein a gap (112) is provided at a predetermined interval between the medal selector and the chute member, and a return receiving opening (131) is provided above the return member to receive medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector, and the return receiving opening is not located vertically below the gap, and the chute member comprises: a medal guide passage (121) that guides medals from the medal selector side toward the hopper side, and a bottom surface portion (122) that forms the bottom surface of the medal guide passage, It has a first side wall (inner wall 123) that forms one (inner) side of the medal guide passage, and a second side wall (outer wall 124) that forms the other (outer) side of the medal guide passage, and a step (125) that is lower on the hopper side than on the medal selector side is provided at a position on the bottom surface that corresponds to the middle of the medal guide passage, and is characterized by being configured so that when the height of the step is "H1" ("H1" in Figure 110), the height of the first side wall is "H2" ("H2" in Figure 110), and the height of the second side wall is "H3" ("H3" in Figure 110), then "H1 < H2" and "H1 < H3" (Figure 110).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 5 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return slot and therefore from being dispensed into the medal tray. Therefore, the medal placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player. Furthermore, according to the original invention, by causing medals moving from the upstream side to the downstream side of the medal guide path to fall down the step portion, medals that have lost momentum due to contact with the first side wall portion or the second side wall portion can be accelerated. Furthermore, according to the original invention, by making the height "H1" of the step portion lower than the height "H2" of the first side wall portion and the height "H3" of the second side wall portion, when a medal falls down the step portion, it is possible to prevent the medal from climbing over the first side wall portion or the second side wall portion and flying out of the medal guide path.

6. Original Invention 6 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 6: Same as Original Invention 1. (b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 6 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises: a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted through a medal insertion port (47); a chute member (120) that guides medals that are permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a hopper (35); and a return member (130) that guides medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector to a medal tray (19); a gap (112) with a predetermined interval is provided between the medal selector and the chute member; a return receiving port (131) is provided above the return member to receive medals that are not permitted to be inserted by the medal selector; and the return receiving port is not located vertically below the gap. It is characterized by the configuration such that when one medal ("one medal M" in Figure 111) has entered the gap, other medals ("other medals M" in Figure 111) cannot pass from the medal selector toward the chute member.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 6 According to the original invention, if a medal is placed in the gap between the medal selector and the chute member during maintenance and then the front door is closed without remembering to do so, and the medal falls through the gap, the medal can be prevented from falling into the return slot and therefore from being paid out to the medal tray. Therefore, the medal placed in the gap during maintenance can be prevented from being given to the player. Furthermore, according to the original invention, when one medal has fallen into the gap, other medals inserted through the medal insertion slot can be made to hit the one medal that has fallen into the gap and stop, causing them to become trapped in the medal selector. Then, by detecting other medals trapped in the medal selector, it is possible to indirectly detect that a medal has fallen into the gap.

7. Original Invention 7 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 7 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that, when an error is detected, issues an error notification according to the type of error detected. Conventionally, gaming machines are known that, when an error such as medals becoming stuck in a medal selector or an error such as an emptying of medals in a hopper is detected, issue an error notification according to the type of error detected, and cancel the error notification when the cause of the error is eliminated and the reset switch is operated (see, for example, JP 2021-052892 A). The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately cancel the error notification according to the situation when the reset switch is operated.

(b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 7 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (Embodiment 9) is characterized in that, when a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) can be executed ("X21" in FIG. 117), and when an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (operation of reset switch 153) is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated ("X23" in FIG. 117), the predetermined error notification is once canceled ("X23" in FIG. 117), and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again ("X24" in FIG. 117).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 7 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed even if the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification can be temporarily canceled to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally. Then, by making it possible to execute the specified error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated.

8. Original Invention 8 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 8: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 8 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment): comprises a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be able to open and close; When a predetermined error (selector stagnation error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector stagnation notification) can be executed ("X31" in FIG. 118); When an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (operation of reset switch 153) is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated ("X33" in FIG. 118), the predetermined error notification is once canceled ("X33" in FIG. 118), and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again ("X34" in FIG. 118); When it is detected that the front door has been opened or can be opened, a door open notification can be executed ("X36" in FIG. 118); Even if an operation to cancel the door open notification is performed when the front door is open or can be opened (turning the door key counterclockwise (the opposite direction to when unlocking the front door 12) and turning on the release switch), the door open notification can continue to be executed without being canceled ("X37" in Figure 118).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 8 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a predetermined error notification is performed even if the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, the predetermined error notification can be temporarily canceled to confirm that the operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is functioning properly. Then, by making the predetermined error notification executable again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated. Furthermore, according to the original invention, even if an operation to cancel a door open notification is performed when the front door is open or can be opened, the door open notification continues without being canceled, thereby preventing fraudulent activity without issuing any notification even when the front door is open or can be opened.

9. Original Invention 9 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 9: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 9 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) comprises a medal selector (110) that selects medals inserted from a medal insertion slot (47), said medal selector having: a medal passage (111) through which medals inserted from said medal insertion slot pass; and insertion sensor A (insertion sensor 44a) and insertion sensor B (insertion sensor 44b) that are provided in said medal passage and are capable of detecting medals (insertion sensor B is arranged downstream of insertion sensor A), and when a predetermined error (selector retention error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector retention notification) can be executed ("X41" in FIG. 119), When an operation to cancel the specified error notification (operation of reset switch 153) is performed in a situation where the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated ("X43" in Figure 119), the specified error notification is canceled once ("X43" in Figure 119) and then the specified error notification can be made to be executed again ("X44" in Figure 119).When the time from the cancellation of the specified error notification to the time when the specified error notification can be made to be executed again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X43" to "X44" in Figure 119), and the time from when a medal inserted through the medal insertion slot is detected by insertion sensor A to when it is no longer detected by insertion sensor B is "T2" (the time "T2" from "X43" to "X45" in Figure 119), the configuration is such that T1 < T2.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 9 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a predetermined error notification is performed, even if the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is functioning properly by temporarily canceling the predetermined error notification. Then, by enabling the predetermined error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated. Furthermore, suppose that an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is performed and a medal is inserted through the medal insertion slot to confirm whether the predetermined error notification has been canceled. Then, suppose that the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot is detected by insertion sensor A at the same time that the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated. If the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, the predetermined error notification is executed again, and the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot is no longer detected by insertion sensor B. Therefore, the medal inserted through the medal insertion slot does not pass through insertion sensor A and insertion sensor B properly, and the process of adding "1" to the number of bets or credits for that medal can be prevented.

10. Original Invention 10 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 10: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for Solving the Problems of Original Invention 10 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment): is provided with "N" (N≧2) (5) indicators (digits), is capable of executing dynamic lighting control to sequentially light up the "N" indicators, and is capable of issuing a predetermined error notification (selector stagnation notification) when a predetermined error (selector stagnation error) is detected ("X51" in FIG. 120), and when an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (operation of reset switch 153) is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated ("X53" in FIG. 120), the predetermined error notification is temporarily canceled ("X53" in FIG. 120), and then the predetermined error notification can be issued again ("X54" in FIG. 120), The time from when the specified error notification is cancelled until when it can be made again is "T1" (the time "T1" from "X53" to "X54" in FIG. 120), and the time from when the first indicator (digit 5) is lit by dynamic lighting control until when the Nth indicator (digit 1) is lit is "T2" (the time "T3" from "X53" to "X55" in FIG. 120), the configuration is such that T1 < T2.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 10 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a predetermined error notification is performed even if the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, canceling the predetermined error notification makes it possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is functioning normally. Then, by enabling the predetermined error notification again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated. Furthermore, according to the original invention, between the time when the predetermined error notification is canceled and the time when the predetermined error notification is enabled again, each of the "N" display devices will either light up only once or not light up at all. For this reason, it is difficult for the human eye to confirm the information displayed on the "N" display devices between the time when the predetermined error notification is canceled and the time when the predetermined error notification is enabled again. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a user from mistakenly believing that the cause of the predetermined error has been eliminated based on the information displayed on the "N" display devices between the time when the predetermined error notification is canceled and the time when the predetermined error notification is enabled again.

11. Original Invention 11 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 11: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for solving the problem of original invention 11 (corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses) The original invention (ninth embodiment) is characterized in that it comprises a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be able to open and close, and when a predetermined error (selector stuck error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector stuck notification) can be executed ("X81" in Figure 123), and thereafter, when it is detected that the front door has been opened or is able to be opened and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification (operation of reset switch 153) is performed, the predetermined error notification is canceled and then a door open notification can be executed ("X83" in Figure 123), and thereafter, when the front door is closed or locked and the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, and an operation to cancel the door open notification (operation of release switch) is performed, the door open notification is canceled and then the predetermined error notification can be issued again ("X85" in Figure 123).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 11 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a specified error notification is performed in a situation where the front door is open or can be opened and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification is temporarily canceled and a door open notification is executed, making it possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally and preventing fraudulent activity by notifying the driver that the front door has been opened. Furthermore, according to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a door open notification is performed in a situation where the front door is closed or locked and the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the door open notification is canceled and the specified error notification can be executed again, making it possible to notify the driver again that the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated.

12. Original Invention 12 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 12: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for Solving the Problem of Original Invention 12 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment): When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) can be executed ("X61" in FIG. 121); When an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated ("X63" in FIG. 121), the predetermined error notification is temporarily canceled ("X63" in FIG. 121) and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again ("X64" in FIG. 121); The time from the temporary cancellation of the predetermined error notification to the time when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time from "X63" to "X64" in FIG. 121 is "T1"); When the design value for the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply occurs ("X63" in Figure 121) to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected ("X65" in Figure 121) is "T2" (the time from "X63" to "X65" in Figure 121 is "T4"), it is characterized by being configured so that T1 < T2.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 12 According to the original invention, when an operation to cancel a predetermined error notification is performed even if the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, the predetermined error notification can be temporarily canceled to confirm that the operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is functioning normally. Then, by enabling the predetermined error notification to be executed again, it is possible to notify again that the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated. Furthermore, according to the original invention, if an event in which the power supply is cut off occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation to cancel the predetermined error notification when the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated, the predetermined error notification can be executed again before the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected. Therefore, since data indicating that the predetermined error notification is being executed can be backed up during the power-off process, the predetermined error notification can be executed when the power supply is resumed.

13. Original Invention 13 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 13: Same as Original Invention 7. (b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 13 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment): When a predetermined error (selector congestion error) is detected, a predetermined error notification (selector congestion notification) can be executed ("X71" in FIG. 122); When an operation to cancel the predetermined error notification is performed in a situation where the cause of the predetermined error has not been eliminated ("X73" in FIG. 122), the predetermined error notification is temporarily canceled ("X73" in FIG. 122) and then the predetermined error notification can be executed again ("X76" in FIG. 122); The time from the temporary cancellation of the predetermined error notification to the time when the predetermined error notification can be executed again is "T1" (the time from "X73" to "X76" in FIG. 122 is "T1"); When the design value for the period from when an event that cuts off the power supply occurs ("X73" in Figure 122) to when the event that cuts off the power supply is detected ("X74" in Figure 122) is "T2" (the time from "X73" to "X74" in Figure 122 is "T4"), it is characterized by being configured so that T1 > T2.

(c) Effect of Original Invention 13 According to the original invention, even if the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, when an operation to cancel the specified error notification is performed, it is possible to confirm that the operation to cancel the specified error notification is functioning normally by temporarily canceling the specified error notification. Furthermore, according to the original invention, if an event in which the power supply is cut off occurs approximately simultaneously with the operation to cancel the specified error notification when the cause of the specified error has not been eliminated, the specified error notification is temporarily canceled, and then the event in which the power supply is cut off is detected before the specified error notification is executed again. Therefore, since data indicating the execution of the specified error notification is not backed up during the power-off process, it is possible to prevent the specified error notification from being executed when the power supply is resumed.

14. Original Invention 14 (a) Problem to be Solved by Original Invention 14 The original invention relates to a gaming machine that, when detecting the opening of a front door, issues a door-open notification indicating that the front door is open. Gaming machines that, when detecting the opening of a front door, issue a door-open notification indicating that the front door is open are known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-117888). In the above-described conventional gaming machine, once a door-open notification is initiated, the door-open notification continues until the front door is detected as closed, and then ends the door-open notification. The problem to be solved by the original invention is to appropriately execute control related to the door-open notification in accordance with the status of the front door when power supply is subsequently resumed when power supply is interrupted during the execution of the door-open notification.

(b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 14 (Note that corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment) is characterized by comprising a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be able to open and close, and when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door is in an open state or in an openable state, a door-open notification can be executed ("X91" in FIG. 124), and when the power supply is cut off while the door-open notification is being executed ("X92" in FIG. 124) and the front door is then closed while the power supply is cut off ("X93" in FIG. 124), when the power supply is resumed, a door-open notification can be executed ("X94" in FIG. 124).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 14 Even if someone tries to conceal their fraudulent act by opening the front door fraudulently, then cutting off the power supply fraudulently while the door-open notification is being issued, and then closing the front door with the power supply cut off, according to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed, the door-open notification can be issued even if the front door is closed, thereby preventing the fraudulent act described above.

15. Original Invention 15 (a) Problem to be solved by Original Invention 15: Same as Original Invention 14. (b) Means for solving the problem of Original Invention 15 (Note: Corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.) The original invention (ninth embodiment): comprises a front door (12) attached to a cabinet (13) so as to be able to open and close, and when power is supplied and it is detected that the front door is in an open state or in an openable state, a door-open notification can be executed ("X91" in FIG. 124, "X111" in FIG. 126), and when the power supply is cut off while the door-open notification is being executed ("X92" in FIG. 124) and the front door is then closed with the power supply cut off ("X93" in FIG. 124), when the power supply is resumed, a door-open notification can be executed ("X94" in FIG. 124), If the power supply is cut off while a door-opening notification is being executed ("X112" in FIG. 126) and the front door is then closed with the power supply cut off ("X113" in FIG. 126), when the power supply is resumed with the door key used to unlock the front door turned in the opposite direction to when the front door was unlocked, the door-opening notification can be executed ("X115" in FIG. 126).

(c) Effect of Original Invention 15 Even if someone attempts to conceal their fraudulent activity by fraudulently opening the front door, then fraudulently cutting off the power supply while the door-open notification is being executed, and then closing the front door with the power supply cut off, according to the original invention, when the power supply is resumed, the door-open notification can be executed even if the front door is closed, thereby preventing the fraudulent activity described above.

10 Slot machine (game machine) 10a Lower panel 11 Power switch 12 Front door 12c Control panel 13 Cabinet 13a Bottom plate 13b Back plate 13c Top plate 14 Pattern display device 15 Medal payout device 16 Medal payout port 17 Door switch 18 Display window 19 Medal tray 21 Performance lamp (decorative lamp section) 22 Speaker 23 Image display device 24 (24A, 24B) Operation button 31 Reel 32 Motor 33 Reel sensor 35 Hopper 35a Storage receiving port 36 Hopper motor 37a, 37b Payout sensor 40a 1 bet switch 40b 3 bet switch 41 Start switch 42 Stop switch 43 Settlement switch 44a, 44b Insertion sensor 45 Blocker 46 Passage sensor 47 Medal insertion slot 50 Main control board (main control means) 50a Resistor 50b Mark number 50c Mark 50d Boundary line 50e DP mark 51 Input port 52 Output port 53 RWM 54 ROM 55 Main CPU (main chip) 55a Pin 55b Recessed portion 55c Stepped portion 55d Stepped portion 55e Two-dimensional code 55f Model number sticker 55g Product name 55h Company name 55i Stepped portion 55j Hidden characters 56 Socket 56a Hollow portion 56b Stepped portion 56c Pin insertion port 56d Socket pin 56e Notch portion 57 Connector 57a Foot portion 57b Lead wire 61 Role selection means 62 Winning flag control means 63 Push order instruction number selection means 64 Performance group number selection means 65 Reel control means 66 Winning determination means 67 Payout means 71 Control command transmission means 73 Setting value display LED 74 Management information display LED (role ratio monitor) 75 Display board 76 Credit number display LED 77 Advantageous period display LED 78 Acquisition number display LED 79 Status display LED 79a 1 bet display LED 79b 2 bet display LED 79c 3 bet display LED 79d Game start display LED 79e Insertion display LED 79f Replay display LED 80 Sub-control board (sub-control means) 81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM 84 ROM 85 Sub-CPU 86 Push button 87 Cross key 91 Performance output control means 110 Medal selector 111 Medal passage 111a Vertical portion 111b Inclined portion 111c Entrance 111d Exit 112 Gap 113 Selector base 120 Chute member 121 Medal guide passage 122 Bottom surface portion 123 Inner wall portion 124 Outer wall portion 125 Step portion 126 Fixing portion 127 Screw 130 Return member 131 Return receiving opening 132 Medal return passage 133 Payout receiving opening 134 Medal payout passage 135 Upper edge portion 140 Closing member 151 Setting key insertion opening 152 Setting key switch 153 Setting change (reset) switch 200 Hall computer 301 Interrupt wait monitor register 302 Interrupt prohibition flag (IFF1 register, IFF2 register) 500 Timer circuit 501 (PTC) 8-bit counter 502 (PTC) prescaler register 503 (PTC) counter setting register 504 (PTC) interrupt flag

Claims (1)

A predetermined control chip is included,
having a predetermined socket,
the predetermined control chip has a plurality of pins;
numbers corresponding to some of the pins of the predetermined control chip are written on the predetermined board on which the predetermined socket is arranged,
the predetermined control chip has a predetermined counter;
Main processing can be executed,
When a predetermined counter times out, a timer interrupt process can be executed;
The main process has a predetermined interrupt disabled section from an interrupt disable instruction to an interrupt enable instruction (hereinafter, the predetermined interrupt disabled section from an interrupt disable instruction to an interrupt enable instruction will be referred to as a "predetermined interrupt disabled section");
When a predetermined counter times out at timing t1, which is a certain timing during a predetermined interrupt disabled section, timer interrupt processing is not executed at timing t1, but the value of the predetermined counter is updated, and timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t2, which is a timing after the predetermined interrupt disabled section ends, and after the timer interrupt processing is executed at timing t2, when the predetermined counter times out at timing t3, timer interrupt processing can be executed at timing t3,
This gaming machine is characterized in that when a period in which a predetermined counter times out is T, timing t1 is "n×T ('n' is a natural number)", and timing t2 is a specific timing before "(n+1)×T", timing t3 is "(n+1)×T" .